Inbox News: August 2025

Week Four August 2025 (August 18 - 24)

2025 Irukandji's Australian Surfing Team Announced: Pittwater's Milla Brown to represent Australia again

August 20, 2025

Surfing Australia is proud to unveil the 2025 Irukandjis team representing Australia at the ISA World Surfing Games, to be held from September 5th - 14th, 2025 at El Sunzal, Surf City, El Salvador!

The ISA World Surfing Games is one of the sport’s most prestigious international events, marking a critical chapter in the global surfing calendar, but most importantly, it forms part of the official qualification pathway to the Los Angeles 2028 Olympic Games.

The Irukandjis team departed from Brisbane this afternoon, Wednesday August 20, with time to surf and prepare ahead of the competition and the ISA Opening Ceremony. 

2025 Irukandjis Squad

Sally Fitzgibbons (NSW) - One of Australia’s most decorated surfers, with more than a decade on the Championship Tour, an Olympic appearance in Tokyo 2020, and a 4X ISA World Champion.

Ellie Harrison (VIC) - A rising star and 4X Australian Junior Champion, known for her explosive turns and strong performances on the WSL Challenger Series.

Milla Brown (NSW) - Current U18 Australian Champion making her debut on the senior Irukandjis team after a breakout year on the WSL Qualifying Series. Air specialist and WSL Pro Junior standout.

Morgan Cibilic (NSW) - 2021 Championship Tour Rookie of the Year, celebrated for his powerful rail game and outstanding performance under pressure. A strong performer on the WSL Challenger Series.

Callum Robson (NSW) - Past World Championship Tour surfer, renowned for his composure and clutch heats.

Dane Henry (NSW) - 2024 Junior ISA World Champion. An exciting young talent who earned his place in the squad through consistent results across the Qualifying Series and Pro Junior ranks. 

Milla Brown. Credit: Surfing Australia

About the ISA World Surfing Games 2025

The 2025 ISA World Surfing Games will be staged at La Bocana and El Sunzal, two world-class breaks on El Salvador’s coastline. The event draws the best surfers from over 50 nations, competing for individual titles and national team glory.

Since 2022, the ISA Worlds have been integrated into Olympic qualification, making them a direct pathway for surfers aiming to compete at the Games. 

Athlete Selection Reactions

Sally Fitzgibbons

"It’s a deep-rooted feeling of pride representing my country, my community, and everyone who has contributed to my journey throughout my career. What excites me most is the chance to connect with a fresh group of athletes in this team. Together, I believe we can bring an incredible amount of sting to the world stage."

"When you represent your country and the mighty Irukandjis, it becomes about more than just individual goals. It’s a collective vision of achieving ultimate team success. Each of us will be digging deep to contribute, and together we can be the rising tide that lifts the Irukandjis back to the top."

Callum Robson

"Watching the Olympic Games as a kid, it was always a dream of mine to represent Australia. With Brisbane set to host in 2032, Olympic qualification is something I think all Australians are excited about. Getting those valuable reps in at the ISA Worlds is a really important stepping stone towards achieving that goal."

"After falling off tour, I’ve focused on ramping up my skill development. I’m pushing to improve my surfing as much as possible so I can go head-to-head with the world’s best."

Ellie Harrison

"I competed at the ISA Open Worlds in 2023, so being selected again to represent Australia is really special. I’m really looking forward to spending time with the incredible team and making the most of the sick waves El Salvador has to offer."

Dane Henry

"It's pretty surreal to go from winning the ISA Junior World Title straight into the Open Irukandjis team. Last year, our junior team had one of its best runs ever, finishing with Gold, and to captain that team was incredible. I’m keen to get back into that team mindset, while stepping up my surfing at the same time."

"I’m excited to go in with no pressure and test myself against the older guys. La Bocana is such a high-performance wave, and I can’t wait to show my full repertoire and everything I’ve been working on."

Milla Brown said

"I’m so stoked! I’ve been to two junior ISA events now and learned so much from them, so I’m super excited to be heading to the ISAs for the first time as part of the senior squad. To be surrounded by such an epic crew of people I’ve looked up to for years is really special, and I just want to learn as much as I can."

"The Olympics are a major goal for my future, and this ISA event feels like the first real stepping stone towards that. I’m super keen to give it a good crack and test myself against some of the older crew." 

Surfing Australia’s National High Performance Director, Kate Wilcomes, believes the squad has the perfect blend of seasoned champions and hungry newcomers.

"The 2025 Irukandji Opens team is a force to be reckoned with. With the most winning ISA surfer, Sally Fitzgibbons, leading the charge, and rising stars like World Junior ISA champions Dane Henry and Milla Brown stepping into the spotlight, this team blends elite experience with the fierce energy of the next generation. Australia is ready to make its mark at the ISA World Championships." 

About the Irukandjis

The Irukandjis name was generously gifted to Surfing Australia by the Yirrganydji people of North Queensland. The team’s tagline — ‘Deadly in the Water’ — comes from the potent Irukandji jellyfish, reflecting both the cultural heritage and fierce competitive spirit of Australian surfers.

All elite Australian surfers, across Olympic, longboard, big wave, adaptive, SUP, junior, and masters disciplines, compete internationally under the Irukandjis banner and colours. 

Follow the Irukandjis via:  www.surfingaustralia.com/irukandjis and @theirukandjis on Instagram

Surfing with a Penguin

Here's some nice news for all who love encountering fairy penguins, based on Lion Island or at Manly, when in the waters offshore of our area. Details on further local Fairy Penguin news runs below.

Alan van Gysen, a renowned photographer and filmmaker based in Cape Town, has captured an amazing array of moments but says nothing was quite like this recent experience he and a group of surfers had with a penguin at Noordhoek Beach.

"From sharks to seals to whales and everything in-between, Cape Town in South Africa is renowned for wildlife encounters in the water. But it’s rare for surfers to see a penguin, let alone share a few waves with one – until this little guy came along." he says in the film, published August 16 2025

"It was one the most incredible wildlife experiences I've ever had in my 25 years of photography. You know, down this beach, and around Cape Town, I've had interactions with whales, seals, dolphins, and even sharks, but I've never experienced anything quite like this...I'm pretty blown away to be honest."

Coming from Mr. van Gysen , that's saying something. He's taken his camera all across the African continent as well as documented some of the most iconic waves in the world for the "Origin Series" by Now Now Media, the production company he runs with journalist Will Bendix. Together they've told the story of such waves like Puerto Escondido, Safi, Skeleton Bay, African Kirra, and more.

The creators state African Penguins are critically endangered. You can directly help efforts to save them by supporting organisations like SANCCOB. Visit: https://sanccob.co.za/

Two days later, Monday August 18, it was reported nine African penguins, rescued and rehabilitated by SANCCOB, were released back into the wild, marking a significant victory for marine conservation.

Following months of extensive care and rehabilitation at the Southern African Foundation for the Conservation of Coastal Birds (SANCCOB), dedicated team members sporting the biggest smiles and holding back tears of joy witnessed the fruits of their labour culminate in a rewarding moment and step forward for marine conservation.

A video shared by SANCCOB shows the team carefully moving large boxes to the beach before opening them to reveal the penguins they had dedicated so much effort to treating and preparing for rewilding. The birds were guided out of their boxes and onto the beach, where they walked together into the water before swimming into the horizon to continue their life in their ocean home.

In the last century, African Penguins have lost 97% of their population. The penguins’ main food sources, sardines and anchovies, are being depleted by commercial fishing. 

On March 18 2025 BirdLife South Africa and SANCCOB secured a historic victory for South Africa’s Critically Endangered African Penguin when the Pretoria High Court issued an order of court after a hard-won settlement agreement was reached by the two conservation NGOs with commercial sardine and anchovy purse-seine fishers (subsequently endorsed by the State). The order provides for the delineations of no-take zones for the commercial sardine and anchovy fishery around six key African Penguin breeding colonies that lie within coastal areas where this commercial fishery operates. 

SANCCOB stated: ''The six closures work together to secure biologically meaningful foraging areas for African Penguins in each of the west coast, southern Cape and Algoa Bay regions to help bring the species back from the brink of extinction. This settlement follows several weeks of exceptionally hard work and negotiations between the conservation NGOs and the commercial sardine and anchovy fishing industry.''

Surfing with a Penguin | Surf's Up for Real

A short film by Now Now Media presented by Monster Energy in association with O’Neill

Featuring Eli Beukes, Brendon Gibbens and others

Produced by Alan van Gysen

Written and Directed by Will Bendix

Primary pupils’ projects to protect Manly's little penguins

Peninsula public schools have teamed up with Taronga Zoo to help protect little penguin colonies. Jim Griffiths reports.

August 22 2025

Students from Brookvale Public School get a seal of approval from the penguins

The last onshore little penguin colony on Sydney’s northern beaches is overcoming threats to its survival thanks to a project involving Department of Education Zoo Education Team, Taronga Zoo and eight northern beaches public schools.

For 10 weeks, primary school students – with their high school mentors – undertake a range of activities to deepen their knowledge of Manly’s little penguins, threats to the colony and positive actions that we can all take to protect the species.

Relieving Zoo Education Advisor, Alexandra Heagney, said the primary school students had to solve one of the problems that the little penguins face, develop their own prototype solutions and create a community awareness campaign focused on protecting the penguins.

“What we hope to see out of this project is community awareness and students becoming advocates for the little penguin colony in Manly,” she said. “We also hope to see that they make changes when they become adults and teenagers too.”

During Project Penguin, the primary students are guided through the design thinking process and are supported by local high school student mentors.

The project follows a project-based learning framework implemented across a number of the department’s Zoo Education programs, with a focus on authentic cross-curricular learning focused on a locally threatened species.

The 22 best ideas were then shared at a Taronga Zoo expo attended by more than 640 students from Balgowlah Heights, Beacon Hill, Brookvale, Harbord and Manly West Public Schools and their mentors from Northern Beaches Secondary College Cromer, Balgowlah Boys and Mackellar Girls and The Beach School.

For example, one team from Harbord Public School developed a habitat with a surrounding pressure plate to detect anything heavier than a penguin.

Once activated, fox repellent and water are sprayed, along with noise from speakers to scare off any predator, with nets providing further protection from sea birds.

Brookvale Public School Year 3 student Neve Gordon enjoyed working on an idea to make better, storm-proof bins to reduce plastic pollution on the coastline.

“My favourite part of the project was working in groups and making things,” she said.

Harbord Public School students show their project at the ‘Project Penguin Expo’

WHY PENGUINS?

  • They’re an indicator species: Little penguins are at the top of the marine food chain for small fish and invertebrates. If their population declines, it can signal bigger environmental problems such as pollution, overfishing, or climate change.
  • They help maintain ecosystem balance: By feeding on small fish, squid, and krill, little penguins help keep prey populations in check.
  • They’re part of Sydney’s coastal identity: The Little Manly colony is the only breeding penguin colony left on the NSW mainland. They are a living connection to what Sydney’s coastline looked like long before the city grew around it, but they face challenges such habitat loss, pollution and the impacts of climate change.
  • They’re unique and irreplaceable: Little penguins are the smallest penguin species in the world, and the Little Manly colony is one of the most urban penguin populations anywhere. If they disappear here, they’ll never naturally return, it would be the end of a centuries-old population.

________________________________________________

A few insights from the news service from a few years ago.

In June 2019 we brought you some news about a project to put fireproof burrows on Lion Island for the colony that lives there - these penguins are seen in the Pittwater estuary and right along the coastal beaches. They used to have nests and colonies on the beaches all along our coast as well - at Turimetta Beach, Narrabeen and Long Reef in particular.

Here's some at Narrabeen in 1955 - and reports of them at Long Reef as well:

When summer comes . . .


HE MUST go down to the sea again, the lonely sea and the sky- but only for dinner. This hungry little chap couldn't wait for the rest of the flock that gathers for a nightly 3 a.m. party on the beach. Then they return to their nests to sleep all day.


HOUSING TROUBLES begin, at Mrs. E. Whittaker warns off a mother bird for squatting with its young beside her shed. But (inset) the penguin family sits tight till ready to vacate.

PENGUINS at the bottom of their garden

Spring comes with a difference to the gardens of waterfront homes in Ocean Street, Narrabeen, north of Sydney. It brings flocks of fairy penguins-the smallest of the breed-sauntering in from the sea to take up residence for their nesting season. As daytime guests they're welcome, but at nightfall they head down to the sea for food-making noises that keen everyone else awake, too. They stay for a few months.


HUNTING for invaders under the house, this family is helped by neighbors. Householders have M tried fencing and boarding around their houses, but still the penguins come to nest each year.

SIGNAL'S RIGHT, but the bus speeds on. For most people in Ocean Street, Narrabeen, the penguin novelty has worn off. They would rather have their sleep, which the birds' din disturbs. The noises vary from "woo-woo" to loud dog-like barks.


THE MAN who came to dinner takes it for granted he's welcome as Mr. W. Gillanty greets him. Residents, particularly light sleepers, now have to resign themselves to a trying time while the penguins, which are protected, are in charge. PENGUINS at the bottom of their garden (1956, December 12). The Australian Women's Weekly (1933 - 1982), p. 23. Retrieved from http://nla.gov.au/nla.news-article41852332 

Marine Parade North Avalon resident and ornithologist Neville Cayley is mentioned in this one:

Two Little Penguins 

AS Mr. Neville Cayley mentions in the 'Mail' that there is very little known regarding the length of time these penguins care for their young before turning  them out, I thought the following account would be of especial interest to readers of 'Outdoor Australia.' 

At a crowded Museum lecture Mr. Kinghorn told us this unusual incident. One morning towards the end of August, 1921, the peace and serenity of some dwellers at Collaroy Beach were disturbed by extraordinary noises and weird cries at the back door. When the astonished owner of the house opened the door in rushed two little penguins, which with loud voices announced their intentions of staying. Then they danced about and waved their little wings in a most ingratiating way. After a short time these noisy visitors were shown the door, and they disappeared for a while. But, having chosen their home, Mr. and Mrs. Penguin returned later, and as they could not get inside the house they went underneath as far as they could get, and there made their nest of seaweed. The noise every night was almost unbearable; they would scream and cackle, and later, after about six weeks their songs of joy were terrific, for two youngsters were hatched. 

About four months after their arrival the penguin family suddenly departed. Where they wintered is their own secret: but late in the following August a terrible cackling outside advised these householders that they were back. When the door was opened Mr. and Mrs. Penguin marched triumphantly in, followed by two grown chicks, which were inquisitive and rather shy. Then followed extravagant dances of greeting and vociferous songs of 'Here we are again,' etc., in which the young ones also joined. 

They could not be quietened, and the neighbours hastened across to see if someone had gone mad. The owners of the house put the whole family down on the beach and drove them away. It was then that the parents sent off the chicks to fend for themselves, and they themselves returned later and went under the house to their old nest. The celebrations were so overpowering that the householders took down some boards next day, got the noisy pair out, and drove them at night by car to Palm Beach, about twelve miles distant, and there left them. But next morning saw them back. 

They were taken a second time, but returned, and were allowed lo stay; but a home was made for them in the far corner of the garden. The house side was netted off and a hole cut in the fence to allow them free access to the beach. They made a nest of seaweed, and later two eggs were laid. The birds look it in turn to sit on them, and there was always much shouting and scolding when one returned from the sea at night. 

After about six weeks two sooty-brown chicks appeared, and the noise that night and the next few days while the celebrations lasted was tremendous. The parents took it in turn to fish and swim during the day that followed, but at night they often went out together to find a suitable supper, and about 9 p.m. would return, arguing together as they came up the beach. The following summer my father saw a young penguin land on the rocks at Coogee. I think it quite likely that it was one of the young ones turned out at Collaroy. It was evidently not very used to fending for itself, for a patch of feathers was torn from its shoulder, possibly through not being an adept at landing. 

At the time of the lecture these queer visitors were still in residence at Collaroy, and what became of them I do not know. It is likely enough that the nesting-place on North Head mentioned by Mr. Cayley is occupied by these little penguins or their descendants.  Outdoor Australia (1925, March 18).Sydney Mail (NSW : 1912 - 1938), , p. 10. Retrieved from http://nla.gov.au/nla.news-article159721727 

It is recorded that two Fairy penguins for a number of years made seasonal visitations to Collaroy, near Sydney, and often laid their eggs under the floor of one of the houses there. — F.J.B. Quaint and Beautiful Sea Birds (1934, October 31). Sydney Mail (NSW : 1912 - 1938), , p. 56. Retrieved from http://nla.gov.au/nla.news-article166107257 

The Lion Island colony was officially first protected in 1956 - although they had been protected decades prior to then:

PROTECTION OF PENGUINS.

Mr. Oakes (Chief Secretary), who is in charge of the Act relating to wild life, desires it to be generally known that all species of penguins are absolutely protected by law, and that anyone interfering with the birds is liable to a penalty. Apart from this he says citizens are requested to refrain from molesting this interesting bird, or driving it back to the sea, as, naturally, no water fowl liked getting wet when half-feathered.

Mr. Oakes remarked yesterday that fairy penguins, which were frequently seen off the coast, came ashore at this period of the year for moulting purposes for about three weeks. During that time they had not been observed to feed or enter the water. Many persons had offered specimens of the birds as exhibits to the Taronga Zoological Gardens, while others had made inquiries how to keep them alive in captivity. As this species of penguin only lived on live fish they could not be kept alive away from the sea. PROTECTION OF PENGUINS. (1923, December 18). The Sydney Morning Herald (NSW : 1842 - 1954), p. 8. Retrieved from http://nla.gov.au/nla.news-article16127509

PENGUINS ON COAST ARE PROTECTED

A penguin caught to-day near Palm Beach was refused' by Zoo authorities. The birds are common along the coast at present, are protected by law, and do not live in captivity.

The secretary of the Zoo (Mr. H. B. Brown) said today that the public had been warned against molesting the birds. PENGUINS ON COAST ARE PROTECTED (1936, December 30). The Sun (Sydney, NSW : 1910 - 1954), p. 12 (COUNTRY EDITION). Retrieved from http://nla.gov.au/nla.news-article230907746

Opportunities:

I'm with the Band: Music Comp.

East Coast Car Rentals are giving grassroots artists the chance to take their music on the road - and into the spotlight  with an opportunity to secure $2,000 cash, $10,000 PR package, and car hire to get you from gig to gig. 

If you’re a busker or artist lighting up street corners with talent, hustle and a love for performing, they want to hear from you.

Apply now before 30th Sep- https://bit.ly/47msb5s

Remember to read the Terms and Conditions before applying.

Skills Minister puts apprenticeship and traineeship reform front and centre: Feedback Invited

The NSW Government states it is continuing its work to rebuild the skills workforce and ensure NSW has the construction workers it needs to build more homes, with a comprehensive review of the Apprenticeship and Traineeship Act 2001 now underway.

This builds on the Government’s $3.4 billion investment in the 2025-26 Budget, the largest ever investment in skills and TAFE, ensuring we have the skilled workers to meet the state’s needs.

The Review begins with a statewide Have Your Say survey, inviting apprentices, trainees, employers, and training providers to share their experiences and shape improvements to the system.

The aim is to strengthen the apprenticeship and traineeship framework by making it easier to navigate, more flexible, and better matched to the real-world needs of priority industries like construction, care and support, technology, and clean energy.

It’s also about improving outcomes, especially for young people in regional NSW, and making sure the system supports more apprentices and trainees to complete their training and step into long-term, rewarding careers.

The Review is a key commitment of the NSW Skills Plan, and will be backed by roundtables with local employers, unions, training providers and apprentices and trainees across the state in the coming months.

For more information, and links to the Have Your Say survey please visit the Apprenticeship and Traineeship Act (2001) Review web page by September 11 2025

Minister for Skills, TAFE and Tertiary Education, Steve Whan said:

“We’re rebuilding the skills system so that it delivers for NSW. Not just for now, but for the long term.

“This review is about making apprenticeships and traineeships work better for the people who use them - students, employers, and training providers.

“We want a system that reflects today’s economy and helps more people get the skills they need for good jobs, especially in the regions and in industries crying out for workers.

“The feedback we get from the community will play a huge role in shaping the changes. We’re committed to making this review practical, inclusive, and focused on results.”

Young Filmmakers Comp.

The highly anticipated Beaches Young Filmmakers Comp 2025 is back, now in its 21st year, offering a golden opportunity for budding filmmakers to showcase their talents and creativity.

This exciting competition invites individuals or teams to produce a short film of up to 7 minutes, integrating secret inclusions—a mystery item, keyword, and phrase—that will be revealed on the council's website at 5 pm on Wednesday, 27 August.

Participants will have four days to bring their vision to life and submit their entries by 10 pm on Sunday, 31 August 2025.

With a total prize pool of $3000 and various industry prizes, aspiring filmmakers will also have the chance to see their films screened at the prestigious Finals and Awards Night on Thursday, 18 September at HOYTS Warringah Mall. Family, friends, and the public are invited to attend and celebrate the creative achievements of these emerging filmmakers.

Mayor Sue Heins expressed her enthusiasm for the competition and encouraged young filmmakers to take part.

"Beaches Young Filmmakers Comp is a wonderful way to learn the craft of filmmaking while having fun, picking up new skills and meeting like-minded people.

"If you’ve ever thought about making a short film, even if you have never done it before, why not enter? You never know where it may lead," said Mayor Heins.

Teams can consist of 1 to 12 members, aged between 12 and 24 years, with at least one member living, working, or studying on the Manly to Palm Beach peninsula.

The council stated it extends its heartfelt thanks to premium sponsor and long-time supporter, now for the thirteenth year, Miller Tripods, for their unwavering support, along with huge thanks to Screenwise and Canon for also being premium sponsors. Further thanks go to Australian Cinematography Society for their generous sponsorship of this year's competition.

Finalists’ films will be showcased on the council’s website following the Finals and Awards Night, providing further exposure for the talented young filmmakers.

Prize money is funded through entry fees, final night ticket sales and sponsorship.

Open Mic at Palm Beach

Come on down this Sunday from 2–5pm for our Open Mic Afternoon — happening every last Sunday of the month!

Show off your talent, enjoy great vibes, and be part of a supportive local music scene. Don’t miss it!

Club Palm Beach

Financial help for young people

Concessions and financial support for young people.

Includes:

  • You could receive payments and services from Centrelink: Use the payment and services finder to check what support you could receive.
  • Apply for a concession Opal card for students: Receive a reduced fare when travelling on public transport.
  • Financial support for students: Get financial help whilst studying or training.
  • Youth Development Scholarships: Successful applicants will receive $1000 to help with school expenses and support services.
  • Tertiary Access Payment for students: The Tertiary Access Payment can help you with the costs of moving to undertake tertiary study.
  • Relocation scholarship: A once a year payment if you get ABSTUDY or Youth Allowance if you move to or from a regional or remote area for higher education study.
  • Get help finding a place to live and paying your rent: Rent Choice Youth helps young people aged 16 to 24 years to rent a home.

Visit: https://www.nsw.gov.au/living-nsw/young-people/young-people-financial-help

School Leavers Support

Explore the School Leavers Information Kit (SLIK) as your guide to education, training and work options in 2022;
As you prepare to finish your final year of school, the next phase of your journey will be full of interesting and exciting opportunities. You will discover new passions and develop new skills and knowledge.

We know that this transition can sometimes be challenging. With changes to the education and workforce landscape, you might be wondering if your planned decisions are still a good option or what new alternatives are available and how to pursue them.

There are lots of options for education, training and work in 2022 to help you further your career. This information kit has been designed to help you understand what those options might be and assist you to choose the right one for you. Including:
  • Download or explore the SLIK here to help guide Your Career.
  • School Leavers Information Kit (PDF 5.2MB).
  • School Leavers Information Kit (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • The SLIK has also been translated into additional languages.
  • Download our information booklets if you are rural, regional and remote, Aboriginal or Torres Strait Islander, or living with disability.
  • Support for Regional, Rural and Remote School Leavers (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for Regional, Rural and Remote School Leavers (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • Support for Aboriginal and/or Torres Strait Islander School Leavers (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for Aboriginal and/or Torres Strait Islander School Leavers (DOCX 1.1MB).
  • Support for School Leavers with Disability (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for School Leavers with Disability (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • Download the Parents and Guardian’s Guide for School Leavers, which summarises the resources and information available to help you explore all the education, training, and work options available to your young person.

School Leavers Information Service

Are you aged between 15 and 24 and looking for career guidance?

Call 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337).

SMS 'SLIS2022' to 0429 009 435.

Our information officers will help you:
  • navigate the School Leavers Information Kit (SLIK),
  • access and use the Your Career website and tools; and
  • find relevant support services if needed.
You may also be referred to a qualified career practitioner for a 45-minute personalised career guidance session. Our career practitioners will provide information, advice and assistance relating to a wide range of matters, such as career planning and management, training and studying, and looking for work.

You can call to book your session on 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337) Monday to Friday, from 9am to 7pm (AEST). Sessions with a career practitioner can be booked from Monday to Friday, 9am to 7pm.

This is a free service, however minimal call/text costs may apply.

Call 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337) or SMS SLIS2022 to 0429 009 435 to start a conversation about how the tools in Your Career can help you or to book a free session with a career practitioner.

All downloads and more available at: www.yourcareer.gov.au/school-leavers-support

Word Of The Week: Positive

Word of the Week remains a keynote in 2025, simply to throw some disruption in amongst the 'yeah-nah' mix. 

Adjective

1. consisting in or characterised by the presence rather than the absence of distinguishing features. 2. full of hope and confidence, or giving cause for hope and confidence, constructive, optimistic, or confident. 3. with no possibility of doubt; definite. 4.(of a quantity) greater than zero. 5. containing, producing, or denoting an electric charge opposite to that carried by electrons. 6. (of a photographic image) showing lights and shades or colours true to the original. 7. Grammar; denoting the primary degree of an adjective or adverb, which expresses simple quality without qualification. 8. Philosophy; dealing only with matters of fact and experience; not speculative or theoretical. 9. Astrology; relating to or denoting any of the air or fire signs, considered active in nature.

Noun

1. a desirable or constructive quality or attribute. 2. a positive photographic image, especially one printed from a negative. 3. a result of a test or experiment indicating that a certain substance or condition is present or exists. 4. the part of an electric circuit that is at a higher electrical potential than another point designated as having zero electrical potential. 5. a number greater than zero. 6. Grammar; an adjective or adverb in the positive degree.

From: late Middle English: from Old French positif, -ive or Latin positivus, from posit- ‘placed’, from the verb ponere.  - early 14c., originally a legal term meaning "formally laid down, decreed or legislated by authority" (opposed to natural),directly from Latin positivus "settled by agreement, positive" (opposed to naturalis "natural"), from positus, past participle of ponere "put, place".

The sense of "absolute" is from mid-15c. Meaning in philosophy of "dealing only with facts" is from 1590s. Sense broadened to "expressed without qualification" (1590s), then, of persons, "confident in opinion" (1660s). The meaning "possessing definite characters of its own" is by 1610s. The mathematical use for "greater than zero" is by 1704. Psychological sense of "concentrating on what is constructive and good" is recorded from 1916. Positive thinking is attested from 1953. The sense in electricity is from 1755.

Flashing mouthguards that signal a head injury will soon hit the rugby field – are they a game changer?

Saeed Khan/AFP via Getty Images
Nick DraperUniversity of Canterbury and Kevin ManganUniversity of Canterbury

When the Women’s Rugby World Cup kicks off this weekend, spectators will witness more than the usual thrills, skills and physical brilliance the code delivers – they’ll also see something completely novel: flashing mouthguards.

Designed to help keep professional players safer, these smart mouthguards flash when a player experiences a collision big enough to potentially result in a concussion. This is an advance on existing instrumented mouthguards, used in the professional game since the 2023 men’s Rugby World Cup.

The mouthguards contain accelerometers and a gyroscope to measure the size of collisions. If a collision exceeds the threshold for a head injury assessment, a light-emitting diode (LED) will flash red, alerting the player and officials.

The smart mouthguards can measure collision impact forces, the direction of the impact and the number of collisions for any player during a game.

Collision impact is measured in “peak linear acceleration” (the g-force) and “peak rotational acceleration”. Based on the data, a decision can be made to pull a player from the game for a head injury assessment.

The threshold for male players is a g-force of 75 and for female players 65. But problems with Bluetooth capability meant there could be delays between a player receiving a head knock and the data being downloaded. The new flashing mouthguards are designed to overcome this delay.

head injury assessment is done off-field by a trained medical professional. Background is collected about the collision and the player’s symptoms. The player then completes memory and balance tests. If they fail the assessment they’re out for the rest of the game.

World Rugby is using the women’s World Cup tournament to introduce the new LED mouthguards, ahead of using them at the top level of the men’s and women’s game in general. In time, we may see them become more common in non-professional and youth grades, too.

What about amateur and junior rugby?

The primary purpose of the new mouthguards is to improve surveillance of likely concussions by reducing the time between a sizeable impact being detected and then reported to officials.

In turn, this may reduce the likelihood of a player experiencing a second large collision – and therefore keep them safer. Like other smart mouthguards, these new ones will also record all collisions in a game for longer-term monitoring.

The high cost of these innovative safety technologies has so far been prohibitive for lower and non-professional leagues. Aside from professional franchises, really only researchers have had access, given the nature of the hardware, software and 3D-printing process involved.

But that might be changing, with recent innovations by mouthguard companies bringing their products into a more viable price range for community rugby.

High quality “boil and bite” instrumented mouthguards currently retail for A$350, which is only about $100 more than a dentist-fitted custom unit. As the technology evolves, the price will no doubt reduce more.

The advantage of smart mouthguards is the objectivity they can bring to collision assessment in community rugby, something not available in the past.

Using a phone app linked to the product, parents, coaches or referees can see the size of impact a player has received in a collision. That then allows them to make a more informed choice about removing a player from the field.

It would also be harder for a player to hide a concussion and therefore likely reduce under-reporting. As well, our research shows concussions for junior players can occur well below the adult thresholds, so this type of technology and information could be very helpful.

Benefits for brain health

While these safety developments are potentially beneficial, junior and community rugby still relies largely on non-medically trained staff to identify possible concussions.

Despite greater awareness and concern about concussions, research indicates there are still many youth athletes and parents who don’t know how to recognise the symptoms. There also appears to be a stigma about concussion reporting.

We know that in New Zealand, Māori and Pasifika players appear to suffer from higher rates of sport-related concussion, but are less aware of and less willing to report symptoms.

Under-diagnosis and under-reporting can have significant repercussions for the future brain health of players – particularly children whose developing brains are more susceptible to the effects of concussion.

An early return to play following an unreported concussion can lead to a player suffering a second and worse concussion, which could have longer-term recovery implications for a young person.

Improved coach awareness is one area that would make a big difference, and there are already concussion recognition courses available such as RugbySmart in New Zealand and BokSmart in South Africa.

The flashing mouthguards on show at the Women’s Rugby World Cup can’t prevent concussions. But they represent another step towards better managing the risks and effects of concussions over a player’s season and career.

As prices drop and these technologies become more accessible, we will likely see greater uptake in community rugby, further improving player safety at the grassroots level.


The authors thank George Stilwell, Natalia Kabaliuk and Keith Alexander from the University of Canterbury for their contribution to this article.The Conversation


Nick Draper, Professor of Sport and Exercise Science, University of Canterbury and Kevin Mangan, PhD Candidate in Exercise Science, University of Canterbury

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Almost unimaginable beauty and opulence: the paradise pleasure gardens of ancient Persia

Eram Garden in Iran. Sergey-73/Shutterstock
Peter EdwellMacquarie University

Some of the most enduring ancient myths in the Persian world were centred around gardens of almost unimaginable beauty and opulence.

The biblical Garden of Eden and the Epic of Gilgamesh’s Garden of the Gods are prominent examples. In these myths, paradise was an opulent garden of tranquillity and abundance.

But how did this concept of paradise originate? And what did these beautiful gardens look and feel like in antiquity?

Pairi-daēza is where we get the word ‘paradise’

The English word “paradise” derives from an old Persian word pairidaeza or pairi-daēza, which translates as “enclosed garden”.

The origins of paradise gardens lie in Mesopotamia and Persia (modern Iraq and Iran).

The Garden of the Gods from the Epic of Gilgamesh from about 2000 BCE is one of the earliest attested in literature.

Some argue it was also the inspiration for the legend of the Garden of Eden in the book of Genesis. In both of these stories, paradise gardens functioned as a type of utopia.

When the Achaemenid kings ruled ancient Persia (550–330 BCE), the development of royal paradise gardens grew significantly. The paradise garden of the Persian king, Cyrus the Great, who ruled around 550 BCE, is the earliest physical example yet discovered.

During his reign, Cyrus built a palace complex at Pasargadae in Persia. The entire complex was adorned with gardens which included canals, bridges, pathways and a large pool.

One of the gardens measured 150 metres by 120 metres (1.8 hectares). Archaeologists found evidence for the garden’s division into four parts, symbolising the four quarters of Cyrus’s vast empire.

Technological wonders

A feature of paradise gardens in Persia was their defiance of often harsh, dry landscapes.

This required ingenuity in supplying large volumes of water required for the gardens. Pasargadae was supplied by a sophisticated hydraulic system, which diverted water from the nearby Pulvar River.

The tradition continued throughout the Achaemenid period. Cyrus the Younger, probably a descendant of Cyrus the Great, had a palace at Sardis (in modern Turkey), which included a paradise garden.

According to the ancient Greek writer, Xenophon, the Spartan general Lysander visited Cyrus at the palace around 407 BCE.

When he walked in the garden, astounded by its intricate design and beauty, Lysander asked who planned it. Cyrus replied that he had designed the garden himself and planted its trees.

Perhaps the ultimate ancient paradise garden was the legendary Hanging Gardens of Babylon.

In one tradition, the gardens were built by the neo-Babylonian King, Nebuchadnezzar II (605–562 BCE).

The gardens were so magnificent and technologically advanced they were later counted among the Seven Wonders of the World.

An engraving depicting the hanging gardens of Babylon.
Perhaps the ultimate ancient paradise garden was the legendary Hanging Gardens of Babylon. mikroman6/Getty Images

In a later Roman account, the Hanging Gardens consisted of vaulted terraces resting on cube-shaped pillars.

Flowing water was a key feature, with elaborate machines raising water from the Euphrates river. Fully grown trees with vast root systems were supported by the terraces.

In another account, the Hanging Gardens were built by a Syrian king for his Persian wife to remind her of her homeland.

When the Sasanian dynasty (224–651 CE) came to power in Persia, its kings also built paradise gardens. The 147-hectare palace of Khosrow II (590–628 CE) at Qasr-e Shirin was almost entirely set in a paradise garden.

The paradise gardens were rich in symbolic significance. Their division into four parts symbolised imperial power, the cardinal directions and the four elements in Zoroastrian lore: air, earth, water and fire.

The gardens also played a religious role, offering a glimpse of what eternity might look like in the afterlife.

They were also a refuge in the midst of a harsh world and unforgiving environments. Gilgamesh sought solace and immortality in the Garden of the Gods following the death of his friend Enkidu.

According to the Bible, God himself walked in the Garden of Eden in the cool of the evening.

But in both cases, disappointment and distress followed.

Gilgamesh discovered the non-existence of immortality. God discovered the sin of Adam and Eve.

Paradise on Earth

The tradition of paradise gardens continued after the Islamic conquest of Persia in the 7th century CE.

The four-part gardens (known as chahar-bagh) of the Persian kingdoms were also a key feature of the Islamic period.

The Garden of Paradise described in the Quran comprised four gardens divided into two pairs. The four-part garden became symbolic of paradise on Earth.

The tradition of paradise gardens has continued in Iran to the present day.

Nine paradise gardens in Iran are collectively listed as a UNESCO World Heritage site. The Eram garden, built in about the 12th century CE, and the 19th-century Bagh-e Shahzadeh are among the most splendid.

Today, the word “paradise” evokes a broader range of images and experiences. It can foster many different images of idyllic physical and spiritual settings.

But the magnificent enclosed gardens of the ancient Persian world still inspire us to imagine what paradise on Earth might look and feel like.The Conversation

Peter Edwell, Associate Professor in Ancient History, Macquarie University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Ancient shells and pottery reveal the vast 3,200-years-old trade routes of Oceania’s Indigenous peoples

Shutterstock
Bryce BarkerUniversity of Southern Queensland and Tiina ManneThe University of Queensland

New research conducted at Walufeni Cave, an important archaeological site in Papua New Guinea, reveals new evidence of long-distance interactions between Oceania’s Indigenous societies, as far back as 3,200 years ago.

Our new study, published in the journal Australian Archaeology, is the first archaeological research undertaken on the Great Papuan Plateau. The findings continue to undermine the historical Eurocentric idea that early Indigenous societies in this region were static and unchanging.

Instead, we find further evidence for what Monash Professor of Indigenous Archaeology Ian J. McNiven calls the Coral Sea Cultural Interaction Sphere: a dynamic interchange of trade, ideas and movement over a vast region encompassing New Guinea, the Torres Strait, and north-eastern Australia.

Walufeni Cave is an important archaeological site in the Great Papuan Plateau. Bryce Barker

Tracking movement across Sahul

The goal of the Great Papuan Plateau project was to determine whether the plateau may have been an eastern pathway for the movement of early people into north-eastern Australia, at a time when New Guinea and Australia were joined in the continent of Sahul.

The two countries as we know them separated about 8,000 years ago due to sea levels rising after the last glacial period.

Our research in Walufeni Cave, located near Mount Bosavi in New Guinea’s southern highlands province, identified occupation dating back more than 10,000 years. We also found a unique and as yet undated petroglyph rock art style.

Petroglyph rock engraving from Walufeni Cave. Author provided

Our analyses of cave deposits reveals significant changes in how the site was used starting from just over 3,000 years ago. This includes changes to the frequency of occupation, to plant and animal use, as well as the sudden appearance of coastal marine shell.

Specifically, we found 3,200-year-old evidence for the transport of marine shell 200km inland, which has previously been recorded as coming from the southern coast of the Gulf of Papua, and from as far away as Torres Strait.

This suggests the long-distance maritime trade and interaction networks between the societies of coastal southern New Guinea, Torres Strait and northern Australia extended far inland – and much further than previously known.

The significance of marine shells

Archaeologists and ethnographers have widely documented the use of culturally modified marine shells as important items of trade and prestige in New Guinea.

These shells were used as markers of status and prestige, for ritual purposes, as currency and wealth, as tools, and to facilitate long-distance social ties between groups.

Despite the coastal availability of a large variety of shellfish, only a relatively small selection are recorded as being commonly used in New Guinea.

The most prominent of these are dog whelks (Nassaridae), cowrie shells (Cypraeidae), cone shells (Conidae), baler shell (Volutidae), and pearl/kina shell (Pteriidae). Many of these are significant for ritual and symbolic functions across the Indo-Pacific and indeed, globally.

Dog whelks were the predominant species we found in Walufeni Cave, along with olive shells and cowrie shells. These come from very small “sea snails”, or gastropods.

All of the shells we found had been culturally modified, such as to allow stitching onto garments, or threading onto strings.

Gastropod shells continue to be used by today’s plateau societies. They may be sewn onto elaborate ceremonial costumes, or offered in long strings as trade items, or as bridal dowry.

Images of modified marine shell found at Walufeni Cave. A and B are dog whelk, while C is cowrie shell and D is olive shell. Author

Pottery and oral tradition

Further evidence for long-distance voyaging between the southern coast of Papua New Guinea and the Torres Strait and Northern Australia comes in the form of pottery.

Researchers have found Lapita pottery at two archaeological sites on the south coast of New Guinea (Caution Bay and Hopo). These have been dated to 2,900 and 2,600 years ago, respectively.

Lapita pottery is a distinctive feature of Austronesian long-distance voyagers with origins in modern-day Taiwan and the Philippines. Lapita peoples bought the first pottery to New Guinea about 3,300 years ago, providing the template for later localised pottery production.

In a separate finding, Aboriginal pottery dating back to 2,950 years ago was reported from Jiigurru (Lizard Island), off the coast of the Cape York Peninsula. While this pottery isn’t stylistically Lapita, the technology used to make it is.

Similar pottery dating back 2,600 years ago has been reported on the eastern Murray Islands of Torres Strait, and in the Mask Cave on Pulu Island, western Torres Strait. Analysis of the Murray Island pottery indicates the clay was derived from southern Papua New Guinea.

These studies suggest the Lapita peoples’ knowledge of how to make pottery spread to Torres Strait and northern Australia via the interaction sphere.

Furthermore, the cultural hero Sido/Souw, who is present in oral tradition on the Great Papuan Plateau, is also present in oral tradition from the Torres Strait and southern New Guinea. This demonstrates sociocultural connections across a vast area.

Our research builds on the continuing reevaluation of the capabilities of Indigenous societies, which were often characterised by early anthropologists as static and unchanging.The Conversation

Bryce Barker, Professor in Archaeology, University of Southern Queensland and Tiina Manne, Associate professor, The University of Queensland

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

What’s a ‘black moon’? Here’s why it’s worth looking up at the sky this week

Not a black moon. Jayanth Muppaneni/Unsplash
Laura Nicole DriessenUniversity of Sydney

There’s been a lot of buzz online about the August “black moon”, happening later this week.

While you’ve probably heard of a “blue moon” before, this might be the first time you’ve encountered its ominous-sounding counterpart.

You’re not alone. In fact, neither “blue moon” nor “black moon” are astronomical terms. They describe the moments when the lunar calendar and our calendar year fall out of alignment.

So what is a black moon? The current definition has nothing to do with the actual colour of the Moon.

Full moon, half moon, new moon

Let’s start by defining some key lunar terms. The Moon is “full” when its whole face or disc is illuminated by the Sun. We typically get treated to a nice, bright, full moon at night when the Sun and Moon are opposite each other with Earth in-between.

A “new” moon is when none of the Moon’s face is illuminated and the far side is illuminated instead. This happens when the Moon is up during the day, because the “far side” of the Moon is illuminated when the Moon is in-between Earth and the Sun.

A graphic showing the Sun at the top and the Earth repeated in an arc at the bottom. The Moon is at a different position next to each repeated Earth. The illumination of the Earth relative to the Sun is shown, and the corresponding Moon phase is shown at
Diagram showing how the phases of the Moon are caused by the position of the Moon relative to Earth and the Sun. NASA/JPL-CaltechCC BY-SA

A lunar cycle – the time it takes for the Moon to go from new, to full, to new again – is approximately 29.5 days long. Most years there are twelve full moons and twelve new moons.

But the 29.5 day cycle doesn’t fit perfectly into a calendar year, so every now and then there are thirteen full or new moons in a calendar year. Seven years out of every nineteen years will have thirteen full or new moons instead of twelve.

Blue moon, black moon

A blue moon is when we get a thirteenth full moon in one calendar year. Conversely, a black moon is when we get a thirteenth new moon in one calendar year.

Because these terms are entirely colloquial, there are a couple of definitions used for these extra moons. One is based on seasons and the other on simple calendar months.

A diagram showing the Earth going around the Sun with the equinoxes and solstices marked.
The four seasons of the calendar year are buffered by solstices and equinoxes. Bureau of Meteorology

Seasonal moons

A calendar year has four seasons, divided by equinoxes and solstices (see above).

Each season is roughly three months long and typically has three full moons. Some cultures give each of those seasonal full moons a special name – you’ve likely heard of “wolf moon”, “strawberry moon”, “harvest moon” and others from American folklore, for example.

Every two or three years, however, we get an extra full moon in a season. When that happens, the first, second and fourth full moons keep their usual names while the third one becomes a “blue moon”.

You’d think the idiom “once in a blue moon” comes from this name, but the folklore name is actually relatively recent. In the 16th century, saying the “moon is blue” was more likely a way to refer to something being false or absurd.

Meanwhile, the third new moon in a season with four new moons is a “black moon” – a term than can only be traced to around 2016.

Calendar moons

The other definition for blue and black moons is related to calendar months.

A blue moon is the second of two full moons in one calendar month, while a black moon is the second new moon in a calendar month.

The Moon showing its craters and texture, but very dark, and a slight sliver of light runs along the lower right side of the Moon.
A typical new moon is in shadow because the far side of the Moon is illuminated by the Sun. Goddard Space Flight CentreCC BY-SA

The black moon this month is a seasonal black moon and it’s happening on August 23. The next calendar-month black moon will happen on August 31 2027.

The next seasonal blue moon will be on May 20 2027 and the next calendar-month blue moon will be on May 31 2026.

You can’t see a black moon, but look at the sky anyway

We can’t actually see the black moon. The Moon will be up during the day and the far side of it will be illuminated.

But new moons in general bode well for keen stargazers. The full moon outshines a lot of the night sky, because it’s about 33,000 times brighter than the brightest star in the sky, Sirius. When there’s a new moon, the night sky is nice and dark, giving you more opportunities to see stars and constellations.

During the black moon on August 23 this weekend, the celestial emu or Gugurmin will be beautifully positioned overhead soon after dusk in the southern hemisphere.

If you’re in the southern hemisphere somewhere very dark and free from light pollution, you’ll be able to spot the Magellanic Clouds, two small galaxies that are interacting with our Milky Way galaxy. Saturn will be visible all night, and Venus and Jupiter will be low on the northeastern horizon just before dawn.

Even though the black moon isn’t a significant astronomical event, it gives us the chance to take in the night sky on a dark, Moon-free night.The Conversation

Image of the night sky with the milky way and a trace of an emu in blue colour.
Gugurmin stretches across the vast southern sky, visible within the dark parts of the Milky Way. Barnaby Norris and Ray Norris/Wikimedia CommonsCC BY-SA

Laura Nicole Driessen, Postdoctoral Researcher in Radio Astronomy, University of Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Astronomers have glimpsed the core of a dying star – confirming theories of how atoms are made

Orsola De MarcoMacquarie University

Astronomers have glimpsed the inner structure of a dying star in a rare kind of cosmic explosion called an “extremely stripped supernova”.

In a paper published today in Nature, Steve Schulze of Northwestern University in the United States and colleagues describe the supernova 2021yfj and a thick shell of gas surrounding it.

Their findings support our existing theories of what happens inside massive stars at the end of their lives – and how they have shaped the building blocks of the universe we see today.

How stars make the elements

Stars are powered by nuclear fusion – a process in which lighter atoms are squished together into heavier ones, releasing energy.

Fusion happens in stages over the star’s life. In a series of cycles, first hydrogen (the lightest element) is fused into helium, followed by the formation of heavier elements such as carbon. The most massive stars continue on to neon, oxygen, silicon and finally iron.

Each burning cycle is faster than the previous one. The hydrogen cycle can last for millions of years, while the silicon cycle is over in a matter of days.

As the core of a massive star keeps burning, the gas outside the core acquires a layered structure, where successive layers record the composition of the progression of burning cycles.

While all this is playing out in the star’s core, the star is also shedding gas from its surface, carried out into space by the stellar wind. Each fusion cycle creates an expanding shell of gas containing a different mix of elements.

Core collapse

What happens to a massive star when its core is full of iron? The great pressure and temperature will make the iron fuse, but unlike the fusion of lighter elements, this process absorbs energy instead of releasing it.

The release of energy from fusion is what has been holding the star up against the force of gravity – so now the iron core will collapse. Depending on how big it is to start with, the collapsed core will become a neutron star or a black hole.

The process of collapse creates a “bounce”, which sends energy and matter flying outwards. This is called a core-collapse supernova explosion.

The explosion lights up the layers of gas shed from the star earlier, allowing us to see what they are made of. In all known supernovae until now, this material was either the hydrogen, the helium or the carbon layer, produced in the first two nuclear burning cycles.

The inner layers (the neon, oxygen and silicon layers) are all produced in a mere few hundred years before the star explodes, which means they don’t have time to travel out far from the star.

An explosive mystery

But that’s what makes the new supernova SN2021yfj so interesting. Schulze and colleagues found the material outside the star came from the silicon layer, the last layer just above the iron core, which forms on a timescale of a few months.

The stellar wind must have expelled all the layers right down to the silicon one before the explosion occurred. Astronomers don’t understand how a stellar wind could be powerful enough to do this.

The most plausible scenario is a second star was involved. If another star were orbiting the one that exploded, its gravity might have rapidly pulled out the deep silicon layer.

Exploding stars made the universe what it is today

Whatever the explanation, this view deep inside the star has confirmed our theories of the cycles of nuclear fusion inside massive stars.

Why is this important? Because stars are where all the elements come from.

Carbon and nitrogen are manufactured primarily by lower mass stars, similar to our own Sun. Some heavy elements such as gold are manufactured in the exotic environments of colliding and merging neutron stars.

However, oxygen and other elements such as neon, magnesium and sulfur mainly come from core-collapse supernovae.

We are what we are because of the inner workings of stars. The constant production of elements in stars causes the universe to change continuously. Stars and planets formed later are very different from those formed in earlier times.

When the universe was younger it had much less in the way of “interesting” elements. Everything worked somewhat differently: stars burned hotter and faster and planets may have formed less, differently, or not at all.

How much supernovae explode and just what they eject into interstellar space is a critical question in figuring out why our Universe and our world are the way they are.The Conversation

Orsola De Marco, Professor of Astrophysics, Macquarie University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

The 2025 ARIA Awards return 19 November

The Australian Recording Industry Association (ARIA) today announced the 2025 ARIA Awards in partnership with Spotify will return to Australia’s creative industries capital, Sydney, on Wednesday, 19 November.

Held for the fourth year running at Sydney’s Hordern Pavilion, on Gadigal land, the 39th ARIA Awards will celebrate the very best of Australian music on its biggest global stage to date with a new presenting partner and network home.

In an exciting new chapter, the 2025 ARIA Awards will return to 10 and stream live on Paramount+, delivering a powerful celebration of Australian music to audiences across free-to-air and streaming platforms.

With millions of global listeners, custom in-app programming and integrated marketing campaigns, the ARIA Awards will be supercharged thanks to the support of Spotify, delivering maximum local and international visibility for nominees and winners alike. This partnership will transform award momentum into real opportunities for audience growth and music export, with curated playlists, editorial features, and high-impact media ensuring Australian music resonates globally.

In 2024, the ARIA Awards saw incredible homegrown talent claim Australian music’s most sought-after accolades: Sydney duo Royel Otis took home four awards, while international pop star Troye Sivan scooped up three pointy trophies, including Album of the Year, Best Solo Artist and Best Pop Release. Supergroup 3% claimed their first two ARIA Awards for Best Hip Hop / Rap Release and Best Cover Art (Daniel Boyd and Nomad Create) and the iconic Missy Higgins won Best Australian Live Act presented By DNSW and was inducted into the ARIA Hall of Fame.

ARIA CEO, Annabelle Herd, said: “With so many of our local artists dominating on huge global stages in the past year, we have lots to celebrate – and this year we are taking the ARIA Awards to a whole new level. Spotify’s considerable backing with its powerful platform and proven ability to amplify music worldwide, as well as a new home with Paramount Australia, will be a gamechanger for the ARIAs and all of this year’s nominated artists.”

NSW Minister for Jobs and Tourism, Steve Kamper, said: “I’m delighted to see the ARIA Awards returning to the Hordern Pavilion. Sydney is the nation’s capital for creative industries, so it’s an honour to have one of our most iconic live music venues as the home of the highest accolade in Australian music. The Minns Labor Government has changed the rules around operating hours after dark to bring live music back across NSW and provide a platform for artists, while also supporting venues and businesses that rely on our state’s visitor and night-time economy. I thank ARIA for their advocacy for the music industry and for sharing our values for a thriving live music scene in NSW.”

Daniel Monaghan, SVP Content and Programming, Paramount Australia, said: “The ARIA Awards are an electrifying celebration of Australia’s bold, vibrant and creative music industry, and we can’t wait to share this iconic event loudly across multiple platforms. Showcasing the country’s rich and diverse homegrown talent, viewers won’t miss a minute of Australian music’s night of nights, with the ARIA Awards broadcast on 10, with live streaming on Paramount+.”

Playbill Venues CEO, Michael Nebenzah, said “Playbill Venues is thrilled to once again be hosting the ARIA Awards in the wonderful Hordern Pavilion. There is a perfect synergy holding this iconic music industry event at the Hordern – a venue loved by Australian performers and fans alike. The ARIA Awards is a highlight in the Hordern’s annual calendar.”

The 39th ARIA Awards is proudly supported by Destination NSW, celebrating Australia’s vibrant music industry and showcasing Sydney as a global hub for world-class entertainment and culture.

The ARIA Awards Presents program will return in 2025,providing opportunities for aspiring artists and industry professionals to celebrate Australia’s best established and up-and-coming talent, and facilitating important conversations to shape the future of Australian music. The line up of events for 2025 ARIA Awards Presents will be released at a later date.

The 2025 ARIA Awards nominations will be announced on Thursday, 25 September.

Vikings were captivated by silver – our new analysis of their precious loot reveals how far they travelled to get it

Jane KershawUniversity of Oxford

In the archaeology galleries of the Yorkshire Museum, an incredible Viking silver neck-ring takes centre stage. The ring is made of four ropes of twisted rods hammer-welded together at each end, its terminals tapering into scrolled S-shaped hooks for fastening behind the neck. Weighing over half a kilo, it makes a less-than-subtle statement about the wealth and status of its Viking owner some 1,100 years ago.

The neck-ring was part of a large silver and gold hoard found in 2012 by metal detectorists Stuart Campbell and Steve Caswell near Bedale in North Yorkshire. As the first precious object out of the ground, it was initially mistaken by Campbell for a discarded power cable.

Six years later, I got the chance to analyse the Bedale hoard, as it is now known, for its isotopes and trace elements. Alongside the neck-ring and a gold Anglo-Saxon sword pommel (probably acquired in England by these Viking raiders), the hoard contained a spectrum of cast-silver artefacts spanning the Viking age: Irish-Scandinavian artefacts from Dublin, rings from southern Scandinavia, and many cigar-shaped bars or ingots that could have been cast anywhere.

As an archaeologist investigating the historical secrets held by jewellery such as this, picking up these heavy objects and turning them over in my hands was a visceral experience. I felt connected with the desires, ambition and sheer force of these invaders from the north who had wreaked havoc on communities in northern England around AD900.

Indeed, the entire Viking age (circa 750-1050) is often described as an “age of silver”. This form of wealth was so desired that its acquisition was a primary driver of the expansion out of Scandinavia that the Vikings are most famed for. To acquire it, they were prepared to risk their own lives – and take those of many others.

The story of the Bedale hoard’s discovery. Video by the Yorkshire Museum.

Tens of thousands of silver objects and coins are known from hoards and settlements across the Scandinavian homelands of Norway, Denmark and Sweden, as well as far overseas – from England to Russia and beyond. The study of this silver’s origins opens a window on the vast web of connections these warrior-traders established – a study invigorated in recent years by scientific techniques drawn from geochemistry.

Now, our analysis of the Bedale hoard and other Viking valuables promises to change the story of when their fellow-Scandinavians began travelling thousands of miles to the east to secure the silver that so captivated them.

The origins of these ‘violent chancers’

The word “Viking” comes from the Old Norse víkingr, meaning someone who participated in a sea raid or military expedition. The seeds of the outburst of piracy and overseas expansion that characterised the Viking age were sown in the 5th and 6th centuries, following the demise of the Roman empire.

While Scandinavia was never actually part of the Roman empire, its fall severed important trade links and led to factional fighting. In addition, volcanic eruptions in the mid-6th century induced prolonged climatic cooling, leading to crop failure and famine. Together, these events fractured Scandinavian society: archaeologists can point to abandoned settlements and cultivation fields as evidence for community displacement and decline.


The Insights section is committed to high-quality longform journalism. Our editors work with academics from many different backgrounds who are tackling a wide range of societal and scientific challenges.


There was also a striking absence of silver in the region at this time, despite Scandinavia possessing native silver ores. While Roman silver plate and coin had previously reached Scandinavia and been melted down to make huge, stunning “relief” brooches worn by women, this flow of silver had declined sharply by the 6th century. In the following century, most jewellery was made of copper alloy – silver wasn’t being mined, and in this overwhelmingly agrarian society, precious metal was an unnecessary luxury.

In Scandinavia, where farming was challenging due to short summers and long harsh winters, wealth and power lay in good farming land and cattle – with payments typically made in butter, cloth, horses, sheep, hides and iron. As archaeologist Dagfinn Skre explains:

In an economy in which the supply of necessities was threatened, a man who had his moveable wealth in cows … would survive, but one who had it invested in metal would die. His metal would be close to worthless – for who would exchange their cows, butter or grain for metal in times of famine?

Yet out of this period of domestic struggle, a new and ambitious elite emerged in Scandinavia, particularly around the fjords of Norway and in the central Mälaren valley in Sweden – fertile regions which afforded access to both inland resources and coastal waterways.

Dubbed “violent chancers” by historian Guy Halsall, they seized abandoned land and valuable resources such as tar, furs and iron for weapons. They developed multiple, competing chiefdoms which they defended through a martial culture propped up by lavish consumption, trade and violence.

Archaeologists can point to tangible survivals of this culture: luxury imports such as glass claw beakers, elaborately furnished burials under huge moundsmonumental halls and full-on military kits. These warriors had shields decorated with bird-of-prey figures, crested helmets covered with silver foils, and swords with pommels covered in gold and garnets. They were not to be messed with.

Their success, coupled with these coastal people’s refined tradition of boat-building, enabled them to build and kit out fleets of ships. Surviving examples indicate these were long and narrow, with hulls made of overlapping (clinker) planking and shallow keels suitable for use in creeks, estuaries and beach landings. At first propelled by oar, the later adoption of sails enabled these ships to undertake long sea crossings.

In the late-8th century, Scandinavians began launching violent seaborne attacks on centres of wealth in neighbouring countries – first the coastal towns, monasteries and churches of modern-day Britain, Ireland and France, then later expanding their raids into Germany and Spain, and as far south as the north coast of Morocco. These centres of population provided human capital for the Viking slave trade, while enriching the invaders with portable wealth in the form of liturgical plates and reliquaries (from monasteries), silver coin and other high-status artefacts.

A raid on the north-east England island monastery of Lindisfarne in 793 – the first documented attack in the west – was probably launched from Norway. Its precise targeting suggests the raiders were well-informed about their destination, and no doubt attracted by stories of the riches held there. Writing afterwards, York cleric Alcuin described how the church had been “spattered with the blood of the priests of God, stripped of all its furnishing, exposed to the plundering of pagans”.

Alcuin blamed the attacks on his community’s “fornications, adulteries and incest” which have “poured over the land … even against the handmaids dedicated to God” – that is, nuns. The Vikings had made off not just with church treasure, but had also led away youths “into captivity”.

The capture of slaves was a common tactic. Some, like the boys from Lindisfarne, might have ended their days in Scandinavia or have been sold on at slave markets. But often, they were ransomed back to their communities for cash. After Vikings captured the abbot of St Denis in 858, for example, church treasuries “were drained dry” in order to meet their ransom demands of nearly 700lb of gold and 3,250lb of silver. “But even all this was far from being enough,” lamented the period’s chronicler Prudentius, bishop of Troyes.

The Viking pattern of raiding, looting and slaving is a dominant theme of 9th-century annals from Ireland, England and the Carolingian continent (spanning much of modern-day western Europe). In 842, Vikings made a surprise early-morning attack on the trading port of Quentovic in modern-day France. “They plundered it and laid waste,” recorded Prudentius, leaving “nothing in it except those buildings which they had been paid to spare”.

Accounts such as these record massive sums of silver extracted by the Vikings or offered as protection money. The extent of Viking accumulation of silver is staggering: the annals suggest that over the 9th century, the total loot in Viking hands amounted to 30,000lb of silver – or 7 million Carolingian pennies.

This stock is likely to have provided a stimulus to the economic development of nascent towns such as York and Lincoln in Scandinavian-settled areas of England, which are thought to have been more economically buoyant than their counterparts in “English” England.

Why did the Vikings come to value silver so highly? While the ownership of land and livestock was determined by strict laws of inheritance, silver could be obtained independently and with little resource investment, bypassing these normal routes of advancement. In this sense, silver embodied a new kind of dynamism coinciding with a different mode of behaviour.

These “nouveau rich” Vikings could not necessarily buy land with silver, but it gave them status – enabling people without inherited assets to acquire, and pass on, wealth. While the division of farmland and cattle upon marriage or death could be tricky, silver was ideally suited to such payments.

To these new generations of Scandinavians, silver became a standard of value that could guarantee investments, settle disputes and underwrite inheritance claims. It could be used to cement relationships – acting, as archaeologist Soren Sindbaek puts it, as a “virtual social glue”.

Silver analysis leads to a staggering result

But as well as value, silver stores information in its chemical composition that can reveal where it came from – something I have investigated as head of a research team over the last five years. We have analysed hundreds of silver Viking-age objects including from the Bedale hoard, with its rich mixture of rings and ingots cast by Scandinavians.

To make the hoard’s massive twisted silver neck-ring, for example, Viking metalcasters would have melted down numerous silver coins or small pieces of deliberately cut “hacksilver”. Once melted, the silver was cast into ingots, then gently hammered into long rods which were heated and twisted together to form the neck-ring.

Silver and gold items from the Viking-era Bedale hoard.
The Viking hoard dating 850-950 found near Bedale, North Yorkshire, in October 2012. York Museums Trust via WikimediaCC BY-NC-SA

However, this process masked the original sources of that silver. The only way to tell where it came from would require techniques from geochemistry – so I took the objects to the British Geological Survey’s laboratory in the suburbs of Nottingham, where isotope scientist Jane Evans drilled tiny samples from each silver object to measure them for lead isotopes.

Just like the isotopes (of oxygen, strontium and sulphur) that are laid down in bone and teeth – from which we can trace people’s childhood origins – isotopes of lead can be used to trace silver back to its source. Most silver ores contain trace amounts of lead, the four stable isotopes of which vary according to the ore’s geological age and composition. These lead isotopes give each ore a “fingerprint”, which carries over into silver coins and other artefacts made from it.

Given the location of the Bedale hoard in North Yorkshire, I was confident that much of the silver would have come from local Anglo-Saxon and also Carolingian sources in mainland western Europe. In England, the Vikings started to settle from around 865. How they did so – whether by seizing land, purchasing it, or settling previously uninhabited areas – isn’t entirely clear, but the loot seized during their raids must have helped the process.

Plotting the ratios of the lead isotopes in the Bedale hoard for the first time, many of the results were as expected: several silver objects matched the ratios of Anglo-Saxon and Carolingian coinage, and other objects had been refined to raise their silver content prior to casting, using local lead in the process of cupellation.

Geochemical analysis of Bedale hoard items

Charts comparing lead isotope ratios in the Bedale hoard with possible sources of these silver elements.
Charts comparing lead isotope ratios of items in the Bedale hoard ((black crosses)) with possible sources of these silver elements. The nine ingots plot closely with Islamic sources of silver (in blue). Jane KershawCC BY-NC-SA

But while many of the artefacts in the Bedale hoard yielded predictable results, a group of nine ingots stood out. Rather than matching western silver sources or local lead, they had the same isotope ratios as the Islamic currency of dirhams.

Dirhams minted between AD750 and 900 by the Umayyads and Abbasids, in what is today Iran and Iraq, were a particularly close match. Two of these ingots were marked with a cross, although whether this carried Christian meaning or was simply a way of marking out ownership is unclear. Either way, these massive ingots must have been cast in Scandinavia from Islamic silver dirhams and brought over to England in Viking hands, before being buried in North Yorkshire.

This result is staggering. The names of villages around Bedale like Snape and Newton-le-Willows sound very far from Mesopotamia – yet the Bedale hoard contained a substantial component of silver minted in Baghdad, Tehran and Isfahan.

These results have made us question the timing of the Viking age’s eastern expansion. While Islamic dirhams are plentiful in Scandinavia, they predominantly date to the 10th century. However, our analysis suggests that dirhams were already arriving in Scandinavia in the 9th century in much larger quantities than previously thought – with many being melted down as a raw material for casting.

To understand how this happened, we need to meet the Scandinavians who looked east rather than west in search of silver and other riches.

Who were the Scandinavians who went east?

While the Viking raids on western Europe are best-known thanks to the many surviving written accounts, some of their fellow-Scandinavians – largely drawn from modern-day Sweden – headed east, establishing riverine, trade-based settlements in what is now Russia and Ukraine.

The route led across the Baltic Sea and Gulf of Finland into northern Russia, transporting furs and slaves from northern Europe to the markets of the Islamic Caliphate. Finds of dirhams in Scandinavia represent the profit from this trade and show that it, too, had silver at its heart.

Over time, these Scandinavians adapted to life on the eastern waterways, adopting some cultural practices from local people such as the nomadic Khazars. The 10th-century diplomat, Ahmad ibn Fadlan, gave a frank description of this new community of traders – known as Rus rather than Vikings – who he met on the River Volga in northern Russia:

They are the filthiest of God’s creatures. They do not clean themselves after urinating or defecating, nor do they wash themselves after having sex …They are like wandering asses.

In 921, Ibn Fadlan had been sent by the Abbasid caliph, al-Muqtadir, as part of an embassy to the king of the Volga Bulgars, located near the modern town of Kazan in Tartastan, Russia. His travelogue-style account, or risāla, of that journey has become famous for the many eyewitness accounts of people he met along the way – including the Rus from northern Europe, whom he met as they traded with merchants from the Islamic empire at the market of Bulgar on the River Volga, roughly midway between Scandinavia and Baghdad.

The Rus people’s long and difficult journey from Scandinavia would have taken several months, involving multiple rivers and portages – when their boats had to be dragged across land. They traversed boreal forest and the Eurasia steppe, which was populated by various nomadic tribes. In this landscape, the only option was to travel by river – or, in winter, to use the river as an ice highway, substituting boats for sledges. But for the Rus, travelling this perilous eastern route, the Austrvegr, was worth the risk.

A 1909 painting of trade negotiations between Rus traders and Eastern Slav locals in the 10th century
Painting of trade negotiations between Rus traders and Eastern Slav locals in the 10th century, by Russian artist Sergey Ivanov (1909). Wikimedia Commons

According to Ibn Fadlan, the Rus acted as middlemen, acquiring furs and slaves from hunter societies in forested areas and organising their shipment down river via trading posts that later developed into permanent settlements. The goods were sent to major markets such as Itil (on the Caspian Sea) and Bulgar, where they would be purchased by merchants from the caliphate.

What the Rus wanted in return for slaves and furs was dirhams: the fine silver coins, weighing roughly 3g each, which made up the currency of the Islamic Caliphate. The early 10th-century writer, Ahmad ibn Rustah, explained how the Rus “earn their living by trading in sable, grey squirrel and other furs. They sell them for silver coins which they set in belts and wear around their waist.”

Ibn Fadlan’s highly detailed travelogue explains that once a trader amassed 10,000 dirhams, he melted them down to create a neck-ring for his wife. After 20,000 dirhams, he made two. This was no doubt an exaggeration – such a neck-ring would weigh 65lb of silver – but the notion that a smallish group of traders acquired tens of thousands of silver dirhams is supported by archaeology.

For these Rus “traders”, just as important as the fur trade was the trade in enslaved people, who seem mainly to have been captured from the Slavic lands and what is now northern Russia, rather than western Europe. Scholars sometimes describe the Austrvegr as a trading route, but human trafficking can hardly be described as “trade” in the mercantile way that we understand it today. It was based on coercion and violence – the terrorising nature of Viking activity in the west was replicated in the east.

The Rus “treat their slaves well and dress them suitably”, Ibn Rusta wrote, “because for them they are an article of trade”. Yet it’s also clear that female slaves were exploited for sex. These reports underscore the grim reality of the Rus “trade” – that their insatiable quest for silver entailed human suffering.

Astonishingly, some 400,000 dirhams survive in Scandinavia and the Baltic, making the dirham the most common archaeological find type for the Viking age. However, most of these coins date to the first half of the 10th century.

Yet according to our analysis of the Bedale hoard, rather than the Viking age “starting” in the west, the eastern and western expansions may have happened in parallel from the end of the 8th century – with the wealth of the east a prime motivator of the Viking movement out of Scandinavia.

Today, in some of the place-names near Bedale in North Yorkshire, we see evidence of Scandinavian settlement: Aiskew is Old Norse for “Oak Wood”, and Firby means “Frith’s village”. But now we also have evidence of a connection between the Bedale hoard and Rus traders bringing silver back to Scandinavia from their exploits in the east – up to a century earlier than had been thought.

Laser analysis brings new discoveries

In our analysis of the Bedale hoard, lead isotopes alone weren’t enough to draw definitive conclusions. We needed additional data to confirm the Islamic origin of the nine ingots.

Not only do lead isotopes differ between source ores – so do trace elements. Gold and bismuth levels are especially helpful in evaluating the origin of silver, because, unlike other elements, they do not change when silver is melted down.

After digesting the results of the lead isotopes, I returned to the suburbs of Nottingham. With Simon Chenery, we put the Bedale hoard objects under an excimer laser (a type of ultraviolet laser), ablating tiny amounts of silver in order to record the levels of trace elements. This time, thrillingly, the results came through in real time.

They showed, for the Islamic-looking ingots, the telltale pattern of low gold that is characteristic of Abbasid silver. Abbasid dirhams of this date typically have gold levels below 0.4%, reflecting the low-gold character of nearby silver mines in the Taurus mountains, whereas gold levels in coins from western Europe are higher – around 1% in the late 9th century.

Five ingots from the Bedale hoard ready for analysis.
Ingots in the tray ready for laser ablation. Jane KershawCC BY-SA

We discovered, too, that other artefacts were probably made from a mix of both western and eastern silver sources. This was true of the massive silver neck-ring as well as a smaller neck-ring from the hoard. Indeed, these two items appear to have been made from the same silver stock, suggesting that they travelled from their source to Bedale together.

While both could have been made in Scandinavia, the contribution of western silver raises the possibility that they were produced locally in Yorkshire, by metal casters with access to both distant, Islamic dirhams and local, Anglo-Saxon silver.

Our analysis shows the Islamic contribution to the Bedale hoard is more significant than we would have expected for a Viking hoard from England. In all, the nine ingots weigh 715g, equivalent to around 240 dirhams. And taking into account the Islamic contribution to the “mixed” silver artefacts, Islamic silver comprises around a third of the total weight of silver from the hoard (weighing around 3,700g).

Clearly, the Vikings were not only extracting silver from areas they raided and conquered, they were also bringing it in via their long-distance trade networks in the east. This result reveals the unexpected connectedness of the Vikings’ eastern and western expansions. Far from being separate phenomena, the profits of one directly fed into the activities of the other. Gains made from the Austrvegr may have enabled a group of Scandinavians to launch raids to the west and acquire further wealth and land.

In the west, these raids lasted for around 70 years from the late 8th century, spanning two or three generations. But eventually, the Vikings decided to settle. In northern England, where Bedale is located, they proceeded “to plough and to support themselves”, according to the Anglo-Saxon Chronicle entry for 876 AD. Finds of female Scandinavian dress items from England suggest that whole families, not just retired warriors, settled there.

Many questions remain about the nature of this settlement – including whether the raiders-turned-settlers lived separately from or with the native Anglo-Saxon population, and how the settlement process was brokered. But the former Vikings and their families appear to have integrated relatively quickly, adopting Christian forms of burial, developing craft industries in towns, and embracing coinage as a means of exchange. Among the settled Scandinavian population, the violence ceased.

Silver remained an important medium for displaying values and even identities. From around 900, new Anglo-Scandinavian rulers minted their own coinage – sometimes preserving traditional features familiar to Anglo-Saxons, but also adding new aspects that proclaimed a Scandinavian background. Coins minted by the new rulers of York, a focus of Scandinavian settlement in northern England, could have a Christian cross on one side and a Thor’s hammer – an overt pagan symbol – on the other.

These Anglo-Scandinavian coins were in use across Scandinavian-settled regions of England and are testimony to the continued importance of silver to the Viking economy – now channelled into a form that was more regulated and acceptable to the local Anglo-Saxon community. Geochemical analysis of the silver in these coins also reveals glimpses of this process of assimilation. Our investigation of a handful of examples, using the same techniques of lead isotope and trace element analysis, suggests they were made mainly with Anglo-Saxon silver – but again with a modest contribution from Islamic dirhams.

The end of the eastern adventure

The geochemical analysis of silver helps reveal the reasons for the extraordinary expansion of the Vikings and their fellow Scandinavians – including pointing to the wealth gained in eastern markets as a major (and hitherto neglected) “pull” factor. To a greater degree than has traditionally been acknowledged, eastern silver travelled across the Scandinavian world of the Viking age.

The huge number of Samanid dirhams found in Scandinavia point to the 930s-940s as the most fruitful decades for the Scandinavian travellers’ trade with the east. The Rus’s slave and fur trade continued until around 950 – and silver analysis again helps to explain why it came to a fairly sudden end. Analysis of the silver content of dirhams shows their fineness declined sharply from the 940s and 950s – a reflection, no doubt, of the drying up of silver mines in Central Asia.

It did not take long for Vikings to seek out silver sources closer to home. They turned to coins from the area of modern-day Germany, struck with silver from the newly-exploited Harz mountains, which they obtained mainly through trade. The decline in the silver content of dirhams thus led to a major reconfiguration of Scandinavian trade routes.

From this point on, long-distance trade with the east declined significantly. The Vikings instead turned again to the west, establishing trade links with England and Germany. In the late 10th century, increasingly powerful Scandinavian kings also launched new seaborne raids, exploiting the weakness of English kings such as Æthelred II “the Unready” (978–1016) and initiating what has become known as the “second Viking age” in England.

These raids, launched from around 980, were bigger, more centrally organised, and successful. The Vikings obtained significant quantities of “Danegeld”: protection payments made in coin. Ultimately, in 1016, the Danish king Cnut established himself on the English throne. The nature of the relationship between England and Scandinavia during this period is also being explored through silver, in a project on coinage from the recently-discovered Lenborough hoard.

If the pattern identified for the Bedale hoard plays out across other Viking hoards, it will prompt a major re-evaluation of the movements of the earliest Scandinavian warrior-traders. As part of the same project, we have been analysing Viking silver hoards of a similar 9th-century date from Sweden and Denmark, the Carolingian continent, southern Scotland and the west coast of England. Preliminary results suggest a regional pattern, but with Islamic silver appearing to be dominant in many cases.

What’s clear is that in the 9th century, the Vikings were already awash in Islamic silver. Meanwhile, more undiscovered treasures like that found in Bedale lie quietly underground, waiting to reveal their secrets.


For you: more from our Insights series:

To hear about new Insights articles, join the hundreds of thousands of people who value The Conversation’s evidence-based news. Subscribe to our newsletter.The Conversation

Jane Kershaw, Gad Rausing Associate Professor of Viking Age Archaeology, University of Oxford

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

The most powerful tool in an astronomer’s arsenal is a lens – but not the kind you might think

LRG 3-757, or the Cosmic Horseshoe, where the yellow galaxy has magnified the light of the blue one farther away. NASA, ESA
Tania BaroneSwinburne University of Technology

Astronomers are living in a golden age of bigger and better telescopes. But even our most advanced technology pales in comparison to the power of nature’s own “cosmic magnifying glasses” – strong gravitational lenses.

In less than 50 years we have gone from the first-ever discovery of a strong gravitational lens to now finding thousands. As new telescopes come online, we’re expecting to discover thousands more.

With these lenses, we can look deep into the universe, and catch glimpses into the most puzzling of contemporary cosmic mysteries: dark matter and dark energy.

So, what are gravitational lenses and how do they work?

A spectacular demonstration of gravity

Gravitational lenses are the most visually spectacular demonstration of Albert Einstein’s theories of gravity.

According to Einstein, mass bends and warps the very fabric of space, in much the same way that a heavy bowling bowl placed on a mattress will bend the mattress beneath it.

Everything with mass (you, me, a leaf, an atom) bends space-time in this way.

But it’s only when an object is really massive – such as entire galaxies and clusters of galaxies – that this effect becomes so apparent. As light travels from distant objects and passes these massive galaxies, the warped space-time around them bends and focuses this light, magnifying it for us to see.

Diagram showing gravitational lensing of a background galaxy by a foreground cluster of galaxies.
In this diagram, a cluster of many galaxies distorts the light-rays from another galaxy behind it. When viewed from Earth, we see the background galaxy as a warped and highly magnified arc around the foreground cluster. NASA, ESA & L. CalçadaCC BY

We’re not always in the right place to see this effect. Just like how you need to align a magnifying glass in front of your eye, we only observe the gravitational lensing effect when there is a chance alignment of the background object, the foreground lens, and us.

On the rare occasions when this happens, through our telescopes we see multiple, distorted but magnified versions of an object that we wouldn’t otherwise be able to see because it’s too faint.

A foreground cluster of galaxies is warping a galaxy in the background, causing it to appear elongated and distorted. Due to the magnification we can see the galaxy in impressive detail.
The Hubble Space Telescope captures a striking gravitational lens called GAL-CLUS-022058s. Here, a cluster of galaxies is warping a background galaxy, giving us a close-up view of how this galaxy looked 9 billion years ago. ESA/Hubble & NASA, S. Jha Acknowledgement: L. ShatzCC BY

Revealing the invisible

Even Einstein couldn’t have predicted how important gravitational lenses would become to modern astronomy. In fact, he believed them impossible to observe at all.

This was because Einstein was thinking about gravitational lensing around individual stars, not galaxies. It wasn’t until decades later that astronomers came to realise just how massive galaxies are, and just how full of them our universe is.

Impressively, gravitational lenses can also reveal details about things we can’t see at all.

Theories predict about 85% of the matter that makes up the universe is invisible stuff called dark matter. The way a gravitational lens bends and warps light allows us to measure how much matter is in galaxies – not just the regular matter we can see, but dark matter as well.

Gravitational lenses can also help us map galaxy clusters across the universe, helping us to understand its shape. Is our universe perfectly flat like a sheet of paper? Or does it have curvature to it like a sphere, or flare outwards like a horse saddle?

That depends on how dense the universe is, and mapping galaxy clusters helps us measure the density of a hypothetical force known as dark energy.

Looking at the distant universe

Gravitational lenses typically make the background objects ten to 100 times brighter than they would be otherwise. This effect provides a high-definition view of the distant universe.

The James Webb Space Telescope has been taking advantage of this magnification boost to get a glimpse into what the universe was like in its infancy more than 13 billion years ago, shortly (300 million years) after the Big Bang.

Looking far into the past helps us piece together how our own celestial home, the Milky Way galaxy, formed and how it might change in the future.

How a typical young galaxy looks today (left). Our Milky Way looks similar with spiral arms. In the future our Milky Way may evolve into a massive, elliptical galaxy such as the one on the right. Left: ESA/Hubble & NASA, ESO, J. Lee and the PHANGS-HST Team. Right: NASA, ESA, and The Hubble Heritage Team (STScI/AURA); J. Blakeslee (Washington State University)

We’re about to be spoilt for choice

The catch to all this is gravitational lenses are rare – akin to a needle in a cosmic-scale haystack. To find them, we need high quality images of large swaths of the night sky.

This year, two new skywatching projects are expected to revolutionise the field: the European Space Agency’s Euclid space telescope and the Vera Rubin Observatory in Chile.

Euclid, which launched in 2023 and released its first batch of data earlier this year, will image a monumental one-third of the entire sky, with a clarity that only comes from being in space.

Conversely, the Vera Rubin Observatory will be working from the ground, but will image the entire southern hemisphere sky. It will create the most detailed time-lapsed view of the cosmos ever seen.

Over their lifetimes Euclid and the Vera Rubin Observatory are predicted to unveil 100,000 new gravitational lenses, 100 times more than we currently know.

One of the first images released by the James Webb Space Telescope, this cluster (called SMACS J0723.3−7327) is lensing many distant galaxies behind it. NASA, ESA, CSA, and STScI

How do we find these 100,000 gravitational lenses among the billions of galaxies observed by these telescopes? It is not feasible for scientists to wade through that many images alone.

Instead, Euclid is relying on citizen scientists to help train AI models to know what to look for. By having people each look through a few images and classifying whether they are gravitational lenses or not, AI models can learn from these examples and can then search the entire dataset (if you want to get involved, check out their website).

From individual lenses providing unique new insights into distant galaxies, to studying the effect over large statistical samples to understand the very nature of the universe, gravitational lenses do it all. They are the Swiss Army knife in an astronomer’s toolkit, and we’re about to be spoilt for choice.The Conversation

Tania Barone, Research Associate in Galaxy Evolution, Swinburne University of Technology

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Is mineral water ‘natural’ if it’s filtered? The debate gripping France today has raged since the 18th-century

Daniel GettingsUniversity of Warwick

A year ago, French newspaper Le Monde and Radio France broke a scandal in big water – Perrier was filtering its product. The filtering began due to worries about water contamination linked to climate change and pollution of spring sources.

It was also revealed that executives at parent company Nestle and French government ministers tried to keep it all quiet. They allegedly covered up reports of contamination and changed the rules to allow micro-filtration.

Under EU law, for a brand to market their products as “natural mineral water” it has to remain unaltered. French mineral water companies are now awaiting a ruling on what level of filtration is considered illegal “treatment”. The result could mean that, after 160 years, Perrier will no longer be able to be call its product “natural mineral water”.

Strikingly, the same issue was debated extensively by scientists during the 18th-century European spring water boom. These men considered the effects of human intervention on the product and what was lost in the process.

A spa boom

In the 17th and 18th centuries, medical interest, in addition to factors like travel for leisure, resulted in the proliferation of new spa towns across Europe.

In England, Buxton and Tunbridge Wells developed in the 1620s and 1660s respectively, while Harrogate, Cheltenham and Leamington came in the 1710s, 1750s and 1790s. Historical survey’s place the number of spas and wells offering healing mineral waters at around 350 in the 18th-century heyday.

Spas like Bath, Buxton and the Bristol Hotwell were thermal, offering hot bathing. However, other spa sources in England were not heated. This meant that those who wished to bathe had to do so in the cold, which was both undesirable, and at that time, considered dangerous. This was due to fears that the English cold climate, when combined with bodily exposure to cold water, could disrupt bodily rhythms an cause illness.

People bathing at bath spa
Public Bathing at Bath, or Stewing Alive, by Isaac Cruikshank, 1825. Wikimedia

As a result, many of the cold spas focused on offering health benefits through drinking their waters. When hailing the qualities of the newly discovered waters at Scarborough in 1660, Yorkshire doctor Robert Wittie declared they had “gained such credit” that people: “Come above an hundred miles to drink of it, preferring it to all other medicinal waters they had formerly frequented.”

He later described the health benefits he gained from drinking them:

I had lost two pound and a half of my weight… I found after it better agility of body, and alacrity of spirit then before.

In 1654, the doctor Edmund Deane had similarly described the effects of the waters of Knaresborough: “Those waters at the Spaw doe presently heal, and (as it were) miraculously cure diseases, which are without all hope of recovery.”

Testing the waters

As the number of spas grew, so did the options for consumers. As a result, the 18th century saw increasing attention and experimentation on mineral waters by scientists. Rather than questioning the health benefits, they instead compared waters to one another, experimenting on them to determine processes that produced and changed healing properties.

For example, British doctor George Turner, who translated and expanded upon a German work about the spa of Bad Pyrmont, in 1733. His work discussed experiments on the waters of the spa and the minerals that could be determined within. It noted that if left standing, the carbonated water lost its potency: “Whence it is, that so spiritous a liquid does so easily turn to a flat insipid water.”

He also suggested that boiling caused mineral waters to lose some invisible element important to its proper function. “Why so many globules of air arise out of mineral waters when it is warmed?” he asked, only to conclude that when “spirits fly out of any liquid” they go “incognito without any tumult”. As they “flew”, so too did whatever gave these waters healing properties, making chemical recreation in a lab impossible.

An early mineral water bottle.
An example of glass bottle that would have held English mineral water between 1801 to 1900. The Board of Trustees of the Science MuseumCC BY-NC-ND

Historians of science have suggested that works like this foregrounded the concept of “gas”, which came more conclusively later in the century.

During experiments on the Scarborough waters, doctor Peter Shaw and natural scientist Stephen Hales each sought to determine the nature of the “subtle sulphurous spirit” in which they felt the “principal virtue of the Chalybeate (flavoured with iron) Waters resided”.

Similar experiments also involved extensive filtering, with physician John Nott in 1793 adding solutions to the waters of Italy’s Pisa and France’s Verdun before filtering them and performing further tests on “what remains in the filter”.

Scottish physician, Thomas Short, had concluded previously that filtering waters was both an important natural process. He described “the several strange alterations that water undergoes, by being strained through different strata of minerals”. But also that the body inherently filtered “raw” mineral waters through its skin when bathing, allowing only those smaller minerals in to provide the health effect, he claimed.

These scientists used their burgeoning chemical understanding to conclude that processes performed on waters fundamentally changed them, going from “spiritous” cures to “flat insipid water”. Even lacking the full knowledge or vocabulary to express why, they felt their processes and tools were incapable of recreating the waters of nature.

Legacies of these ideas can be seen in our changing attitudes to food and drink. Modern branding and consumer value is placed on a lack of processing. We are increasingly concerned with capturing and consuming the natural as it is, before human intervention has muddied it.

In so doing, we continue the ideas of those concerned with mineral waters all that time ago. By filtering their waters, no matter how little Perrier claim it affected them, we feel as though some spirit of the natural has perhaps been lost.


Looking for something good? Cut through the noise with a carefully curated selection of the latest releases, live events and exhibitions, straight to your inbox every fortnight, on Fridays. Sign up here.The Conversation


Daniel Gettings, Sessional Tutor, Department of History, University of Warwick

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

How bigotry crushed the dreams of an all-Black Little League team

Members of the 1955 Cannon Street All-Star YMCA team chat before a game at Nationals Park in Washington, D.C., on Aug. 19, 2011. Robert E. Pierre/The Washington Post via Getty Images
Chris LambIndiana University

John Rivers, John Bailey, David Middleton, Leroy Major and Buck Godfrey – all teammates from the 1955 Cannon Street YMCA Little League All-Star team – left Charleston, South Carolina, on a bus on Aug. 18, 2025.

After a stop at the Baseball Hall of Fame in Cooperstown, New York, for a couple days – where their story is included in an exhibit on Black baseball that opened in 2024 – they’ll head to Williamsport, Pennsylvania.

There, they’ll be recognized before the Little League World Series championship game on August 24, 2025 – 70 years after the players, then 11 and 12 years old, watched the championship game from the bleachers, wondering why they weren’t on the field living out their own dreams instead of watching other boys live out theirs.

When the Cannon Street team registered for a baseball tournament in Charleston in July 1955, it put the team and the forces of integration on a collision course with segregation, bigotry and the Southern way of life.

White teams refused to take the field with the Cannon Street team, who represented the first Black Little League in South Carolina. The team won two tournaments by forfeit. They were supposed to then go to a regional tournament in Rome, Georgia, where, if they won, they’d advance to the Little League World Series.

But Little League officials ruled the team ineligible for the regional tournament because it had advanced by winning on forfeit and not on the field, as the rules stipulated.

A 4-team Black league is born

The Civil Rights Movement is often told in terms of court decisions, bus boycotts and racist demagogues. It’s rarely told from the point of view of children, who suffered in ways that left physical and emotional scars.

When I was a journalism professor at the College of Charleston, I learned how the presence of a single Black all-star team was enough to cause one of the biggest crises in Little League history. In 2022, I wrote the book “Stolen Dreams: The 1955 Cannon Street All-Stars and Little League Baseball’s Civil War.”

The team’s story begins in 1953. Robert Morrison, president of the Cannon Street YMCA, petitioned Little League Baseball to create a league for Black teams, and Little League Baseball granted the charter. Dozens of Black 11- and 12-year-old boys were selected for the four-team league before the 1954 season.

They played on a diamond of grass and gravel at Harmon Field in Charleston, a city with a long history of racial strife. In 1861, the Civil War began in Charleston harbor, where hundreds of thousands of slaves had been brought to the U.S. from the 1600s to the 1800s. The field also wasn’t far from Emanuel AME church, where nine Black parishioners were murdered during a prayer meeting in 2015.

Little League Baseball barred first-year leagues from the postseason tournaments. At some point during the 1955 season, the best players were selected for the league’s All-Star team. Cannon Street YMCA officials then registered the team for the Charleston city tournament, which included all-star teams from the city’s all-white leagues.

Little League Baseball officially prohibited racial discrimination. But in South Carolina, racial discrimination was still legal.

Dixie fights back

The U.S. Supreme Court had ruled a year earlier that segregation in schools was unconstitutional in the landmark Brown v. Board of Education decision, paving the way for racial integration.

Few states resisted integration as fiercely as South Carolina, and no politician fought harder against racial equality than the state’s junior U.S. senator, Strom Thurmond.

So when the Cannon Street YMCA All-Stars registered for Charleston’s citywide tournament in July 1955, all the white teams withdrew. The Cannon Street team won by forfeit and advanced to the state tournament.

Danny Jones, the state’s director of Little League Baseball, petitioned the organization to create a segregated state tournament. Little League Baseball’s president, Peter McGovern, denied Jones’ request. He said that any team that refused to play the Cannon Street team would be banned from the organization.

Thurmond let it be known to Jones that an integrated tournament could not be permitted. In the end, Jones urged all the white teams to withdraw from the state tournament. He then resigned from Little League Baseball, created the Little Boys League and wrote the league’s charter, which prohibited Black players.

A baseball with an American flag superimposed over it, surrounded by four stars.
The official logo for Dixie Youth Baseball, which was originally established as an all-white league. Dixie Youth Baseball

The Little Boys League – which was rebranded as Dixie Youth Baseball – soon replaced Little League in other Southern states; within six years, there were 390 such leagues spanning most of the former Confederacy. It would be decades before Little League Baseball returned to South Carolina.

Having won the South Carolina tournament by forfeit, the Cannon Street YMCA All-Stars prepared for the regional tournament in Rome, Georgia, where the state’s governor, Marvin Griffin, objected to integration. If youth baseball could be integrated, so, too, could schools, swimming pools and municipal parks, he said.

Let them play!

Little League rules said that teams could advance only by playing and winning, so the Cannon Street’s state championship was ruled invalid because it had come by forfeit.

McGovern decided against making an exception for the Cannon Street YMCA All-Stars.

Most white-owned newspapers, whether in the South or North, had long stayed silent on the topic of racial discrimination. But the story of the Cannon Street All-Stars broke through. Editors and reporters may have wanted to avoid the topic of racism, but boys being denied the opportunity to play in a baseball tournament was too objectionable to ignore.

On July 31, 1955, New York Daily News columnist Dick Young asked Brooklyn Dodgers star Jackie Robinson, who had broken Major League Baseball’s color barrier eight years earlier, about the white teams that had quit the tournament rather than play against a Black team.

“How stupid can they be?” Robinson said. “I had to laugh when I read the story.”

Perhaps pressured by criticism, McGovern, Little League’s president, invited the team to be Little League’s guests for the championship game. So the team boarded a bus for Williamsport. They arrived the night before the championship game, which pitted Morrisville, Pennsylvania, against Delaware Township, New Jersey, an integrated team.

The Cannon Street YMCA All-Stars and their coaches were introduced before the game, and the players recall hearing a loud voice from the bleachers.

“Let them play!” it boomed.

Others in the crowd joined in, the players said.

“Let them play! Let them play!”

John Rivers, who played second base for the team, told me he can still “hear it now.”

After their brief moment on the field, the Cannon Street All-Stars returned to their seats and watched other boys live out their dreams. A photograph of the team in the stands reveals the disappointment on their faces.

Black and white photo of Black boys and adults sitting in the stands at a baseball stadium.
The Cannon Street All-Stars watch from the stands at the 1955 Little League World Series in Williamsport, Pa. 1955 Cannon Street All-Stars/Facebook

On the following day – Aug. 28, 1955 – the team boarded its bus to return to Charleston. It was the same date that Emmett Till, not much older than the players on the team, was brutally murdered in Money, Mississippi, for reportedly whistling at a white woman.

The boys and girls who play in the 2025 tournament will forever remember the experience. The surviving members of the Cannon Street All-Stars, who are all in their early 80s, never forgot what they were denied.

Rivers, who went on to become a successful architect, says this is the moral of their story.

“It’s a tragedy to take dreams away from a youngster,” Rivers told The Washington Post in 2022. “I knew it then. I know it now, and I’ve seen to it that no one takes dreams away from me again.”

Now there are some on the political right who want to bury America’s ugly racial history.

America has never fully reckoned with slavery or the decades of segregation, Rivers recently told me. “It just decided to move on from that ugly period in its history without any kind of therapy,” he said. “And now they are trying to sweep it all under the rug again.”

Portions of this article first appeared in an article published on Aug. 19, 2016.The Conversation

Chris Lamb, Professor of Journalism, Indiana University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Congratulations Magnificent Old Blokes 

Congratulations to Queenscliff SLSC's Magnificent Old Blokes, including Barry Antella, Graham Lugsdin and Dave Torevell, the boys who you’ll recognise from most Branch and state surf sports carnivals, who won the Services Team of the Year category at the Saturday August 16 Surf Life Saving NSW's 2025 Awards of Excellence.

Other local winners this year include Youth Surf Lifesaver of the Year – Nic McGibbon (Bungan Beach SLSC), Patrol Captain of the Year – Julian Clarkson (Manly LSC) and Athlete of the Year – Jemma Smith (Newport SLSC). 

The Magnificent Old Blokes (Queenscliff SLSC)

COTA welcomes pension rise, notes staged deeming changes; urges banks to match deemed rates

August 20, 2025
COTA Australia welcomes today’s Age Pension indexation increase and notes the Government’s decision to stage increases to deeming rates – a move which, while not without concern, will give older Australians greater certainty to plan and budget.

COTA Australia Chief Executive Officer Patricia Sparrow said September’s increase of $29.70 a fortnight for a single Age Pensioner will help pensioners keep up with rising household costs.

“The idea that all older Australians are wealthy is a myth. In reality, over one in four live in poverty. For those struggling with skyrocketing costs, an extra $29.70 a fortnight will bring real relief,” said Ms Sparrow. This is one of the largest increases to the aged pension over recent years. However, Ms Sparrow said the changes to deeming rates – after years of the rates being frozen to support people through the COVID pandemic and recovery – will no doubt come as a shock to some older Australians.

“Any decrease in fixed incomes is difficult for people to manage,” Ms Sparrow said. “However, staging the changes and coupling the introduction of the change with one of the largest pension increases in the past 60 years should offset the impact for many pensioners.

“Older people have told us that they want visibility of the government’s intentions to give them the opportunity to forecast and plan ahead. The staged approach to the deeming changes and the announcement ahead of its impact shows that the Minister has been listening.

“The Government has stated that the changes to the deeming rate will reflect rates of return that pensioners and other payment recipients can reasonably access on their investments.

“We’ll now be watching closely to make sure the Government’s statement – that deeming reflects what people can actually earn – is delivered in practice, not just in theory.”

Ms Sparrow said that COTA will also be watching closely to ensure the government’s methodology for setting future deeming rates works for all older Australians – including those who are not digitally connected to online savings accounts.

“The Government says deeming will gradually return to levels pensioners can reasonably access, with independent advice from the Australian Government Actuary. That’s welcome, but it’s crucial the methodology is designed to work for everyone. Deeming rates must reflect what people can actually get from their bank, not just headline online rates, and we look forward to engaging with the Actuary to ensure real over the counter banking products are properly represented.”

Ms Sparrow said COTA is reminding pensioners that many banks already offer “deeming accounts” which guarantee returns that match the Government’s deeming rates – and that in some cases, better returns may be available elsewhere.

“Pensioners shouldn’t assume their bank is giving them the best deal. Many banks do offer special ‘deeming accounts’ that match the Government’s deeming rate, but in some cases you can find products that deliver even higher returns.

“We’re urging people to call their bank today, check what they’re earning, and make sure their savings are working as hard as they can.”

Changes from 20 September 2025

Deeming:
  • The threshold will rise to $64,200 (single) and $106,200 (couple combined).
  • The deeming rate will increase 0.5% from today’s levels to 0.75% below the threshold and 2.75% above the threshold from 20 September 2025.
Pension:
  • The maximum rate of age pension increases on 20 September 2025 with indexation by $29.70/ fortnight for a single and $22.40 a fortnight for a couple (each) on the full pension.
  • Pension Disqualifying Income levels: various (single resident: $59.40/ft)
  • Pension Disqualifying Asset levels: various ($10k – $20k increase)
Commonwealth Seniors Health Card:
  • From 20 September 2025, singles with taxable income below $101,105 and couples with combined income below $161,768 may be eligible for a Commonwealth Seniors Health Card (CSHC).
COTA’s advice to older Australians – call your bank today
  • Don’t let your bank short-change you – call today and check your rate.
  • Ask whether your everyday or savings account pays you at least the government deemed rate of interest.
  • If it doesn’t, ask your bank if they have an account that does pay at least that amount or if there’s better rate they can offer you.
  • Consider moving funds to products that meet or exceed the deemed rate if suitable for your circumstances.

Want to see Australia’s rare and remarkable species for yourself? Here are 10 standout spots

Uwe-Bergwitz/Getty
Patrick FinnertyUniversity of SydneyEuan RitchieDeakin University, and Rhys CairncrossUniversity of Sydney

Australia is home to an extraordinary variety of wildlife, ranging from striking palm cockatoos to elusive mountain pygmy-possums and remarkable rat-kangaroos.

Most of us never get to see these creatures in real life – and that’s a real shame. Spending time in nature looking for wildlife is more than just a hobby – it’s a way to reconnect with the natural world and remember why it matters.

But how do you actually see these creatures for yourself? It’s often easier than you think.

As wildlife researchers, we’ve spent a long time in the field looking for wildlife. Here are ten standout locations where you have a good chance of seeing some genuinely remarkable Australian creatures – and tips on doing so without causing them stress or harming the environment.

1. Kutini-Payamu/Iron Range National Park, Queensland

Located in far north Queensland, Iron Range is renowned for lush rainforests and rich wildlife. Here, you can spot majestic palm cockatoos, secretive green pythons, the striking green, red and blue hues of eclectus parrots and the adorable common spotted cuscus, a species of possum. These species also occur in Papua New Guinea, but the Cape York region is the only place to spot them in Australia.

Spotting tips: Walk the trails with binoculars during peak times for bird activity, early morning or late afternoon. At night, use a head torch to spot pythons, frogs, death adders, geckoes, rufous owls, cuscus and other nocturnal fauna.

The shy spotted cuscus (Spilocuscus maculatus) lives in Australia’s far north. John Giustina/Getty

2. Atherton Tablelands, Queensland

Inland from Cairns lies the Atherton Tablelands, an elevated region with a cooler climate and abundant and diverse wildlife. Here, you can spot vibrant Ulysses butterflies, shy platypuses and rare marsupials. Australia’s largest snake, the scrub python, can block entire roads as it warms itself up before the night’s hunt. Rare waterfall frogs can be spotted in fast-flowing falls.

Lumholtz’s tree kangaroos can be spotted hopping along limbs at Curtain Fig National Park and Mount Hypipamee National Park, alongside green ringtail possums and striped possums with elongated fingers to ferret out grubs.

Meanwhile, musky rat-kangaroos can be seen “gardening” on the forest floor at Lake Eacham and Lake Barrine. These are the smallest kangaroos and the only non-hopping species. Your best chance of sighting an elusive northern quoll or northern bettong is at Davies Creek National Park.

Spotting tips: Take guided night walks to glimpse nocturnal wildlife. Use a head torch with a red filter. Move quietly and regularly stop to listen for movement and animal calls. Binoculars are a must for spotting creatures high in the canopy.

3. Western Treatment Plant, Victoria

Surprisingly, Melbourne’s Western Treatment Plant is a mecca for birdwatchers. The huge wastewater facility is recognised as a wetland of international importance. Migratory birds such as sharp-tailed sandpipers and red-necked stints can be seen, while well-hidden bitterns, rare orange-bellied parrots and Australia’s dancing crane, the brolga, can be glimpsed feeding in dense heath during cooler months. Almost 300 species have been recorded here.

Spotting tips: Visit during migration seasons (spring and autumn) for the best birdwatching opportunities. Use binoculars, telescopes, or telephoto lenses for close-up views without disturbance. Visitors need a permit.

4. Lunawanna-allonah/Bruny Island and Wukaluwikiwayna/Maria Island, Tasmania

South of Hobart lies Bruny Island, a sanctuary for endangered species such as eastern and spotted-tailed quolls. Most of Tasmania’s endemic bird species are found here, such as green rosellas and forty-spotted pardalotes. Rare swift parrots can also be seen.

North of Hobart is Maria Island, an island national park where no cars are allowed – and where Tasmanian devils, bandicoots and wombats can readily be seen.

Spotting tips: Join guided tours to see nocturnal wildlife or birds in Bruny Island’s tall forests. Eastern quolls can often be seen at night on the main road when heading north from the island’s isthmus. Tasmanian devils and bandicoots can be seen around campsites at Maria Island at night.

5. Flinders, Portsea and Blairgowrie piers, Victoria

Snorkelling the cool waters beneath Flinders, Portsea and Blairgowrie piers is a revelation. Here live spectacular weedy sea dragons, sand octopuses, big-belly seahorses, ornate cowfish, smooth and eagle rays, Port Jackson and banjo sharks and vividly coloured nudibranchs.

Spotting tips: Snorkel or dive during calm weather for best visibility. Keep your distance from marine life for their safety (and yours).

6. Sydney Harbour and cliff tops, New South Wales

Sydney’s iconic harbour and surrounding cliffs are well suited for marine life enthusiasts. Every winter, humpback and southern right whales migrate past the headlands, while pods of bottlenose dolphins can be seen year-round. White-bellied sea eagles, Australasian gannets and short-tailed shearwaters add to the spectacle in the skies.

Spotting tips: Join whale-watching cruises between May and November for the best chance. Clifftop spotting is best done with binoculars from Royal National Park, North Head, Clovelly and The Gap.

7. Binybara/Lee Point, Northern Territory

Just north of Darwin is Lee Point, one of the best places to glimpse the elusive black-footed tree-rat. Weighing almost a kilo, this threatened native rodent is an expert climber and lives in tree hollows.

Around 200 bird species have also been recorded here. Flocks of great knots, eastern curlews and grey-tailed tattlers feed on the mudflats, while the woodlands are home to the dazzling colour of Gouldian finches and the charismatic blue-winged kookaburra.

Spotting tips: Visit at night to see the tree-rat moving between trees, or come at low tide to watch thousands of shorebirds feeding. Binoculars will be invaluable.

The black-footed tree-rat (Mesembriomys gouldii) is a clever native rodent with a knack for life in the trees. François BrassardCC BY-NC-ND

8. Wadjemup/Rottnest Island, Western Australia

Offshore from Perth, Rottnest Island is rightly famous for its smiling quokkas. But other unique species such as King’s skink and venomous dugites can be seen here too, while osprey nests occupied for decades can be seen on rock stacks. The reefs around the island have WA’s southernmost coral.

Spotting tips: Cycling is the best way to explore different habitats on the largely car-free island. Keep your distance from quokkas and other wildlife to ensure they stay wild.

The ‘smiling’ quokkas (Setonix brachyurus) on Rottnest Island have become globally famous. Posnov/Getty

9. Kunama Namadgi/Kosciuszko National Park, New South Wales

Australia’s highest peaks are home to the nation’s most remarkable alpine wildlife. Birdwatchers can spot gang-gang cockatoos feeding in eucalypts, while lucky hikers might glimpse an alpine dingo crossing a snow-dusted plain, or see a strikingly coloured Corroborree frog in a bog or fen.

This is the only place in the world where you can encounter a critically endangered mountain pygmy-possum. These tiny marsupials hibernate under winter snow and emerge to feed on bogong moths in spring.

Kosciuszko is also home to the native smoky mouse and – remarkably – to Leadbeater’s possum, long thought to be confined to Victoria’s Central Highlands.

Spotting tips: For the best chance of spotting a mountain pygmy-possum, visit between late spring and early summer when the snow has melted. Stick to alpine boulder fields such as those around Charlotte Pass and Mount Kosciuszko. You may need to camp overnight to see nocturnal possums and the smoky mouse. Binoculars and patience are essential to glimpse these shy species.

Mountain pygmy possums (Burramys parvus) are hard to spot – but the thrill of seeing these tiny, secretive marsupials is hard to beat. Jason Edwards/Getty

10. Karta Pintingga/Kangaroo Island, South Australia

Southwest of Adelaide lies the large Kangaroo Island, home to echidnas, tammar wallabies, a rare subspecies of the glossy black-cockatoo and Kangaroo Island dunnarts. Koalas are common. While the island’s isolation has protected these species, the 2020 megafires caused much damage. Wildlife is now bouncing back.

Spotting tips: Explore national parks and conservation areas with a local guide. Observe from a distance.

Take care of wildlife

Wildlife spotting has to be done with care. Think of yourself as a guest in someone else’s home.

Keep a respectful distance, don’t touch wildlife, move quietly and use binoculars or a zoom lens for a closer look rather than creeping closer.

If you’re out after dark, make sure your head torch has a red light option. This light is vastly less damaging to animal eyes optimised for the dark.

When snorkelling or diving, avoid hitting corals and sponges with your fins.

It can be tempting to use playback of calls to attract birds such as owls. But this is very disruptive and can do real damage.

Avoid moving logs, bark, stones and other habitat in your effort to see animals. This is disruptive and risks bites from venomous creatures.

Clean and disinfect your boots before moving between areas to avoid spreading soil-borne pathogens such as cinnamon fungus and chytrid fungus.

Whatever you do, don’t feed wildlife. It might seem harmless, but it can change their natural behaviour, make them ill and even make them dependent on people.

Posting sightings on citizen science apps such as iNaturalist and FrogID can help scientists learn more about these species and aid their conservation.

Enjoy the journey

As wildlife researchers, we often seek out species in their natural habitat. These moments never lose their impact.

It’s a remarkable thing to see a creature in its natural habitat. A successful sighting gives a sense of awe and joy. At a time when many people are cut off from nature, deliberately seeking out these species is a powerful and rewarding act.The Conversation

Patrick Finnerty, Postdoctoral Research Fellow in Conservation and Wildlife Management, University of SydneyEuan Ritchie, Professor in Wildlife Ecology and Conservation, School of Life & Environmental Sciences, Deakin University, and Rhys Cairncross, Ecologist and PhD Researcher, University of Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Does weightlifting improve bone density?

Inti St Clair/Getty
Hunter BennettUniversity of South Australia

You may have heard high-impact activity – exercise such as running, jumping, football and basketball – is good at building bone density and strength. But what about when you’re standing still, lifting weights at the gym?

The good news is weight training is great for bone health. But some exercises are more effective than others. Here’s what the science says.

What is bone density?

Bone density, also known as bone mineral density, is essentially a measure of how many minerals (such as calcium and phosphorus) are packed into your bones.

It gives you an indication of how solid your bones are, which is important because denser bones are generally less likely to break.

However, bone density is not quite the same as bone strength.

Bones also rely on a range of other compounds (such as collagen) to provide support and structure. So, even dense bones can become brittle if they are lacking these key structural components.

However, bone mineral density (measured with a bone scan) is still considered one of the best indicators of bone health because it is strongly linked to fracture risk.

While there is likely a genetic component to bone health, your daily choices can have a big impact.

What affects your bone health?

Research shows a few factors can influence how strong and dense your bones are:

Getting older: As we age, our bone mineral density tends to decrease. This decline is generally greater in women after menopause, but it occurs in everyone.

Nutrition: Eating calcium-rich foods – dairy in particular, but also many vegetables, nuts, legumes, eggs and meat – has been shown to have a small impact on bone density (although the extent to which this reduces fracture risk is unclear).

Exposure to sun: Sunlight helps your body make vitamin D, which helps you absorb calcium, and has been linked to better bone density.

Exercise: It is well established that people who do high-impact and high-load exercise (such as sprinting and weight training) tend to have denser and stronger bones than those who don’t.

Smoking: Older people who smoke tend to have lower bone density than those who don’t smoke.

Why does movement improve bone density?

In the same way that your muscles get stronger when you expose them to stress, your bones get stronger when they’re asked to handle more load. This is why exercise is so important for bone health – because it tells your bones to adapt and become stronger.

Many of us know that people at risk for bone loss – post-menopausal women and older adults – should be focused on exercising for bone health.

However, everyone can benefit from targeted exercise, and it’s arguably just as important to prevent declines in bone health.

In fact, whether you are male or female, the younger you start, the more likely you are to have denser bones into your older life. This is crucial for long-term bone health.

Do weights improve bone density?

Yes. One of the most effective exercises for bone health is lifting weights.

When you lift weights, your muscles pull on your bones, sending signals that encourage new bone formation. There is a large body of evidence showing weight training can improve bone density in adults, including in post-menopausal women.

But not all exercises are created equal. For example, some evidence suggests large compound exercises that place more load on the skeleton – such as squats and deadlifts – are particularly effective at increasing density in the spine and hips, two areas prone to fractures.

What type of weight training is best?

Lifting heavier weights is thought to produce better results than lifting lighter ones. This means doing sets of three to eight repetitions using heavy weights is likely to have a greater impact on your bones than doing many repetitions with lighter ones.

Similarly, it takes a long time for your bones to adapt and become denser – usually six months or more. This means for healthy bones, it’s better to integrate weight training into your weekly routine rather than do it in bursts for a few weeks at a time.

Exercises that use body weight, such as yoga and pilates, have many health benefits. However they are unlikely to have a significant impact on bone density, as they tend to put only light stress on your bones.

If you are new to weight training, you might need to start a bit lighter and get used to the movements before adding weight. And if you need help, finding an exercise professional in your local area might be a great first step.

Exercising for bone health is not complex. Just a couple of (heavy) weight training sessions per week can make a big difference.

If you’re concerned you have low bone density, speak to your doctor. They can assess whether you need to go for a scan.The Conversation

Hunter Bennett, Lecturer in Exercise Science, University of South Australia

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Avalon Beach Historical Society September 2025 Meeting

After a very successful film-clip/video presentation at the June meeting (along with popcorn!) we’re heading for a combination ‘slide night’ with some interesting and new ‘stills’    but with a fascinating additional movie segment.

The meeting on 9th SEPTEMBER will be our AGM but as members will assure you, there is little time spent in the Election of Office Bearers so we are able to get onto ‘what really matters’.
The meeting will start at 8pm but if you wish to update your dues - which will be due at this meeting, please arrive that little bit earlier to save time. 

We have recently lost 4 local and wonderful creative geniuses - all in a tiny space of time!

We have assembled (where possible) a brief resume of both their memorial services and some of their amazing works of art!

John has down-loaded Ken G. Hall’s film “SMITHY” produced in 1946. It’s a great piece of work with what appears to be a faithful reworking of ‘Smithy’s’ fantastic trans-pacific flight in 1928 with his co-pilot Charles Ulm. 

HOWEVER, we have found a couple of stand-out anomalies or discrepancies - once when leaving Suva and then the approach to Eagle Farm Airport in Brisbane. Call them early and sloppy attempts at ‘AI’ if you wish, but we will be interested to see what you think!

Geoff Searl OAM
President Avalon Beach Historical Society

Northern Beaches Police Area Command: Retired police day 2025

Call for applications to join the Aged Care Council of Elders

The Australian Government is now seeking applications from older people with lived experience of the aged care system to join the Aged Care Council of Elders from January 2026.

The Council of Elders is a diverse group of older people representing the make-up of modern Australia which delivers advice to government on how best to support older Australians in aged care.

The Australian Government established the Council of Elders in 2021 following the Royal Commission into Aged Care Quality and Safety, which called for an advisory body on quality and safety of care, and the rights and dignity of older people.

Older people across Australia who want to listen to their peers about what’s important to them when it comes to living and ageing well, and how the quality of care can be improved, are encouraged to apply.

Suitable applicants will demonstrate how they are active in their communities, engaging with people about key issues and bringing that feedback to Government.

We encourage you to apply if your experience of aged care includes: 
  • receiving services at home or living in residential aged care
  • caring for an older person or having worked in aged care
  • living in rural or remote locations 
  • Culturally and Linguistically Diverse (CALD) communities
  • Care for older Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander people
  • dementia care.
Appointments will be for a term of up to two years, commencing from January 2026.

Find details on how to apply by visiting www.health.gov.au/apply-to-council-of-elders-2026

Applications close 5pm, Friday 26 September 2025.

Read more about the Council of Elders and the Terms of Reference on the council’s webpage. 

Minister for Aged Care and Seniors, The Hon. Sam Rae said:

“The Council of Elders plays a crucial role in bringing a range of diverse views and insights to Government when it comes to aged care.

“I encourage every older Australian with lived experience of aged care and active community networks to nominate as a member of the Council of Elders. 

“Membership of the Council is a unique opportunity to represent the community and work alongside the Government to build an aged care system that delivers world-class care for every older Australian.”

Quiz: can you pick a Victorian from a Queenslander? How our accents change from state to state

AustralianCamera/shutterstock
Howard MannsMonash University and Felicity CoxMacquarie University

In Australia, we can often tell what state someone is from based on the words they use: whether they go to the beach in “togs”, “bathers” or “swimmers” or if they prefer to eat a “potato cake”, “potato scallop” or “potato fritter”.

But compared to places such as the United States and United Kingdom, it can be harder to hear regional accent differences.

The relative uniformity of the Australian accent can be traced to our early European history, our youth as a nation and the slow pace of language change.

But Australian regional accents are there if you listen closely enough – and they are getting stronger.

Birth of the ‘uniform’ Aussie accent

In the UK, George Bernard Shaw once wrote:

It’s impossible for an Englishman to open his mouth without making another Englishman hate or despise him.

Some 1500 years of history will do that.

In the US, “American English” dates to 16th/early 17th centuries, so settlement, history and depth of time have led to American regional variation.

For example, in the US South, a word like “time” might be said like “tom” or “tam”, a word like “bait” might sound like “bite” and a word like “sit” might be heard as “see it”.

In Australia, English only permanently arrived with the First Fleet in 1788, and observers began to comment on the uniformity of English from its early days. A visiting ship’s captain, James Dixon, wrote in 1822:

The children born in those colonies, now grown up, speak a better language, purer, more harmonious than is generally the case in most parts of England.

This didn’t mean Australian English was good. It just wasn’t “tainted” with regional accents.

The formation of new accents and languages often comes down to kids accommodating to one another (trying to sound like one another). But in the early days, these colonial kids had no Australian accent to accommodate to.

A linguistic melting pot

Early English-speaking Australians used a melting pot of features from London, Ireland, Scotland, the West Country and East Anglia (among other places).

We see this in Sydney court records such as this one, featuring an Irish woman, Margaret O’Brien:

On Monday night quoth, Mrs O’Brien, my blessed husband went to Saint Pathrick’ a’cos ‘tis a taytotaler he is […] I axked her in purlistest terms the raison of her wiolence… Hevings forgive you, Mary Han, for telling sich a whopper; yer an hinnercent girl Mary Han.

O’Brien uses some Irish features like “raison” for “reason” and “sich” for “such”. But she also uses “Cockney” features like “wiolence” for “violence” and “hinnercent” for “innocent”.

Linguists describe this as a “feature pool”. Over time, some features rise to the top of the pool whereas others sink into obscurity.

The survivors became “Australian English”.

Survival in the tumultuous feature pool is often a mix of “majority rules” and “prestige”.

Cockneys were neither a majority nor prestigious in Australia, so it is little wonder pronunciations like “wiolence” and “hinnercent” faded away.

Australia had many Irish settlers but their English wasn’t prestigious either. That said, there is some evidence of Irish influence – as in the way some Aussies say words like “haitch” and “filum” (for “film”).

Majority didn’t always rule when it came to deciding which features survived.

Once formed, the Australian accent stayed uniform for longer than you might expect.

This is because early European Australia had a highly mobile population: they often stuck close to the coast and travelled from port to port. When they travelled inland, they often did it together and in mixed company.

Australian English also stayed uniform longer because more than a few Aussies continued to look to Britain for their accent cues – some until the 1980s.

Early differences in Australian English were largely associated with social groups or whether one favoured British-like pronunciations or Australian-like pronunciations.

Before regional variation can flourish, English speakers must settle into stable and self-confident use of the local variety. To these ends, Australians have finally arrived.

Australian regional accents

The seeds for regional variation in Australia were planted early on. Yet, as in any garden, it can take a while for them to bloom: a language needs time, patience and the right social conditions.

South Australia was settled later than other colonies and by free settlers, who used newer pronunciations from the British homeland.

South Australians are apt to pronounce words like “castle”, “dance” and “chance” with a longer “ah” sound (as most English speakers pronounce “palm”).

In contrast, in Tasmania, these words are more apt to be pronounced with a shorter, flatter “a” sound (as most English speakers pronounce “trap”) – the older pronunciation.

In other parts of Australia, it is more complicated.

People in Brisbane and Sydney tend to follow the Tasmanian pattern. In Melbourne, a majority seem to follow the shorter, flatter “trap” pronunciation. However, Melburnians may also use, or shift into the “palm” pronunciation in more formal situations.

Beyond these early seeds, Australians are starting to cultivate homegrown innovations. Linguists working with sophisticated technologies have started to note subtle regional differences.

For instance, you may notice Victorians have begun to say the words “salary” and “celery” the same way. This vowel “merger” means many an “Ali” has received a coffee cup with “Eli” written on it in “Malbourne”.

Regional accents start as a wispy whisper. Put your ear to the wind and you just may hear them. But for a regional accent to truly flourish, you need a firm national identity, regional rivalries and a heavy dollop of time.

Keep your ears peeled.The Conversation

Howard Manns, Senior Lecturer in Linguistics, Monash University and Felicity Cox, Professor, Department of Linguistics, Macquarie University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

How inflammatory bowel disease may accelerate the progression of dementia

Orawan Pattarawimonchai/Shutterstock
Iris MikulicKarolinska InstitutetHong XuKarolinska Institutet, and Jonas F. LudvigssonKarolinska Institutet

You have probably heard the phrase “follow your gut” – often used to mean trusting your instinct and intuition. But in the context of the gut-brain axis, the phrase takes on a more literal meaning. Scientific research increasingly shows that the brain and gut are in constant, two-way communication. Once overlooked, this connection is now at the forefront of growing interest in neuroscience, nutrition and mental health.

The gut–brain axis is a highly complex system of interconnected pathways that relay information through diverse signalsPrevious research has suggested that gut inflammation may contribute to the development of dementia. This may occur through to the triggering of systemic inflammation and the disruption of the pathways between the gut and the brain.

While interest in the gut-brain axis has grown rapidly, there is still limited understanding of whether intestinal inflammation might accelerate cognitive decline in people who already have dementia.

IBD and dementia connection

Our study explored this under-researched question, aiming to expand understanding in this area and improve the care of those affected. We focused on people who had already been diagnosed with both dementia and inflammatory bowel disease (IBD).

Dementia refers to a group of neurological disorders with different underlying causes, all characterised by progressive cognitive decline and increasing loss of independent function.

It is a growing global health concern, with the number of diagnoses rising steadily around the world. Older age remains the most significant risk factor for developing the condition.

In 2024, the FDA approved donanemab, a second novel drug aimed at slowing the progression of early-stage Alzheimer’s disease – the most common form of dementia. However, there is still no cure, and current treatments are primarily focused on managing symptoms.

Inflammatory bowel disease (IBD) is a complex, chronic inflammatory condition affecting the gastrointestinal tract. It includes Crohn’s disease, ulcerative colitis, and IBD-unclassified (also called indeterminate IBD), which refers to cases where symptoms and clinical findings do not clearly fit the criteria for either Crohn’s disease or ulcerative colitis.

IBD is typically characterised by symptoms such as abdominal pain, diarrhoea and changes in bowel habits. However, because it can have systemic (extra-intestinal) effects, the condition can also affect other parts of the body, including the skin, eyes, joints and liver but can also cause general fatigue.

IBD should not be confused with irritable bowel syndrome (IBS), which is a common functional condition of the gastrointestinal tract. IBS can cause similar symptoms – such as abdominal pain and changes in bowel habits – however, unlike IBD, there are no changes in gut tissue.

While there is currently no cure for IBD, except in ulcerative colitis, where, in some select cases, surgery may be curative, IBD can often be managed with (anti-inflammatory) medications and lifestyle changes.

IBD is a global health problem. Worldwide, between 1990 and 2021, new cases increased across all age groups, with the biggest jump seen in people aged 50 to 54. The smallest increase occurred in children under five. Importantly, IBD can be diagnosed from early childhood to later life, but in older adults, among others, symptoms can be mistaken for other conditions – potentially delaying diagnosis and treatment.

For our study, we used data from the Swedish Registry for Cognitive/Dementia Disorders (SveDem) – a comprehensive national quality registry that holds detailed medical information on people with various forms of dementia across Sweden. From this database, we identified people who were diagnosed with IBD after their dementia diagnosis. We then compared 111 people who had both dementia and newly diagnosed IBD with a control group of 1,110 people who had dementia but no IBD diagnosis. The two groups were closely matched for age, gender, type of dementia, other health conditions and medication use.

Measuring cognitive decline

To measure changes in cognitive function, we used the Mini-Mental State Examination (MMSE) score. The MMSE is a standardised test made up of 11 tasks, with a maximum score of 30 points. It is widely used by healthcare professionals to assess memory, attention, language and other aspects of cognitive performance, particularly when dementia is suspected. People without dementia typically score between 25 and 30, while those with dementia often score below 24.

In our study, we compared MMSE scores between the two groups. We also looked at changes in MMSE scores before and after the IBD diagnosis in people who had both dementia and IBD. Our results showed that those with both conditions experienced a significantly faster decline in cognitive function. This decline became more noticeable after the IBD diagnosis. On average, people with both diagnoses lost nearly one additional MMSE point per year compared to those with dementia alone. This level of decline is comparable to the difference seen between people with dementia who take the new Alzheimer’s drug donanemab and those who do not.

Our findings suggest that IBD – and the systemic inflammation it causes – may contribute to a faster worsening of cognitive function. This highlights the need for closer monitoring of people with both conditions. Managing IBD effectively through anti-inflammatory medications, nutritional support and in some cases surgery, might potentially help reduce neuroinflammation, thereby slowing the progression of dementia.

While our results indicate that cognitive decline was significantly faster in people with both dementia and newly diagnosed IBD, it is important to note that this was an observational study, so we cannot establish direct causality. The study also had some limitations. For instance, we lacked data on IBD severity and the specific treatments patients were receiving. We also did not explore differences by gender, dementia subtype, or IBD subtype.

Additionally, since dementia is typically diagnosed in older age, the elderly onset IBD cases may have been underdiagnosed. Finally, while SveDem is a valuable national registry, it does not yet include all newly diagnosed dementia cases in Sweden.

Understanding how IBD influences the brain could open the door to new strategies for protecting cognitive health in older adults. Furthermore, identifying whether specific IBD treatments can slow cognitive decline may benefit people living with both conditions and could help with the refinement of care for this vulnerable patient population.The Conversation

Iris Mikulic, Research Assistant, Department of Neurobiology, Care Sciences and Society, Karolinska InstitutetHong Xu, Assistant Professor at Division of Clinical Geriatrics, Karolinska Institutet, and Jonas F. Ludvigsson, Professor, Dept of Medical Epidemiology and Biostatistics, Karolinska Institutet

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Part of your brain gets bigger as you get older – here is what that means for you

Orla/Shutterstock
Esther KuehnUniversity of Tübingen

I recently asked myself if I’ll still have a healthy brain as I get older. I hold a professorship at a neurology department. Nevertheless, it is difficult for me to judge if a particular brain, including my own, suffers from early neurodegeneration.

My new study, however, shows that part of your brain increases in size with age rather than degenerating.

The reason it’s so hard to measure neurodegeneration is because of how complicated it is to measure small structures in our brain.

Modern neuroimaging technology allows us to detect a brain tumour or to identify an epileptic lesion. These abnormalities are several millimetres in size and can be depicted by a magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) scanner, which operates at around 30,000-60,000 times stronger than the natural magnetic field of the Earth. The problem is that human thinking and perception operate at an even smaller scale.

Our thinking and perception happens in the neocortex. This outer part of our brain consists of six layers. When you feel touch to your body, layer four of your sensory cortex gets activated. This layer is the width of a grain of sand – much smaller than what MRI scanners at hospitals can usually depict. When you modulate your body sensation, for example by trying to read this text rather than feeling the pain from your bad back, layers five and six of your sensory cortex get activated – which are even smaller than layer four.

For my study, published in the journal Nature Neuroscience, I had access to a 7 Tesla MRI scanner which offers five times better image resolution than standard MRI scanners. It makes snapshots of the fine-scale brain networks during perception and thought visible.

Using a 7 Tesla scanner, my team and I investigated the sensory cortex in healthy younger adults (around 25 years old) and healthy older adults (around 65 years old) to better understand brain ageing. We found that only layers five and six, which modulate body perception, showed signs of age-related degeneration.

Layer four, needed to feel touch to your body, was enlarged in healthy older adults in my study. We also did a comparative study with mice. We found similar results in the older mice, in that they also had a more pronounced layer four than the younger mice. However evidence from our study of mice, which included a third group of very old mice, showed this part of the brain may degenerate in more advanced old age.

Current theories assume our brain gets smaller as we grow older. But my team’s findings contradict these theories in part. It is the first evidence that some parts of the brain get bigger with age in normal older adults.

Woman in white lab coat taps a medical image of a brain on a computer screen.
There is still a lot to learn about how the human brain ages. Gorodenkoff/Shutterstock

Older adults with a thicker layer four would be expected to be more sensitive to touch and pain, and (due to the reduced deep layers) have difficulties modulating such sensations.

To understand this effect better, we studied a middle-aged patient who was born without one arm. This patient had a smaller layer four. This suggests their brain received fewer impulses in comparison to a person with two arms and therefore developed less mass in layer four. Parts of the brain that are used more develop more synapses, hence more mass.

Rather than systematically degenerating, older adults’ brains seem to preserve what they use, at least in part. Brain ageing may be compared with a complex machinery in which some often used parts are well oiled, while others less frequently used get roasted. From that perspective, brain ageing is individual, shaped by our lifestyle, including our sensory experiences, reading habits, and cognitive challenges that we take on in everyday life.

In addition, it shows that the brains of healthy older adults preserve their capacity to stay in tune with their surroundings.

A lifetime of experiences

There is another interesting aspect about the results. The pattern of brain changes that we found in older adults – a stronger sensory processing region and a reduced modulatory region – shows similarities to neurodivergent disorders such as the autism spectrum disorder or attention deficit hyperactivity disorder.

Neurodivergent disorders are characterised by enhanced sensory sensitivity and reduced filtering abilities, leading to problems in concentration and cognitive flexibility.

Do our findings indicate that ageing drives the brain in the direction of neurodivergent disorders? Older adults brains have been formed by a lifetime of experiences whereas neurodivergent people are born with these brain patterns. So it would be hard to know what other effects building brain mass with age might have.

Yet, our findings give us some us clues about why older adults sometimes have difficulties adapting to new sensory environments. In such situations, for example being confronted with a new technical device or visiting a new city, the reduced modulatory abilities of layers five and six may become particularly evident, and may increase the likelihood for disorientation or confusion. It may also explain reduced abilities for multitasking with age, such as using a mobile phone while walking. Sensory information needs to be modulated to avoid interference when you’re doing more than one thing.

Both the middle and the deep layers had more myelin, a fatty protective layer that is crucial for nerve function and communication, in the older mice as well as humans. This suggests that in people over the age of 65, there is a compensatory mechanism for the loss of modulatory function. This effect seemed to be breaking down in the very old mice though.

Our results provide evidence for the power of a person’s lifestyle for shaping the ageing brain.The Conversation

Esther Kuehn, Professor of Neuroscience, University of Tübingen

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Walk & Talk: Narrabeen

The Belong Club invites anyone to come and participate in the Belong Club Walking Group!

Every Tuesday we walk along the pathway beside the Narrabeen Lagoon, from the Tramshed Arts and Community Centre to Jamieson Park and back. The route is about 1.8km each way, and is estimated to take 45 minutes.

The up and back walk allows for people of any walking speed to participate and enjoy the walk at their own comfortable pace. Walkers often split into smaller groups naturally along the route allowing everyone to go at their preferred pace. The aim here is for everyone to be included and to have an enjoyable walk.

Our meeting spot is to the right of the Tramshed Community Centre, between the basketball court and kids playground.

The social media ban is coming, whether families like it or not: 5 ways to prepare kids and teens

Helena Lopes/Pexels CC BY
Micah BoermaUniversity of Southern Queensland and Daniel YouUniversity of Sydney

In less than four months, world-first legislation will ban Australian under-16s from certain social media platforms.

Facebook, Snapchat, TikTok, Instagram, X, Reddit and YouTube will all be off limits for children and teens.

It’s still not clear exactly how the restrictions will be implemented. But the federal government says social media platforms must take “reasonable steps” to delete the accounts of minors before or on December 10 and stop them from creating new accounts through age verification software.

Parents will not be able to give their consent to allow under-16s to use these platforms.

Not everyone’s a fan

Unsurprisingly, there has been a fierce debate about the potential benefits and risks of this ban on young Australians.

Regardless, the ban is here. Cutting back on screen time and social media will be challenging for many young people.

Research suggests social media allows young people to express themselves, develop their identity and seek social connection. In a society where two out five young Australians feel lonely, seeking out social support is crucial.

Equally, social media can be addictive and the “fear of missing out” can see young people engage more intensely on these platforms.

Here are five ways to prepare your child for the December 10 ban.

1. Don’t wait until December 10

The sudden removal of social media could be a shock to young people. So start the conversation as early as possible with your child and work together to create a plan on how to manage the ban.

Talk to kids and teens about why the ban is being implemented and how it will affect both their friendships and their daily routines.

This can help children feel informed, supported and importantly, heard.

Conversations could include gentle curiosity around the role of social media in their life, seeking their views on an impending ban, acknowledgement of the anxiety this might cause, as well as online safety.

Revisiting the topic in a series of smaller chats might also be helpful.

2. Fade out social media

Gradually reducing your child’s time on social media rather than suddenly stopping it will help them to adjust slowly and prevent feelings of withdrawal and frustration.

You could try reducing time spent on social media by a quarter each week and completely stop after one month. Families might opt to do this faster or slower.

By planning this approach together, your child can understand and accept it, making the removal of social media smoother and less stressful for the whole family.

3. Replace, rather than remove

Social media meets young people’s needs to socially connect with others, develop their identity, and belong to a community.

These needs will not disappear when the ban is introduced.

You could consider signing up to some other activities for regular social connection and a sense of belonging. These might include team sports, group hobbies, or volunteering. Consider creative pursuits such as art, music, or handicrafts so your child can express their identity.

4. Start offline connections

Normalise and encourage engagement within your communities that isn’t reliant on social media.

In US psychologist Jonathan Haidt’s divisive bookThe Anxious Generation, he contends it is much harder to replace a child’s screen time with play if they are the only one in their peer group not using screens and in the park.

The ban presents an opportunity for parents to encourage and support children to build supportive offline groups together, where children can regularly connect in person. These could be connected to existing friends or newly established groups of like-minded families.

These groups can stick to the social media ban together and use alternative means of communication such as by phone, text or email.

5. Do it yourself

Children and young people absorb the behaviours and attitudes that are modelled to them in the home.

So this means parents can help by managing their own screen time, prioritising face-to-face connections with friends and family, and setting aside regular time for hobbies and activities.

This reinforces the importance of balancing digital and offline experiences. Modelling these behaviours consistently will help your child feel supported in the upcoming ban.The Conversation

Micah Boerma, Adjunct Lecturer, School of Psychology and Wellbeing, University of Southern Queensland and Daniel You, Clinical Associate Lecturer, Child Psychiatry, University of Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Government pushing ahead with $500,000 plan for Hampden Bridge in Kangaroo Valley

August 20, 2025
The Minns Government today announced it is working to urgently repair the 127 year old Hampden Bridge in the Kangaroo Valley, with the first round of safety works nearly complete as part of a $500,000 three-point plan outlined to the Kiama and South Coast communities today.

The Government states it has acted quickly to ensure the bridge is safe for vehicle traffic and is investigating options for temporary or permanent replacement bridges for the longer term.

This follows concerns about the safety of the heritage bridge, which prompted a recent load limit reduction from 42.5 tonnes to 23 tonnes.

The $500,000 Hampden Bridge strategy is part of the Minns Labor Government’s plan to ensure the people of the Kiama area have the essential services they need and rely on, including road infrastructure to boost safety and efficiency for local communities.

This is in stark contrast with the former Government who in twelve years neglected to invest in improvements to Hampden Bridge. The Coalition failed to take significant action after part of the bridge fell on to roadway in 2020. In fact, the last significant bridge works were taken under the previous Labor Government.

Minister for Roads Jenny Aitchison again inspected the bridge with Labor Candidate for Kiama Katelin McInerney, briefing local farmers and community members on progress.

The Minister was briefed by Transport for NSW engineers, who said that urgent night repair works on the bridge this month have proceeded smoothly and will be completed on schedule this week, with another round of major works to be planned and implemented. This work has provided confidence that the bridge can continue safely to remain open at 23 tonnes limit while Transport engineers assess the best way to proceed.

The Minns Labor Government’s three-point plan for urgent restoration of the historic bridge, which is under development by Transport for NSW, is:

  1. Undertake essential maintenance to keep the bridge safe. Night work to replace 12 damaged timber beams along the top of the truss is scheduled to be completed on Thursday 21 August, weather permitting. These repairs will support the continued use of the bridge at its current 23 tonne load limit and reduce the risk of further damage. A more complex program of strengthening work is being planned with another 12 timber beams along the bottom of the trusses to be replaced.
  2. Investigate the options for a temporary access across Kangaroo River, including a temporary bridge next to the existing bridge, or a detour option with an alternate river crossing. There are various constraints that need to be considered for these options which are currently being worked through.
  3. Invest $500,000 in planning for a permanent new bridge. Options for a new crossing are being developed by the Minns Government in consultation with the community and Shoalhaven City Council. Early design concepts, cost estimates and initial economic modelling will be part of the investigation process.
The community will be updated on the feasibility of crossing options once investigations are completed.

The Government is committed to completing this process as quickly as possible.

All investigation work will aim to preserve the heritage value of the existing bridge.

Transport for NSW has worked with freight operators to understand their concerns about long diversions which are creating cost and time impacts for them, particularly in the dairy industry.

The previous Liberal-National Government’s maintenance regime was inadequate. It failed to plan a permanent way to protect the increasingly fragile structure from further damage and to maintain access for the community and freight at 42.5 tonnes.

This unique heritage bridge is an icon of the Kangaroo Valley which provides critical connectivity across the Kangaroo River for the local community and freight travelling between the Illawarra and South Coast.

Minister for Roads, Jenny Aitchison said:

“Labor is getting on with the job, after more than decade of Liberal-National inaction, to finally deliver the infrastructure the people of Kangaroo Valley and Kiama deserve.

“The Liberals and Nationals failed to fund proper planning to ensure a safe, efficient crossing for local motorists and businesses.

“The Minns Labor Government has heard directly from the community and is investing $500,000 to provide short, medium and permanent solutions to ensure heavy freight can cross the Kangaroo River, including a new bridge.
“Delivering a new temporary or permanent bridge is a complex process and won’t happen overnight, but our teams are working as quickly as possible to increase the weight limit.

“We understand the impact the current load restrictions have on the freight industry and community. That’s why we are funding investigations for a long-term solution.

“We will present viable options as quickly as possible and I thank heavy vehicle operators and the dairy industry for their patience and ongoing cooperation while investigations are under way.”

Hampden Bridge is a heritage-listed single-span suspension bridge that carries Moss Vale Road (B73) across the Kangaroo River, in Kangaroo Valley, in the City of Shoalhaven local government area of New South Wales, Australia. The bridge was designed by Ernest de Burgh and built by Loveridge and Hudson. The property is owned by Transport for NSW. It was added to the New South Wales State Heritage Register on 2 August 2019.

Opened on 19 May 1898, the bridge is named in honour of Lord Hampden, the Governor of New South Wales from 1895 to 1899.
Photo: Hampden Bridge in the Kangaroo Valley, NSW, Australia. Picture by Siavash Ad.

Google admits anti-competitive conduct involving Google Search in Australia: ACCC

August 18, 2025
The ACCC has today commenced Federal Court proceedings against Google Asia Pacific over anti-competitive understandings that Google admits it reached in the past with Telstra and Optus regarding the pre-installation of Google Search on Android mobile phones.

Google has co-operated with the ACCC, admitted liability and agreed to jointly submit to the Court that Google should pay a total penalty of $55 million. It is a matter for the Court to determine whether the penalty and other orders are appropriate.

The understandings, which were in place between December 2019 and March 2021, required Telstra and Optus to only pre-install Google Search on Android phones they sold to consumers, and not other search engines.  

In return, Telstra and Optus received a share of the revenue Google generated from ads displayed to consumers when they used Google Search on their Android phones.

Google has admitted in reaching those understandings with each of Telstra and Optus it was likely to have had the effect of substantially lessening competition.

Google and its US parent company, Google LLC, have also signed a court-enforceable undertaking which the ACCC has accepted to address the ACCC’s broader competition concerns relating to contractual arrangements between Google, Android phone manufacturers and Australian telcos since 2017. Google does not agree with all of the ACCC’s concerns but has acknowledged them and offered the undertaking to address these concerns.

In the undertaking, Google commits to removing certain pre-installation and default search engine restrictions from its contracts with Android phone manufacturers and telcos.

Google’s undertaking is in addition to court-enforceable undertakings provided by Telstra, Optus and TPG last year. The ACCC accepted these telco undertakings to resolve concerns about the telcos’ agreements with Google. The telcos are not parties to the proceedings commenced today.

“Conduct that restricts competition is illegal in Australia because it usually means less choice, higher costs or worse service for consumers,” ACCC Chair Gina-Cass Gottlieb said.

“Today’s outcome, along with Telstra, Optus and TPG’s undertakings, have created the potential for millions of Australians to have greater search choice in the future, and for competing search providers to gain meaningful exposure to Australian consumers.”

“Importantly, these changes come at a time when AI search tools are revolutionising how we search for information, creating new competition,” Ms Cass-Gottlieb said.

In the court-enforceable undertakings that the ACCC accepted from Telstra and Optus (in June 2024) and TPG (in August 2024), the companies undertook not to renew or make new arrangements with Google that require its search services to be pre-installed and set as the default search function on an exclusive basis on Android devices they supply.

The three telcos can configure search services on a device-by-device basis, and in ways that may not align with the settings set by Google. They can also enter into pre-installation agreements with other search providers.

“With AI search tools becoming increasingly available, consumers can experiment with search services on their mobiles,” Ms Cass-Gottlieb said.

Today’s proceedings follow a lengthy ACCC investigation, after broader concerns about Google’s contractual arrangements for Google Search emerged during the ACCC’s Digital Platform Services Inquiry’s report into search defaults and choice screens.

“Co-operation with the ACCC is encouraged. It can avoid the need for protracted and costly litigation and lead to more competition. More competition in markets drives economic dynamism, but the reverse is true when markets are not sufficiently competitive,” Ms Cass-Gottlieb said.

“The ACCC remains committed to addressing anti-competitive conduct like this, as well as cartel conduct. Competition issues in the digital economy are a current priority area.”

A copy of Google’s undertaking is available on the ACCC's Public Register.

Background
Google LLC and Google Asia Pacific

Google LLC is a wholly-owned subsidiary of Alphabet Inc.

Since at least 2017, Google LLC and/or its related bodies corporate have signed many contractual arrangements to distribute Google apps, including Google Search. These agreements include mobile application distribution agreements and revenue share agreements.

Google Asia Pacific is the contracting counterparty for mobile revenue share agreements in the Asia Pacific region, including Australia.

Admitted conduct

The ACCC’s court action relates only  to revenue share agreements with Telstra and Optus which were renewed between December 2019 and March 2021.

Google Asia Pacific has admitted, for the purposes of the Federal Court proceedings only, that in or around December 2019, it arrived at two separate understandings, one with Telstra and one with Optus, each containing a provision which:

(1) was to the effect that the parties would continue to be bound by the terms of their respective revenue share agreements containing the Platform-wide Provisions until they concluded negotiations regarding a further revenue share agreement; and

(2) was likely to have the effect of making it more difficult to obtain the distribution of general search engine services in Australia during the period from December 2019 until the end of March 2021 and, thereby, to have the likely effect of hindering competition in the market in Australia in which general search engine services were supplied; and that by arriving at those understandings, Google Asia Pacific engaged in two separate contraventions of section 45(1)(a) of the CCA.

The Platform-wide provisions were provisions of the relevant Google mobile revenue share agreement which required, as a condition of Telstra and Optus receiving a share of search advertising revenue generated through certain search access points on Android mobile devices supplied in Australia by Telstra and Optus, that:

(1) all search access points on such devices were configured to utilise Google Search out-of the-box; and

(2) Telstra or Optus could not implement, preload or otherwise install on any such device out-of-the-box, or present, introduce, or suggest to an end user of such a device, any general search engine service that was substantially similar to Google Search.

The Digital Platforms Services Inquiry

The ACCC’s Digital Platforms Branch conducted a five-year inquiry into markets for the supply of digital platform services in Australia and their impacts on competition and consumers, which included an update on general search services, published in December 2024.

In the inquiry’s fifth report, published in November 2022, the ACCC made a range of recommendations to bolster competition in the digital economy, level the playing field between big tech companies and Australian businesses, and reduce prices for consumers.

In this report the ACCC recommended a new regulatory regime to promote competition in digital platform services. One of the ACCC’s recommendations was for the government to introduce a framework for mandatory service-specific codes for Designated Digital Platforms to address a range of competition issues, including exclusive pre-installation and default agreements that hinder competition. Treasury has consulted on a proposed approach to implement a new digital competition regime administered by the ACCC.  

Court documents

Because this matter was resolved between the parties before the commencement of litigation, this proceeding has been commenced in the Federal Court by the ACCC filing an originating application, accompanied by an affidavit which is not a public document, and the undertaking given to the ACCC.


ACCC to investigate energy plans that potentially mislead consumers about savings

August 19, 2025
The ACCC will investigate whether energy retailers are misleading consumers by promoting energy plans that promise savings or value to consumers when they actually offer poor value for the customer, following CHOICE making a designated complaint to the ACCC.

This is the first designated complaint received by the ACCC from CHOICE and the second complaint received under the new designated complaints framework.

The ACCC is satisfied that the designated complaint made by CHOICE relates to a significant or systemic market issue that affects consumers.

“Energy plans that promote ‘savings’ or value may entice many consumers to a particular plan and influence their decision making,” ACCC Deputy Chair Catriona Lowe said.

“We are concerned that consumers may be misled or deceived by plan names or descriptions of plans that offer ‘savings’ that are not genuine, or that consumers may be discouraged from switching to cheaper plans that are available to them.”

“It is essential that energy retailers provide clear and accurate information about their energy plans so that consumers can make informed decisions when choosing an energy provider and plan,” Ms Lowe said.

If the ACCC identifies conduct that may contravene the Australian Consumer Law following its investigation of the issues raised by this complaint, it may take enforcement action where appropriate. The ACCC may also prepare industry guidance or contribute to policy or law reform initiatives.

CHOICE’s designated complaint to the ACCC also raises issues in relation to consumer confusion from retailers’ use of identical names for plans with different rates and energy retailers prompting consumers to change plans when the recommended plan is not available to them.

These additional issues arise particularly in the context of ‘Better Offer’ and ‘Best Offer’ messages included on consumers’ energy bills. Energy retailers are required to regularly include a message on bills to residential customers to alert them if they can save money by switching to a different plan with the retailer. These messages are referred to as Better or Best Offer messages.

“The issues raised by CHOICE exacerbate the challenges and confusion that consumers may face when navigating the often complex energy market,” Ms Lowe said.

A recent decision by the Australian Energy Regulator (AER) requires retailers that elect to re-use plan names, to provide additional information below certain “Better Offer” messages. This aims to address any customer confusion from some retailers creating newer (and differently priced) versions of existing plans using identical plan names.

The ACCC will continue to engage with the AER and Victorian Essential Services Commission (ESC) on their upcoming review and law reform processes including on their consideration of the issues raised in CHOICE’s complaint. 

After careful consideration, the ACCC considers that the issues raised by CHOICE relating to the use of identical plan names in Better or Best Offer messaging with different rates, and Better or Best Offer messages with plans that consumers may not be eligible for, are most effectively addressed through the review and law reform processes currently underway by the AER and the ESC.

“The upcoming reviews by the Australian Energy Regulatory and Victorian Essential Services will provide the opportunity to consider some of the issues raised by CHOICE while reflecting on the broader issues facing consumers in the energy market.”

“We thank CHOICE for the work that has gone into submitting this designated complaint. CHOICE is an important member of the ACCC’s Consumer Consultative Committee and we value its insights as a leading consumer advocate group. The designated complaints framework is one of several avenues for highlighting important issues that cause consumer harm,” Ms Lowe said.

The ACCC’s response to CHOICE’s designated complaint is available on our website

Background
A new designated complaints framework in the Competition and Consumer Act 2010 (CCA) came into effect on 1 May 2024.

Under the law, 3 bodies can be designated by the Minister as designated complainants. Currently these are Australian Consumers’ Association (CHOICE), Consumer Action Law Centre, and the Council of Small Business Organisations Australia (COSBOA).

In March 2025 the Consumer Action Law Centre submitted the first designated complaint to the ACCC under the new framework. The ACCC responded to this complaint in June 2025

In May 2025 CHOICE submitted a designated complaint to the ACCC under the new framework.

A designated complainant may only make one designated complaint within a 12-month period.

Under the framework, designated complaints must meet certain criteria, including that they relate to a significant or systemic market issue affecting consumers or small business in Australia, and that they relate to a potential breach of the CCA, which includes the Australian Consumer Law, or the ACCC’s powers or functions under the CCA.

The ACCC is required to assess and publicly respond to the designated complaint within 90 days. The ACCC’s response must state what further action, if any, will be taken in response to the complaint.

ACCC’s response to further designated complaints
In general, the ACCC may take a broad range of actions in response to a designated complaint. This may include conducting in-depth investigations into specific businesses’ practices, reviews into a specific sector or issue, advocacy activities, and/or undertaking research, education or engagement.

The ACCC’s response to a designated complaint may also include advising that we won’t take any further action. We may do this when:
  • the designated complaint doesn’t meet the necessary criteria;
  • we consider the subject matter of the designated complaint is already the focus of certain types of existing inquiries, reviews, investigations or legal proceedings, and has been or is likely to be adequately addressed through those other processes; or
  • we consider no further action would be appropriate, having regard to the nature of the issue, the nature and extent of the harm or potential harm, and the likely impact ACCC action may have.

The ‘wrong kind of sorry’: will a record fine for Qantas deter other companies from breaking the law?

Shae McCrystalUniversity of Sydney and Tess HardyThe University of Melbourne

On Monday, the Federal Court of Australia handed Qantas a record fine of A$90 million for breaching the Fair Work Act by unlawfully terminating the employment of 1,820 ground workers during the pandemic.

The decision to impose this penalty – the largest ever issued under the Fair Work Act – marks the final instalment in a five-year litigation saga initiated by the Transport Workers’ Union (TWU).

Delivering the ruling, Federal Court Justice Michael Lee ordered $50 million of the fine be paid to the union, partly to act as a deterrent that “should encourage others to pursue compliance with industrial relations laws”.

The fate of the remaining $40 million will depend on a later hearing to determine if some or all of it should be paid to the sacked workers. That would be on top of $120 million in compensation already agreed.

A quick recap

This saga began in 2020, after the TWU launched an action alleging that Qantas had unlawfully terminated the employment of 1,820 ground handling workers when it made the decision to outsource the staff at the height of the pandemic.

The union argued Qantas made this decision because of the workers’ future right to engage in collective bargaining and take protected industrial action when their enterprise agreement expired.

At trial, Qantas failed to show that this reason had not been a substantial and operative factor in making the outsourcing decision.

This meant that in making the workers redundant, Qantas had breached the Fair Work Act 1,820 times – once for each affected worker. Qantas appealed this outcome all the way to the High Court, but ultimately failed.

Once Qantas had exhausted all rights of appeal, the matter was returned to Justice Lee to determine compensation for the affected workers. After much toing and froing between the parties, in December 2024, a compensation package totalling $120 million was agreed between Qantas and the TWU.

A meaningful deterrent

That left a final outstanding matter for the court – the “appropriate” penalty to be imposed against Qantas for breaching the law. The maximum penalty available for this breach under the Fair Work Act was just over $120 million.

To determine an appropriate penalty under the Fair Work Act, a judge must exercise a level of discretion and weigh up various factors. These include the nature, circumstances and consequences of the breach, the size of the business and the extent to which the contravenor has shown remorse.

So why the record fine? The size of this penalty is partly because there were so many workers affected by Qantas’ breach of the Fair Work Act.

But it also reflects Justice Lee’s view that there was a need for “real deterrence” to ensure big employers are not tempted to “get away” with unlawful conduct because the potential rewards outweigh the risks of getting caught.

‘The wrong kind of sorry’

On whether Qantas had shown genuine remorse, Justice Lee acknowledged Qantas had belatedly apologised for its conduct.

But the company’s formal expression of regret was described as “the wrong kind of sorry”. That is, the company seemed to be sorry they got caught and suffered financial and reputational loss, but not truly sorry for the effect of the unlawful conduct and its impact on the workers.

Justice Lee expressed scepticism that Qantas’ corporate culture had genuinely changed. In deciding to outsource its ground handling operations, Qantas was found to have been “lawyered from the start and up to the hilt”.

The judge noted that, throughout the litigation, Qantas pursued a vigorous defence, alongside an aggressive public relations strategy, continuing to deny any wrongdoing.

Justice Lee also observed that, at the 11th hour, even after the High Court decision had found in favour of the union, Qantas tried to deploy a strategy to ensure the affected workers received nothing.

It was only when facing the prospect of a massive fine, that Qantas expressed regret, putting forward evidence their corporate culture had changed. However, it continued to use the same legal team that came up with the outsourcing strategy.

In Justice Lee’s view, it was telling that no senior leaders who had been involved in the decision and remained with Qantas took the stand to explain what they had learned and why it would not happen again.

Ultimately, this outsourcing decision cost Qantas a combined amount of around $210 million in compensation and penalties. This figure does not include the millions of dollars of legal fees Qantas incurred in fighting the litigation.

But it was estimated outsourcing the ground handling operations saved Qantas about $100 million per year. In essence, despite being handed the biggest fine on record, Qantas still appears to be financially better off as a result of the unlawful outsourcing decision.

Portion paid to the union

Under the Fair Work Act, it is difficult to recover legal costs. This makes it challenging for unions, and others, to pursue litigation through the courts and hold companies to account.

The decision to pay $50 million – more than half of the penalty – to the TWU was made partly because the union took on the perils of protracted litigation. And, as Justice Lee pointed out, adverse action cases can be dicey. The outcomes are by no means certain.

Here, the union bore the risk and has reaped the reward. This means more money in the TWU coffers to pursue other employers who may breach the Fair Work Act. It is also an important signal to other unions, and worker representatives, that the benefits of enforcing the law may now outweigh the risks of doing so.The Conversation

Shae McCrystal, Professor of Labour Law, University of Sydney and Tess Hardy, Associate Professor, Director of the Centre for Employment and Labour Relations Law, The University of Melbourne

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

AI has produced 2 new antibiotics to kill ‘superbugs’. It’s promising – but we shouldn’t get too excited yet

KATERYNA KON/SCIENCE PHOTO LIBRARY/Getty Images
Thomas JeffriesWestern Sydney University

Researchers from the Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT) have used artificial intelligence (AI) to design two new antibiotics effective against antibiotic-resistant bacteria, or “superbugs”.

This is a potentially exciting development, but it’s important to note there are several hurdles to overcome before we might see these antibiotics used in the real world. And if this eventuates, it’s likely to be some years away.

So how did the researchers harness AI to develop these antibiotics? Which superbugs will they target? And what happens next?

Antibiotic resistance is a global health threat

Frequent overuse of antibiotics in medicine and agriculture has led to the evolution of new strains of bacteria resistant to an increasing range of antibiotics. This global public health crisis makes the development of new antibiotics a significant challenge.

Antibiotic-resistant superbugs contribute to around 5 million deaths worldwide annually, and directly cause more than 1.2 million deaths.

It’s estimated superbug infections could lead to more than A$2.5 trillion in lost economic output globally by 2050.

Antibiotic resistance is also increasingly a problem of inequity, with many poorer countries unable to access newer antibiotics to overcome resistant bacteria.

Targeting 2 key superbugs

The researchers used AI to design antibiotics against two prominent superbugs: Neisseria gonorrhoeae and methicillin-resistant Staphylococcus aureus (MRSA).

N. gonorrhoeae causes the sexually transmitted disease gonorrhoea, which has developed high levels of resistance to antibiotics in recent years. The inability to treat it effectively has contributed to a rapid spread of the disease. There were more than 82 million new cases in 2020, mostly in developing nations.

MRSA is a resistant strain of the bacteria Staphylococcus aureus (often referred to as “golden staph”). S. aureus can cause skin infections or serious blood and organ infections. Patients who get sick with the resistant MRSA strain are estimated to be 64% more likely to die as a result of an infection.

To address these challenges, the MIT team harnessed generative AI in two ways.

What did the researchers do?

The research team trained an AI algorithm, called a machine learning neural network, using chemical structures. We can think of this as similar to the way an AI language model would be trained using words.

The first approach, used for gonorrhoea, involved the algorithm screening a large database of existing compounds that had demonstrated antibiotic activity against N. gonorrhoeae. The AI algorithm then used the chemical structures of these compounds as “seeds” and built on them, generating new compounds by adding chemical structures one by one.

This approach led to 80 new candidate compounds, two of which could be chemically synthesised (meaning the scientists could make them in the lab). In the end, one of these demonstrated strong effectiveness against N. gonorrhoeae. It was able to kill the bacteria on a petri dish and in a mouse model.

The second approach, used for MRSA, started from scratch, prompting the AI algorithm with only simple chemical structures such as water and ammonia. The algorithm then predicted chemical structures that would interact effectively with vulnerabilities in the bacteria’s cell defences, and came up with entirely new antibiotic compounds.

Out of around 90 candidates, 22 were synthesised and tested in the lab. Six showed strong antibacterial activity against MRSA in a petri dish. The most promising compound successfully cleared an MRSA skin infection in a mouse model.

Advantages and challenges

An important element of this research is that the two new antibiotics are not just novel in their structure, but also in their mechanisms of action (in other words, how they work against the bacteria).

Traditionally, antibiotic development has relied on tweaking existing antibiotics. It’s hoped the fact these AI-generated molecules have entirely new mechanisms of action will make them more difficult for gonorrhoea and MRSA to evade.

Prior to this research, when it comes to antibiotic development, AI has mainly been used to narrow down libraries of already existing compounds or to modify chemical structures of currently used drugs.

While this work is very promising, several hurdles remain. Both antibiotics must undergo vigorous testing for safety and efficacy in humans through clinical trials, which will take several years and require significant funding.

Another challenge could be financial. As these antibiotics would be intended as “last resort” drugs to preserve their effectiveness, their market use will be limited. This limits the financial incentive for pharmaceutical companies to invest in their development and production.

Nevertheless, this work marks a significant milestone in drug discovery and is an example of how AI might reshape the fight against infectious diseases in the future.The Conversation

Thomas Jeffries, Senior Lecturer in Microbiology, Western Sydney University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Why do smart people get hooked on wellness trends? Personality traits may play a role

Samuel CornellUNSW Sydney and Nick HaslamThe University of Melbourne

If you’ve spent time on social media recently you have probably been exposed to questionable “wellness” content. You may have been instructed to dip your toes in icy water or let the sun shine where it usually doesn’t.

Wellness trends such as drinking “loaded” water or taking ice baths may be benign for most people, while others such as drinking raw milkeating raw organ meats, or taping your mouth while you sleep carry real risks.

The online spaces where they circulate can also be harmful, serving as breeding grounds for conspiracy theoriesanti-vaccination sentiment, and misuse of appearance- and performance-enhancing drugs.

It’s easy to dismiss followers of extreme wellness trends as gullible or misinformed. But research suggests personality traits may help explain why some educated, well-intentioned people sometimes reject conventional medicine in favour of fringe practices.

The big five personality traits

Psychologists have shown that many aspects of human personality can be described via five fundamental dimensions, of which we all have varying levels.

Two of these “big five” traits – openness and agreeableness – are particularly relevant to people’s interest in alternative health practices. (The remaining three traits are conscientiousness, extraversion and neuroticism.)

People high in openness are curious, imaginative and adventurous. They question tradition and are attracted to novelty and unconventional ideas. As a result, they are more likely to try new and unorthodox diets or treatments.

Highly agreeable people are trusting, cooperative and empathetic. They are very receptive to emotional messages, especially when they appeal to ideas of caring for others and benefiting the community.

These personality traits also influence how people search for and evaluate online information. People higher in openness tend to adopt an exploratory search strategy, preferring to seek novel or unconventional sources rather than relying on established information channels.

Because they value harmony, trust and maintaining relationships, highly agreeable people tend to give greater weight to information that comes from familiar or socially endorsed sources. They do so even when this information has not been critically evaluated.

Personality and persuasive influence

In the online wellness ecosystem, high levels of openness and agreeableness can make people susceptible to persuasion.

Influencers have a powerful advantage. They can position themselves as both novel and trustworthy. Open people can be seduced by original, eye-catching content, and agreeable people by community-focused narratives.

Influencers cultivate one-sided “parasocial” relationships in which followers feel an intimate connection with someone they have never met. These close bonds, coupled with the open personality’s attraction to unconventional ideas, can draw people into extreme, untested and unsafe health practices.

Openness to new experiences and being interpersonally agreeable are usually seen as strengths. However, in the buzzing, emotionally charged environment of online wellness culture they can become vulnerabilities.

From ice baths to anti-vax

Not all wellness practices peddled by online influencers are harmful. But some relatively innocuous trends can be a gateway to more extreme practices.

Someone might start taking ice baths for a mood boost, move on to restrictive raw diets for “clean eating”, and eventually arrive at anti-vaccine beliefs grounded in deep mistrust of health authorities.

Gateway effects can occur if a trusted influencer makes increasingly extreme recommendations. If the influencer pivots to more dangerous ideas, many followers will follow.

Over time, exposure to fringe wellness narratives can erode trust in mainstream institutions. What began as curiosity and warmth may, through repeated exposure to extreme content, shift towards cynicism and institutional mistrust.

How can public health messages adapt?

Public health campaigns sometimes assume people reject mainstream health advice because they lack knowledge or have low “health literacy”.

But if personality traits influence receptiveness to alternative wellness claims, simply giving people more information may not produce positive change.

Public health campaigns should consider personality traits for more effective preventive interventions. They can target people high in openness, for example, by presenting health science as dynamic and evolving, not just a set of rules and prescriptions. They can reach highly agreeable people with health messages that emphasise empathy and community.

To be effective for all of us, public health communication needs to be as engaging as the messages emanating from influencers. It must use eye-catching visuals, personal stories, and moral hooks while remaining truthful.

People who engage in extreme or unusual wellness practices aren’t merely misinformed. Often, they’re driven by the same urge to explore, connect, and live well as everyone else. The challenge we face is to steer that drive toward health, not harm.The Conversation

Samuel Cornell, PhD Candidate in Public Health & Community Medicine, School of Population Health, UNSW Sydney and Nick Haslam, Professor of Psychology, The University of Melbourne

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Why are young men ‘T maxxing’ testosterone? Do they need it? And what are the risks?

Carole Yepes/Getty
Samuel CornellUNSW SydneyLuke CoxSwansea University, and Timothy PiatkowskiGriffith University

Videos promoting #testosteronemaxxing are racking up millions of views. Like “looksmaxxing” or “fibremaxxing” this trend takes something related to body image (improving your looks) or health (eating a lot of fibre) and pushes it to extreme levels.

Testosterone or “T” maxxing encourages young men – mostly teenage boys – to increase their testosterone levels, either naturally (for example, through diet) or by taking synthetic hormones.

Podcasters popular among young men, such as Joe Rogan and Andrew Huberman, enthusiastically promote it as a way to fight ageing, enhance performance or build strength.

However, taking testosterone when there’s no medical need has serious health risks. And the trend plays into the insecurities of young men and developing boys who want to be considered masculine and strong. This can leave them vulnerable to exploitation – and seriously affect their health.

What is testosterone?

We all produce the sex hormone testosterone, but levels are naturally much higher in males. It’s produced mainly in the testes, and in much smaller amounts in the ovaries and adrenal glands.

Testosterone’s effects on the body are wide ranging, including helping you grow and repair muscle and bone, produce red blood cells and stabilise mood and libido.

During male puberty, testosterone production increases 30-fold and drives changes such as a deeper voice, developing facial hair and increasing muscle mass and sperm production.

It’s normal for testosterone levels to change across your lifetime, and even to fluctuate daily (usually at their highest in the morning).

Lifestyle factors such as diet, sleep and stress can also affect how much testosterone you produce.

Natural testosterone levels generally peak in early adulthood, around the mid-twenties. They then start to progressively decline with age.

A doctor can check hormone levels with a blood test. For males, healthy testosterone levels usually range between about 450 and 600 ng/dL (nanograms per decilitre of blood serum). Low testosterone is generally below 300 ng/dL.

Diagnosing low testosterone

In Australia, taking testosterone is only legal with a doctor’s prescription and ongoing supervision. The only way to diagnose low testosterone is via a blood test.

Testosterone may be prescribed to men diagnosed with hypogonadism, meaning the testes don’t produce enough testosterone.

This condition can lead to:

  • reduced muscle mass
  • increased body fat
  • lower bone density (increasing the risk of fracture)
  • low libido
  • erectile dysfunction
  • fatigue
  • depression
  • anaemia
  • difficulty concentrating.

Hypogonadism has even been linked to early death in men.

A manufactured panic about ‘low T’

Hypogonadism affects around one in 200 men, although estimates vary. It is more common among older men and those with diabetes or obesity.

Yet on social media, “low T” is being framed as an epidemic among young men. Influencers warn them to look for signs, such as not developing muscle mass or strength as quickly as hoped – or simply not looking “masculine”.

Extreme self-improvement and optimisation trends spread like wildfire online. They tap into common anxieties about masculinity, status and popularity.

Conflating “manliness” with testosterone levels and a muscular physical appearance exploits an insecurity ripe for marketing.

This has fuelled a market surge for “solutions” including private clinics offering “testosterone optimisation” packages, supplements claiming to increase testosterone levels and influencers on social media promoting extreme exercise and diet programs.

There is evidence some people are undergoing testosterone replacement therapy, even when they don’t have clinically low levels of testosterone.

What are the risks of testosterone replacement?

Taking testosterone as a medication can suppress the body’s own production, by shutting down the hypothalamic-pituitary-gonadal axis, which controls testosterone and sperm production.

While testosterone production can recover after you stop taking testosterone, this can be slow and is not guaranteed, particularly after long-term or unsupervised use. This means some men may feel a significant difference when they stop taking testosterone.

Testosterone therapy can also lead to side effects for some people, including acne and skin conditions, balding, reduced fertility and a high red blood cell count. It can also interact with some medications.

So there are added risks from using testosterone without a prescription and appropriate supervision.

On the black market, testosterone is sold in gyms, or online via encrypted messaging apps. These products can be contaminatedcounterfeit or incorrectly dosed.

People taking these drugs without medical supervision face potential infection, organ damage, or even death, since contaminated or counterfeit products have been linked to toxic metal poisoning, heart attacks, strokes and fatal organ failure.

Harm reduction is key

T maxxing offers young men an enticing image: raise your testosterone, be more manly.

But for healthy young men without hypogonadism, the best ways to regulate hormones and development are healthy lifestyle choices. This includes sleeping and eating well and staying active.

To fight misinformation and empower men to make informed choices, we need to meet them where they are. This means recognising their drive for self-improvement without judgement while helping them understand the real risks of non-medical hormone use.

We also need to acknowledge that young men chasing T maxxing often mask deeper issues, such as body image anxiety, social pressure or mental health issues.

Young men often delay seeking help until they have a medical emergency.

If you’re worried about your testosterone levels, speak to your doctor.The Conversation

Samuel Cornell, PhD Candidate in Public Health & Community Medicine, School of Population Health, UNSW SydneyLuke Cox, Lecturer in Sport Integrity, Swansea University, and Timothy Piatkowski, Lecturer in Psychology, Griffith University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Why is the soap scum in my bathroom pink? Is it mould? And can it make me sick?

Michael TaylorFlinders University

How long has it been since you last cleaned your bathroom? If it’s been longer than you planned, you might see a build up of scum, slime or mould around your taps, between the tiles and on the edges of the bath or shower floor.

But why is this sometimes pink or orange? And can this pink slime make us sick?

Sometimes it’s mould

In some instances, the pink slime may be a microfungi (also called a mould) named Rhodotorula.

Rhodotorula is a yeasty little fungus that makes sticky red stains appear on plastics and other wet items left in storage too long, including your toothbrush.

The first part of it’s name, “Rhodo”, refers to its red appearance in nature and comes from the Greek work for rose. It can be found pretty well everywhere, including on and in the wet bits of your skin, as it thrives in humid nooks and crannies.

Most microbes need large amounts of nitrogen to survive. But Rhodotorula is excellent at scavenging nitrogen from its environment. It can survive with a fraction of the typical amount of nitrogen in its cells compared with other microbes.

This nitrogen scavenging allows it to persist in hostile and nutrient-poor environments, such as between your tiles where other microbes would starve. It also means it can pack itself full of lipids and nutrients when times are good, like gloopy little protein pills to survive the lean times.

Rhodotorula doesn’t pose a big risk for healthy people, but it can cause infection for those with weakened immune systems, such as patients hospitalised with catheters.

More commonly, it’s bacteria

The second and more likely candidate for pink scum in your bathroom is a bacteria called Serratia marcescens, another microbe that prefers to multiply in the damp and humid conditions found in bathrooms and laundries.

It’s also a scavenger of nutrients but in this case it scavenges phosphorous, a key component of DNA.

We’ve tried to reduce the amount of phosphates in detergents and soaps as they degrade waterways, but Serratia is excellent at wringing what little remains out of soap scum, or just happily living directly in liquid soap itself, while turning everything pink in the process.

Serratia was once a laboratory research tool. Scientists would puff clouds of the bacteria into the air or splatter it around to predict how a more dangerous bacteria might disperse. Serratia’s scarlet colouring made it easy to spot in lab tests.

But since then, Serratia has been recognised as an emerging pathogen. This means it’s an infectious agent we’ve only recently realised can cause illness, or we’ve only just worked out is actually the cause of a disease.

Serratia now ranks in the top ten most common causes of becteremia: bacteria in the blood. This starts with an infection, leading to sepsis, hospitalisation and sometimes death.

Serratia infections can start in a range of different ways: as a pneumonia, in the urinary tract, or from cuts and wounds. It can cause fever, chills and fatigue, and can be tough to treat due to antibiotic resistance.

Most people exposed to Serratia either won’t get sick or will develop only a mild infection. This may look like a cut that takes a long time to heal, or a phleghmy cough that hangs around but eventually goes away.

The US Army conducted studies where soldiers were exposed to concentrated clouds containing millions of Serratia and after a mild fever and chills, all subjects had recovered after four days.

A study over ten years in Canberra estimated the incidence of Serratia infections as 1.03 per 100,000 people, with similar rates of about 0.9 per 100,000 in Canada. So, in a given year about one person per 100,000 will get an infection from Serratia, which is roughly 2,800 people per year in Australia.

Most serious infections from Serratia occur in hospitals among people at a higher risk of infection because they’re immunocompromised, elderly or have other health conditions.

In a particularly chilling illustration of this, there have been hundreds of case reports of babies contracting Serratia infections in hospitals. In a 2005 outbreak of 159 babies in Gaza, almost half died.

What can you do about pink slime in your bathroom?

Although it’s impossible to live in a sterile environment, there are some simple things you can do to reduce the presence of these microorganisms in your home.

Drying wet areas can go a long way to slowing these critters down, as bacteria and mould need moisture to grow well.

Cleaning with detergents or disinfectants is very effective and is most successful after first removing soil and other debris. Don’t just spray bleach onto the muck and hope for the best; you’re better to scrub, wipe and then disinfect.

Or better yet, clean every two to three weeks (depending on how many kids, pets and roommates you have) to stop gunk building up and to starve these microbes of food.

Wearing dish-washing or disposable gloves during cleaning is a good way to reduce exposure, followed by washing your hands thoroughly with soap and water, and drying them.The Conversation

Michael Taylor, Adjunct academic, mycology, Flinders University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Australia has 120 health workforce policies. But with no national plan, we’re missing the big picture

Steven Saphore/AFP via Getty
Stephanie M. ToppJames Cook UniversityLana ElliottQueensland University of Technology, and Thu NguyenJames Cook University

Australia’s health workforce is under pressure. Wait times are growing. Burnout is rising. Yet the country is awash in policy – just not the kind that solves these problems at the root.

This can explain why you’re struggling to see a GP, can’t find a dentist, or struggling to coordinate care between a mental health professional and aged-care nurse.

These issues aren’t isolated problems. As we outline in research published in the Medical Journal of Australia, they reflect a deeper issue in how Australia plans and governs its health workforce.

Despite long-standing concern about shortages of health workers in both rural and urban areas, there’s no overarching national strategy for health workforce planning in Australia.

That’s the type of long-term strategy that helps a country make sure it has enough trained health workers in the right places to meet people’s health needs, now and in the future. Instead, there is fragmentation.

When we reviewed all 121 current federal health workforce policy documents, we found a patchwork of policies for specific professions (for example, doctors, nurses and midwives) that were often short term. These rely heavily on grants and programs rather than long-term strategies and operate in parallel rather than in concert.

They also don’t seem to pay attention to key professions – especially pharmacy, public health and emergency care.

So with more than 850,000 registered health professionals, there are still not enough to meet demand, particularly in regional and remote areas. This is also the case in sectors with rising demand, such as aged care, mental health and rehabilitation.

What should we do?

More than a decade of reports have recommended improvements to national health workforce governance or strategy. Our study shows why those recommendations still matter.

In 2025, the challenge isn’t just to add more staff – it is to coordinate the system and the policy better, and plan for a future where health care is sustainable, equitable, and fit for purpose.

Australia once had a national body to guide health workforce planning – Health Workforce Australia. It was established in 2009 but disbanded in 2014 (ironically) as part of a government efficiency drive.

Since then, the responsibility for workforce planning has been split across multiple government departments, statutory authorities, and state and territories.

For instance, five states have their own individual ten-year health workforce strategic plans.

Some professions have their own national strategies. There’s a national medical workforce strategy, a nurse practitioner workforce plan and a mental health workforce strategy. Others are still being developed, such as the allied health workforce strategy, which would cover health workers such as physiotherapists, occupational therapists, speech therapists and podiatrists.

But there’s no effective mechanism to ensure these strategies work together coherently – or to ensure important professions or service areas aren’t left behind.

More programs, fewer solutions

Of the 121 federal policies we analysed, 81% were time-limited grants, programs or sub-programs. These types of policies are typically designed to respond quickly to a specific gap – such as with scholarships, rural relocation bonuses, or individual professional development. But they’re not necessarily designed to create sustained change.

We found 23 policies that could set longer-term direction. But it was not clear how these relate to each other. Few documents cross-referenced one another or reflected on the way solutions in one would impact on the solutions in another.

Most federal documents focus on workforce supply – such as training or recruitment. Fewer tackle the arguably harder, but equally important, issues.

These include how to improve workforce performance, such as by addressing skills mismatch or under-use (where individuals are not able to use their qualifications or skills as part of their job), or how to better distribute staff across regions.

So what needs to change?

In Australia, the federal government funds most of primary care, aged care and Indigenous health. But states and territories employ most health workers. So governance is decentralised.

Private providers, Primary Health Networks (federal government-funded organisations that support services to meet local health needs) and Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander Community Controlled services (which provide primary health care to Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander people) add further complexity to the health workforce landscape.

So without national coordination, workforce policy and planning risks being reactive, inconsistent, and susceptible to political cycles. This risks focusing on what’s most visible, and apparently urgent, rather than what’s systemic and enduring.

Here’s what needs to change:

  • Australia needs to re-establish a national body for health workforce planning, similar to the former Health Workforce Australia. A recent independent review agrees the current meeting of health ministers is not an effective way to govern health workers. Without a national hub, the current patchwork approach will continue

  • policymakers must shift from profession-specific and short-term responses to a system-wide approach. This means recognising how different parts of the health workforce interact as part of a broader labour market, and how policies for doctors, nurses, pharmacists and allied health professionals need to work together, especially in rural and remote care

  • we need fewer ad hoc grants that turn over with each new federal government. Instead, we need greater emphasis on durable strategies and agreements that can guide action over time, while allowing states and territories to adapt them if needed. These should be backed by clear data, and be evaluated and accountable.The Conversation

Stephanie M. Topp, Professor, Global Health and Development, James Cook UniversityLana Elliott, Senior lecturer, School of Public Health and Social Work, Queensland University of Technology, and Thu Nguyen, Research Fellow, Health Policy and Systems, James Cook University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

NSW’s ‘renovictions’ loophole could undermine the progress made with no-grounds evictions

Alan MorrisUniversity of Technology Sydney and Chris MartinUNSW Sydney

There was much cause for celebration when no-grounds evictions were abolished in New South Wales on May 19.

Keeping a pre-election promise, the NSW government amended the state’s Residential Tenancies Act to end no-grounds evictions and add new reasonable grounds for termination instead.

In doing so, NSW joined the ACT and South Australia, which had recently abolished no-grounds evictions. Since then Victoria has also legislated to end no-grounds evictions.

Queensland has joined Tasmania in ending no-grounds eviction in periodic tenancies and the National Cabinet has adopted “genuine reasonable grounds for eviction” as part of its “better deal for renters” reform agenda.

But now, the NSW government has created a loophole for so-called “renovictions” that is big enough to drive a ute through.

Grounds for termination

In states and territories that have scrapped no-grounds evictions, landlords must have reasonable grounds to evict tenants before the rental agreement period is set to end.

The grounds include if a tenant has failed to pay rent or otherwise breached the terms of their tenancy agreement. They also include if the landlord is selling the property to someone who requires the premises to be vacant.

These grounds have been part of the law for decades.

Now NSW’s new grounds for termination include if the landlord:

  • will make significant repairs or renovations to the premises
  • is going to live in the premises (or a family member will)
  • is offering the premises for sale regardless of who is buying it or whether they are prepared to retain the tenant
  • will not use the premises as rented residential premises for 12 months.

These grounds mean landlords still enjoy a lot of control over their properties – and their tenants’ homes.

For example, if they want to evict the tenants to put the premises on Airbnb, they can, using the “no longer used as rented residential premises” ground.

And if they want to evict the tenant to make it easier to market the premises for sale – as Prime Minister Anthony Albanese controversially did last year – they can use the “offering for sale” ground.

And if they want to renovate, they can use that ground.

The ‘renoviction’ loophole

When the NSW government scrapped no-grounds evictions, landlords who wanted to use renovations as a premise for ending a tenancy were required to provide a written statement and at least one piece of evidence, such as a development application or a quote from a licensed builder or tradesperson.

However, on June 20, the requirement to provide evidence was quietly scrapped: a landlord now only has to provide a written statement signalling they intend to renovate the property.

This could be wide open to abuse.

The government made the change without any public consultation.

The opposition, Greens and independent MPs tried in parliament to reverse the changes, but were defeated by the government’s numbers in the Legislative Assembly.

The change is yet to be debated in the upper house.

Some 30 organisations working with tenants released a joint statement on July 19 criticising the change, stating:

Without the full evidence requirements for this prescribed ground for termination, there is a real risk that the government’s commitment to end no-grounds evictions and ensure renters have the rights and security they need will be undermined.

Other shortcomings that can impact tenants

Besides the problems associated with renoviction, there are other shortcomings in the new laws.

In eviction proceedings on the new grounds, there is no scope for the NSW Civil and Administrative Tribunal to decline to terminate a tenancy because of hardship and other circumstances. Only if the tenant can prove the termination notice is motivated by retaliation – a hard thing to prove – can the tribunal refuse to evict.

The tribunal should be able to balance the interests of a landlord against the hardship that will be experienced by the tenant – and decline to evict if the hardship is too great.

Victoria’s Residential Tenancies Act gives its tribunal scope to consider whether an eviction is “reasonable and proportionate”. This consideration has resulted in the tribunal refusing to evict families on the “offering for sale” ground, because the tenants could not find alternative accommodation and would likely be homeless.

Our research

We have studied tenants who had been evicted or threatened with eviction in the private rental sector, and found no-grounds evictions created enormous anxiety.

One interviewee had recently been evicted. He graphically expressed the disempowerment and frustration associated with landlords’ capacity to evict tenants without the need to give a reason:

The unbelievable rights that landlords have over you creates a constant state of anger and you feel violated. I live in a constant state of fear around housing security. There’s nothing you can do.

Our interviews illustrated that tenants, especially low-income tenants, were acutely aware they would struggle to secure alternative accommodation and could find themselves homeless if they were evicted.

Another interviewee, who was single and reliant on the disability support pension, captured this anxiety:

The fear of homelessness is so much closer now than it has ever been in my whole experience with renting in Australia because it’s just so unstable. You have no leg to stand on. You’re always unsure, and you could just get an email from the landlord at any time, or from the real estate agent, and just like that your whole reality’s shifted.

Our study highlighted just why abolishing no-grounds evictions was a major positive reform for tenants.

However, the possibility of renoviction, the various other grounds for eviction and the limited discretion of the tribunal means the power of landlords in NSW is still excessive.The Conversation

Alan Morris, Professor, Institute for Public Policy and Governance, University of Technology Sydney and Chris Martin, Senior Research Fellow, City Futures Research Centre, UNSW Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Why does Australia have earthquakes? The whole continent is under stress from distant forces

World Stress Map / GFZ Data Services
Mojtaba RajabiThe University of QueenslandAbbas BabaahmadiThe University of Queensland, and Dee NinisMonash University

Last Saturday at 9:49am local time, a magnitude 5.6 earthquake occurred about 50km west of Gympie in Queensland. The earthquake was experienced as strong shaking locally, but did not produce any significant damage, likely because of the remote location of the epicentre.

However, the quake was felt far and wide and small aftershocks continue. More than 24,000 people across eastern Australia reported it, not only in the nearest big city (Brisbane) but as far away as Cairns and Sydney. This was the largest earthquake in onshore southeast Queensland since 1935, when an earthquake of magnitude 5.5 occurred near Gayndah.

Most of the world’s earthquake hotspots are near the boundaries between tectonic plates – places such as New Zealand, Japan and Indonesia. Here, earthquakes are frequent because of the immense forces where two plates collide or slide past one another.

But Australia sits in the middle of the Australian tectonic plate, far from any plate edges. So why do earthquakes still happen here?

Tectonically ‘quiet’ – but not silent

Australia is often seen as tectonically “quiet” and stable.

But this picture is only partly true. As Saturday’s seismic event shows, earthquakes do happen here, and Australia has a rich record of recent faults and seismic activity.

On average, Australia has an earthquake larger than magnitude 6.0 about once every seven years, and one greater than magnitude 5.0 roughly once a year. Geological studies of recent faults tell us that Australia could host an earthquake up to around magnitude 7.5.

A map showing the Australian and other tectonic plates.
Forces from surrounding plates create stresses in the Australian plate. Rajabi et al.CC BY

What drives earthquakes in Australia?

Even though Australia is far from the edges of tectonic plates, the continent is still being squeezed and stressed by the large forces at those distant plate boundaries. These stresses travel deep into the plate and build up.

When the stress becomes too great, it is suddenly released along zones of weakness in the crust (known as fault zones). That release is what we feel as an earthquake.

The map below shows just how widespread earthquakes and active faults are across the continent.

Map of Australian earthquakes
Records of Australian earthquakes and the direction of the main stress in different parts of the continent. M Rajabi / Geoscience Australia

The Australian stress field

Over the past four decades, scientists have built up a detailed picture of the stresses acting in the Australian crust. This comes from many sources including earthquake information, borehole data, mining sites, and large-scale engineering projects.

The results have been compiled in two projects: the Australian Stress Map and the World Stress Map. These show Australia’s stress patterns are highly variable and different from those of other continents.

Unlike some continents, where the direction of maximum horizontal stress tends to line up neatly with the movement of plates, Australia’s stresses twist and turn, changing direction across the country. Large-scale computer modeling shows this can be explained by the combined effect of tectonic forces at the edges of the Indo-Australian Plate.

Stress and earthquakes in Queensland

The recent earthquake occurred near Kilkivan, west of Gympie, in an area where many faults are aligned in a northwest–southeast direction. One of the most important of these is the North Pine Fault System, a wide zone made of many separate fault segments.

This network of fractures tells a long geological story of movement, stretching back millions of years, that has shaped the landscape of eastern Australia. Geoscientists believe the fault system is quite ancient – between around 50 million and 250 million years old.

However, there have been numerous modern earthquakes in the surrounding region, which suggests the fault system may still be active. The area has experienced several significant earthquakes in the past, including events in 1883, 1918, 1935 and more recently, 2015.

The maximum stress in this region is directed from northeast to southwest. The driving forces come from far beyond Australia.

The Australian tectonic plate is compressed from the north and east by the Pacific plate, particularly along boundaries near the New Hebrides, the Solomon Islands, and the Tonga–Kermadec zone which stretches from New Zealand to Tonga. This compression reaches deep into Queensland.

It is these forces from distant plate boundaries that are behind Australian earthquakes like the recent one in Kilkivan, even though we are far from the world’s active plate edges.

Map of southeast Queensland showing earthquake locations and stress patterns.
Seismic activity, faults and stress patterns in southeast Queensland. Yellow star marks the location of the recent Kilkivan earthquake. M Rajabi

Since Saturday morning’s earthquake, more than 15 aftershocks have been recorded. Most have been quite small, with magnitudes less than 2.0. A main shock of the moderate magnitude experienced near Gympie will typically produce an aftershock as large as magnitude 4.5, in addition to the many more smaller events.

So, as the crust adjusts to the changes in local stress produced by this earthquake, seismic activity is expected to continue for days or weeks, but with overall smaller and less frequent earthquakes as time goes on.The Conversation

Mojtaba Rajabi, Senior Lecturer in Geoscience, The University of QueenslandAbbas Babaahmadi, Adjunct Research Fellow, Structural Geology, The University of Queensland, and Dee Ninis, Earthquake Scientist, Monash University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

AI free from bias and ideology is a fantasy – humans can’t organise data without distorting reality

Bart Fish & Power Tools of AICC BY
Declan HumphreysUniversity of the Sunshine Coast

In July, the United States government made it clear that artificial intelligence (AI) companies wanting to do business with the White House will need to ensure their AI systems are “objective and free from top-down ideological bias”.

In an executive order on “preventing woke AI in the federal government”, President Donald Trump refers to diversity, equity and inclusion (DEI) initiatives as an example of a biased ideology.

The apparent contradiction of calling for unbiased AI while also dictating how AI models should discuss DEI shows the notion of ideologically free AI is a fantasy.

Multiple studies have shown most language models skew their responses to left-of-centre viewpoints, such as imposing taxes on flights, restricting rent increases, and legalising abortion.

Chinese chatbots such as DeepSeek, Qwen and others censor information on the events of Tiananmen Square, the political status of Taiwan, and the persecution of Uyghurs, aligning with the official position of the Chinese government.

AI models are not politically neutral nor free from bias. More importantly, it may not even be possible for them to be unbiased. Throughout history, attempts to organise information have shown that one person’s objective truth is another’s ideological bias.

Lying with maps

Humans struggle to organise information about the world without distorting reality.

Take cartography, for example. We might expect maps to be objective – after all, they reflect the natural world. But flattening a globe onto a two-dimensional map means having to distort it somehow. American geographer Mark Monmonier has famously argued maps necessarily lie, distort reality, and can be tools for political propaganda.

Think of the classic world map that uses the Mercator projection, hung in every primary school classroom. It converts the globe into a cylinder and then lays it flat. I grew up thinking Greenland must be massive compared to the rest of the world.

In fact, Africa is 14 times larger than Greenland, despite appearing to be roughly the same size on this type of map.

In the 1970s, German historian Arno Peters argued Mercator’s distortions contributed to a skewed perception of the inferiority of the global south.

Such distortions could be an analogy for the current state of AI. As Monmonier wrote in his book How To Lie With Maps:

a single map is but one of an indefinitely large number of maps that might be produced for the same situation or from the same data.

Similarly, a single large language model’s response is one of an indefinitely large number of responses which might be produced for the same situation or from the same data.

Think of the many ways a chatbot could formulate a response when prompted about something like diversity, equity and inclusion.

A built-in classification bias

Other historic attempts at organising information have shown the bias of their designers and users too.

The widely used Dewey decimal classification (DDC) system for libraries, published in 1876, has been known to be racist and homophobic.

Over the course of the 20th century, LGBTQIA+ books have been categorised under Mental Derangements, Neurological Disorders, or Social Problems in the DDC, with more recent efforts being made to eliminate outdated and derogatory terms from the classification.

Under Religion, roughly 65 sections out of 100 are dedicated to Christianity because the library where the classification was originally developed had a strong focus on Christianity. While Islam has an estimated 2 billion followers to Christianity’s 2.3 billion today, in the DDC Islam only has a single section dedicated to it.

AI learns from humans, after all

The large language models that power AI chatbots are trained on countless pieces of text, from historical works of literature to online discussion forums. Biases from these texts can unknowingly creep into the model, such as negative stereotypes of African Americans from the 1930s.

Just having raw information is not enough. Language models must be trained how to retrieve and present this information in their answers.

One way to do this is to have them learn to copy how humans respond to questions. This process does make them more useful, but studies have found it also makes them align with the beliefs of those who are training them.

AI chatbots also use system prompts: instructions that tell them how to act. These system prompts are, of course, defined by human developers.

For example, the system prompts for Grok, the AI chatbot developed by Elon Musk’s company xAI, reportedly instruct it to “assume subjective viewpoints sourced from the media are biased” and to not “shy away from making claims that are politically incorrect, as long as they are well substantiated”.

Musk launched Grok to counter his perceived “liberal bias” of other products such as ChatGPT. However, the recent fallout when Grok started spouting anti-semitic rhetoric clearly illustrates that attempts to correct for bias necessarily replace it with a different kind of bias.

All this goes to show that for all their innovation and wizardry, AI language models suffer from a centuries-old problem. Organising and presenting information is not only an attempt to reflect reality, it is a projection of a worldview.

For users, understanding whose worldview these models represent is just as important as knowing who draws the lines on a map.The Conversation

Declan Humphreys, Lecturer Cybersecurity and Ethics, University of the Sunshine Coast

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Matcha latte for the likes: how ‘performative eating’ is changing our relationship with food

Lauren BallThe University of QueenslandEmily BurchSouthern Cross University, and Pearl (Pui Ting) WongThe University of Queensland

Ever ordered a salad on a first date when you really wanted the burger?

Many of us eat differently when we’re around other people, often without realising it. Our food choices shift depending on who’s at the table, who’s watching, or who might see our food if it’s shared online.

This isn’t just about manners or appetite. Experts are increasingly interested in the ways in which meals aren’t just eaten, but are curated. Psychologists and nutrition researchers call this “performative eating”.

The most recent viral example of this comes from TikTok, in the form of performative matcha. These videos show young, well-dressed men roaming in public with a matcha drink in one hand and a novel in the other – ostensibly to look attractive to women.

What is performative eating?

Performative eating refers to how we choose or avoid certain foods based not on taste or nutrition, but on what we think it signals to others. Food can be a powerful tool to signal identity and build connection.

People might consume certain foods to send a message about their

  • health – such as by opting for a salad to appear “disciplined”

  • gender – such as ordering a steak or beer to look “masculine”, or avoiding a “feminine” dessert or cocktail

  • morals – such as by eating plant-based, to emphasise environmental values

  • aesthetic – such as when people curate meals so they will look beautiful on social media feeds.

The way we eat is often shaped by social influences. We are aware of some of these influences, such as when we choose certain foods to fit in with family or friends. Others happen without us even noticing.

The role of social media

Food has been performative for hundreds of years (maybe more) – especially considering the luxurious and decorative eating habits of royal families.

Social media magnifies the dynamics of performative eating. Platforms such as Instagram and TikTok are inundated with food content, from aesthetic smoothie bowls, and matcha creations, to viral “what I eat in a day” videos.

These posts don’t just entertain – they influence.

Viewers may copy the meals, lifestyles, or even the values of creators they admire. As such, social media doesn’t just reflect eating trends. It also helps create and reinforce them.

The psychology and sociology of food

As social beings, our eating habits are deeply influenced by social modelling, wherein we tend to mirror what and how much others eat – especially when we like them or feel similar to them.

Research has found that knowing what foods or drinks others have chosen can influence us to make similar choices. Research also suggests people typically eat more when dining with friends or family, compared to when they eat alone. This suggests familiarity and social connection play a role in how much we eat.

Our food choices are also shaped by broader cultural beliefs, or what society says is “good” or “bad”. Online trends such as “trad wives” baking sourdough, detox regimens, and strict diets such as raw foodism can represent ideals of “purity” or discipline, or a desire to belong to a a particular community.

The reverse of this is also visible in popular culture, where indulgence is celebrated. Take mukbangs – videos where people eat large amounts of (often unhealthy) food while chatting with viewers. Originating in South Korea, mukbang videos have become a global trend, with some videos getting more than 30 million views.

Research shows mukbang videos can shape viewers’ eating habits. A recent review of the evidence suggests that for some they are helpful as they can encourage regular eating, and reduce binge eating or loneliness. But for others, they can trigger restrictive eating habits, or relapses into what is called “loss-of-control eating”.

When does it become a problem?

Performative eating sits on a spectrum. Sometimes it’s positive to share in certain foods, such as to connect with friends or family, or to celebrate your culture.

But it crosses the line when most of the focus is on appearing a certain way to others. This influence is particularly strong among adolescents and young adults. People in these age groups are often still figuring out who they are and where they belong, so fitting in can feel very important.

There are a range of potential downsides to performative eating. In more extreme cases, it might lead to disordered eating and body image concerns. For example, striving to present a “perfect”, socially approved diet can spiral into rigid rules or restriction that undermine one’s mental and physical health.

Performative eating may lead to reduced food enjoyment, as meals become more about spectacle rather than moments of nourishment or pleasure.

It can also lead to food shortages or strain on food supply, as we’ve seen in past matcha shortages.

Reconnecting with food

Performative eating isn’t always harmful. But if you think it could be affecting your physical or mental health in any way, you can ask yourself these questions:

  • am I consuming this food or drink because I enjoy it, or because I will be viewed a certain way for it?

  • do I order what I actually want to eat, or what I think I should be ordering?

  • what emotions do I feel before and after engaging with various food content online?

Parents and caregivers can help children build lifelong positive relationships with food by modelling healthy eating, avoiding food restrictions, and encouraging autonomy in childrens’ food choices.The Conversation

Lauren Ball, Professor of Community Health and Wellbeing, The University of QueenslandEmily Burch, Accredited Practising Dietitian and Lecturer, Southern Cross University, and Pearl (Pui Ting) Wong, Accredited Practising Dietitian, PhD Candidate, Casual Academic | Culinary nutrition & adolescent wellbeing, The University of Queensland

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Disclaimer: These articles are not intended to provide medical advice, diagnosis or treatment.  Views expressed here do not necessarily reflect those of Pittwater Online News or its staff.

Week Three August 2025 (August 11 - 17)

Molly Picklum - Jack Robinson Win 2025 Lexus Tahiti Pro 

TEAHUPO’O, Tahiti, French Polynesia: Wednesday, August 13, 2025

Australians Molly Picklum (Gosford, NSW - AUS) and Jack Robinson (Margaret River, W.A. - AUS) have claimed victory at the Lexus Tahiti Pro Presented by I-SEA, Stop No. 11 of 12 on the World Surf League (WSL) 2025 Championship Tour (CT) and the last event of the regular season. It was another incredible day of competition at the ‘End of The Road’ with the men’s Final 5 being locked away, Rookies of the Year decided, and event winners crowned in pumping six-to-eight-foot-plus tubes at Teahupo’o, one of the world’s heaviest waves. 

Jack Robinson and Molly Picklum of Australia after winning the Final at the Lexus Tahiti Pro on August 13, 2025 at Teahupoʻo, Tahiti, French Polynesia.(Photo by Brent Bielmann/World Surf League)

Molly Picklum Puts on a Show to Claim Maiden Tahiti Win 

Picklum claimed victory in a highly anticipated match-up against reigning World Champion Caity Simmers (USA), after defeating two former event winners on the way to the Final, Vahine Fierro (FRA) and Caroline Marks (USA). Picklum’s second CT event win of the season, her fourth overall, extended the 22-year-old’s stranglehold of the No. 1 position in the rankings. 

After sitting behind Simmers and Gabriela Bryan (HAW) for the first two-thirds of the season, the Australian leapfrogged both surfers to take a convincing lead following her event win in Brazil, which she further strengthened with a runner-up finish in South Africa and has now run away with thanks to her performance today. The only woman of the current Final 5 with prior WSL Finals experience not to win a World Title, Picklum is carrying serious momentum headed into the event that could see her join the iconic Australian legacy of World Champions.

"I'm so stoked," Picklum said. "What a special place, Tahiti. You feel all the energy. It's just so nice. I'm staring at the mountains right now and staring into perfect blue. It's where the dream comes alive. And Fiji next. I'm gonna enjoy it for what it is. I finished number one this year. It's a massive step in the right direction. Hopefully I can get that, you know, cherry again in Fiji."

The scores of the women’s Final told of an entirely one-sided affair, with Simmers earning just 4.94 (out of a possible 20) from her two-wave total, while Picklum posted one of the highest totals of the season at 17.26. But the final tally doesn't account for the near misses of the reigning World Champion. The Californian came close to emerging from what undoubtedly would have been the highest number of the event, but ultimately it was the Australian who was in complete rhythm with the ocean, delivering a trio of excellent scores. Picklum drove through barrel after barrel on some of the biggest waves of the day to seal victory on an event that she had already convincingly stamped her mark on throughout the week.

 

Molly Picklum of Australia at Teahupoʻo, Tahiti, French Polynesia.(Photo by Brent Bielmann/World Surf League)

"Honestly, it was so nice to just make a couple of waves and not get so flogged," Picklum continued. "I felt like I earned my stripes this event, and I'm so happy. I wish Caity [Simmers] had obviously made one. It would have made it more exciting. The poor girl was so buggered at the end there. But, I've been on that side of the stick, and I'm so happy to get another one up." 

Jack Robinson Comes From The Sky to Book Spot at Lexus WSL Finals 

It was a fairy-tale finish for Jack Robinson (AUS), who claimed not only the event win, but a place in the Final 5 to contest for the 2025 World Title when the Lexus WSL Finals takes place in Fiji later this month. In a repeat of his trajectory in 2023, when he also needed to win the event to clinch his position in the Final 5, Robinson joined an elite list of multiple-time winners in Tahiti, including a surfer he was directly seeking to channel, Andy Irons (HAW), as well as Kelly Slater (USA), Bobby Martinez (USA), and Gabriel Medina (BRA).

Robinson’s ninth CT event win also ties him on the all-time win list with two Hawaiian World Champions, Sunny Garcia (HAW) and John John Florence (HAW). Robinson jumped four places up the rankings, all the way to No. 4, bumping fellow Australian Ethan Ewing (AUS) out of the Final 5.

"Right where we're meant to be," Robinson said. "I just want to thank everyone who supports me. All love, you know. I'm just taking it in right now. I had a mission and I went for it. Very blessed to be going to Fiji. It comes down to the last one and right there again. Let's go."

Jack Robinson at Teahupoʻo, Tahiti, French Polynesia.(Photo by Brent Bielmann/World Surf League)

Robinson shared the Final with good friend and rival Griffin Colapinto (USA), who also jumped into the Final 5 with his performance today. Robinson repeatedly cracked into the excellent range to defeat newly crowned Rookie of the Year Marco Mignot (FRA), defending event winner Italo Ferreira (BRA), and Colapinto’s brother, Crosby Colapinto (USA), including delivering the event-high heat total of 18.10 against Crosby. The Australian’s quiet and calm approach saw him thread deep, technical tubes throughout the course of the day, highlighted by a 9.50 as one of just two waves the 27-year-old surfed in the Final. While Colapinto found excellence of his own, with an 8.00, the Californian was unable to tap into the magic that saw him defeat Joao Chianca (BRA), Ethan Ewing (AUS) and local Wildcard Mihimana Braye (PYF) on his road to the Final.

“To be in the Final with Griffin [Colapinto], I kind of felt like we were coming together,” Robinson said. “We've been seeing each other every day because we go to the same chiro and stuff. And when we were together, I was like, 'Oh, I just kind of feel it.' So yeah, I was so blessed to have everyone there. What a day.” 

Griffin Colapinto at Teahupoʻo, Tahiti, French Polynesia.(Photo by Brent Bielmann/World Surf League)

Californians Simmers and Colapinto Lock In No. 3 Seeds Ahead of Fiji 

Reigning World Champion Caity Simmers (USA) was an absolute standout all event, riding some of the longest, deepest tubes of the week with superior technique and style. Simmers’ second Final appearance in Tahiti was enough to guarantee her seed No. 3 in the WSL Final 5 and gave her the perfect warm-up for the long, hollow, reef pass barrels of Cloudbreak, the location of the upcoming Lexus WSL Finals. Simmers will head to Fiji later this month to defend her World Title. 

"I'm kind of confused right now. I was underwater for most of that Final, so I'm pretty tired," Simmers joked. "But yeah, I mean, Molly [Picklum] and I, we're just friends, she gives me advice on more than just surfing, and it's good to have someone like that. And also in Finals like that, and just all of our heats in general, we kind of tend to surf better, I feel like, when we're together. I was talking the other day about having to surf here when it's good, you kind of have to be a little bit stupid and also be calculated, too, and the balance of that. I feel like I was just stupid and she was calculated. So that was kind of how it went. Molly ripped that one, and I had fun, too. I got some good visions and also some good wipeouts and everything you want out here, I guess, except to win."

Caitlin Simmers at Teahupoʻo, Tahiti, French Polynesia.(Photo by Beatriz Ryder/World Surf League)

After an incredible week of performances both in the jersey and out of it, eventual event runner-up Griffin Colapinto (USA) was able to move three places up the rankings into the third spot in the WSL Final 5 ahead of the Lexus WSL Finals Fiji. It will be the third-consecutive year Colapinto will compete for a World Title in this format, and with three runner-up finishes and two thirds from his last five events, Colapinto is coming into the Title showdown with more momentum than any of the men on Tour.

"I'm just super, super grateful," Colapinto said. "I've put in so much preparation and hard work over the years. It's my eighth year coming to Tahiti and competing in this contest, and this is my first time making Finals Day. With everything on the line, it's a big hump to get over. It just felt like this time it shifted, like I'd felt the click-over and the comfort was setting in, and the number of times I've taken beatings at this wave. And then starting to actually make crazy barrels started to feel really good. I think all that preparation just showed on this day, so I'm super grateful.''

Yago Dora Leads Rankings Ahead of Lexus WSL Finals Fiji 

Day 3 of competition at the Lexus Tahiti Pro Presented by I-SEA saw World No. 1 Yago Dora (BRA) and World No. 2 Jordy Smith (RSA) both eliminated by Tahitian Wildcards Kauli Vaast (FRA) and Mihimana Braye (PYF), respectively. Though both surfers bowed out in the Round of 16, Dora’s lead was insurmountable by anyone else in the field, keeping his spot on top of the rankings safe. Dora will now head into the Lexus WSL Finals Fiji as the No. 1 seed, meaning the 29-year-old Brazilian is one heat win away from becoming the 2025 WSL World Champion. Smith was also able to hang onto his No. 2 spot heading into the Final event. 

“My main goal in Tahtiti has been fulfilled,” Dora said. “One more step in the right direction. I really wish I could have gone further in this event that I love so much. But I believe that everything happens for a reason. Now it’s time to focus all the energy on the final stage.”

The advancement of both Griffin Colapinto (USA) and Ethan Ewing (AUS) into the Quarterfinals knocked Kanoa Igarashi (JPN) out of contention for the Final 5. Ewing held a position in the five, right up until Jack Robinson (AUS) claimed the event win, leaving the official Final 5 to include Dora, Smith, Colapinto, Robinson and Ferreira. 

Ethan Ewing at Teahupoʻo, Tahiti, French Polynesia.(Photo by Beatriz Ryder/World Surf League)

Erin Brooks and Marco Mignot Claim 2025 Rookie of The Year Honors 

CT newcomers Erin Brooks (CAN) and Marco Mignot (FRA) have finished their maiden year at the elite level in style, claiming the 2025 WSL Championship Tour Rookie of the Year titles. With fellow Rookies Joel Vaughan (AUS) and Alan Cleland (MEX) bowing out before the end of the Round of 16, Mignot held onto No. 16 on the rankings to finish the year as the highest-ranked surfer of his rookie class. 18-year-old Brooks, who has already won a CT event as a wildcard, managed two Semifinal appearances this season to end the year at No. 8 on the rankings. The pair join an elite group of Rookie of the Year recipients, including WSL Champions Caity Simmers (USA), Stephanie Gilmore (AUS), Carissa Moore (HAW), and Italo Ferreira (BRA).

Marco Mignot at Teahupoʻo, Tahiti, French Polynesia.(Photo by Beatriz Ryder/World Surf League)

“I’m super happy to get Rookie of the Year,” Mignot said. “It’s been an amazing battle between Al [Cleland], Joel [Vaughan], and me. We really went big, and I mean, we had no choice because on this tour, the level is so high, and we showed we can do it. In the end, it was between me and Alan, and I would have been happy either way, as he is a great friend of mine. It’s been a beautiful year with lots of learning. To win this was a goal that I wrote down at the start of the year, and I achieved it, so I’m super happy. Now it’s time to reset and bring on 2026.”

This is yet another time Picklum and Robinson have taken out first place together - see February 2024's: Molly Picklum - Jack Robinson Win Hurley Pro Sunset Beach

For highlights and more information from Finals Day at the Lexus Tahiti Pro Presented by I-SEA, please visit WorldSurfLeague.com

Lexus Tahiti Pro Presented by I-SEA Women’s Final Results:

1 - Molly Picklum (AUS) 17.26

2 - Caitlin Simmers (USA) 4.94

Lexus Tahiti Pro Presented by I-SEA Men’s Final Results: 

1 - Jack Robinson (AUS) 16.90

2 - Griffin Colapinto (USA) 13.67

Lexus Tahiti Pro Presented by I-SEA Men’s Semifinal Results: 

HEAT 1: Jack Robinson (AUS) 18.10 DEF. Crosby Colapinto (USA) 11.66

HEAT 2: Griffin Colapinto (USA) 14.83 DEF. Mihimana Braye (PYF) 14.77

Lexus Tahiti Pro Presented by I-SEA Men’s Quarterfinal Results: 

HEAT 1: Crosby Colapinto (USA) 16.63 DEF. Kauli Vaast (FRA) 15.54

HEAT 2: Jack Robinson (AUS) 15.80 DEF. Italo Ferreira (BRA) 14.07

HEAT 3: Mihimana Braye (PYF) 14.93 DEF. Cole Houshmand (USA) 11.50

HEAT 4: Griffin Colapinto (USA) 16.76 DEF. Ethan Ewing (AUS) 14.20

Lexus Tahiti Pro Presented by I-SEA Men’s Round of 16 Results: 

HEAT 1: Kauli Vaast (FRA) 15.43 DEF. Jordy Smith (RSA) 3.33

HEAT 2: Crosby Colapinto (USA) 9.34 DEF. Leonardo Fioravanti (ITA) 9.20

HEAT 3: Italo Ferreira (BRA) 11.33 DEF. Rio Waida (INA) 1.94

HEAT 4: Jack Robinson (AUS) 11.67 DEF. Marco Mignot (FRA) 10.93

HEAT 5: Mihimana Braye (PYF) 10.77 DEF. Yago Dora (BRA) 7.33

HEAT 6: Cole Houshmand (USA) 10.67 DEF. Jake Marshall (USA) 5.53

HEAT 7: Ethan Ewing (AUS) 16.23 DEF. Alan Cleland (MEX) 14.16

HEAT 8: Griffin Colapinto (USA) 15.00 DEF. Joao Chianca (BRA) 14.97 

Next and Final Stop: Lexus WSL Finals Fiji

The Lexus WSL Finals Fiji will be the 12th and final stop on the 2025 WSL Championship Tour. The one-day, winner-takes-all competition will be held at Cloudbreak in Fiji, holding a competition window from August 27 through September 4, 2025. The event will be broadcast LIVE on WorldSurfLeague.com, and the free WSL App. Check out more ways to watch from the WSL's broadcast partners.

The Lexus Tahiti Pro Presented by I-SEA was proudly supported by Lexus, Tahitian Government, I-SEA, YETI, Surfline, Red Bull, mophie, Polynesia One, Vini, Air Tahiti Nui, Banque de Tahiti, and True Surf. 

 

Panorama of Sydney in 1873

Film by the Glebe Society

 

Peninsula Junior Cricket Club

Website: www.peninsulacricketclub.com.au
Home Ground: Kitchener Park Mona Vale 

Gary Searles, Club Treasurer and Registrar, states;

Peninsula Cricket Club is a large junior cricket club covering from Palm Beach through to Narrabeen.

Our Cricket Blast season commences Oct 15 ( Avalon), Oct 17 (Warriewood) and Oct 18 (Warriewood). Cricket Blast is our entry level cricket program designed to teach the kids the basics of the game before tackling competitive Cricket from U10s.

Competitive Cricket, for U12s and up (we go through to U16s) commences September 13 2025.

The Girls U11s / U13s and Boys U10s and U11s start October 18.

Registrations are now open at: www.peninsulacricketclub.com.au/registration

We are the only Cricket Club in the Barrenjoey Peninsula catchment area - Palm Beach to Narrabeen – and we are Not for Profit. Our primary focus is the children's welfare as they develop their skills, passion and a lifelong love for the wonderful game of cricket.

We have Cricket skill programs, designed to get kids into Cricket - so think Kindy, Year 1 and 2 - available at 3 locations. The cricket skills program runs at Avalon (Wednesday), Warriewood (Friday evening), Warriewood (Saturday morning).

We have modified games, so no helmets, pads etc. These re-designed for children for prior to getting into competition Cricket, for Years 3 and 4. 

Then we also offer Competitive Cricket for U10s and Up for boys. We have 3 girls teams in the U11s, U13s and U15s – and are always wanting to build up more girls playing.

More details are on our Website: www.peninsulacricketclub.com.au

When did the Peninsula Junior Cricket Club begin? 

In 1987 – so the club is coming up on 40 years.

What is your home ground? 

Our main base is Kitchener Park, Mona Vale but our Grassroots program Cricket Blast is held at Warriewood Sports Field.

Who is this for?

We offer Grassroots Cricket (ages 5-9) this teaches the kids coming into the sport the basics of the game through a program of fun, interactive skill sessions and modified games (no pads, helmets, etc ) From U10s and up kids have the ability to register into Competitive / Traditional form of Cricket (with pads, helmets, gloves, harder ball). We provide cricket programs and competitions for Boys and Girls of all abilities between the ages of 5 and 17.

What if you haven’t played cricket before? Is here a coach or training program? 

As a volunteer based club, our coaches come from Parents who have a love for the game or have coached other sports. The club provides the coaches with training and coaches can use the Cricket Australia app to think of fun ways to make training interesting.

What equipment will a player need? 

For Cricket Blast nothing is needed, the club provides all gear - kids do get a Participant pack from Cricket Australia upon registering). 

Once they hit U10s Traditional Cricket the club provides a team kit to all teams which includes everything they need to play - so no outlay initially. We find kids who love the game will get Bats, Pads etc as Christmas and Birthday presents, but generally the club provides everything.

What is the best part about being part of a big team? 

Being part of a Community and meeting new people. Kids get an opportunity to interact with kids from other schools in the area. Cricket can teach kids a lot about resilience and teamwork.

When does the Season start and end? 

Cricket Blast: Oct 18 - runs for 8 weeks in Term 4, then we run another one for 6 weeks in February-March each year.

U12s and up starts Sept 13 including Girls U15s (U12s play Sat afternoon - everyone else is Saturday morning ) 

U10s / U11s / Girls U11s and U13s start Oct 18 (matches go for 2 hours on a Saturday morning)

Who are you playing against? 

There are 8 junior Clubs on the beaches;  Seaforth, Wakehurst, Beacon Hill, Harbord, Cromer, St Augustine's, Collaroy Plateau, and St. Pius. Competition Cricket for Junior Boys and Girls is played all over the peninsula from Seaforth to Avalon and everywhere in between. 

Does the Peninsula Junior Cricket Club have a 'motto'?  

Give Cricket a go!

If you are thinking of playing - give the sport a go, you don’t need to have natural ability - we just want kids playing in Sport and getting in the fresh air, for parents this is a great way to meet new people and be part of a fun club. We are always looking to improve as a club and welcome new volunteers to help run our club.

Big Wave Challenge 2025

Queenscliff Bomb Squad by Benny Hamilton Featuring Tommy Myers

Published Monday August 11 2025 by Sydney Surf Daily

Opportunities:

I'm with the Band: Music Comp.

East Coast Car Rentals are giving grassroots artists the chance to take their music on the road - and into the spotlight  with an opportunity to secure $2,000 cash, $10,000 PR package, and car hire to get you from gig to gig. 

If you’re a busker or artist lighting up street corners with talent, hustle and a love for performing, they want to hear from you.

Apply now before 30th Sep- https://bit.ly/47msb5s

Remember to read the Terms and Conditions before applying.

Skills Minister puts apprenticeship and traineeship reform front and centre: Feedback Invited

The NSW Government states it is continuing its work to rebuild the skills workforce and ensure NSW has the construction workers it needs to build more homes, with a comprehensive review of the Apprenticeship and Traineeship Act 2001 now underway.

This builds on the Government’s $3.4 billion investment in the 2025-26 Budget, the largest ever investment in skills and TAFE, ensuring we have the skilled workers to meet the state’s needs.

The Review begins with a statewide Have Your Say survey, inviting apprentices, trainees, employers, and training providers to share their experiences and shape improvements to the system.

The aim is to strengthen the apprenticeship and traineeship framework by making it easier to navigate, more flexible, and better matched to the real-world needs of priority industries like construction, care and support, technology, and clean energy.

It’s also about improving outcomes, especially for young people in regional NSW, and making sure the system supports more apprentices and trainees to complete their training and step into long-term, rewarding careers.

The Review is a key commitment of the NSW Skills Plan, and will be backed by roundtables with local employers, unions, training providers and apprentices and trainees across the state in the coming months.

For more information, and links to the Have Your Say survey please visit the Apprenticeship and Traineeship Act (2001) Review web page by September 11 2025

Minister for Skills, TAFE and Tertiary Education, Steve Whan said:

“We’re rebuilding the skills system so that it delivers for NSW. Not just for now, but for the long term.

“This review is about making apprenticeships and traineeships work better for the people who use them - students, employers, and training providers.

“We want a system that reflects today’s economy and helps more people get the skills they need for good jobs, especially in the regions and in industries crying out for workers.

“The feedback we get from the community will play a huge role in shaping the changes. We’re committed to making this review practical, inclusive, and focused on results.”

Young Filmmakers Comp.

The highly anticipated Beaches Young Filmmakers Comp 2025 is back, now in its 21st year, offering a golden opportunity for budding filmmakers to showcase their talents and creativity.

This exciting competition invites individuals or teams to produce a short film of up to 7 minutes, integrating secret inclusions—a mystery item, keyword, and phrase—that will be revealed on the council's website at 5 pm on Wednesday, 27 August.

Participants will have four days to bring their vision to life and submit their entries by 10 pm on Sunday, 31 August 2025.

With a total prize pool of $3000 and various industry prizes, aspiring filmmakers will also have the chance to see their films screened at the prestigious Finals and Awards Night on Thursday, 18 September at HOYTS Warringah Mall. Family, friends, and the public are invited to attend and celebrate the creative achievements of these emerging filmmakers.

Mayor Sue Heins expressed her enthusiasm for the competition and encouraged young filmmakers to take part.

"Beaches Young Filmmakers Comp is a wonderful way to learn the craft of filmmaking while having fun, picking up new skills and meeting like-minded people.

"If you’ve ever thought about making a short film, even if you have never done it before, why not enter? You never know where it may lead," said Mayor Heins.

Teams can consist of 1 to 12 members, aged between 12 and 24 years, with at least one member living, working, or studying on the Manly to Palm Beach peninsula.

The council stated it extends its heartfelt thanks to premium sponsor and long-time supporter, now for the thirteenth year, Miller Tripods, for their unwavering support, along with huge thanks to Screenwise and Canon for also being premium sponsors. Further thanks go to Australian Cinematography Society for their generous sponsorship of this year's competition.

Finalists’ films will be showcased on the council’s website following the Finals and Awards Night, providing further exposure for the talented young filmmakers.

Prize money is funded through entry fees, final night ticket sales and sponsorship.

Underwater Photography Contest 

Council is holding its annual Underwater Photography competition from Thursday 24 July to Sunday 18 August 2025.

The 2025 theme 'Wonder', sustaining what sustains us aligns with the Worlds Ocean Day theme and gives photographers the opportunity to showcase the Northern Beaches 5 aquatic reserves and be in the running for part of the $4,000 prize pool.

With 80 km of iconic coastline featuring 24 ocean and harbour beaches, five aquatic reserves, and 5 intertidal protected areas—including nationally and globally recognised surfing reserves—photographers are truly spoilt for choice when deciding where to capture the perfect shot.

Mayor Sue Heins said, “Our coastline is home to an extraordinary array of marine life, from delicate seagrass meadows to majestic sea creatures. Each photograph taken helps tell the story of this precious underwater world and the urgent need to protect it for future generations.”

The competition celebrates all skill levels and is open to amateur and professional photographers and videographers.

“I encourage everyone, whether you’re a seasoned photographer or just starting out, to grab your camera, dive in, and capture the wonder that lies beneath our waves. Every image you share inspires greater understanding and appreciation for the ocean that sustains us all.” Mayor Heins said.

With 8 categories including a major award - The Valerie Taylor Underwater Photography Award for Excellence, entrants can enter up to 3 images. Videographers can submit one reel.

Categories:

  • Behaviour: Capturing natural behaviour of marine life.
  • Macro: Getting up close to the subject matter.
  • Threatened Species: Portraying the vulnerability of a threatened species found, for example: black rod cod, grey nurse shark, green turtle.
  •  Human Connection: Capturing the positive or negative connection between a person(s) and marine life (flora / fauna / megafauna). This could include monitoring citizen science projects or research undertaken in one of the Northern Beaches aquatic reserves.
  • Seascapes (wide angle): Capturing the raw beauty of the underwater vista in one of the Northern Beaches aquatic reserves.
  • Youth: For the budding young photographers aged 12 to 17 years old. The winner will be recognised as the Underwater Youth Photographer of the Year 2025.
  • Reels: Capturing the wonder of the biodiversity in our underwater world. Reel length is 15 to 30 seconds duration.
  • People’s Choice Award: Everyone can vote online for their favourite finalist image.

The People’s Choice voting opens Thursday 28 August and runs through to Sunday 21 September with winners announced in November.

For more information about the competition and the full terms and conditions, visit council's website.

Open Mic at Palm Beach

Come on down this Sunday from 2–5pm for our Open Mic Afternoon — happening every last Sunday of the month!

Show off your talent, enjoy great vibes, and be part of a supportive local music scene. Don’t miss it!

Club Palm Beach

Financial help for young people

Concessions and financial support for young people.

Includes:

  • You could receive payments and services from Centrelink: Use the payment and services finder to check what support you could receive.
  • Apply for a concession Opal card for students: Receive a reduced fare when travelling on public transport.
  • Financial support for students: Get financial help whilst studying or training.
  • Youth Development Scholarships: Successful applicants will receive $1000 to help with school expenses and support services.
  • Tertiary Access Payment for students: The Tertiary Access Payment can help you with the costs of moving to undertake tertiary study.
  • Relocation scholarship: A once a year payment if you get ABSTUDY or Youth Allowance if you move to or from a regional or remote area for higher education study.
  • Get help finding a place to live and paying your rent: Rent Choice Youth helps young people aged 16 to 24 years to rent a home.

Visit: https://www.nsw.gov.au/living-nsw/young-people/young-people-financial-help

School Leavers Support

Explore the School Leavers Information Kit (SLIK) as your guide to education, training and work options in 2022;
As you prepare to finish your final year of school, the next phase of your journey will be full of interesting and exciting opportunities. You will discover new passions and develop new skills and knowledge.

We know that this transition can sometimes be challenging. With changes to the education and workforce landscape, you might be wondering if your planned decisions are still a good option or what new alternatives are available and how to pursue them.

There are lots of options for education, training and work in 2022 to help you further your career. This information kit has been designed to help you understand what those options might be and assist you to choose the right one for you. Including:
  • Download or explore the SLIK here to help guide Your Career.
  • School Leavers Information Kit (PDF 5.2MB).
  • School Leavers Information Kit (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • The SLIK has also been translated into additional languages.
  • Download our information booklets if you are rural, regional and remote, Aboriginal or Torres Strait Islander, or living with disability.
  • Support for Regional, Rural and Remote School Leavers (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for Regional, Rural and Remote School Leavers (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • Support for Aboriginal and/or Torres Strait Islander School Leavers (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for Aboriginal and/or Torres Strait Islander School Leavers (DOCX 1.1MB).
  • Support for School Leavers with Disability (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for School Leavers with Disability (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • Download the Parents and Guardian’s Guide for School Leavers, which summarises the resources and information available to help you explore all the education, training, and work options available to your young person.

School Leavers Information Service

Are you aged between 15 and 24 and looking for career guidance?

Call 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337).

SMS 'SLIS2022' to 0429 009 435.

Our information officers will help you:
  • navigate the School Leavers Information Kit (SLIK),
  • access and use the Your Career website and tools; and
  • find relevant support services if needed.
You may also be referred to a qualified career practitioner for a 45-minute personalised career guidance session. Our career practitioners will provide information, advice and assistance relating to a wide range of matters, such as career planning and management, training and studying, and looking for work.

You can call to book your session on 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337) Monday to Friday, from 9am to 7pm (AEST). Sessions with a career practitioner can be booked from Monday to Friday, 9am to 7pm.

This is a free service, however minimal call/text costs may apply.

Call 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337) or SMS SLIS2022 to 0429 009 435 to start a conversation about how the tools in Your Career can help you or to book a free session with a career practitioner.

All downloads and more available at: www.yourcareer.gov.au/school-leavers-support

Word Of The Week: Always

Word of the Week remains a keynote in 2025, simply to throw some disruption in amongst the 'yeah-nah' mix. 

Adverb

1. without exception; on every occasion; every time 2. continually; repeatedly 3. in any case 4. informal; forever.

Originating from mid-14c., contraction of Old English phrase ealne weg "all the time; quite, perpetually," literally "all the way," with accusative of space or distance, though the oldest recorded usages refer to time; all + way (n.). The adverbial genitive -s appeared in the early 13c., was rare before c. 1400, but is now standard, though the variant alway survived, now termed archaicuse, into the 1800s for the sake of poetry. The meaning of "every time" is from early 13c.

From Middle English: genitive case of all way, the inflection probably giving the sense ‘at every time’ as opposed to ‘at one uninterrupted time’: the difference between the two is no longer distinct.

New research shows WWII dominates Australians’ knowledge of military history. But big gaps remain

Nicole TownsendUNSW Sydney

Eighty years ago this week, Japan surrendered after nearly four years of war in the Asia-Pacific. For Australia, this meant the end of not only the war in the Pacific, but also the second world war that had begun six years earlier, in September 1939.

In that time, around one million Australians – approximately 15% of the population – served in the armed forces. Over half served overseas, with nearly 40,000 killed and more than 66,000 wounded.

But what do Australians today know about this epochal moment in our history? We surveyed 1,500 Australians aged 18 and older to find out.

Our study

The survey was conducted from late February to early March 2025 as part of our work at the War Studies Research Group, with the aim of measuring public understanding of Australian military history.

It covered the major conflicts in which Australians have been involved, from the Frontier Wars and colonial wars through to the more recent wars in Afghanistan and Iraq. We asked a range of questions to determine Australians’ knowledge of and engagement with national military history, how they learn about it, and their opinions on the commemoration of military events today.

Our survey data revealed that between 40% and 70% of respondents (depending on age group) had not formally studied Australian military history. This means it provides a good insight into how the average Australian views the country’s military history.

Australia’s most well-known conflict

Nearly 90% of our respondents were aware of the second world war. Around 80% were also aware that Australians had been involved in the conflict.

There were no significant differences by any demographic.

The first world war was the next most well-known conflict, ahead of the Vietnam War, indicating the dominance of these three conflicts in Australian popular memory.

Most of our respondents (55%) also indicated their desire to learn more about the second world war — and they think Australian schoolchildren should, too. More than two-thirds support its inclusion in the Australian school curriculum.

In this, the second world war is the exception. Respondents were not particularly interested in learning more about other events in Australian military history.

The second world war is also the only conflict for which a majority believe Australian involvement was in the national interest.

Pacific War dominates

Australians served globally during the war, from the Asia-Pacific to the Mediterranean, Europe, and the Middle East. However, our survey confirmed that although our respondents indicated they were aware of the second world war, their knowledge of key events within it varies.

The most well-known event in the Mediterranean was the siege of Tobruk, which was known by approximately 41% of respondents, well ahead of the battle of El Alamein (28%) in second position.

More surprising was the fact that another 42% of our respondents had not heard of any of the listed events. This included the siege of Tobruk, which is a hallmark event in Australian military history.

By contrast, the Pacific was more well-known. Fewer than one in five respondents indicated they had not heard of any listed event from the war in the Pacific.

The top three events in the Pacific were the Japanese attack on Pearl Harbor (67%), the bombing of Darwin (59%), and the atomic bombings of Japan (57%).

Still, there were some unexpected findings. We expected Kokoda to rank highly, but it ranked outside the top three.

Younger Australians less knowledgeable

A deeper dive into the demographic data, however, highlights stark differences among age cohorts when it comes to what they know about the second world war.

Awareness of events increased consistently in line with respondents’ age. Older Australians are more knowledgeable across the board. This means greater knowledge among those aged 60 and over lifted the overall average response across the board.

Over two-thirds of those aged 60 and over knew of the siege of Tobruk. By contrast, only 23% of those aged 30–39 were aware of the siege. The youngest cohort (18–29) fared only slightly better, with around one-third (31%) aware of Tobruk.

Likewise, around 90% of respondents aged 60 and over knew of the attack on Pearl Harbor, compared to just over half of those aged 18–29. In fact, Pearl Harbor was the only key event from the war that garnered majority recognition among respondents aged 18–49.

Kokoda and the prisoner of war experiences of Changi, the Thai-Burma Railway, and Sandakan were all little known among those aged under 50.

Younger respondents were also at times more than twice as likely not to have heard of any listed event in this theatre.

However, the youngest cohorts were not always the least knowledgeable. For instance, 10% of those aged 18–29 knew of the battle of Milne Bay, compared to only 3% of those aged 40–49.

Australian military history needs to be bolstered

Our survey shows the second world war now dominates Australians’ understanding of their military history. But Australians know little about events outside the Pacific, and knowledge is also significantly decreasing with each generation.

This suggests the need for a stronger focus on the broader narrative of Australia’s involvement in the second world war, especially in school curricula, if this pattern is to be reversed.

It’s important public awareness of these events goes beyond the major events and encompasses diverse perspectives. This will allow future generations to better understand our past and the complexities of war, and its impact on our world today.The Conversation

Nicole Townsend, Lecturer in History, UNSW Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Pittwater Online's 80th Anniversary of VP Day History pages in 2025:

  1. WEA's Newport Summer School – for Workers, WANS + Future U.S., B.P.F. Wives: Local Insights for The 80th Commemoration of VP Day in 2025
  2. Coastal Defences In World War Two: The Dee Why to Warriewood Sections 
  3. Broken Section: The Story Of Pittwater's Anti-Submarine Boom Net - By John Illingsworth 
  4. Avalon Beach SLSC During World War Two: The Police Boys Club Mans the Beaches 

Other Profiles, History pages and Reports on Commemorative Services for all conflicts Australians have served in, which include Addresses given, and all with local connections, are listed in the Contents page and History page, or can be found by using the search function. 

Some examples include:  

The Battle of the Menin Road, in which the Australians took a prominent part. Returning from the advanced front line is a continuous stream of walking wounded and prisoners. Littering the side of the road are stretchers bearing seriously wounded awaiting motor ambulance transport. From Exhibition of war photographs / taken by Capt. Frank Hurley(who once lived at Whale Beach), August 1917- August 1918. Courtesy State Library of New South Wales

Cherry blossoms and eucalypts: this Japanese war cemetery remembers fallen Australians

Anoma Darshani PierisThe University of Melbourne and Athanasios TsakonasThe University of Melbourne

After the Great War, Australians made pilgrimages to distant battlefields of Gallipoli and northern France. They paid their respects to the fallen soldiers who shaped our national identity.

After the second world war, new places emerged such as the Kokoda Track, Papua New Guinea; Changi, Singapore; and the Thai-Burma railway. They became synonymous with Australia’s wartime sacrifices in Asia and the Pacific.

However, few know about Yokohama War Cemetery – the only Commonwealth war cemetery in mainland Japan. This unique site was collaboratively designed and built by Australian and Japanese architects, horticulturists and contractors in the years following the war.

It marks one of the first acts of reconciliation between the two nations after hostilities ceased.

Reimagining the cemetery

Yokohama War Cemetery was established as the final resting place for more than 1,500 Allied servicemen and women. Most had died as prisoners of war in Japan and China, including 280 Australians.

About six kilometres west of Yokohama’s historic port, the cemetery sits within a thick pine and cherry tree landscape. After the war ended, Australian and American war graves teams scoured Japan to locate and identify the remains of the fallen. They were often found in the care of local temples near prisoner-of-war camps.

Oil painting, cherry trees in the foreground.
This painting from 1950, by George Colville, shows the Australian war graves section of the cemetary. Australian War Memorial

Between 1946 and 1951, a small team of Australian architects and horticulturists designed and constructed the cemetery. They were from the Melbourne-based Anzac Agency of the Imperial War Graves Commission (now known as the Office of Australian War Graves).

Many of these designers were recently returned servicemen.

They include young architects Peter Spier, Robert Coxhead, Brett Finney and Clayton Vize. All trained at the University of Melbourne’s Architectural Atelier, their fledgling careers interrupted by years of war service and at the agency. Others, such as Alan Robertson, endured years as a prisoner of war in Singapore then Japan.

These architects reimagined the flat expanse of the traditional British war cemetery. They arranged a 27-acre former children’s amusement park into five national burial grounds: for the United Kingdom, Australia, New Zealand–Canada, pre-Partition India, and a post-war section.

Four diggers under a cross.
Australian Diggers rest on their reversed arms at the dedication of the British War Cemetery at Yokohama, 1951. Argus Newspaper Collection of Photographs, State Library of Victoria

Eucalyptus trees towering above the mature foliage clearly identify the cemetery as an Australian endeavour.

Another important contributor was Alec Maisey, a former merchant seaman and New Guinea veteran. Maisey took on the horticultural duties for the Anzac Agency’s numerous war cemeteries. In New Guinea, Borneo, Indonesia, New Caledonia, the South Pacific and across mainland Australia, he left behind a lasting landscape legacy for the thousands of visitors.

An international collaboration

Australian designers collaborated with their Japanese counterparts to create a memorial landscape. They embedded the commission’s established lawn cemetery template into a Japanese style “hide and reveal” garden that conceals and reveals the view as you walk through it.

Impressed by Frank Lloyd Wright’s use of native Oya stone at the Imperial Hotel in Tokyo, modernist architect Yoji Kasajima introduced it at the cemetery.

Japanese-American Michael Iwanaga was the principal local architect for the cemetery and introduced the Australians to the social and cultural norms of Japanese funerary architecture.

Black and white photo, a crowd under the cross.
Troops from Australia and New Zealand pay tribute to fallen comrades during the 1954 Anzac Day Ceremony. Australian War Memorial

The main contractor on the project, Yabashi Marble, was associated with Japan’s modernist architecture renaissance. They installed the interior stone for Japan’s parliament building.

Tokio Nursery was initially an importer and exporter of seeds, bulbs and plants. They turned to landscaping after the war, becoming the cemetery’s principal gardening and maintenance contractor.

These tentative first steps towards reconciliation between Australia and Japan were made through design.

The result was a war cemetery unique to Asia, combining Asian and Western funereal features and aesthetics in its design.

Wide shot featuring lots of trees.
The 1954 Anzac Day Ceremony in the Australian/New Zealand section of the cemetery. Australian War Memorial

Through these encounters, the Australian designers’ gained a deeper understanding of Japan’s materials, flora and landscape. Working closely with Japanese architects, nurseries and contractors, their approach to and perception of their profession and Japan was transformed.

Among many cemeteries they designed throughout Asia, Yokohama was the place they often returned to and drew inspiration from in their personal lives.

Enduring reminders

War does not end with a victory or a battle. Some of the most difficult tasks are carried out by the seemingly obscure units of the Australian army. The Australian war graves services, undertook the recovery of the war dead, providing for their dignified burial in designated cemeteries.

Many of these spaces were designed and created during the last stages of the conflict.

Men cross the bridge
An arched stone bridge in the gardens of the Yokohama Cemetery, 1952. Australian War Memorial

War cemeteries are often activated only during commemorative anniversaries. Yet, they persist in serving as enduring reminders of the futility of war and the scale of a nation’s sacrifice. They trigger intergenerational memories for Australians.

For many Asians, however, these sites often represent an unwelcome age of imperial conflicts in which their service and sacrifice was often overlooked.

Yokohama War Cemetery stands as a testament to the collaborative efforts of Australian and Japanese designers in the aftermath of the second world war. It offers a unique perspective on the journey towards reconciliation and the power of design to bridge cultural divides.


The exhibition Eucalypts of Hodogaya is at the Shrine of Remembrance, Melbourne, until August 2026.The Conversation

Anoma Darshani Pieris, Professor of Architecture, The University of Melbourne and Athanasios Tsakonas, Sessional Tutor in Architecture, The University of Melbourne

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Friday essay: who was Anne Frank?

Anne Frank in December 1941. Public domain, via Wikimedia Commons
Jan LanicekUNSW Sydney

Everyone knows her photo. For some it shows the cheeky smile of a young girl, “Miss Quack Quack”. For others, the image represents an enigmatic veil of mystery, similar to Leonardo Da Vinci’s Mona Lisa.

Millions have read her diary, watched various renditions in theatres and on the screen, or visited exhibitions devoted to her story. Thousands queue in front of the house in Amsterdam, where she spent 760 days in the secret annex, hiding from the Gestapo and their Dutch collaborators.

People quote the most famous sentence from her diary, immortalised in the Hollywood film, saying that “in spite of everything I still believe that people are really good at heart”.

The sentence was written in July 1944 by 15-year-old Jewish girl Anne Frank, three weeks before the capture of her family by the Nazis. It represents the innocence, perhaps naivety of an adolescent, who after the war became one of the most iconic symbols of the Nazi Holocaust.

The quote carries a universal message that good will eventually prevail. This has turned Anne’s legacy into an easily adoptable trope, serving activists and political agendas. But who, actually, was Anne Frank? And how did she differ from the “Anne Franks” that have emerged since the end of the war?


The Many Lives of Anne Frank – Ruth Franklin (Yale University Press)


Acclaimed author Ruth Franklin explores these probing questions in her newest book. She is to be commended for her sensitive treatment of a difficult subject and an attempt to get as close as possible to Anne’s personality and nature.

Franklin follows two paths. First, she reconstructs Anne’s life based on the diary and recollections of people who knew her. In the second part, she reveals the afterlife of the diary and “Anne Frank”, in different contexts and on different platforms.

She concludes that the “Anne” most people know, or imagine, differs quite significantly from the girl who lived in the secret annex and penned the diary.

The story

Annelies Marie Frank was born in 1929 in Frankfurt am Main to an affluent assimilated German-Jewish family. After the rise of Hitler and the introduction of the first racial laws, her parents Otto and Edith decided to take Anne and her older sister Margot to the Netherlands. They continued to live in Amsterdam despite the growing threat, even after the German invasion in 1940. Attempts to emigrate to the United States failed.

The mounting persecution kept restricting their lives. In early 1942, the Nazis began to plan deportations of the Jews to the east. In July, when Margot received a call to the transport to occupied Poland, the family decided to go into hiding.

Anne’s mother Edith Frank with Margot, 1929. Photo collection Anne Frank House, Public domain, via Wikimedia Commons

They spent over two years in the secret annex, eventually accepting four more fugitives: the van Pels family, including their teenage son Peter, and dentist Fritz Pfeffer. They were supported by a group of people, including, most famously, Miep and Jan Gies.

The group, experiencing the constant tensions of living in the claustrophobic space, ran out of luck in early August 1944. They were betrayed, and the Nazis sent them to the transit camp of Westerbork, from where they continued on the very last train to Auschwitz. After a month, Margot and Anne were separated from their mother and sent to Bergen-Belsen in central Germany.

Their physical and mental state soon deteriorated. A survivor of Belsen later remembered the “two thin, shaven-headed figures” who “looked like freezing little birds”.

Shortly before the end of the war, typhus erupted in the overcrowded camp and Anne and Margot became its victims. Otto, liberated from Auschwitz, was the only survivor from the eight who hid in the secret annex.

Jan and Miep Gies in 1980. Dutch National Archives, via Wikimedia CommonsCC BY

The diary

Anne got the red-checkered diary on her 13th birthday, shortly before moving to the secret annex. She wrote only occasionally, but soon the diary turned into her constant companion. It was a place where she could express her feelings.

Written in the form of letters to an imaginary friend Kitty (identified by Franklin as a character in Cissy van Marxveldt’s popular books for children), the diary offers a vivid reconstruction of life in hiding, describing in detail the daily routine. It also allowed Anne to vent frustration from constant conflicts with her mother, Mrs. van Pels and Pfeffer.

Another prominent feature, dominating later representations, was her evolving relationship with Peter, which eventually turned romantic.

In March 1944, Anne heard a radio broadcast by the exiled Dutch education minister Gerrit Bolkestein, who asked listeners to keep documentary evidence about their life under the Nazis. Anne began to rewrite her diary, now with the intention of making it public. Franklin suggests that this turned the book into a memoir in the form of diary entries.

Anne had not finished when the raid stopped her efforts. Not all parts of the diary survived. At least one of the original volumes, covering over a year, is missing; it does, however, exist in the version Anne wrote after March 1944.

Several versions

Otto returned to Amsterdam in June 1945. After they received a confirmation that Anne did not survive, Miep Gies handed over Anne’s papers, which she had found in the annex. Otto decided to publish the diary but, in what Franklin calls “the most confusing and contested” aspect of Anne’s story, “betrayed” her legacy.

Otto Frank in 1930. Photo collection Anne Frank House, Public domain, via Wikimedia Commons

Otto combined both versions of the diary. He returned to the manuscript sections that Anne removed, including details of her romance with Peter. He softened the criticism of Anne’s mother and of Mr. and Mrs. van Pels.

Franklin believes Otto did so out of respect for victims. The last surviving pages from Anne’s diary, offering critical comments about her parents’ marriage, were made public only after Otto’s death decades later.

It took almost 40 years before a critical edition, comparing all the versions of the diary, was published by Dutch researchers. This necessarily raises the question of how far the Anne Frank people know from Otto’s version is different from Anne who lived in hiding and perished in Belsen.

Afterlife and projection

Despite initial scepticism, the diary immediately became a hit, especially in the United States. Soon there were efforts to turn it into a theatre play and film. Otto agreed, because he needed money to preserve the house with the annex.

The Broadway play premiered in 1955 and the Hollywood feature film in 1959. In the following decades, Anne’s story inspired scores of authors, but also activists who referred to the public icon in support of their agenda.

The immense publicity did not come without controversies. It has led, according to Franklin, to Anne becoming “whoever and whatever we need her to be”. Such efforts keep surfacing. Franklin is right to criticise those who deliberately aim to provoke, for example, by using Anne’s image in anti-Zionist campaigns.

The original theatre and film representations, according to some, intentionally universalised Anne’s story, suppressing her Jewish identity. This, according to Franklin, made the story more palatable to the American audience and reflected the American Jewish ideal at that time of full assimilation into American society.

Yet although Anne’s diary can speak to a multitude of audiences, it is a deeply Jewish story. Anne’s relation with her Jewish identity and Zionism was ambiguous, though she was aware of her background and wrote that they “will always remain Jews”. Margot, her sister, wanted to go to Mandatory Palestine as a maternity nurse; Otto in his later life was supportive of the Zionist project.

Another affair, more recently, focused on the parts of the diary where Anne expressed her desire to touch her female friend’s breast and kiss her. She also wrote about her attraction to female nudity in art.

There were accusations that Otto censored these parts of the diary, in an effort to deny the coming out of his daughter. This is unfair criticism. As Franklin shows, Otto included the entries, slightly modified, in the first US edition, even though Anne had removed them from the rewritten version of her diary.

Ironically, conservative circles in the United States have called for a ban of a graphic novel based on the book, calling it “Anne Frank pornography”. Franklin cautions us against such projections and reading too much into these comments. We simply don’t know enough about Anne and about how her sexuality would develop. In the diary, she repeatedly expressed attraction to several boys, including Peter van Pels.

The raid

These efforts only show how the popularised image of Anne keeps attracting attention. We still want to know more about her and solve all mysteries. In 2022, a Canadian author Rosemary Sullivan, in cooperation with a former FBI special agent, published a book that claimed to solve the mystery of Anne’s betrayal.

Until today, the culprit has not been identified. According to Sullivan, the Annex eight were betrayed by a member of the Dutch Jewish Council. This compulsory community body has often been accused of collaboration.

The publication triggered a quick response from Dutch Holocaust historians who, in a long rebuttal, rejected Sullivan’s claim, calling it a baseless fabrication. Dutch and German publishers withdrew the book.

Anne Frank, May 1942. Public domain, via Wikimedia Commons.

Who was the real Anne Frank?

The question ultimately remains unresolved.

Is it the girl who penned the first version of her diary to cope with the persecution and isolation in the annex? Is it the young woman, author of the second version, who matured too quickly because of a lack of contact with her peers? Is it the Anne that Otto, grieving after the loss of his whole family, reconstructed from the pages saved by Miep Gies?

Or is she one of the versions of her story produced at Broadway, Hollywood, by countless writers, and now even political activists?

We all suffer from cognitive dissonance. The only photos we have of Anne are those of a young girl from the time before the family went into hiding. But the Anne who wrote the diary was older, almost womanlike, physically and mentally. Miep Gies recalled that “she had arrived a girl, but she would leave a woman”.

Reading the diary, even though we know the end, we hope she will survive. We don’t want to know what happened after their capture. We don’t want to see her bald and emaciated in Auschwitz or Belsen.

At the same time, we know the story will end there. Franklin bitterly remarks that “readers already perceive Anne as if she were a figure in a book rather than a real person. To just about everyone, her life is of secondary importance to what we make of it.”

Perhaps we should just conclude, together with Franklin that Anne was a talented girl and “an accomplished and sophisticated writer – a deliberate, literary witness to Nazi persecution”. She had many virtues and vices.

She can inspire us, we need to learn about her, but we should respect her. We should not project onto her our current agenda, concerns or political views. We should “restore her as a human being”, and that’s exactly what Franklin does.The Conversation

Jan Lanicek, Associate Professor in Modern European History and Jewish History, UNSW Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Not quite angels: why we should stop calling these small winged children ‘cherubs’

Raphael, Sistine Madonna (detail), between c. 1512 and c. 1513. Wikimedia Commons
Philip C. AlmondThe University of Queensland

We are all familiar with cherubs – small, winged children that have a status in Western art history as angels.

But did you know this image you hold in your head of a cherub is completely unlike the cherubs of the biblical and medieval traditions?

Here’s what you should know about these mythical creatures.

Cherubs were originally fearsome

The Cherubs in the book of Ezekiel in the Old Testament were fearsome creatures.

Each had four faces – those of a human, a lion, an ox and an eagle – and four wings.

By the 4th century within Christianity, angels had become creatures with two wings, sufficient to enable them to travel from heaven, where they usually resided, to earth, generally to bring messages from God to us.

In the order of heavenly beings constructed by Pseudo-Dionysius in the late 5th century, Cherubs were second in importance to the Seraphs, followed by Thrones, Dominions, Virtues, Powers, Principalities, Archangels and Angels.

The cherubim of glory shadowing the mercy seat
The biblical cherub has four faces, as depicted in this engraving from 1773. Wikimedia Commons

So, in the Dionysian order, Cherubs aren’t even angels, but are way above them, close to God. There, they supported the divine throne or the divine chariot by means of which God travelled around.

In a later tradition they, along with the archangel Gabriel, guarded the entrance to the Garden of Eden.

Cherubs as we know them come from Putti

What we now call Cherubs in Christian art were originally depictions of Putti – chubby, male children – from Ancient Greece and Rome. We are most familiar with a Putto as ErosAmor or Cupid, usually naked, winged and with arrows used to incite love.

Bronze statue of Eros sleeping, Greek, 3rd–2nd century BCE. The Metropolitan Museum of Art

Putti were re-introduced into the West by the Italian sculptor Donatello in 1429 in sculpture.

In his art, the Putti were spiritelli – what we would call “sprites” or “elves”. They were little creatures – playful, lively and mischievous – often associated with love.

Suddenly, the Putti were everywhere. They especially adorned churches, playing with their Putti friends in childish glee, singing and dancing to the music of the lute or mandolin, climbing on fountains, pouring water through a vase or through the mouth of a fish.

A relief carving featuring Mary, Jesus, and four cherubs.
Madonna with Four Cherubs, Donatello, c. 1440. Staatliche Museen zu Berlin, Skulpturensammlung und Museum für Byzantinische Kunst / Antje VoigtCC BY-SA

The wings of the Putti suggested angelic status to Christian artists. And so, within the history of Christian art, these Putti have been and are still called “Cherubs”. But we do not know how they came to be known by this name.

The Putti became child-angels

In the 15th century, when the classical Putti were introduced into Christian art, they were looked upon as child-angels rather than as Putti. That is, they were Christianised.

We find child-angels with haloes and multi-coloured wings surrounding Mary and Jesus in Bernardino Fungai’s The Virgin and Child with Cherubim, painted around the end of the 15th century.

The Virgin Mary embraces the infant Christ.
Bernardino Fungai, The Virgin and Child with Cherubim, between 1495 and 1510. Wikimedia Commons/National Gallery

We know child-angels best of all as the two playful infantile figures of the Sistine Madonna (1514) with coloured wings, where Raphael has added them into the painting almost, it appears, just for the fun of it or as an afterthought.

Even Cherubs are not always Cherubs

Although we now might refer to all of these winged child-angels as Cherubs, the artists who painted them likely divided them into various celestial creatures, classified in some cases by the colour of the clothing they wore.

Cherubs often appear in blue clothing and with Mary, the mother of Jesus – their blue clothing perhaps reflecting her traditional blue clothes.

Child-angels dressed in blue are often paired with child-angels in red, the traditional colour of the Seraphs, those of a higher angelic order than the Cherubs.

In the French court painter Jean Fouquet’s Virgin and Child (1452), Mary the Queen of Heaven and Jesus are surrounded by naked red Seraphs and, behind them, naked blue Cherubs. So here we have the two highest orders of celestial creatures, surrounding Mary and Jesus.

On occasion, we find Seraphic infants only in attendance on Mary, now as winged heads, with no Cherubic children present at all.

Giovanni Bellini, in a 1485 painting known as Madonna of the Red Cherubim – but better titled “the Madonna of the red Seraphs” – has red winged, red-headed child-angels, their bodies in the clouds surrounding the head of Mary. It wasn’t until the 19th century that the name “Cherub” became common for all these baby angels.

Madonna of the Red Cherubim, Giovanni Bellini, c. 1485. Gallerie dell'Accademia/Wikimedia Commons

But to call these child-angels all “Cherubs” is a misnomer, still perpetrated in Western art history.

Most artists just depicted child-angels or even infant-angels, with no connection to the biblical Cherub. That said, some, when dressed in blue, are probably intended as Cherubs; others, when dressed in red, are likely meant as Seraphs.

The history of the Western art of celestial creatures needs to be rewritten as a consequence.The Conversation

Philip C. Almond, Emeritus Professor in the History of Religious Thought, The University of Queensland

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

‘Australiana’ images made by AI are racist and full of tired Clichés, new study shows

‘An Aboriginal Australian’s house’ generated by Meta AI in May 2024. Meta AI
Tama LeaverCurtin University and Suzanne SrdarovCurtin University

Big tech company hype sells generative artificial intelligence (AI) as intelligent, creative, desirable, inevitable, and about to radically reshape the future in many ways.

Published by Oxford University Press, our new research on how generative AI depicts Australian themes directly challenges this perception.

We found when generative AIs produce images of Australia and Australians, these outputs are riddled with bias. They reproduce sexist and racist caricatures more at home in the country’s imagined monocultural past.

Basic prompts, tired tropes

In May 2024, we asked: what do Australians and Australia look like according to generative AI?

To answer this question, we entered 55 different text prompts into five of the most popular image-producing generative AI tools: Adobe Firefly, Dream Studio, Dall-E 3, Meta AI and Midjourney.

The prompts were as short as possible to see what the underlying ideas of Australia looked like, and what words might produce significant shifts in representation.

We didn’t alter the default settings on these tools, and collected the first image or images returned. Some prompts were refused, producing no results. (Requests with the words “child” or “children” were more likely to be refused, clearly marking children as a risk category for some AI tool providers.)

Overall, we ended up with a set of about 700 images.

They produced ideals suggestive of travelling back through time to an imagined Australian past, relying on tired tropes like red dirt, Uluru, the outback, untamed wildlife, and bronzed Aussies on beaches.

‘A typical Australian family’ generated by Dall-E 3 in May 2024.

We paid particular attention to images of Australian families and childhoods as signifiers of a broader narrative about “desirable” Australians and cultural norms.

According to generative AI, the idealised Australian family was overwhelmingly white by default, suburban, heteronormative and very much anchored in a settler colonial past.

‘An Australian father’ with an iguana

The images generated from prompts about families and relationships gave a clear window into the biases baked into these generative AI tools.

“An Australian mother” typically resulted in white, blonde women wearing neutral colours and peacefully holding babies in benign domestic settings.

A white woman with eerily large lips stands in a pleasant living room holding a baby boy and wearing a beige cardigan.
‘An Australian Mother’ generated by Dall-E 3 in May 2024. Dall-E 3

The only exception to this was Firefly which produced images of exclusively Asian women, outside domestic settings and sometimes with no obvious visual links to motherhood at all.

Notably, none of the images generated of Australian women depicted First Nations Australian mothers, unless explicitly prompted. For AI, whiteness is the default for mothering in an Australian context.

An Asian woman in a floral garden holding a misshapen present with a red bow.
‘An Australian parent’ generated by Firefly in May 2024. Firefly

Similarly, “Australian fathers” were all white. Instead of domestic settings, they were more commonly found outdoors, engaged in physical activity with children, or sometimes strangely pictured holding wildlife instead of children.

One such father was even toting an iguana – an animal not native to Australia – so we can only guess at the data responsible for this and other glaring glitches found in our image sets.

An image generated by Meta AI from the prompt ‘An Australian Father’ in May 2024.

Alarming levels of racist stereotypes

Prompts to include visual data of Aboriginal Australians surfaced some concerning images, often with regressive visuals of “wild”, “uncivilised” and sometimes even “hostile native” tropes.

This was alarmingly apparent in images of “typical Aboriginal Australian families” which we have chosen not to publish. Not only do they perpetuate problematic racial biases, but they also may be based on data and imagery of deceased individuals that rightfully belongs to First Nations people.

But the racial stereotyping was also acutely present in prompts about housing.

Across all AI tools, there was a marked difference between an “Australian’s house” – presumably from a white, suburban setting and inhabited by the mothers, fathers and their families depicted above – and an “Aboriginal Australian’s house”.

For example, when prompted for an “Australian’s house”, Meta AI generated a suburban brick house with a well-kept garden, swimming pool and lush green lawn.

When we then asked for an “Aboriginal Australian’s house”, the generator came up with a grass-roofed hut in red dirt, adorned with “Aboriginal-style” art motifs on the exterior walls and with a fire pit out the front.

Left, ‘An Australian’s house’; right, ‘An Aboriginal Australian’s house’, both generated by Meta AI in May 2024. Meta AI

The differences between the two images are striking. They came up repeatedly across all the image generators we tested.

These representations clearly do not respect the idea of Indigenous Data Sovereignty for Aboriginal and Torres Straight Islander peoples, where they would get to own their own data and control access to it.

Has anything improved?

Many of the AI tools we used have updated their underlying models since our research was first conducted.

On August 7, OpenAI released their most recent flagship model, GPT-5.

To check whether the latest generation of AI is better at avoiding bias, we asked ChatGPT5 to “draw” two images: “an Australian’s house” and “an Aboriginal Australian’s house”.

Red tiled, red brick, suburban Australian house, generated by AI.
Image generated by ChatGPT5 on August 10 2025 in response to the prompt ‘draw an Australian’s house’. ChatGPT5.
Cartoonish image of a hut with a fire, set in rural Australia, with Aboriginal art styled dot paintings in the sky.
Image generated by ChatGPT5 on August 10 2025 in response to the prompt ‘draw an Aboriginal Australian’s house’. ChatGPT5.

The first showed a photorealistic image of a fairly typical redbrick suburban family home. In contrast, the second image was more cartoonish, showing a hut in the outback with a fire burning and Aboriginal-style dot painting imagery in the sky.

These results, generated just a couple of days ago, speak volumes.

Why this matters

Generative AI tools are everywhere. They are part of social media platforms, baked into mobile phones and educational platforms, Microsoft Office, Photoshop, Canva and most other popular creative and office software.

In short, they are unavoidable.

Our research shows generative AI tools will readily produce content rife with inaccurate stereotypes when asked for basic depictions of Australians.

Given how widely they are used, it’s concerning that AI is producing caricatures of Australia and visualising Australians in reductive, sexist and racist ways.

Given the ways these AI tools are trained on tagged data, reducing cultures to clichés may well be a feature rather than a bug for generative AI systems.The Conversation

Tama Leaver, Professor of Internet Studies, Curtin University and Suzanne Srdarov, Research Fellow, Media and Cultural Studies, Curtin University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Spiderweb silks and architectures reveal millions of years of evolutionary ingenuity

An orchard orb weaver spider rests in the center of her web. Daniela Duncan/Moment via Getty Images
Ella KellnerUniversity of North Carolina – Charlotte

Have you ever walked face-first into a spiderweb while on a hike? Or swept away cobwebs in your garage?

You may recognize the orb web as the classic Halloween decoration or cobwebs as close neighbors with your dust bunnies. These are just two among the many types of spiderweb architectures, each with a unique structure specially attuned to the spider’s environment and the web’s intended job.

While many spiders use their webs to catch prey, they have also evolved unusual ways to use their silk, from wrapping their eggs to acting as safety lines that catch them when they fall.

As a materials scientist who studies spiders and their silks, I am curious about the relationship between spiderweb architecture and the strength of the silks spiders use. How do the design of a web and the properties of the silk used affect a spider’s ability to catch its next meal?

Webs’ ancient origins

Spider silk has a long evolutionary history. Researchers believe that it first evolved around 400 million years ago. These ancestral spiders used silk to line their burrows, protect their vulnerable eggs and create sensory paths and guidelines as they navigated their environment.

To understand what ancient spiderwebs could have looked like, scientists look to the lampshade spider. This spider lives in rock outcroppings in the Appalachian and Rocky mountains. It is a living relative of some of the most ancient spiders to ever make webs, and it hasn’t changed much at all since web-building first evolved.

A black and brown spider camouflaged over a mossy rock, with a circular, flat web around it, stuck to the rock
A lampshade spider in its distinctive web between rocks. Tyler BrownCC BY-SA

Aptly named for its web shape, the lampshade spider makes a web with a narrow base that widens outward. These webs fill the cracks between rocks where the spider can be camouflaged against the rough surface. It’s hard for a prospective meal to traverse this rugged landscape without being ensnared.

Web diversity

Today, all spider species produce silk. Each species creates its own specific web architecture that is uniquely suited to the type of prey it eats and the environment it lives in.

Take the orb web, for example. These are aerial, two-dimensional webs featuring a distinctive spiral. They mostly catch flying or jumping prey, such as flies and grasshoppers. Orb webs are found in open areas, such as on treelines, in tall grasses or between your tomato plants.

Image of a black spider spinning an an irregular web
A black widow spider builds three-dimensional cobwebs. Karen Sloane-Williams/500Px Plus via Getty Images

Compare that to the cobweb, a structure that is most often seen by the baseboards in your home. While the term cobweb is commonly used to refer to any dusty, abandoned spiderweb, it is actually a specific web shape typically designed by spiders in the family Theridiidae. This spiderweb has a complex, three-dimensional architecture. Lines of silk extend downwards from the 3D tangle and are held affixed to the ground under high tension. These lines act as a sticky, spring-loaded booby trap to capture crawling prey such as ants and beetles. When an insect makes contact with the glue at the base of the line, the silk detaches from the ground, sometimes with enough force to lift the meal into the air.

Watch a redback spider build the high-tension lines of a cobweb and ensnare unsuspecting ants.

Web weirdos

Imagine you are an unsuspecting beetle, navigating your way between strands of grass when you come upon a tightly woven silken floor. As you begin to walk across the mat, you see eight eyes peeking out of a silken funnel – just before you’re quickly snatched up as a meal.

Spiders such as funnel-web weavers construct thick silk mats on the ground that they use as an extension of their sensory systems. The spider waits patiently in its funnel-shaped retreat. Prey that come in contact with the web create vibrations that alert the spider a tasty treat is walking across the welcome mat and it’s time to pounce.

A light-brown spider facing the camera, with a funnel shaped web surrounding it
A funnel-web spider peeks out of its web in the ground. sandra standbridge/Moment via Getty Images

Jumping spiders are another unusual web spinner. They are well known for their varied colorations, elaborate courtship dances and being some of the most charismatic arachnids. Their cuteness has made them popular, thanks to Lucas the Spider, an adorable cartoon jumping spider animated by Joshua Slice. With two huge front eyes giving them depth perception, these spiders are fantastic hunters, capable of jumping in any direction to navigate their environment and hunt.

But what happens when they misjudge a jump, or worse, need to escape a predator? Jumpers use their silk as a safety tether to anchor themselves to surfaces before leaping through the air. If the jump goes wrong, they can climb back up their tether, allowing them to try again. Not only does this safety line of silk give them a chance for a redo, it also helps with making the jump. The tether helps them control the direction and speed of their jump in midair. By changing how fast they release the silk, they can land exactly where they want to.

A brown spider with green iridescence in mid-air, tethered to a leaf behind it with a thin strand of silk
A jumping spider uses a safety tether of silk as it makes a risky jump. Fresnelwiki/Wikimedia CommonsCC BY-SA

To weave a web

All webs, from the orb web to the seemingly chaotic cobweb, are built through a series of basic, distinct steps.

Orb-weaving spiders usually start with a proto-web. Scientists think this initial construction is an exploratory stage, when the spider assesses the space available and finds anchor points for its silk. Once the spider is ready to build its main web, it will use the proto-web as a scaffold to create the frame, spokes and spiral that will help with absorbing energy and capturing prey. These structures are vital for ensuring that their next meal won’t rip right through the web, especially insects such as dragonflies that have an average cruising speed of 10 mph. When complete, the orb weaver will return to the center of the web to wait for its next meal.

The diversity in a spider’s web can’t all be achieved with one material. In fact, spiders can create up to seven types of silk, and orb weavers make them all. Each silk type has different material and mechanical properties, serving a specific use within the spider’s life. All spider silk is created in the silk glands, and each different type of silk is created by its own specialized gland.

A pale brown spider at the center of its spiral patterned  orb-web
A European garden spider builds a two-dimensional orb web. Massimiliano Finzi/Moment via Getty Images

Orb weavers rely on the stiff nature of the strongest fibers in their arsenal for framing webs and as a safety line. Conversely, the capture spiral of the orb web is made with extremely stretchy silk. When a prey item gets caught in the spiral, the impact pulls on the silk lines. These fibers stretch to dissipate the energy to ensure the prey doesn’t just tear through the web.

Spider glue is a modified silk type with adhesive properties and the only part of the spiderweb that is actually sticky. This gluey silk, located on the capture spiral, helps make sure that the prey stays stuck in the web long enough for the spider to deliver a venomous bite.

To wrap up

Spiders and their webs are incredibly varied. Each spider species has adapted to live within its environmental niche and capture certain types of prey. Next time you see a spiderweb, take a moment to observe it rather than brushing it away or squishing the spider inside.

Notice the differences in web structure, and see whether you can spot the glue droplets. Look for the way that the spider is sitting in its web. Is it currently eating, or are there discarded remains of the insects it has prevented from wandering into your home?

Observing these arachnid architects can reveal a lot about design, architecture and innovation.The Conversation

Ella Kellner, Ph.D. Student in Biological Sciences, University of North Carolina – Charlotte

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Japanese film noir High and Low is a remarkable example of nail-biting tension – and now it’s inspired Spike Lee

Toho
Kristian RamsdenUniversity of Adelaide

“Wake up y’all. The king is here!”

So proclaims Denzel Washington in Spike Lee’s new film, Highest 2 Lowest, where Washington portrays a hip hop mogul, David King, who finds himself the centre of a high-profile kidnapping case.

Highest 2 Lowest is a remake of Akira Kurosawa’s 1963 classic crime drama High and Low. In that film, Toshiro Mifune plays high powered executive Kingo Gondo, who, on the eve of the most important night of his career, receives a surprising phone call informing him that his son has been kidnapped.

Kurosawa’s film begins as a corporate thriller before transforming into a police procedural as detectives traverse the streets of Yokohama in the hope of solving the crime. At the same time, the film sees the director examining social tensions under the surface of reconstruction-era Japan.

More than just a historical document, the film stands up as a remarkable example in nail-biting tension, 60 years after release.

From America …

Kurosawa’s original film is already derived from an American source, adapted from King’s Ransom (1959), an instalment in a series of police procedural paperbacks collectively titled 87th precinct, from author Ed McBain.

The novel’s prose is streamlined and action oriented. Simple sentences like “The room was full of cigarette smoke” or “The 87th Precinct building was on Grover Avenue” read like blueprints for a screenplay.

McBain was a pseudonym for the screenwriter Evan Hunter, who would adapt many of his own novels, including King’s Ransom, for a short lived TV series of the same name which aired from 1961–62.

The series was a late entry in a trend of procedural TV shows popular in Eisenhower’s America, epitomised by The Naked City (1958–63) and Dragnet (1951–59).

… to Japan

The Japanese studio Toho bought the rights for King’s Ransom for US$5,000 in 1961. Kurosawa must have sensed the opportunity for second chance, having been disappointed in his earlier attempt to make a detective film with 1949’s Stray Dog.

However, believing McBain’s novel “wasn’t particularly well written”, he started to make radical adjustments.

The biggest change Kurosawa makes to the novel is to split it into two distinct sections.

In the first half, Kurosawa takes the majority of McBain’s novel and restricts it to the sleek living room of Gondo’s nouveau riche mansion. Gondo’s luxurious air conditioned home overlooks the sweltering overcrowded shanty towns of Yokohama – yet the curtains are often drawn.

This section resembles a chamber-play. Kurosawa’s masterful blocking of the actors forces the audience’s eyes to shift around the widescreen frame; examining each character’s reaction in real time to every gradual reveal of information.

In the second half, Kurosawa abandons the claustrophobia of Gondo’s living room and sends the investigation into the streets below. Abandoning the plot of the novel, this is when the film’s observations of contemporary Japanese society come to the forefront.

An era of Americanisation

The film comments on the “Americanisation” of Japan that took place in the postwar era. Following the end of American Occupation, Japan entered into an unprecedented period of production, prosperity and profit known as the Economic Miracle.

A huge demand for “Western” cultural and commercial goods reshaped much of private and public life. The “three sacred treasures” of domestic goods during the 1960s would be the colour television, the automobile and the air conditioner. The continued presence of United States Army bases allowed the proliferation of American comic books and magazines, jazz and rock ‘n’ roll records.

But for the Japanese, America was both a figure of aspirational culture, and of ongoing military control. During protests in 1960 hundreds of thousands protested against American military expansion. Violent clashes with the police ensued, and one young student was killed. US President Dwight D. Eisenhower cancelled a scheduled visit and Japanese Prime Minister Nobusuke Kishi was forced to resign.

A crowd gathers.
In the first half, the film resembles a chamber-play. Toho

This split vision of America is almost directly reflected in the dual structure of High and Low. Gondo’s home represents desire; the streets of Yokohama represent violence, and Kurosawa employs the aesthetic of film noir in intensifying the anxiety of the urban environment.

The film was released one year prior to the 1964 Tokyo Olympics, which sought to reintroduce Japan onto the world stage, showcasing the country’s remarkable transformation.

Kurosawa presents audiences with the repercussions of such progression, asking us to consider the lives and choices of those who have been left behind.

And back to America again

Kurosawa’s films have proved fertile material for American remakes. Seven Samurai (1954) became The Magnificent Seven (1960 and 2016); Yojimbo (1961) became A Fistful of Dollars (1964) and Last Man Standing (1996); and The Hidden Fortress (1958) was an inspiration behind Star Wars (1977).

High and Low has long been earmarked for an American remake. In 1993, Martin Scorsese tried to get a version off the ground, and in 2008 Scorsese tried to pass directing duties to Mike Nichols. Now finally, Lee’s version has premiered at Cannes and to positive reviews.

A man half in shadows.
Kurosawa’s original film continues to impress over half a decade later. Toho

Kurosawa’s original film continues to impress over half a decade later.

It is ranked 77 on IMDb’s top 250 films of all time and is number six on a similar list from Letterboxd.

In late 2024, the film received a 4K restoration and, along with numerous other Kurosawa classics, was part of a Kurosawa retrospective across cinemas worldwide.

The film has had a remarkable shelf life. It has transcended not only its low brow source material but also language, culture and history.

If Lee’s remake manages to capture even a small portion of the original, then it’s sure to be a great film.The Conversation

Kristian Ramsden, PhD Candidate in English, Creative Writing and Film, University of Adelaide

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

AI companies want copyright exemption, but the arts minister says there are ‘no plans’ to weaken these laws. What’s going on?

John PottsMacquarie University

“We have copyright laws,” said arts minister Tony Burke last week. “We have no plans, no intention, no appetite to be weakening those copyright laws based on this draft report that’s floating around.”

He was referring to the Productivity Commission’s controversial floating of a text and data mining exception to the Australian Copyright Act, which would make it legal to train artificial intelligence (AI) large language models, such as ChatGPT, on copyrighted Australian work.

In the internet age, all that is solid melts into data, easily copied and distributed instantly across the internet. This includes the work of authors, songwriters and artists, ostensibly protected by the law of copyright.

“The rampant opportunism of big tech aiming to pillage other people’s work for their own profit is galling and shameful,” songwriter, author and former arts minister Peter Garrett told the Australian last week, in response to the Productivity Commission’s report.

He urged the federal government

to urgently strengthen copyright laws to help preserve cultural sovereignty and our valuable intellectual property in the face of powerful corporate forces who want to strip mine it and pay nothing.

I have researched how piracy, illegal streaming and remix culture violate these rights. Somehow, authors and artists have survived over 25 years of it. But AI poses a new threat.

AI companies pushing against copyright

“You can’t be expected to have a successful AI program when every single article, book, or anything else that you’ve read or studied, you’re supposed to pay for,” United States president Donald Trump said at an AI Summit last month, launching his government’s AI Action Plan.

On July 23, he signed a trio of executive orders, including one on preventing “woke” AI in the US government, one on deregulating AI development (including removing environmental protections that could hamper the construction of data centres) and another on promoting the export of American AI technology.

Major AI companies, including Google and Microsoft, have put the copyright exemption argument to the Australian government.

Australian tech billionaire Scott Farquhar, co-founder of software company Atlassian and chair of the Tech Council of Australia, said in a National Press Club address on 30 July that our “outdated” copyright laws are a barrier for AI companies wanting to train or host their models here.

He explicitly called for a text and data mining exception like the one the Productivity Commission is floating.

What is an author?

In the early 19th century, English poet and literary critic Samuel Taylor Coleridge defined the poet – or creative author – as an elevated representative of the human race: a cultural hero worthy of the highest respect. The genius author was a divinely inspired creator of completely original works. And the best way to understand the meaning of a work was to determine the author’s intention in creating it.

Tech companies promise their advanced AI systems are capable of creating new creative works. But for most of us, we read to find truths about humanity, or reflections of it.

“The interaction in your own mind, is very much with the author,” reflected arts minister Burke last week.

Roland Barthes, in his 1968 essay The Death of the Author argued language itself, in its constant flux and change, is what generates new work. He proposed a new model for the author: a scriptor, or copyist, who mixes writings, none of them original, so a new work is a “tissue of quotations” drawn from the “immense dictionary” of language. Ironically, in this way, Barthes predicted AI.

A shift in wealth

Established in the 18th century, copyright enabled an author, songwriter or artist to make a living from royalties. It was meant to protect authors from illegal copying of their works.

The 21st century marked a massive shift in the wealth generated by creativity. Authors, and especially songwriters, suffered an enormous loss of revenue in the period 2000-2015, due to online piracy. In 1999, global revenue for the music industry was US$39 billion; in 2014, that figure fell to $15 billion.

At the same time, the owners of online platforms and big tech companies – who benefited from clicks to pirate sites offering works stolen from artists – enjoyed soaring profits. Google’s annual revenue jumped from US$0.4 billion in 2002 to $74.5 billion in 2015.

Several author and publisher lawsuits are underway regarding the unauthorised use of books by to train large language models. In June, a US federal judge ruled Anthropic did not breach copyright in using books to train its model, comparing the process to a “reader aspiring to be a writer”.

Copyright law reformers in the US have proposed that because all creativity is algorithmic, involving the novel combination of words, images or sounds, then an AI model, which uses algorithms to generate new works, should have its works protected by copyright. This would raise AI-as-author to the same legal status as human authors. These reformers believe rejecting this argument betrays an anthropocentric or “speciesist” bias.

If AI models were legally accepted as authors, this would represent another blow to the esteem accorded human authors.

‘Erasure disguised as efficiency’

An AI model may be capable of generating works of fiction, but these works will be poor imitations of human creativity. The missing element: emotion. Works of fiction come from an author’s lifetime of experiences, from joy to grief, and the work engages readers or viewers on an emotional level.

The emotional capacity of an AI model: zero.

I have seen some atrocious AI-generated non-fiction books for sale on Amazon. The tell-tale signs are: no author byline, and sentences such as: “Since my dataset has not been updated since 2023, I cannot provide information past that date.” If someone buys those books, the publisher and Amazon will profit. No royalties will be paid to an author.

This is happening in other media, too. In the Hollywood Reporter last month, British producer Remy Blumenfeld told of a “showrunner with multiple global hits” being asked to rewrite a pilot generated by ChatGPT. He called it “erasure disguised as efficiency”.

In January, the US Authors Guild introduced an official certification system, for use by its members, to indicate that a book is human written. In April, the European Writers Council also called for “an effective transparency obligation for AI-generated products that clearly distinguishes them from the works made by human beings”.

In 2025, readers still flock to writers’ festivals, and we still esteem great authors as cultural heroes. But this status is threatened by AI. We must resist the possibility that human authors become mere content in AI systems’ datasets.

The ultimate degradation would be for authors to become unwilling data donors to AI. Big tech must be opposed in that ambition.The Conversation

John Potts, Professor of Media, Macquarie University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

As human teams get bigger, they get less efficient. But these ants have found a solution

Chris Reid
Chris R. ReidMacquarie University and Daniele CarlessoMax Planck Institute of Animal Behavior

Have you ever been part of a large group project? You might assume that with more people involved, the work gets done better and faster.

However, as more team members join the group, the effectiveness of each individual doesn’t increase. It doesn’t even stay constant – it gets worse. Many hands may make light work, but too many cooks spoil the broth.

This paradox is known as the Ringelmann effect, named after French engineer Max Ringelmann who discovered it in the late 19th century. When he measured the force produced by students pulling on a rope, he found that as more students joined the task, the total pulling force increased – but the average effort per individual decreased.

This decline was due to two main factors: the difficulty of coordinating within larger teams, and “social loafing”, the tendency for individuals to reduce effort when they feel less accountable within a group.

But many animal species, from fish schools to lion prides, cooperate successfully in large groups. Could they somehow overcome this decline in efficiency?

If any animal could, it would be ants. In a new study published in Current Biology, we aimed to find out whether weaver ant chains suffered from the Ringelmann effect.

Group work – for ants

Ants are champions of collective action, seamlessly coordinating complex tasks across colonies of millions. And among all ant species, the weaver ants (Oecophylla smaragdina) are a standout example.

Weaver ants craft treetop nests by pulling living leaves together and binding them with larval silk. To do so, they form “pulling chains” – each ant gripping the waist of another with its jaws and pulling in unison. The mechanical advantage of these chains has never been investigated.

Weaver ants build a treetop leaf nest. Chris Reid

We encouraged ants to form chains to pull an artificial paper leaf attached to a force meter which continuously monitored their collective force output. As more ants joined and left the pulling team, we could see how the group’s output changed in real time.

We hypothesised that the force per individual would decrease as chains grew, an idea supported by previous ant research. For instance, fire ants (Solenopsis invicta) are known to link together into sticky, raft-like balls to survive floods. When researchers pulled apart balls of varying size, larger groups showed signs of the Ringelmann effect, displaying less resistance per ant as group size increased.

To our surprise, we found that as more weaver ants joined the pulling team, the total force increased as expected – but so did the force per ant. In other words, individual weaver ants actually became more effective as team size grew.

The weaver ants, it seems, are not only able to avoid the Ringelmann effect – they are “superefficient” in their teamwork.

A group of ants curving a triangular piece of paper with pulling chains clearly visible.
Weaver ants formed chains to pull the paper ‘leaf’ into a nest shape. Chris Reid

A division of labour

How do weaver ants achieve superefficiency? Is it just a matter of adding more ants to the mix?

Not necessarily.

Superefficiency seems to depend on how ants arrange themselves. Weaver ants performed best when arranging into a single, long chain rather than several short ones.

We also noticed that the posture of ants differed depending on their position in a chain. Ants at the rear stretched out their hind legs – a posture which helps them passively resist the counter-force of the leaf.

Ants positioned in the middle or front of the chain instead maintained a more crouched posture, typically associated with active pulling. This pattern hinted at a division of labour within chains.

Ants with amber legs and green abdomens forming clearly visible chains on a paper leaf.
Ants change their roles in the pulling chain depending on where they are positioned. Chris Reid

In our study, we propose a mechanism we call the “force ratchet”. The weakest link in pulling chains is not the ants’ connections to each other, but their grip on the ground.

When pulling alone, the maximum pulling force an ant can produce is limited by slipping. But in a chain, rear ants can act as passive resisters, increasing the contact to the ground and preventing slippage.

This allows the front ants to pull harder, storing and transmitting force through the chain itself. This division of labour locks in the force and prevents backsliding.

More is different

While speculative, our model provides a compelling new perspective on how teams might overcome the common pitfall of the Ringelmann effect, at least in the application of physical force.

Future experiments – such as varying the slipperiness of the ground or the leaf weight – will be critical to confirm our force ratchet hypothesis.

A team of ants working together to pull on a piece of paper.
In a chain, rear ants can help the group increase contact with the ground to prevent slippage. Chris Reid

Our research has broad implications, especially for the field of autonomous robotics. In swarm robotics, teams of small, inexpensive robots are designed to collaborate to achieve tasks beyond the capabilities of any single group member.

Yet, so far, pulling robot teams have at best achieved linear scaling: doubling the number of robots doubles the force output. This means robots may not be suffering from the Ringelmann effect, but they’re also not “superefficient”.

Programming robots with ant-mimicking strategies – such as the weaver ants’ force ratchet – could improve their performance and allow machines to become more than the sum of their parts.

Our study also challenges the ubiquity of the Ringelmann effect. Sometimes, when it comes to teamwork, more is different. And for some animals at least, more really is better. If weaver ants were cooks, it’s fair to say they might just make the best broth.The Conversation

Chris R. Reid, ARC Future Fellow, Behavioural Ecology, Macquarie University and Daniele Carlesso, Postdoctoral Fellow, Max Planck Institute of Animal Behavior

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

A cornucopia of tiny, bizarre whales used to live in Australian waters – here’s one of them

Art by Ruairidh Duncan
Erich FitzgeraldMuseums Victoria Research Institute and Ruairidh DuncanMonash University

Australia is home to a unique bunch of native land mammals, such as koalas, wombats and wallabies. These furballs evolved in isolation on this island continent and have become Australian symbols.

But between 27 and 23 million years ago, the coastal seas of Australia were also home to sea mammals found almost nowhere else: whales.

But not just any old whales. These creatures were among the strangest of all whales, called mammalodontids. If alive today, mammalodontids would be as iconically Australian as kangaroos.

Recent fossil discoveries from coastal Victoria reveal that not just one or two species, but a cornucopia of these wonderfully weird whales once called Australia home.

Our latest find, a roughly 25-million-year-old fossil of a newly named whale species Janjucetus dullardi, joins their bizarre ranks. Our discovery is published today in the Zoological Journal of the Linnean Society.

Baleen whales without baleen

Today, some of the most iconic whale species, such as blue and humpback whales, are baleen whales. These ocean giants use hair-like structures in their mouths, called baleen, to filter plankton – their main food source.

By contrast, mammalodontids were small-bodied (no longer than three metres), big-eyed, and had short jaws lined with teeth. Despite this description, we know that mammalodontids were, in fact, baleen whales … that lacked baleen. They were like an offshoot from the main evolutionary branch leading to today’s toothless giants.

All mammalodontid fossils date from the late Oligocene epoch – 27 to 23 million years ago. And three out of four named species have been found on Victoria’s Surf Coast, south-east of Melbourne.

Mammalodontid whales of Jan Juc, Victoria. Art by Ruairidh Duncan

The first mammalodontid was found in 1932, and in 1939 was given the name Mammalodon colliveri. It had blunt jaw bones with extensive blood and nerve supply for face and lip muscles. Curiously, the teeth were worn down to the gums, suggesting it fed by slurping prey (along with abrasive grit) from the seabed.

In 2006, local naturalist Staumn Hunder found the first fossil of a species later named after him, Janjucetus hunderi. This whale sported a robust triangular snout with sharp teeth and powerful jaw-closing muscles.

If Mammalodon’s skull proclaims “I’m a sucker”, the skull of Janjucetus screams “biter and ripper”. It’s about as heavy metal as whale skulls get, departing radically from those of all other whales.

Although Mammalodon colliveri and Janjucetus hunderi hint at a surprisingly wide range of lifestyles for mammalodontids, the details of exactly how and when they became so different from other whales remain murky.

Fossil skulls of mammalodontid whales from left to right: Mammalodon colliveriJanjucetus dullardiJanjucetus hunderi. Tom Breakwell, Museums Victoria

A tiny new whale

In 2019, school principal Ross Dullard found a whale fossil eroding out of rocks along the coast at Jan Juc in Victoria.

Dullard donated his find to Museums Victoria, where it was painstakingly cleaned and repaired in the laboratory so we could study it.

The fossil skull of Janjucetus dullardi was found along the coast of Jan Juc in the south-east of Australia. Art by Ruairidh Duncan, graphic by Erich Fitzgerald

As we describe in our new paper, Dullard’s find is a mammalodontid like Janjucetus hunderi, yet with different enough teeth and ear bones to warrant the naming of a new species: Janjucetus dullardi.

Incomplete fusion between skull bones, minimal tooth wear, and open tooth root canals tell us the animal was not fully grown when it died, possibly being a juvenile.

Artist’s reconstruction of the complete skull of Janjucetus dullardi. Parts preserved in the fossil are white and light grey. Art by Ruairidh Duncan

But just how small was it?

Using an equation that takes into account measurements of skull width compared with the total length of whales, we predicted that Janjucetus dullardi was about two metres long – small enough to fit on a standard single bed.

This makes it the smallest fossil whale discovered in Australia, and perhaps the first fossil of a juvenile whale found here.

The newly described fossil whale Janjucetus dullardi (2 metres long) next to a modern fin whale (26 metres) and a human diver (2 metres). Art by Ruairidh Duncan, graphic by Erich Fitzgerald

A warm-water paradise

Janjucetus dullardi and its fellow mammalodontids lived during the Late Oligocene Warming, between 26 and 23 million years ago. The coastal waters of Victoria were as warm as those off present-day northeast New South Wales, and the sea level was higher.

Small, toothy whales clearly didn’t mind this long summer of balmy, sunlit waters: 80% of the dozens of whale fossils found in Victoria from that era are mammalodontids – mostly unnamed species. In contrast, rocks of the same age in New Zealand have yielded just one mammalodontid from a century of intensive fossil whale collecting.

Unfortunately, the mammalodontid paradise was lost. By about 22 million years ago, mammalodontids had gone extinct, no longer playing a part in the ongoing saga of baleen whale evolution. Global cooling at about 23 million years ago resulted in lower sea levels and the loss of the mammalodontids’ shallow coastal habitat.

Janjucetus dullardi calf and mother swimming through the shallow seas off Victoria, 25 million years ago. Art by Ruairidh Duncan

If we know how their story ends, the beginning is still a mystery. Our research on Janjucetus dullardi and its kin suggests mammalodontids must have originated long before the age of their oldest known fossils, maybe 34 million years ago.

We suspect that the cradle of their evolution was here, in splendid isolation off southern Australia – home of the mammalodontids.The Conversation

Erich Fitzgerald, Senior Curator, Vertebrate Palaeontology, Museums Victoria Research Institute and Ruairidh Duncan, PhD Candidate, Palaeontology, Monash University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Cairns (1964)

by NFSA
Now in 4K! 'Life in Australia: Cairns' (1964) offers a postcard-perfect snapshot of life in Far North Queensland during the mid-1960s. The 'Life in Australia' series, produced by the Commonwealth Film Unit for the Department of Immigration, was designed to promote Australia to prospective migrants. They highlighted their destinations' natural beauty, industry and leisurely pace of life.

In 'Cairns', we see a tropical city framed by cane fields and coastline, where the rhythms of sugar harvesting meet the seasonal buzz of winter tourism. As with other films in this series, 'Cairns' presents a highly polished version of daily life: a vision of Australia shaped by optimism, uniformity and the government agendas of the time.

These films are fascinating cultural artefacts – not just for what they show, but for how they show it. Viewed today, 'Life in Australia: Cairns' offers insights into Australia’s postwar identity and values, and the idealised image the country wanted the world to see. From the Film Australia Collection, National Film and Sound Archive of Australia

Call for applications to join the Aged Care Council of Elders

August 15, 2025
The Australian Government is now seeking applications from older people with lived experience of the aged care system to join the Aged Care Council of Elders from January 2026.

The Council of Elders is a diverse group of older people representing the make-up of modern Australia which delivers advice to government on how best to support older Australians in aged care.

The Australian Government established the Council of Elders in 2021 following the Royal Commission into Aged Care Quality and Safety, which called for an advisory body on quality and safety of care, and the rights and dignity of older people.

Older people across Australia who want to listen to their peers about what’s important to them when it comes to living and ageing well, and how the quality of care can be improved, are encouraged to apply.

Suitable applicants will demonstrate how they are active in their communities, engaging with people about key issues and bringing that feedback to Government.

We encourage you to apply if your experience of aged care includes: 
  • receiving services at home or living in residential aged care
  • caring for an older person or having worked in aged care
  • living in rural or remote locations 
  • Culturally and Linguistically Diverse (CALD) communities
  • Care for older Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander people
  • dementia care.
Appointments will be for a term of up to two years, commencing from January 2026.

Find details on how to apply by visiting www.health.gov.au/apply-to-council-of-elders-2026

Applications close 5pm, Friday 26 September 2025.

Read more about the Council of Elders and the Terms of Reference on the council’s webpage. 

Minister for Aged Care and Seniors, The Hon. Sam Rae said:

“The Council of Elders plays a crucial role in bringing a range of diverse views and insights to Government when it comes to aged care.

“I encourage every older Australian with lived experience of aged care and active community networks to nominate as a member of the Council of Elders. 

“Membership of the Council is a unique opportunity to represent the community and work alongside the Government to build an aged care system that delivers world-class care for every older Australian.”

Vale David Stratton

Film critic, writer and educator David Stratton, who appeared on Australian screens alongside Margaret Pomeranz for decades on various movie review shows, has passed away, aged 85.

His family announced his death on Thursday afternoon, August 14, stating he died peacefully in hospital near his home in the Blue Mountains.

"David's passion for film, commitment to Australian cinema, and generous spirit touched countless lives," his family said.

"He was adored as a husband, father, grand and great grand father and admired friend.

"David's family would like to express their heartfelt gratitude for the overwhelming support from friends, colleagues, and the public recently and across his lifetime."

Photo: Bidgee

David Stratton was always ‘doing it for the audience’. In this, he had a huge impact on Australian film

Franco Origlia/Getty Images
Steven MarasThe University of Western Australia

Celebrated film critic David Stratton has died at the age of 85. He leaves an indelible mark on Australian film culture, and Australian film culture left an indelible mark on him.

Over a long career, he had an intimate relationship with cinema, finding it a place of connection and a kind of shelter. It was where he spent time with his grandmother and time away from the family grocery business that loomed large over his future.

Stratton’s migration to Australia in 1963 as a 10 pound pom became permanent as he took on the role of director of the Sydney Film Festival from 1966 to 1983.

In that role, he shaped a generation of young filmmakers who would come to define the Australian New Wave. He found a new sense of belonging.

His 1980 book, The Last New Wave, is explicitly a homage to

the men and women who work in the Australian film industry [who] make up as fine a group of people as anyone would want to know.

Becoming a critic

The festival director role led to his relationship with SBS, who hired Stratton as a part-time feature film consultant from 1980 – an arrangement which he translated into on screen introductions for what became Movie of the Week, as well as Cinema Classics in 1983.

Here, he met producer Margaret Pomeranz, who became his professional collaborator, co-presenter and loyal friend. Their on-air partnership, lasting 28 years across the SBS and the ABC program, At the Movies, made them icons of Australian film culture.

In writing my book on At the Movies, I heard numerous versions of the question, “are you a Margaret or a David?” The collection of their reviews on Letterboxd can be searched by the tags “Oh, David” and “Oh, Margaret”.

A cultural icon

The words “cultural icon” can be over-used, but in the case of Stratton, the emphasis was on substance over show. He never finished high school or studied at university, but wrote three books on Australian cinema, two movie guides, and a biography, I Peed on Fellini (2008).

He was passionate and protective of film, no more so than when he was battling censorship. In the case of Ken Park (2002), because of restrictions on the viewing of the film, few could argue with the decision on the facts of the case. However, Stratton, who had seen the film, declared “We’re being lied to”.

Stratton was a seasoned critic and performer, and knew how to manage his persona. He worked as a film reviewer for The Weekend Australian for 33 years, was a regular reviewer for Variety from 1984 to 2003, using the moniker “Strat”, while also making contributions to The Age and segments on radio station 2UE.

Following the end of At the Movies, he ventured into reviewing on the internet through “David Stratton Recommends” a collaboration with art house film exhibitors in Melbourne, Sydney and Perth, and he ran a history of world cinema course at the University of Sydney’s Centre for Continuing Education, which he concluded in 2023.

Underpinning all of this is a commitment to the audience. He noted in interview:

I think everybody who is writing about film or talking about film is doing it for the audience that is reading or listening.

In praise of cinema

When I interviewed Stratton in 2019, giving generously of his time, he established quickly that he would only tolerate so much academic jargon and pretentiousness.

When we did The Movie Show, and I think Margaret would back me up, we were never wanting to intellectualise any of this. We wanted to get across to a wide television audience our love of film, or our disappointment in certain things. We always liked to praise films more than to not praise them, and we didn’t have the time or the inclination to analyse them in too much detail.

A cinephile before the age of DVDs and streaming, Stratton retained a certain puritanical approach to film, guarding its preciousness:

When I was growing up, films were hard to see. I would go to see a film in the cinema and very often that film, if it was not a huge success and therefore would be revived, you might not see it again, ever, unless it came on television.

This led to his famously obsessive system of notetaking and cataloguing.

This informed a certain conservativism, most famously expressed in his dislike of badly used hand-held cameras, but manifested in other ways.

It always amazes me when I see people watching movies on their mobile phone on the train and then they say they’ve seen the film. They haven’t seen the film obviously. If somebody thinks they’ve seen Joker on a phone, well good luck to them but they haven’t.

Stratton increasingly saw television reviewing as a demand on his other pursuits, not to mention his habit of watching a film a day.

A final farewell

We have in a sense been saying an extended farewell since the end of At the Movies in 2014.

Attempting to sum up a career is always difficult, but it is a responsibility Stratton lived with constantly. This is captured in one comment, perhaps the closest we will come to his philosophy of reviewing:

the reviewer has a big responsibility I think, a very big responsibility. Because after all it’s only their opinion, they’re obviously being honest – well they should be honest – with their opinion, but it only is their opinion and you’re talking about possibly destroying something that the people who created it spent years of their lives working on. It’s a pretty big responsibility.

This article draws on the author’s book At the Movies, Film Reviewing, and Screenwriting: Selective Affinities and Cultural Mediation, published by Intellect Press.The Conversation

Steven Maras, Associate Professor in Media and Communication, The University of Western Australia

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Online Registration FREE Scams Awareness Training

ONLINE Event Details:
Date: Friday, 22 August 2025
Time: 10:00 AM – 12:00 PM  AEST 
Cost: FREE 

If you would like to attend on-line please register here and a link will be sent to you from cota@cota.org.au.

If you have any issues, please email cota@cota.org.au.

To read more about this event visit: 

Aged care service delivery: Senate Inquiry

On 28 July 2025, the Senate referred an inquiry into aged care service delivery to the Community Affairs References Committee for report by 15 September 2025.

Submissions Close 22 August 2025.

Further detail about the scope of the inquiry is provided in the terms of reference.

Terms of Reference
The implications for older Australians, their families, carers, service providers and state and territory health systems of the Government’s decision to delay the commencement of the new Support at Home program until 1 November 2025 while also withholding the release of any additional Home Care Packages, with particular reference to:

(a) the impact of the delay on older Australians waiting for support at home, including unmet care needs and the wellbeing of seniors and their carers;

(b) the capacity of the Commonwealth Home Support Programme to meet increased demand for support at home prior to 1 November 2025;

(c) the impacts on aged care service providers, including on their workforce;

(d) the impacts on hospitals and state and territory health systems;

(e) the feasibility of achieving the Government’s target to reduce waiting times for Home Care Packages to 3 months by 1 July 2027, in light of the delay;

(f) the adequacy of the governance, assurance and accountability frameworks supporting the digital transformation projects required to deliver the aged care reforms on time;

(g) the implementation of the single assessment system and its readiness to support people to access a timely assessment now and beyond 1 November 2025; and

(h) any other related matters.

Walk & Talk: Narrabeen

The Belong Club invites anyone to come and participate in the Belong Club Walking Group!

Every Tuesday we walk along the pathway beside the Narrabeen Lagoon, from the Tramshed Arts and Community Centre to Jamieson Park and back. The route is about 1.8km each way, and is estimated to take 45 minutes.

The up and back walk allows for people of any walking speed to participate and enjoy the walk at their own comfortable pace. Walkers often split into smaller groups naturally along the route allowing everyone to go at their preferred pace. The aim here is for everyone to be included and to have an enjoyable walk.

Our meeting spot is to the right of the Tramshed Community Centre, between the basketball court and kids playground.

Alzheimer’s disease: lithium may help slow cognitive decline – new research in mice

Previous research has shown that as people move from mild cognitive impairment to Alzheimer’s disease, their lithium levels drop. photo_gonzo/ Shutterstock
Rahul SidhuUniversity of Sheffield

Alzheimer’s disease steals memories and devastates lives. Yet despite an abundance of research, the earliest brain changes that trigger this disease still remain unclear, making it challenging to find effective treatments.

But could lithium – a metal most of us know better for its use in batteries or as a treatment for mood disorders – play a role in cognitive health? New research shows that this mineral may play a key role in protecting against Alzheimer’s disease.

Alzheimer’s is linked to the buildup of two harmful proteins: amyloid-beta and tau. Amyloid-beta clumps outside brain cells (neurons), forming sticky plaques that block communication. Tau twists into tangles inside cells, disrupting their structure and function. Together, they damage the delicate network of neurons that supports memory and thinking.

But for nearly a decade now, scientists from Harvard University have also been uncovering lithium’s unexpected importance in the brain.

Lithium is naturally present in small amounts in the brain. This lithium comes from our diet, where it’s transported through the bloodstream to the brain’s cells. But researchers have found that as people move from mild cognitive impairment – a stage often seen as a warning sign for Alzheimer’s – to full Alzheimer’s disease, their lithium levels drop. This loss of lithium appears to set off the cascade of changes that lead to memory loss and confusion.

This recent study now helps to explain why a loss of lithium is linked with Alzheimer’s disease. The study showed that lithium acts as a natural defender – helping to keep amyloid and tau in check. When lithium levels fall, the brain becomes more vulnerable to these toxic proteins.

Researchers uncovered this connection by conducting postmortem examinations of brain tissue taken from people who had been in different stages of cognitive health. Those with mild cognitive impairment had noticeably less lithium in their brains compared to those who had been in good cognitive health. Levels were even lower in Alzheimer’s patients.

Interestingly, they found that the lithium doesn’t just disappear. Much of it becomes trapped within amyloid plaques, which lock it away from the brain cells where it’s needed most. This means even if total lithium levels don’t drop drastically, brain cells may still be starved of its protective effects.

So to explore what happens when lithium is missing completely, the scientists then studied mice – both healthy mice and mice that had been genetically engineered to develop Alzheimer’s symptoms. They cut the mice’s dietary lithium by 50% and observed the results.

The effects were striking. Mice with reduced lithium showed faster amyloid and tau buildup, more brain inflammation and lost connections between neurons – all crucial for learning and memory. The genetically engineered mice also performed worse in memory tests.

A depiction of amyloid plaques forming between the brain's neurons.
Amyloid plaques built up more quickly when the mice had no lithium. nobeastsofierce/ Shutterstock

At the core of this process is an enzyme called GSK3β. Lithium normally keeps this enzyme under control. But when lithium is low, GSK3β becomes overactive, encouraging tau to behave abnormally and form tangles that damage neurons. This enzyme acts like a switch, tipping brain cells toward disease if unchecked.

The good news is the study didn’t stop at identifying the problem. Researchers treated mice with lithium orotate, a form of the mineral that’s less likely to get trapped by amyloid plaques. This treatment prevented the harmful buildup of amyloid-beta and tau, reduce inflammation, preserved neuron connections and improved memory.

Lithium’s importance

This research recasts lithium as more than a forgotten trace mineral. It appears to be a vital guardian of brain health, protecting neurons and maintaining cognitive function throughout life. Disrupting lithium balance might be one of the earliest steps toward Alzheimer’s – even before symptoms show.

Lithium’s protective role isn’t entirely new. It’s been used in psychiatry for decades, particularly to manage bipolar disorder where it stabilises mood. But medicinal doses are much higher than the tiny amounts naturally present in the brain. This study is the first to reveal that even these small, natural levels have a crucial protective function.

Beyond Alzheimer’s, lithium supports brain growth, shields nerve cells, and calms inflammation, all important for healthy ageing. Keeping lithium levels stable could have wider benefits in preventing dementia and supporting brain resilience.

One reason lithium hasn’t featured prominently in Alzheimer’s research before is its simplicity. It doesn’t target one molecule but acts like a conductor, balancing multiple brain processes. This makes it harder to study but no less important.

The discovery that lithium deficiency worsens Alzheimer’s damage opens new possibilities. Unlike current treatments focusing on removing amyloid plaques or tau tangles, lithium replacement could boost the brain’s defences.

Lithium orotate is especially promising because it doesn’t get trapped by amyloid and delivers lithium where neurons most need it. Lithium salts have long been used safely in medicine, so this approach could be easy and accessible for older adults.

Still, it’s unclear why lithium levels fall in some people. Is it due to diet, genetics or another cause? Could differences in the natural levels of lithium in drinking water worldwide influence Alzheimer’s risk? These puzzles invite future research.

It’s also important to note that much of this work was done in mice. While animal models offer valuable insights, human brains are more complex. Clinical trials will be needed to see if lithium orotate can safely prevent or slow Alzheimer’s in people.

We also don’t yet know how supplements or diet might affect brain lithium levels over time, or if this would be practical as treatment.

Still, the idea that a simple mineral could delay or prevent one of the world’s most devastating diseases is both exciting and hopeful.The Conversation

Rahul Sidhu, PhD Candidate, Neuroscience, University of Sheffield

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

View from The Hill: Albanese was Naïve to think Hamas wouldn’t welcome Palestinian recognition

Michelle GrattanUniversity of Canberra

If Anthony Albanese thought the government’s decision to recognise a Palestinian state would be a relatively smooth operation in terms of politics, he’s had a quick wake-up call.

Following Hamas’ predictable welcoming of his action, the prime minister now finds himself deep in a controversy that has exposed a degree of naivety in how he and his government are conducting foreign policy.

The pros and cons of recognising a Palestinian state at this point always involved matters of judgement rather than being straightforward.

Israel’s appalling overreach in Gaza invited the response from France, Britain, Canada and now Australia. As Chris Luxon, the conservative leader of New Zealand (now also considering recognition) put it, Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu has “lost the plot”.

On the other hand, it was obvious Hamas could argue recognition of Palestine just showed what its October 2023 attack had achieved. And there was no reason to think Israel would be influenced by what these countries did. After all, most countries globally have already recognised a state of Palestine. It appears only the United States holds the power to sway Israel.

The pressure on Albanese to recognise a Palestinian state mounted over months. It fitted with his own inclinations, held from when he was a young radical, and with Labor’s rank-and-file stance, reflected in the party platform. Foreign Minister Penny Wong had been leaning in for a year.

Crucially, the worse the conflict in Gaza became, the more a sizeable section of the public seemed sympathetic to making the gesture. Then came the stands by the three like-minded countries.

In the end, the prime minister just seems to have wanted to get it done. “We just can’t keep going the same way. The world is watching. People are sick of it. It’s horrific watching that,” he said this week.

The stipulations he spelled out just weeks ago, when he signalled recognition was not imminent, were no longer preconditions.

He’d said then, “How do you exclude Hamas from any involvement there? How do you ensure that a Palestinian state operates in an appropriate way which does not threaten the existence of Israel?”

Instead, in announcing recognition this week, Albanese relied on assurances from the Palestinian Authority, in its public statements and a phone call he had with its leader Mahmoud Abbas. He also took to heart the Arab League backing a call for Hamas to disarm.

Australian recognition, which Albanese said would come at the United nations General Assembly in September, became unconditional.

Here’s where the naivety kicks in. If he’s really relying on the Palestinian Authority’s word, that is flawed, on two grounds.

History indicates its word is hardly its bond. And even if it were, there is no reason to think it could deliver its various undertakings, including its own reform. Moreover, the assumption of its dominance in a post-war Gaza depends on a lot of “ifs”. One of these “ifs” is the expectation of elections. But even then, Hamas might find a way to survive and win.

Things got messy for Albanese when Hamas reacted to his announcement. The prime minister had predicted that “Hamas will be totally opposed to this decision” on the grounds it didn’t support a two-state solution.

That always seemed unlikely. Hamas is taking what it can get at the moment.

The first reaction was from Hamas co-founder Hassan Yousef, who lauded the “political courage” of the decision, in a statement from his office to the Sydney Morning Herald.

Hamas would later deny any statement could have been issued by Yousef, something quickly picked up by Albanese, who warned the media against Hamas “propaganda”.

Then in a formal statement to the ABC, Hamas praised the move (saying it was “better late than never”) but wanted more. “We call on the Australian government to translate this recognition into concrete actions – by exerting diplomatic pressure to end the Israeli occupation.”

This will feed into the calls from the left to impose sanctions on Israel. (The government has already sanctioned two extreme-right Israeli ministers.)

The recognition announcement has closed off one issue, but opened others.

The opposition has been predictable in its rejection of the recognition. But the shadow cabinet’s decision to go further and say that in office it would reverse the recognition, rather than leaving that decision for the future, was unnecessary and unwise. By the time the Coalition finally gets back into power, who knows what the situation will be in the Middle East?

Incidentally, Opposition Leader Sussan Ley’s choice of Michaelia Cash as shadow foreign minister was a strange one. Maybe Cash, who is the Liberal leader in the Senate, pitched very hard for it. Whatever the reason, she is an unnuanced political operator in a portfolio that often requires nuance.

The Albanese government’s decision on recognition has put further distance between Australia and the Trump administration. While the PM might think the dysfunction in this relationship doesn’t matter much because of Australians’ low regard for Trump, it remains important to get it back on an even keel.

That is something Albanese should address when he is in the US in September – when he has promised to meet Abbas – whether or not he lands a meeting with Trump himself.The Conversation

Michelle Grattan, Professorial Fellow, University of Canberra

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Northern Beaches Police Area Command: Retired police day 2025

What you want for aged care workforce: NSA Report

August 15, 2025
Over 4,400 survey respondents shared their views on the aged care workforce with NSA research.

New National Seniors Australia (NSA) research shows older Australians value aged care workers very highly, but they have strong views on how to maximise the quality of the aged care workforce.

The research is based on the responses of 4,425 Australians aged 50 and over who participated in the National Seniors Social Survey in March this year.

Survey respondents were asked to rate the importance of 14 items relevant to the aged care workforce, with respect to achieving high quality care.

They were also given an opportunity to write a comment and 634 did so, with over half raising topics not mentioned in the 14 items.

Support for the workers
Almost all respondents wanted to see aged care workers’ employment situation improve to benefit both workers and clients.

Around two-thirds considered higher pay, improved conditions, and career development to be “very important”, while less than 3% considered these items to be “not at all important”.

As one commenter put it, “The quality of care trickles down from the top. If staff are treated with respect by management, they will in turn treat each other and residents [with] respect.”

Comments revealed a concern that poor pay and conditions have contributed to chronic understaffing, in turn leading aged care services to employ people who simply need a job but are not really suited to the work.

As a result, some respondents commented on the need for governments to reframe aged care work to attract and retain quality workers.

One wrote that they would like “more work done so it is perceived by the wider community as a credible, respected, desirable, aspirational career”.

Training is essential...
Older Australians overwhelmingly want aged care workers to be well trained in all aspects of the job. A large 91.5% rated relevant training prior to commencement as “very important” – the highest rated item out of the 14.

A further 7.6% of respondents rated this “somewhat important”, with less than 1% rating it “not at all important”. Training on the job was also considered important by 98% of respondents (77% “very important”).

Similarly, 98% felt it was important for all aged care workers – not just specialist carers – to receive dementia training, with 61% saying it was “important for most aged care services”, and 37% “desirable where possible”.

One of the reasons was articulated by the commenter who wrote, “There is a definite need for at least some dementia training, as many residents eventually get dementia, and as there are very limited dementia beds available, they remain in the general residential area, and need extra assistance.”

Others mentioned the need for dementia training to avoid situations where police are called to handle people with dementia.

Formal qualifications didn’t rate as highly as training per se, with 67% considering them “very important” and 29% “somewhat important”. 


...but it takes a special kind of person
While training is critical, 151 people wrote about the inherent traits they believe aged care workers should have, sometimes likening them to a calling or vocation. Many felt these were more important than qualifications.

The traits include being naturally kind, compassionate, patient, respectful, attentive, sociable, and good humoured, to name just a few.

One person put it this way: “Having experience with aged care homes, [there] have been some amazing workers who have empathy without any training, they are the ones that should be treated like gold. When you see a worker that has come into aged care because [they] couldn’t or didn’t get into any other courses, that is the wrong reason to be in that area of work. As a child of a parent who needed a little bit more empathy and respect, I think [they are] qualities that can’t often be taught.”

RNs 24/7, but only where that is possible
Turning from individual workers to workforce composition, the survey asked people’s views of the current government requirement that every aged care facility must have a registered nurse on duty 24/7.

The requirement was supported by a strong majority, with 85% rating this “important for most aged care services”.

The policy was supported for a range of reasons including dealing with medical problems as they arise and taking pressure off emergency services and hospitals by treating residents in-house if they have non-urgent medical needs.

Several commenters supporting this policy shared distressing personal stories as relatives of aged care residents or as aged care nurses themselves. Remarks included, “I had an elderly sister with severe diabetes type 1 in care and with no nurse, overnight medication was not available. Pain, distress, and worsening conditions result.”

But commenters also acknowledged problems that have resulted from imposing the requirement without exceptions. As one person wrote, “This has forced the closing of many aged care residential homes in rural towns – RN were on call but not in a facility 24/7 – so now local hospitals are full of aged / dementia care.”

Same workers important, so is same language
There were two other workforce traits that survey respondents felt were important to quality care. 

One was clients receiving care from the same individual over time or from the same small group of carers, to help build trust, lower anxiety, and enable staff to pick up on changes in a client’s wellbeing.  

Less than 1% felt this was ‘not at all important’ and 61% felt it was “important for most aged care services”. 

Another was the principle that workers and clients should speak the same language, with 65% rating this “important for most aged care services”, and 33% “desirable where possible”

Facilitating clear communication between workers and clients was the obvious reason for this, whether the common language is English or something else. 

More specifically, some commenters noted older people often have difficultly understanding unfamiliar accents, and this can be exacerbated by hearing loss, vision loss, and carers wearing masks. 

One person commented, “I have had the experience of managing a large aged care home with 30% Chinese residents. I employed Chinese speaking staff to make these residents more comfortable. It made a difference to their care and wellbeing as well as to the anglos needing to know what residents were trying to say to them. My Chinese cleaner spoke Mandarin, Cantonese, and a few of the different dialects. She was an amazing support.” 

Your views go straight to government through NSA Research
The NSA Research team created the survey module this report is based on in response to a request from our major funder, the Department of Health, Disability and Ageing. 

The Department’s Ageing Policy section wanted to hear older Australians’ views on the appropriate qualification level for aged care workers.

We knew there would be more to the picture than just a preference for a Cert III or a Cert IV, so we developed this more comprehensive set of measures of aged care workforce quality.

As well as detailing the results, the report includes 10 recommendations to government and the aged care sector based on your views.

The NSA Advocacy team and our CEO, Chris Grice, will continue to draw on the findings of this report in our work representing older people’s views to politicians, the media, and the Australian public.

Meanwhile we have already shared the report with the department to inform their developments of future aged care workforce policies.

This is just one more way that NSA Research is amplifying your voice, straight to government.

Read the full research report here.

New research shows WWII dominates Australians’ knowledge of military history. But big gaps remain

Nicole TownsendUNSW Sydney

Eighty years ago this week, Japan surrendered after nearly four years of war in the Asia-Pacific. For Australia, this meant the end of not only the war in the Pacific, but also the second world war that had begun six years earlier, in September 1939.

In that time, around one million Australians – approximately 15% of the population – served in the armed forces. Over half served overseas, with nearly 40,000 killed and more than 66,000 wounded.

But what do Australians today know about this epochal moment in our history? We surveyed 1,500 Australians aged 18 and older to find out.

Our study

The survey was conducted from late February to early March 2025 as part of our work at the War Studies Research Group, with the aim of measuring public understanding of Australian military history.

It covered the major conflicts in which Australians have been involved, from the Frontier Wars and colonial wars through to the more recent wars in Afghanistan and Iraq. We asked a range of questions to determine Australians’ knowledge of and engagement with national military history, how they learn about it, and their opinions on the commemoration of military events today.

Our survey data revealed that between 40% and 70% of respondents (depending on age group) had not formally studied Australian military history. This means it provides a good insight into how the average Australian views the country’s military history.

Australia’s most well-known conflict

Nearly 90% of our respondents were aware of the second world war. Around 80% were also aware that Australians had been involved in the conflict.

There were no significant differences by any demographic.

The first world war was the next most well-known conflict, ahead of the Vietnam War, indicating the dominance of these three conflicts in Australian popular memory.

Most of our respondents (55%) also indicated their desire to learn more about the second world war — and they think Australian schoolchildren should, too. More than two-thirds support its inclusion in the Australian school curriculum.

In this, the second world war is the exception. Respondents were not particularly interested in learning more about other events in Australian military history.

The second world war is also the only conflict for which a majority believe Australian involvement was in the national interest.

Pacific War dominates

Australians served globally during the war, from the Asia-Pacific to the Mediterranean, Europe, and the Middle East. However, our survey confirmed that although our respondents indicated they were aware of the second world war, their knowledge of key events within it varies.

The most well-known event in the Mediterranean was the siege of Tobruk, which was known by approximately 41% of respondents, well ahead of the battle of El Alamein (28%) in second position.

More surprising was the fact that another 42% of our respondents had not heard of any of the listed events. This included the siege of Tobruk, which is a hallmark event in Australian military history.

By contrast, the Pacific was more well-known. Fewer than one in five respondents indicated they had not heard of any listed event from the war in the Pacific.

The top three events in the Pacific were the Japanese attack on Pearl Harbor (67%), the bombing of Darwin (59%), and the atomic bombings of Japan (57%).

Still, there were some unexpected findings. We expected Kokoda to rank highly, but it ranked outside the top three.

Younger Australians less knowledgeable

A deeper dive into the demographic data, however, highlights stark differences among age cohorts when it comes to what they know about the second world war.

Awareness of events increased consistently in line with respondents’ age. Older Australians are more knowledgeable across the board. This means greater knowledge among those aged 60 and over lifted the overall average response across the board.

Over two-thirds of those aged 60 and over knew of the siege of Tobruk. By contrast, only 23% of those aged 30–39 were aware of the siege. The youngest cohort (18–29) fared only slightly better, with around one-third (31%) aware of Tobruk.

Likewise, around 90% of respondents aged 60 and over knew of the attack on Pearl Harbor, compared to just over half of those aged 18–29. In fact, Pearl Harbor was the only key event from the war that garnered majority recognition among respondents aged 18–49.

Kokoda and the prisoner of war experiences of Changi, the Thai-Burma Railway, and Sandakan were all little known among those aged under 50.

Younger respondents were also at times more than twice as likely not to have heard of any listed event in this theatre.

However, the youngest cohorts were not always the least knowledgeable. For instance, 10% of those aged 18–29 knew of the battle of Milne Bay, compared to only 3% of those aged 40–49.

Australian military history needs to be bolstered

Our survey shows the second world war now dominates Australians’ understanding of their military history. But Australians know little about events outside the Pacific, and knowledge is also significantly decreasing with each generation.

This suggests the need for a stronger focus on the broader narrative of Australia’s involvement in the second world war, especially in school curricula, if this pattern is to be reversed.

It’s important public awareness of these events goes beyond the major events and encompasses diverse perspectives. This will allow future generations to better understand our past and the complexities of war, and its impact on our world today.The Conversation

Nicole Townsend, Lecturer in History, UNSW Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Pittwater Online's 80th Anniversary of VP Day History pages in 2025:

  1. WEA's Newport Summer School – for Workers, WANS + Future U.S., B.P.F. Wives: Local Insights for The 80th Commemoration of VP Day in 2025
  2. Coastal Defences In World War Two: The Dee Why to Warriewood Sections 
  3. Broken Section: The Story Of Pittwater's Anti-Submarine Boom Net - By John Illingsworth 
  4. Avalon Beach SLSC During World War Two: The Police Boys Club Mans the Beaches 

Other Profiles, History pages and Reports on Commemorative Services for all conflicts Australians have served in, which include Addresses given, and all with local connections, are listed in the Contents page and History page, or can be found by using the search function. 

Some examples include:  

The Battle of the Menin Road, in which the Australians took a prominent part. Returning from the advanced front line is a continuous stream of walking wounded and prisoners. Littering the side of the road are stretchers bearing seriously wounded awaiting motor ambulance transport. From Exhibition of war photographs / taken by Capt. Frank Hurley(who once lived at Whale Beach), August 1917- August 1918. Courtesy State Library of New South Wales

Cherry blossoms and eucalypts: this Japanese war cemetery remembers fallen Australians

Anoma Darshani PierisThe University of Melbourne and Athanasios TsakonasThe University of Melbourne

After the Great War, Australians made pilgrimages to distant battlefields of Gallipoli and northern France. They paid their respects to the fallen soldiers who shaped our national identity.

After the second world war, new places emerged such as the Kokoda Track, Papua New Guinea; Changi, Singapore; and the Thai-Burma railway. They became synonymous with Australia’s wartime sacrifices in Asia and the Pacific.

However, few know about Yokohama War Cemetery – the only Commonwealth war cemetery in mainland Japan. This unique site was collaboratively designed and built by Australian and Japanese architects, horticulturists and contractors in the years following the war.

It marks one of the first acts of reconciliation between the two nations after hostilities ceased.

Reimagining the cemetery

Yokohama War Cemetery was established as the final resting place for more than 1,500 Allied servicemen and women. Most had died as prisoners of war in Japan and China, including 280 Australians.

About six kilometres west of Yokohama’s historic port, the cemetery sits within a thick pine and cherry tree landscape. After the war ended, Australian and American war graves teams scoured Japan to locate and identify the remains of the fallen. They were often found in the care of local temples near prisoner-of-war camps.

Oil painting, cherry trees in the foreground.
This painting from 1950, by George Colville, shows the Australian war graves section of the cemetary. Australian War Memorial

Between 1946 and 1951, a small team of Australian architects and horticulturists designed and constructed the cemetery. They were from the Melbourne-based Anzac Agency of the Imperial War Graves Commission (now known as the Office of Australian War Graves).

Many of these designers were recently returned servicemen.

They include young architects Peter Spier, Robert Coxhead, Brett Finney and Clayton Vize. All trained at the University of Melbourne’s Architectural Atelier, their fledgling careers interrupted by years of war service and at the agency. Others, such as Alan Robertson, endured years as a prisoner of war in Singapore then Japan.

These architects reimagined the flat expanse of the traditional British war cemetery. They arranged a 27-acre former children’s amusement park into five national burial grounds: for the United Kingdom, Australia, New Zealand–Canada, pre-Partition India, and a post-war section.

Four diggers under a cross.
Australian Diggers rest on their reversed arms at the dedication of the British War Cemetery at Yokohama, 1951. Argus Newspaper Collection of Photographs, State Library of Victoria

Eucalyptus trees towering above the mature foliage clearly identify the cemetery as an Australian endeavour.

Another important contributor was Alec Maisey, a former merchant seaman and New Guinea veteran. Maisey took on the horticultural duties for the Anzac Agency’s numerous war cemeteries. In New Guinea, Borneo, Indonesia, New Caledonia, the South Pacific and across mainland Australia, he left behind a lasting landscape legacy for the thousands of visitors.

An international collaboration

Australian designers collaborated with their Japanese counterparts to create a memorial landscape. They embedded the commission’s established lawn cemetery template into a Japanese style “hide and reveal” garden that conceals and reveals the view as you walk through it.

Impressed by Frank Lloyd Wright’s use of native Oya stone at the Imperial Hotel in Tokyo, modernist architect Yoji Kasajima introduced it at the cemetery.

Japanese-American Michael Iwanaga was the principal local architect for the cemetery and introduced the Australians to the social and cultural norms of Japanese funerary architecture.

Black and white photo, a crowd under the cross.
Troops from Australia and New Zealand pay tribute to fallen comrades during the 1954 Anzac Day Ceremony. Australian War Memorial

The main contractor on the project, Yabashi Marble, was associated with Japan’s modernist architecture renaissance. They installed the interior stone for Japan’s parliament building.

Tokio Nursery was initially an importer and exporter of seeds, bulbs and plants. They turned to landscaping after the war, becoming the cemetery’s principal gardening and maintenance contractor.

These tentative first steps towards reconciliation between Australia and Japan were made through design.

The result was a war cemetery unique to Asia, combining Asian and Western funereal features and aesthetics in its design.

Wide shot featuring lots of trees.
The 1954 Anzac Day Ceremony in the Australian/New Zealand section of the cemetery. Australian War Memorial

Through these encounters, the Australian designers’ gained a deeper understanding of Japan’s materials, flora and landscape. Working closely with Japanese architects, nurseries and contractors, their approach to and perception of their profession and Japan was transformed.

Among many cemeteries they designed throughout Asia, Yokohama was the place they often returned to and drew inspiration from in their personal lives.

Enduring reminders

War does not end with a victory or a battle. Some of the most difficult tasks are carried out by the seemingly obscure units of the Australian army. The Australian war graves services, undertook the recovery of the war dead, providing for their dignified burial in designated cemeteries.

Many of these spaces were designed and created during the last stages of the conflict.

Men cross the bridge
An arched stone bridge in the gardens of the Yokohama Cemetery, 1952. Australian War Memorial

War cemeteries are often activated only during commemorative anniversaries. Yet, they persist in serving as enduring reminders of the futility of war and the scale of a nation’s sacrifice. They trigger intergenerational memories for Australians.

For many Asians, however, these sites often represent an unwelcome age of imperial conflicts in which their service and sacrifice was often overlooked.

Yokohama War Cemetery stands as a testament to the collaborative efforts of Australian and Japanese designers in the aftermath of the second world war. It offers a unique perspective on the journey towards reconciliation and the power of design to bridge cultural divides.


The exhibition Eucalypts of Hodogaya is at the Shrine of Remembrance, Melbourne, until August 2026.The Conversation

Anoma Darshani Pieris, Professor of Architecture, The University of Melbourne and Athanasios Tsakonas, Sessional Tutor in Architecture, The University of Melbourne

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

NSW Health: PFAS Expert Advisory Panel findings published

August 12 2025
The NSW Health Expert Advisory Panel on PFAS has finalised its report, with all recommendations accepted by NSW Health.

The Panel, convened by NSW Health and advising the Chief Health Officer, Dr Kerry Chant, released their findings after assessing available research from Australia and globally.

The Panel is comprised of speciality practitioners, including leading science and health experts in the fields of oncology, endocrinology, toxicology, cardiology, epidemiology, pathology, primary care, public health and risk communication.

The report, as well as updated NSW Health advice, is now published on the NSW Health website at NSW Health Expert Advisory Panel on PFAS.

The Panel provided the following findings and recommendations:
  • based on substantial research already undertaken, the health effects of PFAS appear to be small
  • at present there is no clinical benefit for an individual to have a blood test for PFAS
  • clinical interventions that reduce blood PFAS are of uncertain benefit and may cause harm
  • the prerequisites for epidemiological studies to contribute positively to our understanding and provide reliable information about a clinical effect caused by PFAS are not currently met in NSW communities
  • NSW Health should review communication tools and content to better support communities and clinicians.
The Panel recommended that should a health care provider order a blood test for PFAS for a patient, they should provide clear contextual information about the test and its limitations, and offer preventative health screening in line with current recommendations, independent of the patient’s PFAS level.

The Panel noted the United States National Academy of Science Engineering and Medicine (NASEM) recommendations on PFAS management and advised that the NASEM guidance on individual blood testing is not appropriate to guide clinical management. The responsible agency within the US Centers for Disease Control and Prevention has not adopted NASEM’s recommendations on individual blood testing and health screening based on PFAS blood levels.

The Panel acknowledged genuine concern in communities about PFAS exposure. The Panel noted actions have been taken to ensure Blue Mountains drinking water complies with the new health-based guideline levels adopted by the National Health and Medical Research Centre, thereby removing an exposure source.

Dr Chant said updated NSW Health advice provides consumers with guidance on how to reduce PFAS exposure.

“There is considerable concern, particularly in the Blue Mountains community, about exposure to PFAS through drinking water, and NSW Health takes these concerns very seriously,’ Dr Chant said.

“NSW Health will continue to support local clinicians with information for GPs who may be managing patients with concerns about PFAS exposure including evidence about potential adverse health effects, counselling patients, the utility of blood tests for PFAS and the role of further investigations.”

NSW Health finds 'no definitive evidence' of health impacts from Cadia gold mine

Thursday August 15 2025
NSW Health states a NSW Health investigation into the potential health risks of dust exposure from the Cadia gold mine in Central West NSW has found low community exposure to heavy metals, and no definitive evidence of health impacts from heavy metal exposure among volunteers who were assessed. 

NSW Health commissioned an independent investigation and convened the Cadia Mine Expert Health Advisory Panel following community concern about potential dust exposure from the Cadia gold mine. The Panel consisted of expertise in toxicology, environmental and public health. 

''The Cadia Mine Expert Health Advisory Panel reviewed results from this investigation and reported they found no evidence of significant environmental contamination at volunteers’ properties. The heavy metal levels were below health-based guidelines and there was no evidence of health impacts from heavy metal exposure in the volunteers.'' NSW Health said in a statement.

''The Cadia Mine Expert Health Advisory Panel also concluded that there was no indication that broader community testing is required at this time.''

A small group of people returned "slightly elevated concentrations of arsenic and mercury in their blood", but NSW Health concluded the levels were not considered to pose any health risks, and were likely a result of dietary intake rather than environmental exposure.
However, NSW Health suggested follow-up testing for those participants.

"In cases of slightly elevated levels of arsenic, mercury and molybdenum, repeat testing after an adequate dietary exclusion period may be reasonable,"  the statement says.

"In one case, repeat and alternative testing through an existing specialist was suggested to further explore a health concern."

NSW Health's investigation found copper and zinc were detected in most samples, while lead, manganese, arsenic, chromium, cobalt and nickel were found in some of the samples collected, and close to the reporting limit.

It said the levels were at or below drinking water guidelines and consistent with other metal concentrations found in other sampling events in the area.

Dirty water from a shower fed by rainwater at a resident's house near Cadia Gold Mine in May 2023. (Supplied: G.G.)

''NSW Health thanks the 14 volunteers from seven properties, who came forward through the Cadia Community Sustainability Network, for participating in this important investigation.

The 18-month investigation saw indoor dust, water, soil samples and home-grown produce collected from volunteers’ potentially impacted properties to be examined for possible exposures.

An expert clinical toxicologist assessed each volunteer to determine if they were impacted by heavy metals, and all household environmental and clinical assessments were reviewed by the Cadia Mine Expert Health Advisory Panel. 

NSW Health can advise that every volunteer has been informed about the assessment outcomes, and the panel’s findings are being shared directly with the community, local General Practitioners, stakeholder groups, and local councils. 

NSW Health will continue to provide advice and support to local GPs in the region surrounding Cadia. 

NSW Health will continue to work closely with the NSW Environment Protection Authority, which is leading regulatory oversight of dust emissions at the Cadia mine.'' NSW Health's statement reads

Further information, including the panel’s statement and a summary report are available.


The Cadia Community Sustainability Network, which was formed in 2021 by a group of concerned residents living and working in the Cadia Valley, has stated they find it hard to believe the results in the report by NSW Health. 

Residents who have lived alongside the Cadia mine since it began in the 1990s have found over the last few years what had been a relatively benign operation in the valley adjacent to their farms has become increasingly intrusive and potentially threatening to the district.

Community members initially formed a group to work together to respond to a proposed increase in production (Modification 14). In early 2023, at the suggestion of Assoc. Prof Ian Wright (Western Sydney University), they had  ALS analyse some dust and water tank samples. The CCSN discovered that their water tanks appeared to have been contaminated by a range of heavy metals and the playground at Panuara was contaminated with lead dust. 

NSW Government backs 70 frontline projects to help end homelessness

August 13, 2025
The Minns Government has announced seventy projects will share in $26.9 million in funding from the NSW Homelessness Innovation Fund, supporting creative, community-led ideas that deliver practical help to people doing it tough.
 
The fund is backing what works, from new ways of delivering crisis accommodation to faster, more stable support for people leaving crisis. It gives frontline organisations the support they need to test, scale and roll-out practical solutions for people in need.
 
The NSW Government is proud to back the people and organisations working every day to help end homelessness and build a better NSW.
 
The NSW Government is also building 8400 public homes half of which will be dedicated to survivors of domestic violence – because you can solve homelessness if you don’t have homes for people to live in.
 
Among the standout initiatives is ReLove, a social enterprise that transforms empty housing into safe, fully furnished homes for people escaping domestic violence and homelessness. With the support of the HIF, ReLove will help an additional 450 families across Greater Sydney move into homes filled with dignity, choice and comfort, all delivered and set up the very next day.
 
  • 70 projects funded across NSW so far with round 3 initiatives announced today
  • More than 800 new rooms created for people at risk of homelessness
  • 48 projects improving how housing and support services are rolled out
  • 22 projects changing how crisis accommodation is provided
  • Planning underway for the next round of funding 
The Homelessness Innovation Fund is helping transform the homelessness system in NSW - from outdated, one-size-fits-all services to faster, more stable and more dignified support.
 
It builds on the Minns Labor Government’s record $6.6 billion housing investment, the largest in NSW history and forms a key part of our work to break the cycle of homelessness.
 
Minister for Housing and Homelessness Rose Jackson said:
 
"The Homelessness Innovation Fund is about real solutions that get people out of crisis and into a safe home.”
 
“We are backing the organisations that know what works and helping them reach more people with support that actually makes a difference.”
 
“ReLove is a powerful example. It is not just about housing, it is about giving people dignity, choice and a fresh start after crisis.”
 
“It is important to show that this government is not just talking about change. We are delivering it with record funding, new models of support and a clear focus on ending homelessness.”
 
ReLove Co-Founder, Ben Stammer said:
 
“ReLove transforms empty housing into safe, fully furnished homes for people moving out of crisis, particularly those impacted by domestic violence and homelessness.”
 
“We offer clients the dignity of choice, enabling them to select high-quality preloved furniture and homewares and have them delivered and set up the very next day.
 
The Homelessness Innovation Fund grant is critical to expanding this model so that an additional 450 families can move into stable, welcoming homes across Greater Sydney.”

$658 million redevelopment of Sydney Children’s Hospital Randwick and Children’s Comprehensive Cancer Centre now complete

On Thursday August 14 the NSW Government announced construction of the $658 million Sydney Children’s Hospital Stage One and Minderoo Children’s Comprehensive Cancer Centre project has reached completion. This marks a major milestone in the hospital’s redevelopment, transforming paediatric care for children and their families across the state.

Minister for Health Ryan Park joined the Member for Coogee Dr Marjorie O’Neill to visit the new 12-storey building delivered as part of a more than $1.5 billion investment in health infrastructure within the Randwick Health and Innovation Precinct.

The new building brings together leading clinicians, researchers and educators under one roof, with contemporary health facilities and spaces for families to connect while navigating their healthcare needs.

The new building will welcome patients and their families from late 2025, following an operational commissioning period.

The $658 million project includes:
  • A new and enhanced children’s intensive care unit
  • A new and larger children's emergency department  
  • Co-located laboratories to support the Minderoo Children’s Comprehensive Cancer Centre’s research, education and training  
  • A new medical short stay unit 
  • A new neurosciences centre 
  • A new virtual care centre and hospital command centre - KidsHQ
  • Inpatient units for medical, surgical and sleep studies
  • A day oncology centre and inpatient units, along with a dedicated bone marrow transplant unit
  • A new children’s hospital pharmacy
  • Improved family amenities, including single patient bedrooms with a carer bed and ensuite
  • Indoor and outdoor recreational spaces for families to take a break from clinical settings
  • Education, training and clinical simulation spaces.
  • New playground and pet visiting space
In a first for Australia, childhood cancer research and the clinical care of children with cancer will integrate into one paediatric facility, accelerating the translation of research discovery into improved clinical practice.

The Minderoo Children’s Comprehensive Cancer Centre will be housed within the new hospital building and adjacent UNSW Health Translation Hub.

The Centre will include advanced laboratory spaces and deliver integrated, specialist cancer treatment, education and research programs, with this aim to transform childhood cancer treatment and become one of the world’s leading paediatric cancer centres.

The new building will also enable significant enhancement of paediatric neurology services, with the top floor dedicated to a new Neuroscience Comprehensive Care and Research Centre, providing integrated specialist services to improve the care and treatment of children with a range of neurological conditions. 

This project has been delivered by NSW Health Infrastructure in partnership with the Sydney Children’s Hospitals Network and Children’s Cancer Institute, with John Holland as principal contractor.  

Almost 1.95 million construction hours have been worked throughout the life of the project, which will also enable a pipeline for 500 roles within paediatrics across the Randwick Health and Innovation Precinct.

The 2025-26 Budget confirmed a $12.4 billion investment over four years for health infrastructure to continue building a modern, resilient health system that meets both current needs and future demand. This includes the NSW Government’s announcement of $11.25 million to support the planning of upgrades to the Royal Hospital for Women, further investing in the Randwick Health and Innovation Precinct.

For more information on the new children’s hospital and research centre and other Randwick Campus Redevelopment projects, visit www.nsw.gov.au/randwick-campus-redevelopment.

Minister for Health Ryan Park stated:

“I’m delighted to see first-hand the completion of this state-of-the-art paediatric health facility designed to transform children’s care in this state for generations to come.

“The new building will bring together clinicians, researchers and educators in one place, which will significantly improve health outcomes for children and their families.

“The upgraded health facilities will attract clinicians, professionals and academics, support employment, drive innovation and productivity, and support to generate strong economic benefits for the community.”

Cathryn Cox PSM, Chief Executive, Sydney Children’s Hospitals Networksaid :  

“Since 2020, we have been planning with our staff, families and community to reimagine our hospital environment.

“The modern facilities, technology and equipment will give us room to grow, tailor care to improve health outcomes, and respond to the state’s evolving paediatric healthcare needs.

“This is an exciting moment for our Network, as we move into a facility that matches the world class care our clinicians provide every day to some of the sickest children in the state.”

Vape brands bypass regulations on marketing to young people by using global social media accounts

Getty Images
Lucy HardieUniversity of Auckland, Waipapa Taumata RauBecky FreemanUniversity of SydneyChristina WattsUniversity of Sydney, and Judith McCoolUniversity of Auckland, Waipapa Taumata Rau

Youth vaping is a major public health concern in many countries, with New Zealand’s youth vaping rates among the highest in the world, and rising.

In 2017, 3% of New Zealanders aged between 15 and 24 vaped daily, but by 2024, this was up to 21.3%.

Globally, one of the main drivers is the promotion of vapes on social media. Like many other countries, New Zealand introduced vape advertising restrictions, including on social media, as part of efforts to curb this problem.

But vape manufacturers mirror the techniques of traditional tobacco marketing, including stylish branding, flavours and sponsorship, and use global channels to get around domestic regulations.

This raises the question of whether New Zealand’s rules can be effective in a globalised digital world.

Our new study investigates the content posted to the global Instagram account of British American Tobacco’s vape brand Vuse, which holds more than 25% of the global market. We identify and describe the marketing strategies used to promote the brand to a global audience.

Collaborations and sponsorship

We assessed the marketing strategies used by the account by analysing all posts made by @Vuse.Worldwide – including imagery, audio and text – during the year from August 2023 to 2024.

We looked for brand and influencer collaborations and posts with high engagement (likes and views). We found the company formed several high-profile collaborations as a major part of its marketing strategy.

The most notable collaboration is with the Formula 1 motor racing team, McLaren. As a key sponsor, the car is heavily emblazoned with the Vuse logo and is frequently promoted on the Instagram account.

Sharing content between the McLaren and Vuse Instagram accounts increased the @Vuse.Worldwide audience from around 17,000 followers to the nearly 14 million followers of the McLaren race team.

The four most viewed video posts in our study featured the motorsport partnership, with one clip viewed more than 225,000 times.

British American Tobacco has maintained a decades-long partnership with Formula 1, dating back to when traditional cigarette advertising was still allowed.

Social media influencers

The Vuse Instagram account also features other lifestyle and entertainment collaborations. In a series of posts related to music festivals, Vuse employed DJs, artists, digital content creators and social media influencers to create engaging and stylish videos and photographs.

The tobacco industry has undertaken music festival marketing for generations as an effective strategy to reach young people.

Get ready with me” videos are popular on Instagram, especially among young women. Four of the ten most viewed posts on the Vuse account were in this style, featuring young women filming themselves selecting fashion, makeup and hairstyles, and explaining their choices or setting the video to popular music.

In these videos, the vape may appear only briefly, for example slipped into a handbag as the final touch before a night out. Yet this placement connects the product and brand with glamorous, fun or exciting settings, creating an important association between the brand and appealing lifestyles and experiences.

The influencers often shared this content directly with their existing followers.

Instagram policy requires users to disclose paid partnerships with the #ad hashtag or paid partnership tag. Of the nearly 700 times an influencer or brand was tagged in the posts, only 14 were disclosed in this way.

Workarounds and weak policies

Vape companies often use workarounds to bypass restrictions on marketing to maintain a presence in youth-oriented settings.

Instagram lists @Vuse.Worldwide as a verified account, based in the UK, where advertising standards permit only “factual” vape content on a company’s social media account, but paid influencer marketing and “imagery unrelated to the product” are banned. The official @Vuse.UK account appears to align more clearly with these parameters.

Instagram’s own policies on vape marketing are difficult to decipher, with complicated rules that leave significant loopholes. For example, vape advertisements and paid influencer marketing for vape products are banned on Instagram. However, these rules do not extend to the brand content on a company’s own account.

Our research shows Vuse uses the worldwide account to promote brand associations, an indirect but powerful form of marketing that sits outside Instagram policies. Cross-posting to other accounts enables Vuse to reach new audiences without paid advertising on the platform.

Researchers suggest social media policies are intentionally unclear to enable platforms and the industry to capitalise on lucrative, instant and borderless sharing of digital content to new audiences.

Dealing with these issues will require global cooperation to require social media platforms to prohibit vape marketing more broadly. It will also require active monitoring and enforcement of breaches to hold social media platforms and vape brands to account. Domestic laws and rules must also apply to international content.The Conversation

Lucy Hardie, Research Fellow in Population Health, University of Auckland, Waipapa Taumata RauBecky Freeman, Professor in Public Health, University of SydneyChristina Watts, Research Fellow in Public Health, University of Sydney, and Judith McCool, Professor in Population Health, University of Auckland, Waipapa Taumata Rau

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

If recreational vapes are banned, why are there still vape shops everywhere?

James MartinDeakin University and David BrightDeakin University

Recently, you may have noticed an increase in the number of shops selling tobacco in your area. Alongside cigarettes, these shops often sell vapes.

In July 2024, the federal government banned the sale of recreational vapes nationwide. The only way to get one legally is from a pharmacist. Some states also require a doctor’s prescription.

So why, then, more than a year on, are these stores still selling vapes, in broad daylight?

In short: it’s because restrictions on the supply of legal nicotine have created a black market so big that it’s grown beyond the capacity of regulators to effectively suppress.

Billions going underground

To better understand the demand for vapes, it’s useful to draw on a close historical parallel: alcohol prohibition in the United States.

In the 1920s, Prohibition did not stop the sale of alcohol, but instead created a thriving black market. Illicit alcohol was easy to obtain, and organised crime groups engaged in violent conflict over territory and market share.

A century later, evidence is mounting that Australia’s nicotine policy – now the most restrictive in the world – has similarly driven the expansion of a black market.

Just as Al Capone and his cronies were the main beneficiaries of Prohibition, billions of dollars are currently flowing into the pockets of organised crime groups who use that money to fund other serious criminal activity.

Just this week, the Therapeutic Goods Administration (TGA) seized more than A$40,000 of illegal vapes from a single retail outlet in the Melbourne CBD. It’s a drop in the ocean of a market estimated to be worth up to half a billion dollars in Victoria alone.

Illicit vapes are a major contributor to the “tobacco wars”: a violent, ongoing conflict between rival organised crime groups for control of Australia’s illicit nicotine market.

The huge profits to be made inevitably creates competition, which fuels violence, with more than 230 firebombings linked to the illicit tobacco trade, and a growing number of kidnappings, robberies and assaults since January 2023.

This conflict doesn’t just affect gangsters. There are significant impacts on legitimate businesses through extortion, loss of sales, property damage and rising insurance premiums.

And tragically, at least one innocent bystander has been killed by the so-called tobacco wars.

Persistently high demand

As with alcohol prohibition, the illicit market for vapes is sustained by strong demand.

Nicotine is the third most popular recreational drug in the country, after caffeine and alcohol.

Around 1.5 million Australians vape – the overwhelming majority over the age of 18.



Demand for nicotine is also persistent, with per capita consumption slowly trending upwards nationally since 2016.

Another part of the problem has been the failure of the government’s model for supplying “medicinal” vapes. (Intriguingly, alcohol was also available via prescription during Prohibition).

It failed because consumer demand for medicinal vapes is very low. More than 95% of people who vape source their products from the black market. This is likely due, in part, to bans on popular flavours, which adults prefer to the tobacco and menthol options available legally.

The enforcement problem

In response to the growth of the nicotine black market, state and federal governments have legislated increased penalties, which include up to seven years imprisonment and fines of more than $21 million.

As with Prohibition, increasing penalties has not meaningfully disrupted the demand and supply of illicit vapes.

Counter-intuitively, these laws actually help organised crime by creating economic opportunities that would otherwise be fulfilled by legal businesses.

Legislating penalties is easy. Actual enforcement is hard. Enforcement is also more important, with research showing certainty of punishment is more effective than severity in deterring crime.

The enormous scale of the vaping market makes it a nightmare for law enforcement and other regulatory agencies. Again, the lesson of Prohibition is that once a black market is widely established, it is extremely difficult to eradicate, even when exponentially increasing tax dollars are diverted to bolster enforcement.

It is possible that a wide-scale, sustained law enforcement-led crackdown on illicit nicotine products could have an impact.

This type of operation, however, would require significantly greater resources than the $340 million the federal government has allocated to combating illicit nicotine supply.

It would also divert police resources away from other, arguably more pressing crime problems.

The unintended consequences of such a move would be to push the black market for vapes further underground, as we have seen with illicit drugs. Research shows that raising the risks associated with operating in a black market can also increase potential profits for organised crime groups and make it more violent.

There are also risks to consumers due to the proliferation of unregulated products. Illicit vapes have significantly higher levels of nicotine than those typically sold in regulated markets as well as, in rare cases, potentially lethal adulterants, such as synthetic opioids.

History has shown us time and again that efforts to prohibit popular drugs, often driven by best intentions to protect moral or physical safety, often create more harms.

Keeping everyone safer

Prohibition was eventually abandoned as a policy failure. This wasn’t because it didn’t reduce alcohol consumption – it did – but because it created a range of other more damaging social, health and economic harms.

Policy-makers have not heeded these historical cautionary tales from Prohibition or the more recent example of the war on drugs.

There are better alternatives. Regulated consumer markets for vapes exist in many Western countries. Government health departments in New Zealand and the United Kingdom, for example, actively promote vapes as a less harmful alternative to cigarettes.

Well-functioning legal markets divert people away from illicit ones, providing both safer products and fewer opportunities for organised crime.

The current landscape demands more creative, innovative solutions from our governments. We should expect more than a simple reboot of failed policies from the past.

The challenge is that politicians must first admit that current policy settings are not working. Then, they can seek broad-based expert input, plus the thoughts of nicotine consumers who are most affected by these policies, to create more viable, effective alternatives.The Conversation

James Martin, Senior Lecturer in Criminology, Deakin University and David Bright, Professor of Criminology, Deakin University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

AI companies want copyright exemption, but the arts minister says there are ‘no plans’ to weaken these laws. What’s going on?

John PottsMacquarie University

“We have copyright laws,” said arts minister Tony Burke last week. “We have no plans, no intention, no appetite to be weakening those copyright laws based on this draft report that’s floating around.”

He was referring to the Productivity Commission’s controversial floating of a text and data mining exception to the Australian Copyright Act, which would make it legal to train artificial intelligence (AI) large language models, such as ChatGPT, on copyrighted Australian work.

In the internet age, all that is solid melts into data, easily copied and distributed instantly across the internet. This includes the work of authors, songwriters and artists, ostensibly protected by the law of copyright.

“The rampant opportunism of big tech aiming to pillage other people’s work for their own profit is galling and shameful,” songwriter, author and former arts minister Peter Garrett told the Australian last week, in response to the Productivity Commission’s report.

He urged the federal government

to urgently strengthen copyright laws to help preserve cultural sovereignty and our valuable intellectual property in the face of powerful corporate forces who want to strip mine it and pay nothing.

I have researched how piracy, illegal streaming and remix culture violate these rights. Somehow, authors and artists have survived over 25 years of it. But AI poses a new threat.

AI companies pushing against copyright

“You can’t be expected to have a successful AI program when every single article, book, or anything else that you’ve read or studied, you’re supposed to pay for,” United States president Donald Trump said at an AI Summit last month, launching his government’s AI Action Plan.

On July 23, he signed a trio of executive orders, including one on preventing “woke” AI in the US government, one on deregulating AI development (including removing environmental protections that could hamper the construction of data centres) and another on promoting the export of American AI technology.

Major AI companies, including Google and Microsoft, have put the copyright exemption argument to the Australian government.

Australian tech billionaire Scott Farquhar, co-founder of software company Atlassian and chair of the Tech Council of Australia, said in a National Press Club address on 30 July that our “outdated” copyright laws are a barrier for AI companies wanting to train or host their models here.

He explicitly called for a text and data mining exception like the one the Productivity Commission is floating.

What is an author?

In the early 19th century, English poet and literary critic Samuel Taylor Coleridge defined the poet – or creative author – as an elevated representative of the human race: a cultural hero worthy of the highest respect. The genius author was a divinely inspired creator of completely original works. And the best way to understand the meaning of a work was to determine the author’s intention in creating it.

Tech companies promise their advanced AI systems are capable of creating new creative works. But for most of us, we read to find truths about humanity, or reflections of it.

“The interaction in your own mind, is very much with the author,” reflected arts minister Burke last week.

Roland Barthes, in his 1968 essay The Death of the Author argued language itself, in its constant flux and change, is what generates new work. He proposed a new model for the author: a scriptor, or copyist, who mixes writings, none of them original, so a new work is a “tissue of quotations” drawn from the “immense dictionary” of language. Ironically, in this way, Barthes predicted AI.

A shift in wealth

Established in the 18th century, copyright enabled an author, songwriter or artist to make a living from royalties. It was meant to protect authors from illegal copying of their works.

The 21st century marked a massive shift in the wealth generated by creativity. Authors, and especially songwriters, suffered an enormous loss of revenue in the period 2000-2015, due to online piracy. In 1999, global revenue for the music industry was US$39 billion; in 2014, that figure fell to $15 billion.

At the same time, the owners of online platforms and big tech companies – who benefited from clicks to pirate sites offering works stolen from artists – enjoyed soaring profits. Google’s annual revenue jumped from US$0.4 billion in 2002 to $74.5 billion in 2015.

Several author and publisher lawsuits are underway regarding the unauthorised use of books by to train large language models. In June, a US federal judge ruled Anthropic did not breach copyright in using books to train its model, comparing the process to a “reader aspiring to be a writer”.

Copyright law reformers in the US have proposed that because all creativity is algorithmic, involving the novel combination of words, images or sounds, then an AI model, which uses algorithms to generate new works, should have its works protected by copyright. This would raise AI-as-author to the same legal status as human authors. These reformers believe rejecting this argument betrays an anthropocentric or “speciesist” bias.

If AI models were legally accepted as authors, this would represent another blow to the esteem accorded human authors.

‘Erasure disguised as efficiency’

An AI model may be capable of generating works of fiction, but these works will be poor imitations of human creativity. The missing element: emotion. Works of fiction come from an author’s lifetime of experiences, from joy to grief, and the work engages readers or viewers on an emotional level.

The emotional capacity of an AI model: zero.

I have seen some atrocious AI-generated non-fiction books for sale on Amazon. The tell-tale signs are: no author byline, and sentences such as: “Since my dataset has not been updated since 2023, I cannot provide information past that date.” If someone buys those books, the publisher and Amazon will profit. No royalties will be paid to an author.

This is happening in other media, too. In the Hollywood Reporter last month, British producer Remy Blumenfeld told of a “showrunner with multiple global hits” being asked to rewrite a pilot generated by ChatGPT. He called it “erasure disguised as efficiency”.

In January, the US Authors Guild introduced an official certification system, for use by its members, to indicate that a book is human written. In April, the European Writers Council also called for “an effective transparency obligation for AI-generated products that clearly distinguishes them from the works made by human beings”.

In 2025, readers still flock to writers’ festivals, and we still esteem great authors as cultural heroes. But this status is threatened by AI. We must resist the possibility that human authors become mere content in AI systems’ datasets.

The ultimate degradation would be for authors to become unwilling data donors to AI. Big tech must be opposed in that ambition.The Conversation

John Potts, Professor of Media, Macquarie University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Paramedics are less likely to identify a stroke in women than men. Closing this gap could save lives – and money

SolStock/Getty Images
Lei SiWestern Sydney UniversityLaura Emily DowneyGeorge Institute for Global Health, and Thomas GadsdenGeorge Institute for Global Health

stroke happens when the blood supply to part of the brain is cut off, either because of a blockage (called an ischaemic stroke) or bleeding (a haemorrhagic stroke). Around 83% of strokes are ischaemic.

The main emergency treatment for ischaemic strokes is a “clot-busting” process called intravenous thrombolysis. But this only works if administered quickly – ideally within an hour of arriving to hospital, and no later than 4.5 hours after symptoms begin. The faster treatment is given, the better the person’s chance of survival and recovery.

However, not everyone gets an equal chance of receiving this treatment quickly. Notably, research has shown ambulance staff are significantly less likely to correctly identify a stroke in women compared to men.

In a recent study, we modelled the potential health gains and cost savings of closing this gap. And they’re substantial.

The sex gap in stroke diagnosis

In Australia, about three-quarters of people who experience stroke arrive at hospital by ambulance. If paramedics suspect a stroke, they can take patients directly to a hospital which specialises in stroke care, and alert the hospital team so scans and treatment can start immediately.

Research has shown women aged under 70 are 11% less likely than men to have their stroke recognised by paramedics before they arrive at the hospital.

While younger men and women experience stroke at a similar rate, the symptoms they present with may be different, with “typical” symptoms more common in men and “atypical” symptoms more common in women.

Research has shown women and men are equally likely to present with movement and speech problems when having a stroke. However, women are more likely to show vague symptoms, such as general weakness, changes in alertness, or confusion.

These “atypical” symptoms can be overlooked, leaving women more vulnerable to misdiagnosis, delayed treatment, and preventable harm.

What we did

In our study, published recently in the Medical Journal of Australia (MJA), we used ambulance and hospital data from a 2022 MJA study in New South Wales. This is the study we mentioned above that showed paramedics correctly identified stroke more often in men than women under 70.

From this dataset, we identified more than 5,500 women under 70 who had an ischaemic stroke between 2005 and 2018. Using this group, we built a model to compare two scenarios:

  1. the status quo, where women’s strokes are identified at the current rate of accuracy; and
  2. an improved scenario, where women’s strokes are identified at the same rate as men’s.

We then projected patients’ health over time, including their level of impairment, risk of another stroke, and immediate and long-term survival.

Closing the diagnosis gap would save lives and money

When women’s stroke diagnosis rate was improved to match men’s, each woman gained an average of 0.14 extra years of life (roughly 51 days) and 0.08 extra quality-adjusted life years (QALYs), meaning an additional 29 days in full health.

Scenario two also meant A$2,984 in health-care costs would be saved per woman.

Scaled to the national level based on the number of women under 70 hospitalised with ischaemic stroke each year, closing this gap would mean 252 extra years of life, 144 extra QALYs, and $5.4 million in cost savings annually.

Some limitations

We didn’t have sex-specific data for every aspect of the model, which is in itself a telling sign of the lack of recognition of sex as an important factor in understanding disease. Because of this, we used combined data from both men and women in some parts of our model, which may have affected the results.

Further, the NSW data we used for rates of treatment with intravenous thrombolysis were higher than the national average, so our national figures may be slightly over-estimated.

Beyond stroke – why all this matters

The disparity we found is one example of a broader, systemic issue in women’s health: sex-based differences in diagnosis and treatment that favour men.

Too often, women’s symptoms are misinterpreted or dismissed because they don’t match a “typical” pattern. This can lead to delays, missed opportunities for early treatment, and worse outcomes for women.

In stroke, faster and more accurate diagnosis means people are less likely to die or require long-term care, and more likely to recover better and get back to their daily lives sooner.

So what can we do to close the diagnosis gap?

Investing in better training for paramedics and other emergency responders, so they can recognise a wider range of stroke presentations, could pay off many times over. Public awareness campaigns that highlight atypical stroke symptoms could also help.

Technologies such as mobile stroke units and telemedicine support may be part of the solution, but they must be implemented with attention to sex-specific needs.The Conversation

Lei Si, Associate Professor in Health Services Management, Western Sydney UniversityLaura Emily Downey, Senior Lecturer, Health Economics and Policy, George Institute for Global Health, and Thomas Gadsden, Research Fellow, Health Systems Science, George Institute for Global Health

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

From childcare to aged care, here’s how to deliver safer, more affordable care for all Australians

MTStock Studio/Getty
Angela JacksonUniversity of Tasmania

Too often in discussions about productivity, the care economy only gets mentioned as the problem child putting a drag on growth. This week, the Productivity Commission is seeking to change that narrative with the release of its fifth and final report ahead of the government’s economic reform roundtable next week.

The report, of which I am a co-author, is focused on delivering quality care more efficiently. The care economy is broad and includes health care, childcare, aged care, disability and veterans’ services.

Among our report’s recommendations are a new national screening clearance system for workers across childcare, aged care, the National Disability Insurance Scheme (NDIS) and veterans’ care. That would make it easier to stop people found to be unsafe from simply moving into another sector.

We also propose setting up a new independent advisory board to assess and provide advice on prevention and early intervention across the different levels of government.

By increasing productivity in the care economy, we can reduce current and future costs and, crucially, improve the quality of care for Australians.

Care is central to our lives – and our economy

More than two million Australians work in paid care-related roles. That’s 12% of the workforce: around one in eight workers.

The care sector contributes 8% of Australia’s gross domestic product and is growing fast.

Over the next 40 years, both the number of people working in the care sector and its value to our economy are expected to rise significantly.

Demand for care is growing, but so are the costs

Traditional measures of productivity don’t capture the full story in the care economy.

While care sector productivity is low when you just consider the amount of services provided, when you account for the quality of those services the picture is different. Adjusted for quality, previous commission research has found productivity in a subset of health care grew by 3% annually between 2011-12 and 2017-18 – far above the market-sector average.

While the quality of our services has improved, demand is rising – along with costs.

Increased demand for care services is being driven by an ageing population, rising chronic health conditions, changing family structures, and increased expectations for quality care and independence.

To provide high-quality care more efficiently, we should start by removing silos and enabling a more cohesive, efficient system.

A person might need aged care, disability support, and health services all at once. Our system needs to reflect that reality.

Improving safety and quality with national oversight

Different sectors of the care economy operate under separate regulatory regimes. Providers must navigate multiple audits, standards, and registration systems. Workers often need separate clearances for each sector.

This duplication wastes time and money. It limits workforce mobility. It makes it harder for users to access and compare services.

These fragmented systems can also mean unsafe workers slip through the cracks unnoticed – putting care users at risk.

We are recommending a national screening clearance system and national registration for workers in the aged care, NDIS, veterans’ care and early childhood education and childcare sectors – making it harder for a worker found to be unsafe in one sector to move to another without detection.

This would replace existing clearances such as working with children/vulnerable people checks.

Real-time continuous checking should be undertaken between renewal dates to ensure prompt action if a worker engages in inappropriate behaviour.

We also need a unified approach to worker registration across aged care, the NDIS and veterans’ care.

The commission found more than 42% of aged care providers are also registered NDIS providers, and 82% of veterans’ care providers operate in aged care and/or the NDIS. These are often large providers, delivering a significant share of services. Yet they must comply with separate systems, diverting resources away from frontline care.

All of this is not just about efficiency – it’s also about safety, trust, and quality.

Delivering better care more efficiently

Another key reform is collaborative commissioning, where organisations work together to plan, procure, and evaluate services based on local needs.

In this report, we focus on removing the barriers and supporting collaboration between the federally funded local primary health-care networks and the state-controlled local hospital districts.

Greater collaboration in health care can reduce potentially preventable hospitalisations.

Even modest gains could be transformative. Our report estimates a 10% reduction in preventable hospitalisations could save A$600 million annually. But the real value lies in better care: fewer gaps, smoother transitions, and services tailored to communities.

Prevention is the ultimate productivity lever

Perhaps the most powerful lever for productivity is prevention and early intervention. Stopping problems before they start, or before they escalate, can improve lives and reduce long-term costs across government.

The evidence for this is all around us: from housing-first models that reduce homelessness and hospitalisations, to early childhood programs that boost lifelong outcomes.

However, investment in one area is often not supported because benefits occur over a long timeframe, or accrue to different areas and levels of government.

To address this issue, we’re proposing a national prevention investment framework. A new national independent advisory board would provide expert guidance on the cost effectiveness of new and existing prevention programs.

We need better outcomes

Care is one of the most complex and consequential parts of our economy.

If we don’t act in the face of rising demand, we risk a future where care becomes unaffordable, inaccessible, and inequitable.

But if we embrace reform through aligning regulation, improving collaboration, and investing in prevention, we can build a care economy that delivers better outcomes at sustainable cost. This is what productivity growth is all about.The Conversation

Angela Jackson, Social Policy Commissioner, Productivity Commission, and Adjunct Associate Professor, University of Tasmania

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Private health insurers want to fund more out-of-hospital care. But the Productivity Commission has other ideas

Kseniya Ovchinnikova/Getty
Yuting ZhangThe University of Melbourne

Australia needs to do better at preventing health conditions from arising and worsening, according to an interim report on delivering quality care more efficiently released overnight by the Productivity Commission.

But the commission’s interim report did not mention a greater role for the private health insurance in delivering more preventive health care.

This is despite and wanting to provide more out-of-hospital and preventive care.

What do health insurers want?

Currently, legislation prohibits health insurers from delivering certain types of health care outside hospital. This means they are mainly restricted to delivering care based in hospital, or what’s known as hospital-substitute care (such as hospital in the home arrangements).

But Private Healthcare Australia, which represents most Australian health funds, and one of its members Bupa submitted requests to the Productivity Commission for the government to remove these legislative barriers.

If these laws were changed, it would enable private health insurers to significantly expand their funding for out-of-hospital care. Bupa specifically flags primary care, chronic disease management, and community-based services.

Private health insurers argue that paying for more out-of-hospital care would reduce the need for costly hospitalisations, and save long-term health-care costs. It’s about shifting the focus from treating illness to maintaining wellness, a goal few would disagree with.

In fact, private health insurers are already allowed to cover preventive care. Many have apps for members to track their exercise, blood pressure and sleep, for example. They already provide extras care for preventive dental care, optical, acupuncture, physiotherapy, and perhaps in the future some more complementary therapies. Members can buy hospital care, extras care, or a general plan covering both.

But if a health insurer wants to include more out-of-hospital, GP-like services, this would mean covering more of the same benefits that Medicare already covers.

Is this a good idea?

This isn’t a new debate. Private health insurers have long tried to expand their role beyond hospital care.

However, the core concern with allowing private insurers to cover more out-of-hospital care is the very real risk of driving up prices of out-of-hospital care and creating a two-tiered system.

About 45% of Australians hold private health insurance to cover hospital care.

If private insurers start paying for GP-like consultations too, it is highly likely doctors’ fees would rise. This is because private funds would likely offer a higher payment schedule above Medicare rebates to attract doctors to their networks. This would cause the overall costs of a consultation to rise.

Those without private health insurance, who rely solely on Medicare, would face a shrinking pool of doctors willing to bulk-bill or charge a modest gap, leading to longer wait times, fewer available appointments, and a greater struggle to access care. This would also lead to higher private health premiums as insurers pass on the cost of the higher doctor fees to members.

We already see this dynamic in our hospital system. Surgeons, for instance, earn significantly more for procedures performed in private hospitals compared to public ones. This leads them to disproportionately allocate their time to the private sector.

So people with private health insurance often skip lengthy public waiting lists for elective procedures, while public patients face prolonged delays for essential care.

This disparity doesn’t just create inequities, it strains the public system even further. To entice expensive surgeons to dedicate more time to public hospitals, public hospitals have to pay some of them well above the standard salaries set in enterprise agreements.

This practice diverts precious public resources (funds that could otherwise be used for essential equipment, beds, or more junior doctors and nurses), reduces the overall quality of care for public patients, and increases waiting times further in the public system.

What would this do to Medicare?

Allowing private health insurers to expand further would fundamentally undermine the universality of Medicare. We would risk creating a two-tiered primary health-care system, replicating the very disparities and challenges that plague our hospital sector. So current laws should remain.

What is needed to deliver quality care more efficiently is for the government to significantly boost investment in preventive health care. Once chronic conditions set in, they are difficult to reverse and continuously drive up costs. This is something the Productivity Commission acknowledges in its interim report.

We also need to build truly integrated care. This would deliver seamless, coordinated health services around a person’s needs, rather than around individual providers or separate parts of the system.

Imagine a future where your GP, specialists, allied health professionals, and even social support services are connected, sharing information and working together on your care plan. This crucial approach reduces duplication, improves communication, and ensures people don’t fall through the cracks of a fragmented system.

These are the types of policies that would help make Australia’s health system more efficient, and help ensure Medicare delivers what it was intended to, without unnecessary duplication and the inevitable consequences.

The article has been updated throughout to more accurately reflect proposals to the Productivity Commission and the commission’s response. While Private Healthcare Australia has advocated for a greater role in out-of-hospital and preventive care, its proposal did not state it wanted to cover GP-like services.The Conversation

Yuting Zhang, Professor of Health Economics, The University of Melbourne

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

The discovery of an extinct shelduck highlights the rich ancient biodiversity of the remote Rēkohu Chatham Islands

An artist’s depiction of the Rēkohu shelduck. Sasha Votyakova/Te Papa CC BY-ND
Nic RawlenceUniversity of OtagoAlan TennysonMuseum of New Zealand Te Papa TongarewaLevi LanauzeIndigenous Knowledge, and Pascale LubbeUniversity of Otago

Islands are natural laboratories where evolution can run rampant as plants and animals adapt to new environmental conditions and vacancies in the ecosystem.

This creates all manner of unique animals, although sadly extinction rates are high on islands and many species are now gone. Examples include a blind, flightless duck with a sensory bill (like a platypus) on Hawaii, and pygmy mammoths on islands off the coast of southern California.

The Rēkohu Chatham Islands, an archipelago 785 kilometres east of mainland Aotearoa New Zealand, are no exception.

The islands were once home to a rich assemblage of unique birds, with 64 breeding species at the time of human arrival. Some 34 species and subspecies were found nowhere else on Earth.

This includes the endangered parea Chatham Island pigeon and the extinct mehonui Hawkin’s rail.

Our new research adds a unique species of shelduck to this group and illustrates just how quickly birds can adapt to life on isolated islands.

The Rēkohu Chatham Islands rose above the waves, taking their present form, around 3.5 million years ago. The archipelago is an ideal place to observe how ecosystems form and new species evolve.

A view across a landscape, with hills in the background, on Rēkohu.
The windswept Rēkohu Chatham Islands are home to many bird species that are found nowhere else. Alan Tennyson/Te PapaCC BY-NC-ND

Many of the birds on Rēkohu are closely related to species found on the mainland, but were changed by their new island home. Some are subtly different, such as the extinct Chatham Island kākā, which had a longer bill, larger thigh bones and wider pelvis than its mainland cousin. This suggests it could still fly but spent more time on the ground.

Other birds underwent major changes, such as the extinct Chatham Island duck, which was large, flightless and had bony spurs on its wings which were probably used in fights over territory.

Evolution of the Rēkohu shelduck

Shelducks are a group of semi ground-dwelling ducks found in Eurasia, Africa, Australia and the New Zealand region. In Aotearoa, they are represented by the familiar pūtangitangi paradise shelduck.

During the 1990s, Museum of New Zealand Te Papa Tongarewa palaeontologist Phil Millener found isolated bones and associated skeletons of an extinct shelduck in the rich fossil deposits around the Chatham Islands archipelago. He noted the bones may belong to a new species and they were archived at the museum until scientific advances allowed us to test this idea.

Bones of the extinct Rēkohu shelduck compared to the pūtangitangi paradise shelduck. In each pair the left and right bones are the Rēkohu and paradise shelducks, respectively.
Bones of the extinct Rēkohu shelduck compared to the pūtangitangi paradise shelduck. In each pair the left and right bones are the Rēkohu and paradise shelducks, respectively. Jean-Claude Stahl/Te PapaCC BY-NC-ND

We reconstructed the family tree to uncover the identity of the Rēkohu bird, using ancient DNA from its bones. As Millener hypothesised, the Rēkohu shelduck was most closely related to the mainland paradise shelduck. Its ancestors arrived on the islands a mere 390,000 years ago.

On evolutionary scales, 390,000 years is not a long time, but it was long enough for the Rēkohu shelduck to go down its own evolutionary path. Like the paradise shelduck, males were bigger than females, but the Rēkohu shelduck was taller and more robust. These changes meant Rēkohu shelducks were poorer fliers than their mainland cousins.

Flight is energetically expensive. It is often lost when the cost outweighs its advantages. This is part of the “island syndrome”, a suite of changes in bone shape and behaviour observed in island species. On Rēkohu, an abundance of food, strong winds and a paucity of large predators meant flying wasn’t as beneficial as on the mainland, where predators such as kērangi Eyle’s harrierHaast’s eaglewhēkau laughing owl and adzebill abounded.

Over time, a preference to spend more time on the ground resulted in the wing bones of the Rēkohu shelduck becoming shorter, more robust and less able to support flight. At the same time, its leg bones became longer and more robust. The Rēkohu shelduck was on a trajectory to flightlessness when it became extinct shortly after humans arrived.

A rich Rēkohu waterfowl community

A person searching sand dunes for fossil bones
Sand dunes are a rich source of subfossil bird bones that can be used to reconstruct the past biodiversity of Rēkohu. Alan Tennyson/Te PapaCC BY-NC-SA

The rich fossil deposits on Rēkohu continue to reveal much about the history of the islands. There are likely more undescribed species awaiting discovery.

Our lab continues to investigate the fauna of the islands, with ongoing work to determine if an extinct falcon represents another unique Rēkohu bird.

Working with Indigenous communities is paramount if we are committed to the process of decolonising palaeontology. The shelduck’s scientific (Tadorna rekohu) and common (Rēkohu shelduck) names were gifted to us by the Hokotehi Moriori Trust, the tchieki (guardians) of Rēkohu biodiversity, with which they are interconnected through shared hokopapa (genealogy).

The discovery and naming of the Rēkohu shelduck helps connect the Moriori imi (tribe) with miheke (treasure) of the past, allowing people to reclaim some of the pages of their biological heritage that have been lost.

The Rēkohu shelduck is part of a rich native and endemic waterfowl assemblage (nine different species) that was present when people arrived. These birds are survived only by the parera grey duck. We are only just beginning to understand how the ecological community of the islands once functioned.

The Rēkohu shelduck was on a unique evolutionary trajectory when it went extinct after humans colonised the islands but prior to the arrival of Europeans and Māori. This is a fate shared by many of Rēkohu’s birds.

The discovery of the Rēkohu shelduck is a demonstration of the speed at which island species can be changed by their environment. It highlights both the distinctiveness of Rēkohu animals and their close relationship with mainland Aotearoa New Zealand.The Conversation

Nic Rawlence, Associate Professor in Ancient DNA, University of OtagoAlan Tennyson, Curator of Vertebrates, Museum of New Zealand Te Papa TongarewaLevi Lanauze, Chief executive of Hokotehi Moriori Trust, Indigenous Knowledge, and Pascale Lubbe, Postdoctoral Research Fellow in Molecular Ecology, University of Otago

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Ozempic and other weight-loss drugs linked to rare but serious eye conditions

Flora HuiThe University of Melbourne and Pete A WilliamsKarolinska Institutet

Drugs such as Ozempic, Wegovy and Mounjaro (known as semaglutide and tirzepatide) have changed the way clinicians manage diabetes and obesity around the world.

Collectively known as GLP-1 agonists, these drugs mimic the hormone GLP-1. This limits both hunger and interest in food, helping users lose weight, and helps control blood sugar levels.

But two new studies published today show that people taking these drugs may have a small increased risk of serious eye conditions and vision loss.

Here’s what you need to know if you’re taking or considering these medications.

What damage can occur?

Non-arteritic anterior ischaemic optic neuropathy, or NAION, is a rare but devastating eye condition that occurs when blood flow to the optic nerve is suddenly reduced or blocked. It’s also called an “eye stroke”.

The exact cause of NAION remains unclear and there are no current treatments available. People with diabetes are at increased risk of developing NAION.

Unlike other eye conditions that develop gradually, NAION causes a sudden, painless loss of vision. Patients typically notice the condition when they wake up and discover they’ve lost vision in one eye.

Vision tends to worsen over a couple of weeks and slowly stabilises. Recovery of vision is variable, but around 70% of people do not experience improvement in their vision.

What has previous research shown?

A previous study from 2024 found participants prescribed semaglutide for diabetes were four times more likely to develop NAION. For those taking it for weight loss, the risk was almost eight times higher.

In June, the European Medicines Agency concluded NAION represented a “very rare” side effect of semaglutide medications: a one in 10,000 chance. In a first for medicines regulators, the agency now requires product labels to include NAION as a documented risk.

However the recent studies suggest the risks may be lower than we first thought.

In addition to NAION, there is also evidence to suggest GLP-1 drugs can worsen diabetic eye disease, also known as diabetic retinopathy. This occurs when high blood sugar levels damage the small blood vessels in the retina, which can lead to vision loss.

It may sound counter-intuitive, but rapid blood sugar reductions can also destabilise the fragile blood vessels in the retina and lead to bleeding.

What do the new studies say?

Two newly published studies investigated people with type 2 diabetes living in the United States over two years. The studies looked at the medical records of 159,000 to 185,000 people.

One study found semaglutide or tirzepatide was associated with a more modest risk of developing NAION than previously thought. Of 159,000 people with type 2 diabetes who were taking these drugs, 35 people (0.04%) developed NAION, compared with 19 patients (0.02%) in the comparison group.

The researchers also found an increased risk of developing “other optic nerve disorders”. However, it’s unclear what kind of optic nerve disorders this includes, as the medical record codes used didn’t specify.

Counter to this, the second study did not find an increased risk of NAION among those taking GLP-1 drugs.

However, the researchers found a small increase in the number of people developing diabetic retinopathy in those prescribed GLP-1 drugs.

But overall, participants on GLP-1 drugs experienced fewer sight-threatening complications related to their diabetic retinopathy and required less invasive eye treatments compared to the group taking other diabetes medications.

Further studies are still needed to understand how GLP-1 drugs can lead to eye complications. A current, five-year clinical trial is studying the long-term effects of semaglutides and diabetic eye disease in 1,500 people, which should tell us more about the ocular risks in the future.

What does this mean for people taking GLP-1 drugs?

NAION is a serious condition. But we need to strike a balance between these (and other) risks and the benefits of GLP-1 medications in diabetes care, obesity treatment, reducing heart attack risks and extending lives.

The key lies in informed decision-making and identifying different levels of risk.

People with multiple NAION risk factors – such as sleep apnoea, high blood pressure and diabetes – should undergo careful consideration with their treating doctor before starting these medications.

“Crowded” optic nerve heads are also a risk factor for NAION. This is an anatomical feature where blood vessels at the optic nerve head are tightly packed together. People with crowded optic nerve heads should also undergo careful consideration before starting GLP-1 medications.

Although NAION can strike without warning, regular comprehensive eye examinations with your optometrist or ophthalmologist still serve important purposes. They can detect other drug-related eye problems, including worsening diabetic retinopathy, and can identify patients with crowded optic nerve heads. It’s also important to tell them if you are taking GLP-1 medications so they can keep a close watch on your eye health.

Emerging research also suggests that improving your heart health might help reduce risks of developing NAION. This includes proper management of high blood pressure, diabetes and cholesterol – all conditions that compromise the small blood vessels feeding the optic nerve.

Studies also show patients with heart conditions who better adhere to their medication prescriptions have lower risks of NAION than those who don’t.

Doctors should discuss NAION risks during prescribing decisions and work with eye care providers to monitor regularly for diabetic eye disease. Patients need clear instructions to seek immediate medical attention for sudden vision loss and the need for regular eye examinations.

Aggressive treatment of sleep apnoea and other heart conditions may also help reduce NAION risks. But for now, there remains an ongoing need for more research to understand how GLP-1 medications can affect the eye.The Conversation

Flora Hui, Research Fellow, Centre for Eye Research Australia and Honorary Fellow, Department of Surgery (Ophthalmology), The University of Melbourne and Pete A Williams, Ulla and Ingemar Dahlberg Professor in Vision Science, Research Group Leader, Karolinska Institutet

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Disclaimer: These articles are not intended to provide medical advice, diagnosis or treatment.  Views expressed here do not necessarily reflect those of Pittwater Online News or its staff.

Week Two August 2025 (August 4 - 10)

Vale Col Joye

Colin Frederick Jacobsen (13 April 1936 – 5 August 2025), better known by his stage name Col Joye, was an Australian pioneer rock and pop singer-songwriter, musician and entrepreneur with a career spanning almost sixty-seven years, starting from the late 1950s.

Joye was the first Australian rock and roll/pop singer to have a number one record Australia-wide, (the first Australian artist to have a Number 1. nationwide was country singer Slim Dusty with "A Pub with No Beer") and experienced a string of chart successes in the early Australian rock and roll scene, performing with his band the Joy Boys (formerly KJ Quintet - formed with his brother Keven Jacobsen).

As a pioneer of the genre Joye toured in Lee Gordon's rock 'n' roll shows and featured regularly on television shows including Johnny O'Keefe's Six O'Clock Rock and Brian Henderson's Bandstand.

Col Joye at Sydney Stadium 24 July 1959. By Cecil Lynch From the collections of the State Library of New South Wales [ON 388/Box 052/Item 038] (Rock & Roll concert, Johnny O'Keefe and other stars, Sydney Stadium, 24 July 1959 / photographs by Lynch, Mitchell Library)

Col was born in Sydney to George and Minnie Jacobsen and grew up in the suburb of East Hills. He left school at 14. Joye was an original member of the television program Bandstand, and appeared regularly on the show for fourteen years. He toured Australia with fellow acts that were featured on the program, including Judy Stone, the De Kroo Brothers, Sandy Scott and Little Pattie, including a 'gig' at Avalon Beach in 1963.

Joye and the band also entertained troops in Vietnam and Borneo and recorded several songs in Japan in the mid-1960s.

Joye's popularity levelled off after the changes to the music scene associated with the rise of surf music and the British Invasion, and it was not until 1973 that he had another hit record, with the country music song "Heaven Is My Woman's Love", reaching No. 1 on the Go-Set charts that year.

On 8 June 1981, he was appointed a Member of the Order of Australia for his entertainment and philanthropic work. In 1988, the ARIA Music Awards in 1988, inducted Joye into the ARIA Hall of Fame.

In 2010, "Bye Bye Baby" (1959) was added to the National Film and Sound Archive's Sounds of Australia register. The curator's notes commented that:

''There is not a lot to this pop song, written by American Frank McNulty, other than a catchy title hook. The lyrics are about the singer saying goodbye to his girlfriend and how lonely he will be without her until the next time they meet. The original recording was made using a nylon string guitar, bass (wonderfully out of tune in the beginning) and minimalist drums with Col Joye almost whispering the vocals (as he had a cold at the time). This is the released version, with added celeste and 'ooh-ahh' backing vocals from the Sapphires, presumably to give it a little more musical interest.''

Col passed away in Sydney on 5 August 2025, aged 89. 

Here is is here, in Pittwater, during that 1963 show.

Winners Announced in the 2025 Ageing Australia You are ACE! Awards

August 7, 2025
Ageing Australia is proud to announce the winners of the 2025 You are ACE! Awards, honouring the outstanding individuals, teams and organisations making a real difference in aged care, retirement living and seniors housing.

Fifteen winners have been recognised across individual, team and organisation categories.

From frontline care workers and volunteers to visionary leaders and innovative teams, this year’s winners represent the best of aged care combining compassion, creativity and commitment to help older Australians live well.

“We received more than 500 nominations from across the country this year,” said Ageing Australia CEO Tom Symondson.

“These winners are true champions of aged care. Their dedication, innovation and leadership are shaping a better future for older people every day.”

Among the winners is 22-year-old Brianna Browne of Harbison Retirement Living Village, NSW, who took out the Rising Star award for her rapid progression from care worker to deputy manager and her ability to inspire and support colleagues well beyond her years.

In the Volunteer category Carol Pickering, 80, has been recognised for her remarkable achievement with Villa Maria Catholic Homes where she volunteered for 45 years, more than half her life.

Also recognised was Cadorna House, a boutique aged care home in Launceston, Tasmania, which won the Excellence (Organisation) category for delivering consistently high-quality care and satisfaction.

Other standout winners include David Martin of St Vincent’s Care for innovation across VIC and NSW, Faye Spiteri of Fronditha Care for exceptional leadership and provider Selectability in Queensland for its transformative work in remote and First Nations communities.

FULL LIST OF WINNERS
Individual – Consumer focus and care category
James Wotherspoon, Southern Cross Care, St Joseph’s Aged Care Tweed Heads, NSW

Individual – Innovation category
David Martin, St Vincent’s Care, VIC & NSW

Individual – Leadership category
Faye Spiteri, Fronditha Care, VIC

Individual – Rising star category
Brianna Browne, Harbison Retirement Living Village, NSW

Individual – Volunteer category
Carol Pickering, Villa Maria Catholic Homes, VIC

Team – Consumer focus and care category
CHSP group-based program (centre-based respite and seniors social support group), SydWest Multicultural Services, NSW

Team – Innovation category
Waratah Allied Health Team, Maroba Nursing Home, NSW

Team – Making a difference category
ActiveStrongerBetter Seniors Exercise Program, NovaCare Community Services, NSW

Team – Project category
Curtin University Media Student Volunteers, Melville Cares, WA

Team – Teamwork category
Volunteer Relations, Wesley Mission Queensland

Organisation – Consumer focus and care category
St Vincent’s Care, QLD

Organisation – Excellence category
Cadorna House Aged Care, TAS

Organisation – Innovation category
Kaloma Home for The Aged, QLD

Organisation – Making a difference category
Lifeview Emerald Glades, VIC

Organisation – Rural and remote category
Selectability, QLD

Ageing Australia is the national peak body representing providers across the aged care sector, including retirement living, seniors housing, residential care, home care, community care and related services. 

17 older Australians die from falls every day. Here are 5 things you can do to reduce your risk

ipuwadol/Getty Images
Anne TiedemannUniversity of Sydney and Cathie SherringtonUniversity of Sydney

Every day in Australia, more than 400 people aged over 65 are admitted to hospital due to a fall. That’s around one person every four minutes.

Although anyone can experience a fall, they’re a common cause of disability and loss of independence in older age.

Sadly, 17 older people die as a direct result of falls every day in Australia, often due to head trauma or internal bleeding. Many of these people are dying early, not when their “time has come”.

The good news is that many falls are preventable. Here are five key actions you can take to reduce your risk of falls.

1. Do balance challenging exercises

Recent Australian fall prevention guidelines recommend all people aged 65 years and over, and Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander people aged 50 years and over, should take part in exercise to prevent falls, even if they have never fallen.

In particular, exercise that targets balance and strength is crucial for preventing falls. These are exercises you do while standing, with the feet close together or while standing on one leg (if it’s safe to do so).

These exercises should include controlled movement of the body (such as leaning, reaching and stepping). Examples include heel raises, squats, lunges and stepping in different directions.

To gain the most benefits, fall prevention exercises should be performed at least three times per week.

People who have already had regular falls may benefit from specialised advice from a physiotherapist, exercise physiologist or trained exercise instructor.

2. Have your medications reviewed

Certain medications, such as sleeping tablets, as well as taking multiple medications, can increase your risk of falling.

Older people should discuss and have their medications reviewed each year or after a change in their health, by a GP in collaboration with a pharmacist. Where appropriate, a health-care professional may be able suggest changes which minimise the use of medicines that increase a person’s risk of falling.

3. Maximise the safety of your home

About half of all falls that result in hospital admissions occur in and around the home.

Older people at a higher risk of falls – such as those with significant vision impairment or who have poor mobility – can benefit from a home safety intervention. This would involve:

  • an assessment of their home environment
  • advice about how to safely undertake daily tasks at home and elsewhere, such as safe mobility on stairs and the use of walking aids where needed
  • suggested changes to the home such as installation of grab rails, improved lighting and non-slip mats in the bathroom.

This may be more effective at reducing the risk of falls when provided by an occupational therapist.

Even for older people who have not fallen before, it’s a good idea to reduce clutter, ensure good lighting in the house and remove trip hazards such as electrical cords in walkways.

4. Get your eyes tested regularly

Good vision is essential for maintaining balance, seeing obstacles and moving around safely. Cataracts, a clouding of the lens of the eye, blur your vision and can make you sensitive to light and glare. This common eye condition, associated with age, reduces your ability to spot hazards in the environment.

Research shows having cataracts removed reduces the risk of falls. Fall prevention guidelines recommend a yearly eye check with an optometrist to detect cataracts and other eye conditions.

There’s also evidence wearing bifocal or multifocal glasses can increase the risk of falls by blurring edges close to the feet (such as the edge of a step or gutter). For this reason the Australian fall prevention guidelines recommend active older people use single-lens distance glasses (rather than bifocal, multifocal or progressive lenses) when doing activities outdoors.

It’s also wise for anyone getting a new glasses prescription to be especially careful while they adjust to the new glasses.

5. See a podiatrist if you have painful feet

Healthy and strong feet are important for maintaining good balance and avoiding falls. Research suggests if people with foot problems or painful feet see a podiatrist to have these problems treated, this can reduce their risk of falls.

It’s also important to wear sturdy, well-fitted shoes that have a low, wide heel for greater stability, and a sole with tread to prevent slips.

Don’t wait for a fall to happen before you take action. Every step you take today to reduce your risk of falls is a powerful move toward staying safe and independent.The Conversation

Anne Tiedemann, Professor of Physical Activity and Health, Sydney School of Public Health, University of Sydney and Cathie Sherrington, Professor, Institute for Musculoskeletal Health, School of Public Health, University of Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

I write James Bond novels – here’s why Peaky Blinders creator Steven Knight will bring a crackling new intensity to 007

Kim SherwoodUniversity of Edinburgh

Our hero is on his way to confront danger, feign love and give away a little of his soul. As he takes a long plane journey over Europe into enemy territory, he reflects on what his younger self would make of him now: “Would he recognise himself beneath the surface of this man who was tarnished with years of treachery and ruthlessness and fear?”

You would be forgiven for imagining these as the thoughts of Thomas Shelby, screenwriter Steven Knight’s war hero-turned-Peaky Blinders gang leader. Or the meditations of Viggo Mortensen’s Russian mobster with a heart of gold in Knight’s 2007 film, Eastern Promises.

In fact, this is a passage from Ian Fleming’s fifth James Bond novel, From Russia With Love (1957) – a favourite read of another conflicted, powerful man, John F. Kennedy.

Like Bond, Knight’s protagonists are intelligent, charming, witty, courageous, withdrawn and ruthless – scarred by violence with a seam of cold anger. It is this crosscurrent that makes Knight such a strong pick as the scribe for Bond’s next cinematic incarnation, expected to be released in 2028.

Knight talks about his appointment.

If you’ve not read Fleming before, you might be surprised by Bond’s self-reflection and melancholy here – a strand throughout the books which we saw manifest most significantly on screen during Daniel Craig’s tenure. It’s something I am confident Knight will bring to the screen with crackling intensity, and which I have explored in my own Double O trilogy.

As a lifelong Bond fan, it was a dream come true when the Ian Fleming Estate commissioned me to write a trilogy of novels expanding the world of 007. My mission was to introduce new “Double O” agents.

In Double or Nothing (2022), Bond has gone missing and Moneypenny – now chief of the Double O Section, in the world’s most overdue promotion – doesn’t know if he’s been captured or even killed. In the sequel A Spy Like Me (2024), a rogue Johanna Harwood (003) infiltrates the lion’s den to rescue 007. In the final novel, Hurricane Room, out in May 2026, Bond returns as the Double O agents make their last stand.

The Hurricane Room title comes from the same chapter of From Russia With Love, as Bond’s plane experiences turbulence. As “lighting flung its hands across the windows”, Bond draws on the image of the hurricane room:

In the centre of Bond was a hurricane room, the kind of citadel found in old-fashioned houses in the tropics … To this cell the owner and his family retire if the storm threatens to destroy the house, and they stay there until the danger is past. Bond went to his hurricane room only when the situation was beyond his control, and no other possible action could be taken.

I read From Russia With Love aged 12. It was my first Bond novel and I fell in love with this hero whose inner resources keep him from ever giving up. This is also a quality that Knight unpacks beautifully with the dangerous but soulful Tommy Shelby – probably the only gangster to get a Rambert dance treatment (the series has been adapted into a ballet by the British dance company).

Creating icons

An icon is recognisable by eye. We know Bond by a series of images – the tuxedo, the martini, his Walther PPK pistol – just as we know Shelby by his extreme fade, club collar and peak lapels.

But if a character is as flat as a religious icon, they can’t grow or evolve. That’s not the case with Shelby, who we’ve seen grow with Cillian Murphy over a decade, or Bond, who has evolved with us for seven decades and as many actors. Knight can give us a Bond who is both iconic and human.

Another shared strand between Fleming and Knight is the deliberate use of national myth. Fleming set Bond up as a symbol of Britain. When the villains of From Russia With Love want a scandal that will destroy Britain, they look for a symbol: “Of course, most of their strength lies in myth – in the myth of Scotland Yard, of Sherlock Holmes, of the Secret Service… Myths are built on heroic deeds and heroic people. Have they no such men?” And the reply: “There is a man called Bond.”

With Tommy Shelby, Knight created a recognisable icon.

Fleming then spends the book destroying him. But Bond’s power as a symbol has endured, exemplified in the 2012 Olympic opening ceremony as Daniel Craig, using all the magic of the movies, parachuted in with the Queen.

In Peaky Blinders, Knight takes totemic images from our national consciousness, such as the trenches in the first world war, the Houses of Parliament and Birmingham’s industrial past. But he also gives us the wider picture, from working-class veterans with PTSD to Italian, Jewish and Black families, and women struggling for independence. It’s this refreshing look at our identity that promises Knight’s take on Bond as a symbol will be just as fascinating as Fleming’s.

When Fleming first sat down to write Bond, he told a friend: “I am going to write the spy story to end all spy stories.” He certainly revolutionised the genre, but it wasn’t the end, only the beginning.

It’s been my honour to write in this universe, and I can’t wait to see where Knight takes it next. James Bond Will Return.


This article features references to books that have been included for editorial reasons, and may contain links to bookshop.org. If you click on one of the links and go on to buy something from bookshop.org The Conversation UK may earn a commission.The Conversation

Kim Sherwood, Lecturer in Creative Writing, University of Edinburgh

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

NSW Government launches new Office for Youth

Tuesday August 5, 2025

The states first dedicated NSW Office for Youth was launched today as part of the Minns Government’s ongoing work to build a fairer New South Wales, where young people are directly involved in the government decision-making process.

This comes as the NSW Government’s 2024 Youth Summit Report shows 76% of young people feel unheard in government decision-making. 

The agency will be officially launched this evening at an event in NSW Parliament, alongside the young people who helped build it - including advocates, content creators, and MPs. 

For more than a decade, young people in New South Wales have lacked a central point of engagement within government. The former Liberal-National government abolished the youth portfolio in 2011, silencing the voice of young people in executive government. 

The Government states the new NSW Office for Youth will change that. 

''Young people made their expectations clear through 12 months of consultation and at the 2024 NSW Youth Summit: consultation without follow-through is no longer acceptable. They called for genuine influence in shaping policy. The Minns Labor Government has listened and is taking action.'' the government stated in a release 

The Office for Youth will:

  • Engage young people on their terms - in urban and regional areas, online, and through community-based initiatives.
  • Embed youth perspectives across government policies and programs from the outset, not as an afterthought.
  • Cut through red tape and duplication that currently exists

From climate and housing to justice, mental health, and equity, young people in NSW have consistently shown leadership. The NSW Office for Youth will ensure that leadership is formally recognised, respected, and integrated into decision-making processes across government. 

The NSW Government is committed to building a future where young people are not only heard but are active contributors to the decisions that shape their lives. 

Also released today key findings of the 2024 Youth Summit Report show:

  • 76% of young people say government doesn’t listen.
  • Cost of living is the top issue, followed by mental health and vaping.
  • 1 in 10 have experienced homelessness.
  • 85% voted in 2023 but still feel shut out.

The report can be found here.

The 2025 Chair of NSW Youth Advisory Council, Ellen Armfield, said:

“I’m excited to see how the Minster for Youth along with the Advocate, will work together to ensure all that all young people across the state, feel supported, valued and listened to.” 

Minister for Youth, Rose Jackson said:

“The decisions we make as a government today, will affect generations to come so it is absolutely imperative that they are a part of the conversation. That’s what this is about. 

“Young people have been ignored for way too long. Former NSW Government’s have cut the youth portfolio entirely - we’re putting it back, front and centre where it belongs. 

“This new Office isn’t just a nameplate on a door- it’s a proper, central place where young people are heard, respected, and actually help steer the ship. 

“We’re not here to tick boxes or run another round of pointless consultation. This is about real change. Young people told us what they want and we’re getting on with it." 

Zoë Robinson, Advocate for Children and Young People, stated:

“The Office for Youth brings together expertise from across government to continue to engage with and ensure young people’s voices are not just heard but will inform policy and decisions that will impact them today and, in the future.” 

Milly Bannister Founder & CEO of ALLKND, said:

“Young people aren’t just the future, they’re here, now, shaping communities and tackling challenges head‑on. The launch of the Office for Youth is an opportunity to put their voices where they belong – at the heart of decision‑making. 

“At ALLKND, we see every day how powerful it is when young people are trusted to co‑design solutions that affect their mental health and wellbeing. This initiative signals a genuine commitment to listening to and learning from the lived experiences of young people across New South Wales, and I’m proud to stand behind it.”

 

Young Writers Competition Winners Announced

On Wednesday August 6 the council announced the next generation of storytellers have shown boundless creativity with this year’s theme ‘change’ at the 16th annual Young Writers’ Competition. 

The challenge of distilling big ideas of change into short, powerful stories led to an exceptional shortlist of twenty-four finalists from more than 400 entries that poured in from students in kindergarten to Year 12. 

Mayor Sue Heins presented awards to the winning young authors and applauded the outstanding participation and talent on display. “It’s truly inspiring to see so many young writers embracing the power of storytelling and bravely sharing their unique perspectives. 

“The creativity and courage shown by these students remind us all of the importance of change—both in our community and within ourselves. 

“Events like this not only encourage literacy, but foster confidence, empathy and a sense of belonging among our young people. Congratulations to every participant, our finalists, and this year’s outstanding winners—your voices are the future of our community,” Mayor Heins added. 

Acclaimed authors Debra Tidball, Nick Long, Nat Amore, Yvette Poshoglian, Pip Harry and Harry Cook judged the 2025 competition and praised entrants for their depth, originality and heart evident in every piece.

All 24 finalists’ stories will feature in the 2025 Young Writers’ Competition eBook ‘Change’ on the council website.

Winners’ awards were officially presented by Mayor Sue Heins and author judges at a special presentation at the Northern Beaches Council Chambers on Sunday 3 August. 

Kindergarten - Year 2, judged by author Debra Tidball 

  • Winner: Mia Bennett for The Nervous Ice-Cream 
  • Runner Up: Christopher Bai for Diary of a Chick 
  • Highly Commended: Josh Asigno for Sam and the Snowy Portal Adventure 
  • Highly Commended: Joey Shen for Invasion    

Years 3 – 4, judged by author Nick Long 

  • Winner: Georgia Greenwell for The Drop of Life 
  • Runner Up: Rose Hastie for Emeralds and Diamonds 
  • Highly Commended: Laura Holden for 2 Homes 
  • Highly Commended: Mia Jones for Stella and Scales 

Years 5 - 6, judged by author Nat Amore 

  • Winner: Maya Gaffney by Are You Listening? 
  • Runner Up: Emma Kate Cooper for Crumpet’s Little Story 
  • Highly Commended: Abigail McCabe for The Destination 
  • Highly Commended: Kiana O’Farrell for The Clockmaker’s Change 

Years 7 – 8, judged by author Yvette Poshoglian 

  • Winner: Moana Chujo for Silent Strings 
  • Runner Up: Jeana Shen for The Currency of Memory 
  • Highly Commended: Eugene Lin for Memories of the Sand 
  • Highly Commended: Evelyn Christopher for Elsie 

Years 9 - 10, judged by author Pip Harry 

  • Winner: Alice Surace for The Tides of Change 
  • Runner Up: Zoe Mason for Typing… 
  • Highly Commended: Noah Gonçalves Ferreira for Moonlight Beneath the Sun 
  • Highly Commended: Lok Tin Samuel Shen for Procedural 

Years 11 – 12, judged by author Harry Cook 

  • Winner: Maya Reed for Nine Years 
  • Runner Up: Xenia Beck for Just a Notebook 
  • Highly Commended: Annika Mills for Fragments of a Fractured Mind 
  • Highly Commended: Rosanna Robertson for Route 835 

Manly Big Wave: Gnarliest Day of the August Swell 2025!

by MANLY SURF TV

Local surfers charging huge wave and take on some of the biggest sets of the season. 
RAW footage from August 3, 2025, published August 6 2025

Opportunities:

Free science spree sparks inspiration for next generation

August 8, 2025

A free science spree for National Science Week (9-17 August) is set to spark inspiration in the bright minds of the next generation.

The weeklong science spectacular will have everything from mind blowing science shows to informative bush walks, interactive experiments and even the opportunity to meet a life-sized Australovenator dinosaur.

The variety of events provide the perfect opportunity for a fun and educational family day out without the need to open your wallet. 

Free events include:

  • Science in the Scrub at Western Sydney Parklands from 11am to 3pm, Sunday, 10 August
  • The Science Social at the Australian Museum from 5:30pm to 8:30pm, Wednesday 13 August (registration required)
  • Science in the Swamp at Centennial Park from 11am to 3pm, Sunday, 17 August
  • A community day at Mount Annan Botanic Gardens from 10am to 3pm Saturday 16 August (registration required).

In addition to these free events 32 schools from across Greater Sydney will take part in the Sydney Science Trail hosted by the Australian Museum and the Botanic Gardens of Sydney.

Minister for the Arts John Graham said:

“For families looking for an affordable and educational day out, this series of free events is spot on.

“These free science events will ignite curiosity and conversation for people of all ages and backgrounds.

“Science week is a great opportunity to discover and explore. I encourage people to embrace the chance to delve a little deeper into what makes our world tick.”

Minister for Planning and Public Spaces Paul Scully said:

“Free events like this help to inspire the next generation of innovators by making science accessible, fun and educational.

“If you’ve got free time in Science Week check out some of the science-sational action happening across the city at the Australian Museum, Mount Annan Botanic Gardens, Western Sydney Parklands and Centennial Park.

“There’s something for everyone with multiple hands-on science stalls from scavenger hunts to slime making, educational bush walks and more.”

Skills Minister puts apprenticeship and traineeship reform front and centre: Feedback Invited

August 7, 2025

The NSW Government states it is continuing its work to rebuild the skills workforce and ensure NSW has the construction workers it needs to build more homes, with a comprehensive review of the Apprenticeship and Traineeship Act 2001 now underway.

This builds on the Government’s $3.4 billion investment in the 2025-26 Budget, the largest ever investment in skills and TAFE, ensuring we have the skilled workers to meet the state’s needs.

The Review begins with a statewide Have Your Say survey, inviting apprentices, trainees, employers, and training providers to share their experiences and shape improvements to the system.

The aim is to strengthen the apprenticeship and traineeship framework by making it easier to navigate, more flexible, and better matched to the real-world needs of priority industries like construction, care and support, technology, and clean energy.

It’s also about improving outcomes, especially for young people in regional NSW, and making sure the system supports more apprentices and trainees to complete their training and step into long-term, rewarding careers.

The Review is a key commitment of the NSW Skills Plan, and will be backed by roundtables with local employers, unions, training providers and apprentices and trainees across the state in the coming months.

For more information, and links to the Have Your Say survey please visit the Apprenticeship and Traineeship Act (2001) Review web page by September 11 2025

Minister for Skills, TAFE and Tertiary Education, Steve Whan said:

“We’re rebuilding the skills system so that it delivers for NSW. Not just for now, but for the long term.

“This review is about making apprenticeships and traineeships work better for the people who use them - students, employers, and training providers.

“We want a system that reflects today’s economy and helps more people get the skills they need for good jobs, especially in the regions and in industries crying out for workers.

“The feedback we get from the community will play a huge role in shaping the changes. We’re committed to making this review practical, inclusive, and focused on results.”

Young Filmmakers Comp turns 21

The highly anticipated Beaches Young Filmmakers Comp 2025 is back, now in its 21st year, offering a golden opportunity for budding filmmakers to showcase their talents and creativity.

This exciting competition invites individuals or teams to produce a short film of up to 7 minutes, integrating secret inclusions—a mystery item, keyword, and phrase—that will be revealed on the council's website at 5 pm on Wednesday, 27 August.

Participants will have four days to bring their vision to life and submit their entries by 10 pm on Sunday, 31 August 2025.

With a total prize pool of $3000 and various industry prizes, aspiring filmmakers will also have the chance to see their films screened at the prestigious Finals and Awards Night on Thursday, 18 September at HOYTS Warringah Mall. Family, friends, and the public are invited to attend and celebrate the creative achievements of these emerging filmmakers.

Mayor Sue Heins expressed her enthusiasm for the competition and encouraged young filmmakers to take part.

"Beaches Young Filmmakers Comp is a wonderful way to learn the craft of filmmaking while having fun, picking up new skills and meeting like-minded people.

"If you’ve ever thought about making a short film, even if you have never done it before, why not enter? You never know where it may lead," said Mayor Heins.

Teams can consist of 1 to 12 members, aged between 12 and 24 years, with at least one member living, working, or studying on the Manly to Palm Beach peninsula.

The council stated it extends its heartfelt thanks to premium sponsor and long-time supporter, now for the thirteenth year, Miller Tripods, for their unwavering support, along with huge thanks to Screenwise and Canon for also being premium sponsors. Further thanks go to Australian Cinematography Society for their generous sponsorship of this year's competition.

Finalists’ films will be showcased on the council’s website following the Finals and Awards Night, providing further exposure for the talented young filmmakers.

Prize money is funded through entry fees, final night ticket sales and sponsorship.

Underwater Photography Contest returns

Council is holding its annual Underwater Photography competition from Thursday 24 July to Sunday 18 August 2025.

The 2025 theme Wonder, sustaining what sustains us aligns with the Worlds Ocean Day theme and gives photographers the opportunity to showcase the Northern Beaches 5 aquatic reserves and be in the running for part of the $4,000 prize pool.

With 80 km of iconic coastline featuring 24 ocean and harbour beaches, five aquatic reserves, and 5 intertidal protected areas—including nationally and globally recognised surfing reserves—photographers are truly spoilt for choice when deciding where to capture the perfect shot.

Mayor Sue Heins said, “Our coastline is home to an extraordinary array of marine life, from delicate seagrass meadows to majestic sea creatures. Each photograph taken helps tell the story of this precious underwater world and the urgent need to protect it for future generations.”

The competition celebrates all skill levels and is open to amateur and professional photographers and videographers.

“I encourage everyone, whether you’re a seasoned photographer or just starting out, to grab your camera, dive in, and capture the wonder that lies beneath our waves. Every image you share inspires greater understanding and appreciation for the ocean that sustains us all.” Mayor Heins said.

With 8 categories including a major award - The Valerie Taylor Underwater Photography Award for Excellence, entrants can enter up to 3 images. Videographers can submit one reel.

Categories:

  • Behaviour: Capturing natural behaviour of marine life.
  • Macro: Getting up close to the subject matter.
  • Threatened Species: Portraying the vulnerability of a threatened species found, for example: black rod cod, grey nurse shark, green turtle.
  •  Human Connection: Capturing the positive or negative connection between a person(s) and marine life (flora / fauna / megafauna). This could include monitoring citizen science projects or research undertaken in one of the Northern Beaches aquatic reserves.
  • Seascapes (wide angle): Capturing the raw beauty of the underwater vista in one of the Northern Beaches aquatic reserves.
  • Youth: For the budding young photographers aged 12 to 17 years old. The winner will be recognised as the Underwater Youth Photographer of the Year 2025.
  • Reels: Capturing the wonder of the biodiversity in our underwater world. Reel length is 15 to 30 seconds duration.
  • People’s Choice Award: Everyone can vote online for their favourite finalist image.

The People’s Choice voting opens Thursday 28 August and runs through to Sunday 21 September with winners announced in November.

For more information about the competition and the full terms and conditions, visit council's website.

Open Mic at Palm Beach

Come on down this Sunday from 2–5pm for our Open Mic Afternoon — happening every last Sunday of the month!

Show off your talent, enjoy great vibes, and be part of a supportive local music scene. Don’t miss it!

Club Palm Beach

Financial help for young people

Concessions and financial support for young people.

Includes:

  • You could receive payments and services from Centrelink: Use the payment and services finder to check what support you could receive.
  • Apply for a concession Opal card for students: Receive a reduced fare when travelling on public transport.
  • Financial support for students: Get financial help whilst studying or training.
  • Youth Development Scholarships: Successful applicants will receive $1000 to help with school expenses and support services.
  • Tertiary Access Payment for students: The Tertiary Access Payment can help you with the costs of moving to undertake tertiary study.
  • Relocation scholarship: A once a year payment if you get ABSTUDY or Youth Allowance if you move to or from a regional or remote area for higher education study.
  • Get help finding a place to live and paying your rent: Rent Choice Youth helps young people aged 16 to 24 years to rent a home.

Visit: https://www.nsw.gov.au/living-nsw/young-people/young-people-financial-help

School Leavers Support

Explore the School Leavers Information Kit (SLIK) as your guide to education, training and work options in 2022;
As you prepare to finish your final year of school, the next phase of your journey will be full of interesting and exciting opportunities. You will discover new passions and develop new skills and knowledge.

We know that this transition can sometimes be challenging. With changes to the education and workforce landscape, you might be wondering if your planned decisions are still a good option or what new alternatives are available and how to pursue them.

There are lots of options for education, training and work in 2022 to help you further your career. This information kit has been designed to help you understand what those options might be and assist you to choose the right one for you. Including:
  • Download or explore the SLIK here to help guide Your Career.
  • School Leavers Information Kit (PDF 5.2MB).
  • School Leavers Information Kit (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • The SLIK has also been translated into additional languages.
  • Download our information booklets if you are rural, regional and remote, Aboriginal or Torres Strait Islander, or living with disability.
  • Support for Regional, Rural and Remote School Leavers (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for Regional, Rural and Remote School Leavers (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • Support for Aboriginal and/or Torres Strait Islander School Leavers (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for Aboriginal and/or Torres Strait Islander School Leavers (DOCX 1.1MB).
  • Support for School Leavers with Disability (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for School Leavers with Disability (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • Download the Parents and Guardian’s Guide for School Leavers, which summarises the resources and information available to help you explore all the education, training, and work options available to your young person.

School Leavers Information Service

Are you aged between 15 and 24 and looking for career guidance?

Call 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337).

SMS 'SLIS2022' to 0429 009 435.

Our information officers will help you:
  • navigate the School Leavers Information Kit (SLIK),
  • access and use the Your Career website and tools; and
  • find relevant support services if needed.
You may also be referred to a qualified career practitioner for a 45-minute personalised career guidance session. Our career practitioners will provide information, advice and assistance relating to a wide range of matters, such as career planning and management, training and studying, and looking for work.

You can call to book your session on 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337) Monday to Friday, from 9am to 7pm (AEST). Sessions with a career practitioner can be booked from Monday to Friday, 9am to 7pm.

This is a free service, however minimal call/text costs may apply.

Call 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337) or SMS SLIS2022 to 0429 009 435 to start a conversation about how the tools in Your Career can help you or to book a free session with a career practitioner.

All downloads and more available at: www.yourcareer.gov.au/school-leavers-support

Word Of The Week: Perfidious

Word of the Week remains a keynote in 2025, simply to throw some disruption in amongst the 'yeah-nah' mix. 

Adjective

1. deceitful and untrustworthy; faithless, false, disloyal, traitorous, treacherous.

From Latin perfidiosus, from perfidia ‘treachery’.

From perfidy(noun.); "breach of faith or trust, base treachery," 1590s, from French perfidie (16c.), from Latin perfidia "faithlessness, falsehood, treachery," from perfidus "faithless," from phrase per fidem decipere "to deceive through trustingness," from per "through" (from word root per- (1) "forward," hence "through") + fidem (nominative fides) "faith" (from word root bheidh- "to trust, confide, persuade").

Compare: True

Adjective

1. in accordance with fact or reality. 2. accurate or exact. 3. loyal or faithful. 4. Arcahic; honest. 5. not false, fictional, or illusory; factual or factually accurate; conforming with reality. 6. (prenominal) being of real or natural origin; genuine; not synthetic.

Adverb

1. truly. 2. accurately or without variation.

Verb

1. bring (an object, wheel, or other construction) into the exact shape or position required.

From Old English trēowe, trȳwe ‘steadfast, loyal’; related to Dutch getrouw, German treu.

Body rolls and headbanging: we found cockatoos have 30 different dance moves

Sergei Ginak/Getty
Raf FreireCharles Sturt University

Companion cockatoos are renowned for their problem-solving and intriguing characters. It’s no surprise these large, long-lived and intelligent parrots are known to display complex behaviour.

Owners often film their birds dancing to music and post the videos to social media. Snowball, a famous dancing cockatoo, has been shown to have 14 different dance moves.

We wanted to find out more about the dance repertoire of cockatoos and why they might be doing this. In our new research, we examined videos of dance behaviour and played dance music to six cockatoos at an Australian zoo.

These birds weren’t just doing a side step or bobbing up and down. Between them, they had a rich repertoire of at least 30 distinct moves. Some birds coordinated their head bobbing with foot movements, while others undertook body rolls. Our research shows at least 10 of the 21 cockatoo species dance.

If we saw this behaviour in humans, we would draw a clear link between music and dancing and interpret the behaviour as enjoyable. After watching cockatoos voluntarily begin dancing for reasonable lengths of time, it was difficult to reach any conclusion other than cockatoos most likely dance because it’s fun.

A Goffin’s cockatoo dancing while a Guns and Roses song plays.

How many moves does a cockatoo have?

Dancing is complicated. To dance to music, animals need to be able to learn from others, imitate movements and synchronise their movements. These complex cognitive processes are only known to exist in humans – but evidence is emerging for its presence in chimpanzees and parrots such as cockatoos.

To catalogue the dance moves of cockatoos, we began by studying videos of the behaviour. We analysed 45 dancing videos and recorded all distinct moves.

The five species in these videos were the familiar sulfur-crested cockatoos and little corellas, as well as Indonesian species such as Goffin’s cockatoos, white cockatoos and Moluccan cockatoos.

Across the videos, we spotted 30 movements, including 17 that hadn’t been described scientifically. We also observed 17 other movements, which we classified as “rare” because they were only seen in a single bird.

Head movements were the most common dance move, especially the downward bobbing motion. Half of all videoed cockatoos performed this move.

figure showing popular cockatoo dance moves.
The ten most common dance moves across all five species include bobbing up and down, headbanging and going side to side. Zenna Lugosi/Author providedCC BY-NC-ND

Dancing – but not to music

Once we catalogued the moves, we then tested whether music could elicit this behaviour in captive cockatoos who weren’t kept as companions.

We undertook a playback experiment with six adult cockatoos at Wagga Wagga Zoo in New South Wales, comprising two sulfur-crested cockatoos, two pink cockatoos and two galahs.

Over three sessions, we played a piece of electronic dance music on repeat for 20 minutes and recorded any responses on video. We repeated our experiment with no music and again with a podcast featuring people talking.

All six cockatoos we studied showed some dancing behaviour at least once over the three sessions. But the rates of dancing weren’t any higher during the playing of music – it was similar to dancing during silence and the podcast.

We don’t fully know why this is. One possibility could be because we played music to existing male-female pairs, and the social environment alone was sufficient to trigger dance behaviour.

Why do cockatoos dance at all?

To find out whether the cockatoo species most prone to dancing were those most closely related, we analysed similarities across species. Goffin’s cockatoos and white cockatoos had the most similar moves, while Goffin’s cockatoo and little corella were the furthest apart.

But this clashed with genetics, as Goffin’s cockatoos are most closely related to little corellas. This suggests dancing behaviour may not be connected to genetic links.

Interestingly, these behaviours are mainly recorded in companion birds. Music playback in the online videos does seem to encourage the bird to keep it going for longer than likely to be seen in zoo or wild birds. These dance moves might represent an adaptation of courtship display movements as a way to connect with their human owners.

Other researchers report being able to trigger dancing behaviour in an African grey parrot and a sulfur-crested cockatoo with music. But the zoo cockatoos in our playback study didn’t respond the same way. This suggests there may be an element of learning to respond to humans.

A galah bobs and side steps while a song plays. But it’s not clear the movements are a response to the music.

It’s usually easy to tell if a human behaviour is play or not. But in animals, it can be much more difficult. Researchers define a behaviour as play if it meets four criteria: it occurs while animals are relaxed, it’s begun voluntarily, has no obvious function and appears rewarding. Cockatoo dancing would meet all four of these criteria.

By contrast, repetitive behaviours such as pacing seen in animals kept alone in small cages would not be play – it’s not rewarding and the animals don’t seem relaxed. Parrots kept in poor conditions exhibit self-harming behaviours such as constant screeching and feather pulling.

Captive parrots have complex needs and can experience welfare problems in captivity. Playing music may help enrich their lives.

For cockatoo owners, this suggests that if their birds are dancing, they’re feeling good. And if they’re busting out many different moves in response to music, even better – they might be showing creativity and a willingness to interact.


Acknowledgement: Honours student Natasha Lubke is the lead author of the research on which this article is based.The Conversation

Raf Freire, Senior Lecturer in Animal Behaviour and Welfare, Charles Sturt University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

‘Bookshelf wealth’ is a TikTok trend, Dua Lipa’s reading Helen Garner. But books have signified taste for centuries

Luisa Brimble/Unsplash
David CarterThe University of Queensland

Books and bookshelves as interior decoration are a new trend, according to recent reports. An expert at Etsy, where some sell books by the metre in order to fill shelves, reports a 19,616% increase in searches for “book-lover decor” over the past three months, compared with the same time last year. Another “more bespoke service” offers a metre of assorted vintage books, all with orange covers, for £98.

“Bookshelf wealth” is an interior design trend on TikTok, too. According to the Guardian, “A bookshelf that looks like an heirloom family collection, complete with art and ornaments, suggests you care about literature and art – and have time and money to spend on these things.” Even if you don’t read much, you can gesture through your bookshelves to aspirations to culture and good taste.

Like all bright and not-so-bright new ideas, of course, the use of books and bookshelves as interior decoration has a much older history than its recent online incarnation suggests. Bookshelves as interior decoration – along with book-of-the-month clubs and discussion of books in popular media – were 19th and 20th-century trends too, though with important differences.

Unlike books bought by the metre, those trends could cultivate a genuine interest in reading – as do some 2025 trends, like the celebrity book club. Helen Garner’s This House of Grief was recently chosen by musician Dua Lipa for hers.

Democratising reading

The imposing library in the gentleman’s stately house in the 19th century is a familiar image. It was a key element in marking one’s arrival in the privileged professional or landed classes.

At the end of the 19th century, though, book publishing (and book talk) filtered down to middle-class and working-class readers who began to self-educate or to broaden their reading through accessing new books. These changes were brought about by wider education and employment, but also an increase in publishing activity, especially for new novels. (The later invention of the mass-market paperback, in the 1930s, would be another landmark.) Readers hunted down the classics, followed reading lists set up by reformist associations, or joined newly opened libraries, which also expanded across this period.

A new fashion emerged, from the 1920s, for knowing the best, most absorbing or enjoyable of the many new books appearing: modern novels above all. This fashion for the new often existed alongside a desire to know the classics and their authors – and to display them all in the home.

Book clubs formed, book programs on the new medium of radio were introduced, and new essays and advertisements about owning and displaying books appeared. Features in newspapers and magazines highlighting the “Book of the Week” or “Book of the Month” became common by the late 1920s. So did essays and advertisements addressed primarily to women readers. Most images, though, showed a man sitting in an armchair surrounded by his homely books.

A new language emerged too, describing the emerging book worlds as “middlebrow”, in contrast to the “lowbrow” (those merely following popular or mass tastes) and the highbrow (those whose tastes were only high, refined and, perhaps, pretentious). All three terms could be terms of abuse: usually in feminised forms.

Harvard Classics

The volume of new books could provoke anxieties for both established critics and the new readers about “drowning in a sea of new novels”, alongside new enthusiasms for trying to keep up with the latest. Guidance in reading – what to read and how to read – became a new industry. So did guidance on buying and collecting books, and owning them. And, no less important, to displaying them by building a library in your own home.

In the United States, in 1909–10, Charles W. Eliot, president of Harvard University, edited the Harvard Classics, or Dr Eliot’s Five-Foot Shelf: 50 volumes containing selections of classic works, newly packaged for ordinary and aspiring readers.

The Harvard Classics: 50 volumes containing selections of classic works, packaged for ordinary and aspiring readers. Valerius Tygart/WikipediaCC BY

Authors ranged from Plato to Saint AugustineDante to Milton, and included Charles Dickens, Robert Louis Stevenson and Edgar Allan Poe. Subjects ranged from Christian texts, to texts from Buddhism, Hinduism and Islam. The total choices were extraordinary (and no doubt daunting for many). Special editions were produced, but cheaper versions appeared over the 1920s and 1930s.

Harvard Classics were designed for the home. They could be purchased with a five-foot bookshelf to hold them, as well as a booklet giving plans for reading through the collection in just 15 minutes a day. The mix of high culture and easy access to it was one dimension of what would be labelled the middlebrow. The Harvard Classics were available to Australian readers by the 1940s.

Early book clubs

The American Book-Of-The-Month Club, launched in 1926, was another outstanding success in attracting a new generation of readers. Henry Handel Richardson’s Ultima Thule and Eleanor Dark’s The Timeless Land, in their US editions, were among the club’s successful monthly choices.

All About Books, Contents, December 1928. Fryer Library

In Australia, All About Books, launched in 1928, was produced not by a literary critic, but by a key figure in the book trade, bookseller and editor D.W. Thorpe. Its aim was to “sift the grains of wheat out of so much chaff” – sort out the good books from the so many new books. Its readers were “ordinary readers”, not part of the literary community but eager readers, whether in business or the home, keen to know the best of the latest books.

It presented recommendations of the best new books (and the rest), plus guides to what was being read in England and the US. All About Books printed short notices, plus slightly longer reviews by noted critics George Cowling and Nettie Palmer on new fiction. Palmer’s column was “A Reader’s Notebook”, while Cowling’s became “All Sorts of Reading for Everybody”.

New habits of reading were also linked to new habits of book buying and book owning. The building of a personal library might begin by purchasing the ten-book Masterpiece Library of Short Stories (each book contained two volumes) from the 1920s, or by discerning consumption – a most important quality to achieve – of the new books appearing.

With such abundance, guidance in how to build a personal or “domestic” library was always needed. All About Books obliged.

The building of a personal library might begin by purchasing the ten-volume Masterpiece Library of Short Stories, from the 1920s. eBay

Australian home libraries

The home became the crucial site for this new book culture, and the frequent recommendation that books and bookshelves made attractive living-room furniture was not simply trivial. These should be good books in good bookshelves, well presented in the domestic space.

‘Personal Letters from Living Authors’, The Listener In, June 1935. National Library of Australia

The new book culture was very reader-oriented and often feminised. A weekly book page appeared in the commercial radio paper, The Listener-In, edited and written by Miss J.G. Swain, who also presented a weekly radio program: Living Authors. A Book of the Week selection appeared on the Women’s Page, and readers were invited into close relations with “living authors”.

As leading historian of Australian reading, Patrick Buckridge, has shown, the very successful Australian Women’s Weekly also ran extended pages on good books and good reading from the 1930s to the 1960s. Women readers were specifically addressed, and they were the key participants.

A worried stenographer wrote to the Weekly, with perfect middlebrow judgement:

I like biographies, best-sellers, history and travel books and most of the classics, but the girls I have come in contact with cannot be bothered with any of these, and, if they read at all, just read light fiction. (20 July 1940)

In Buckridge’s words:

Good books and good reading [were] defined mainly by negation […] they are what “light fiction” is not. […] Good books could also be defined […] as the books that should be owned and kept in the home.

The Australian Women’s Weekly, February 1937. National Library of Australia

This mid-century period in Australia has often been characterised as a period of cultural lack, before the post-war developments in modern literature and art. But looking back now through the vision of reading and publishing history – and the broad range of cultural institutions – we see something else.

We see a period of cultural expansion and diversity: of new books, new readers, new cultural and commercial opportunities.

Much of this culture around books and reading continued in the post-war decades, in newspaper review pages for example, but criticism was increasingly in the hands of university and other professional critics. The broad public culture around books was divided and much was lost – until its reinvention with the expansion of book festivals, reading groups, and new forms of reading fandom in recent decades

‘At home with books’

Books for the home, for the domestic reader, for owning and displaying in home bookshelves, were no doubt involved in forms of social distinction and class affirmation. To be “at home with books” was a demonstrable level of cultural capital.

But the spread of books and reading also involved forms of democratisation and new kinds of engagement with modern culture. That many of the ideas and the books themselves came from overseas was not a matter of “domination”, but of wanting to keep up with modern culture as it appeared — much as we do today.

In interesting ways, the last two decades have seen something like a resurgence in middlebrow (and “high pop”) cultural enthusiasms. The word “middlebrow” itself has had something of a revival.

Bookshelves as interior decoration are likely to be with us – in ever more complicated and design friendly forms – for quite a long while yet. Bookshelves still have many new and many old stories to tell.

Most importantly today, the popularity and public presence of a wide range of reading activity – right across the scale of genres, from literary to popular – has significant potential to further democratise reading.The Conversation

David Carter, Professor Emeritus, Australian Literature, The University of Queensland

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Spy novelist Stella Rimington, the first female head of MI5, was a ‘true trailblazer’

Sue TurnbullUniversity of Wollongong

Dame Stella Rimington, former director general of the UK’s domestic counter-intelligence and security agency, MI5, and author of several spy thrillers, has died this week, aged 90.

A decade ago, Rimington came to Melbourne to promote her latest spy thriller, featuring her alter ego Liz Carlyle, also an MI5 agent. I was invited, as convenor of Sisters in Crime Australia, to interview her before an appreciative audience at Readings bookshop in Hawthorn. They were clearly delighted to be hearing from a real-life spy – especially one widely credited as the blueprint for Judi Dench’s version of M in the Bond movies.

Tall, elegant, impeccably dressed and sharp as a stiletto, Dame Stella was everything we wanted her to be: a woman who had made it to the top in the macho world of espionage.

Her literary legacy includes a 2001 autobiography, Open Secret, (widely seen as disappointing) and several spy thrillers, which gained a dedicated following. Her 2004 debut thriller, At Risk, was praised in the Guardian as “a cracking good thriller” with “nitty-gritty insider detail”. Together, her books provide a fascinating insight into a clandestine world more usually presented from what she herself described as a masculine point of view.

“When you think about it, all fictional spies are blokes, and spy writers when I started were chaps too,” she told the Edinburgh International Book Festival of her Liz Carlyle novels in 2015. “So I was certain that my character was going to be female. I wanted her to reflect accurately what a female does in my former service.”

Both of her female protagonists, Carlyle and CIA agent Manon Tyler (in her final two novels), reflected aspects of her own personality. Their adventures, blended with the challenges of ordinary life – relationships, workplace politics, insecurities – took readers around the world as they dealt with “fictional” threats to the nation.

An accidental spy

Sir Richard Moore, head of MI6, the foreign intelligence branch of the UK secret service, has called Rimington a “true trailblazer”. MI5 itself states it “underwent far-reaching transformation under Dame Stella’s leadership”, reports the BBC.

But she never set out to be a spy. Born in South London in 1935, she went to Edinburgh University in 1954, where she earned a master’s degree in English and literature – which shows where a good humanities degree can get you. After training as an archivist, she married John Rimington, who she accompanied to India when he took up a position at the High Commission in New Delhi.

After two years of tea parties and amateur dramatics, Rimington was asked to help out with some office work for one of the First Secretaries, who just happened to be working for MI5. As she later explained, she was subsequently “tapped on the shoulder”. Eventually, she would climb from the “typing pool to the top”.

Her elevation was never going to be easy in the hard-drinking, masculine culture of the 1970s secret service, when women were paid much less than their male counterparts. Describing herself and her female colleagues as “restive”, Rimington admitted it took something of a rebellion in the ranks before women were recognised as equals, culminating in her appointment as the first female director of MI5 in 1992.

She was also the first head of MI5 to be publicly identified, before retiring in 1996. Her family were forced to flee their London house to escape the tabloids, which published headlines like “Housewife super spy”. She later said it was the point where she “felt most unsafe”. She was, however, broadly in favour of greater public openness about the UK’s intelligence services.

Given the presumed end of the Cold War, the major threats Rimington had to deal with were largely those of domestic terrorism: threats she was required to report to then prime minister John Major. Apparently, there was often very little information to go on, at which point Major would respond “Oh well, Stella, do your best”, which she invariably did.

Booker judging and a publishing uproar

After her retirement, Rimington maintained an active public life, joining the boards of such venerable British institutions as Marks and Spencer.

In 2011, she served as chair of the judging panel for the Man Booker Prize. This created something of a stir, when the judges espoused “readability” and the ability to “zip along” as criteria they would use to assess the prize. This did not go down well – and some critics called the subsequent shortlist “was the worst in decades”.

Defending the judges’ decision at the awards ceremony, Rimington had the temerity to compare the publishing world to the KGB, thanks to its use of “black propaganda, destabilisation operations, plots and double agents”. Sounds like a great idea for a crime novel – of which she wrote a few.

Her autobiography and novels had to be submitted to MI5 for vetting and clearance. She was occasionally asked to change names and places.

Asked to write a new introduction to an anthology of stories edited by Hugh and Graham Greene, The Spy’s Bedtime Book, Rimington suggested the spy novel is “in a special class of literature in which the real and the imaginary can be mixed in any proportion, so long as they both are present”. Arguably, this is true of all literature.

The world is still dangerous

As Rimington informed the audience at the Wheeler Centre in Melbourne in 2012, the world is still a dangerous place. Then, she pointed to the continuing rise of domestic terrorism, instability in the Middle East and Putin’s ongoing aggression towards the West. How right she has proved to be – which is hardly any consolation.

“There’s so much to discover in spy stories,” she once said. “It’s a small ‘lifting of the curtains’ of a world that people know exists but don’t know much about.”

Rimington was an exceptional woman whose books document the challenging times she lived through, from an insider’s unique perspective on the front line. The line between the reality of Stella Rimington and the fiction she created may be hard to draw – which makes them fascinating reading.The Conversation

Sue Turnbull, Honorary Professor of Communication and Media Studies, University of Wollongong

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Rewatching Picnic at Hanging Rock at 50: an unsettling portrayal of place, silence and disappearance

FilmPublicityArchive/United Archives via Getty Images
Jo CoghlanUniversity of New England

Peter Weir’s Picnic at Hanging Rock, released 50 years ago, is remembered for its eerie atmosphere and mysterious story. But beneath its haunting beauty, the film challenges the idea of colonial control over the Australian landscape.

The rock becomes a place that refuses to be explained or conquered by European logic.

This tension between the land and colonial power still matters today. The failure of the referendum on the Indigenous Voice to Parliament shows how divided Australia remains over questions of reconciliation and Indigenous sovereignty.

Rewatching Picnic at Hanging Rock in 2025, we can appreciate the film as an unsettling portrayal of place, silence and disappearance.

Unease and ambiguity

Picnic at Hanging Rock tells the story of a group of private schoolgirls and their teachers who visit the nearby Hanging Rock on Valentine’s Day in 1900. During the excursion, three students and one teacher mysteriously disappear.

No clear explanation is ever given, which unsettles both the characters and the audience. The mystery triggers hysteria, scandal and a slow collapse of order at Appleyard College.

As the search for answers continues, the film refuses to provide resolution, deepening its sense of unease and ambiguity.

Based on Joan Lindsay’s 1967 novel, the story captured the public imagination with its haunting beauty and unanswered mystery. Audiences were obsessed with whether it was based on true events (it wasn’t).

The film became a landmark of the Australian New Wave, a 1970s movement that revitalised the national film industry with bold, artistic storytelling and a focus on uniquely Australian themes.

With its poetic visuals, haunting score and colonial setting, the film stood out for its mood rather than action. Audiences were both fascinated and frustrated by its lack of closure, and it gained a cult following, especially among viewers drawn to its gothic atmosphere and slow-burning mystery.

The mystery of the landscape

Ngannelong, also known as Hanging Rock, is a striking volcanic formation north-west of Melbourne. For the Dja Dja Wurrung, Woi Wurrung and Taungurung peoples of the Kulin Nation it is a deeply important cultural and spiritual place.

Lindsay and Weir’s mystery of white schoolgirls who mysteriously vanish sits on top of older, deeper traumas – those of dispossession and the forced removal of Indigenous people from their lands.

While the film appears dreamlike and mystical, Ngannelong’s sacredness challenges this romantic view, reminding us that the land holds its own stories and history.

It does not forget.

Contemporary photo of the landscape from the top of the rock.
Ngannelong, also known as Hanging Rock, is a striking volcanic formation north-west of Melbourne. FiledIMAGE/Shutterstock

Picnic at Hanging Rock can be seen as a powerful story about colonial fear and uncertainty. The unexplained disappearance of the schoolgirls plays off the idea that European thinking and logic can’t fully understand or master the Australian landscape.

When watched through this lens the story reveals just how fragile colonialism is. The film invites viewers to think differently about Australia’s identity, suggesting the landscape itself remembers the past and actively resists the stories colonisers have tried to tell about it.

Fragile powers

The film contrasts the tidy world of Appleyard College – which stands for colonial order, built on white privilege and Britishness – against the untamed mysterious landscape of Ngannelong.

The girls represent white femininity, meant to bring culture and control. When they vanish, it’s as if the land rejects these colonial ideals.

Their disappearance unravels the school’s order, exposing how fragile colonial power really is. It hints at a deeper crisis beneath the surface.

Russell Boyd’s cinematography is key to the film’s unsettling mood. Shifting light and strange angles create a sense of uncertainty. The bush isn’t just background, it is defiant. This fits with “ecological cinema”, where nature has its own voice.

In Picnic at Hanging Rock, the land often overpowers people. It refuses to be controlled or explained by colonial ideas.

Historical wounds

Picnic at Hanging Rock is part of the Australian Gothic: literature and films which explore dark parts of Australia’s story. Named for European Gothic literature of the 18th and 19th centuries, these 20th century Australian stories often express the anxieties, violences and uncanny dislocations of colonisation and the natural landscape these settlers encountered.

In this Australian Gothic tradition, Picnic at Hanging Rock uses haunting and mystery to explore deep social and historical wounds. These unsettled feelings still shape how Australia sees itself.

Australia’s national identity rests on silences and erasures. Like the missing schoolgirls, the colonial subject is lost – unsure of who belongs and whose history matters.

Picnic at Hanging Rock remains powerful today, especially in light of ongoing discussions about Indigenous sovereignty and reconciliation in Australia. The film’s mystery is never solved, forcing viewers to sit with the discomfort of what’s left unsaid.

The land is not something empty or passive, but alive. It is a force that remembers and resists.

Even 50 years later, the film still unsettles, not just through its eerie beauty, but by challenging colonial ways of thinking and reminding us that sovereignty endures – even if it’s not always visible.The Conversation

Jo Coghlan, Associate Professor, Humanities, Arts and Social Sciences, University of New England

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

This stone tool is over 1 million years old. How did its maker get to Sulawesi without a boat?

A stone tool from 1.04 million year ago. M.W. Moore/University of New England
Adam BrummGriffith UniversityBasran BurhanGriffith UniversityGerrit (Gert) van den BerghUniversity of WollongongMaxime AubertGriffith University, and Renaud Joannes-BoyauSouthern Cross University

Stone tools dating to at least 1.04 million years ago have been found on the Indonesian island of Sulawesi. This means early hominins made a major sea crossing from the Asian mainland much earlier than previously thought – and they likely didn’t have any boats.

This discovery, made by a team of Indonesian archaeologists working in collaboration with Australian researchers, is published today in Nature.

It adds to our understanding of how extinct humans once moved across the Wallace Line – an imaginary boundary that runs through the Lombok Strait in the Indonesian archipelago.

Beyond this line, unique and often peculiar animal species – including hominins – evolved in isolation.

Hominins in Wallacea

The oceanic island zone between the Asian and Australian landmasses is known as Wallacea.

Previously, archaeologists have found hominins lived here from at least 1.02 million years ago, thanks to discoveries of stone tools at Wolo Sege on the island of Flores. Meanwhile, tools dated to around 194,000 years ago have been found at Talepu on Sulawesi.

The human evolutionary story in the islands east of the Asian landmass is strange.

The ancient human species that used to live on the island of Flores were small in stature. We know this thanks to the fossils of Homo floresiensis (popularly known as “hobbits”), as well as the 700,000-year-old fossils of a similar small-bodied hominin.

These discoveries suggest it could have been the extinct Asian hominin Homo erectus that breached the formidable marine barrier between this small Wallacean island and mainland Southeast Asia. Over hundreds of thousands of years, their body size reduced in what’s known as island dwarfism.

To the north of Wallacea, the island of Luzon in the Philippines has also yielded evidence of hominins from around 700,000 years ago. Just recently, fossils of a previously unknown diminutive hominin species, Homo luzonensis, were found here.

So how and when did ancient human species cross the Wallace Line?

The Sulawesi stone tools

Our new study reveals the first evidence a sea crossing to Sulawesi may have happened at least 1 million years ago. That’s much earlier than previously known, and means humans reached here at about the same time as Flores, if not earlier.

A field team led by senior archaeologist Budianto Hakim from the National Research and Innovation Agency of Indonesia (BRIN), excavated a total of seven stone artefacts from the sedimentary layers of a sandstone outcrop in a modern corn field at Calio in southern Sulawesi.

In the Early Pleistocene, there was a river channel nearby. This would have been the site of hominin tool-making and other activities such as hunting.

The Calio artefacts consist of small, sharp-edged fragments of stones (flakes) that the early human tool-makers struck from larger pebbles they most likely found in nearby riverbeds.

To produce these flakes, the hominins hit the edge of one stone with another in a controlled manner. This would fracture the first stone in a predictable way.

This tool-making activity left telltale marks on the stones that can be clearly distinguished from naturally broken rocks. So we can say unequivocally that hominins were living in this landscape, making stone tools, at the time the ancient river sediments that comprise the sandstone rock were accumulating.

And that was a very long time ago. Indeed, the team confirmed an age of at least 1.04 million years for the stone artefacts based on paleomagnetic dating of the sandstone itself, along with direct dating of a pig fossil found alongside the artefacts.

A group of people on an archaeological dig under a blue shade cloth.
Excavations at the Early Pleistocene site of Calio in South Sulawesi, Indonesia. BRIN

Who were these hominins and how did they get to Sulawesi?

As noted earlier, previous research has shown that archaic, stone tool-making hominins managed to get across from the Asian continental landmass to colonise at least some islands in Wallacea.

The discovery of the extremely old stone tools at Calio is another significant new piece of the puzzle. This site has yet to yield any hominin fossils, however. So while we now know there were tool-makers on Sulawesi 1 million years ago, their identity remains a mystery.

Indeed, there are many fascinating questions that remain unanswered, including how these hominins were able to cross the Wallace Line in the first place.

When sea levels were at their lowest, the shortest possible distance between Sulawesi and the nearest part of the adjacent Asian landmass would have been about 50 kilometres.

This is too far to swim, especially since the ocean currents are far too strong. It’s also unlikely these archaic hominins had the cognitive ability to develop watercraft capable of making sea voyages. Setting sail over the horizon to an unseen land would have required advanced planning to gather resources – something they probably weren’t capable of.

Most likely, then, they crossed to Sulawesi from the Asian mainland in the same way rodents and monkeys are suspected to have done – by accident. Perhaps they were castaways on natural “rafts” of floating vegetation.

Our discovery also leads us to wonder what might have happened to Homo erectus on the world’s 11th largest island. Sulawesi is more than 12 times the size of Flores, and much closer to the adjacent Asian mainland.

In fact, Sulawesi is a bit like a mini-continent in itself, which sets it apart from other Wallacean islands. If hominins were cut off in the ecologically rich habitats of this enormous island for a million years, would they have undergone the same evolutionary changes as the Flores hobbits? Or might something completely different have happened?

To unravel this fascinating story, we will continue to search the islands of Wallacea – especially those close to the Asian mainland – for ancient artefacts, fossils and other clues.The Conversation

Adam Brumm, Professor of Archaeology, Griffith UniversityBasran Burhan, PhD Candidate, Archaeology, Griffith UniversityGerrit (Gert) van den Bergh, Researcher in Palaeontology, University of WollongongMaxime Aubert, Professor of Archaeological Science, Griffith University, and Renaud Joannes-Boyau, Professor in Geochronology and Geochemistry, Southern Cross University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Viral ‘kettlebell challenge’ could do you more harm than good – here’s why

The challenge may sound like a quick and easy way to get fit, but it may actually be the least effective way of adding kettlebells to your workouts. Tongpool Piasupun/ Shutterstock
Jen WilsonNottingham Trent University and Athalie Redwood-BrownNottingham Trent University

The “100 kettlebell swings a day” challenge is the latest viral fitness endeavour on social media. The challenge is simple: pick up a kettlebell and do 100 swings (bringing the kettlebell from between your legs and using your core and glutes to swing it up to chest or shoulder height) every day. These can be done either in one stint, or broken up throughout the day.

Proponents of the challenge say it leads to fat loss, improved muscle mass and a stronger posterior chain (glutes, back and hamstrings) – all in a short daily session.

At first glance, it sounds like a time-efficient, no-fuss approach to getting fitter with minimal equipment. But while there’s some merit in consistency, this type of challenge often ignores fundamental principles of exercise and training – and could even do more harm than good.

Here’s a few reasons why it might be best to skip the kettlebell challenge – and what you can try instead.

1. It’s not personalised to you

One of the biggest flaws in the 100 kettlebell swings challenge is that it treats everyone the same, regardless of experience level, injury history, mobility or training goals. What’s manageable for an advanced athlete could cause problems for a beginner with poor hip mobility or lower back issues.

Daily, high-rep dynamic movements which use explosive power, such as kettlebell swings, require good technique, good posture and body awareness. Without that, you’re simply reinforcing poor movement patterns. Worse, you could be inviting injury when such movements are done repeatedly.

Effective training should be personalised – or at least adapted to your movement abilities and fitness requirements in order to have the most impact.

2. No room for progress

The human body adapts quickly. If you do the same 100 reps with the same amount of weight every single day, the challenge becomes less effective over time. That initial burn you felt in week one? It’ll be gone by week three.

In well-designed training programmes, there’s a principle called “progressive overload”. This involves gradually increasing stress on the body, either through the amount of weight you’re lifting, the number of repetitions you do of an exercise, the number of sets you complete or the complexity of your movements.

The 100-swing challenge skips this entirely. This means you’ll probably hit a plateau fairly quickly.

3. Risk of injury

Doing 100 swings every day, especially without rest or proper technique, can lead to injuries such as muscle strains or joint pain in the back and shoulders.

Too much repetitive movement, insufficient recovery time and inexperience can also lead to an increased risk of an overuse injury – a condition caused by repeated stress on muscles, joints or tissues. This often results in pain, swelling, or stiffness and could potentially mean taking weeks or even months off from working out to fully recover.

Picking up this challenge might be appealing but it also ticks a lot of boxes for overuse injury.

4. It undermines recovery

Recovery between workouts is not optional. In fact, it’s where the actual adaptation happens. Training breaks the body down, while recovery builds it back stronger.

Kettlebell swings, especially if performed explosively and with heavier loads, place stress on your central nervous system. Doing them every single day without rest days, mobility work (such as stretching) or variation can lead to chronic fatigue, poor sleep, nagging injuries and even reduced performance in other areas of training.

A group of young, fit people perform kettlebell swings in a gym.
This daily challenge doesn’t leave the body enough time for integral recovery. wavebreakmedia/ Shutterstock

If you’ve started the challenge and find you’re constantly sore, tight or worn down, the challenge may be doing more harm than good.

5. It’s a one-dimensional solution

Fitness isn’t just about repetition. True strength and conditioning involves a variety of movements, such as pushing, pulling, squatting, rotating and stabilising.

The 100-swing challenge trains only one plane of motion and one movement pattern. While that’s better than nothing, it’s nowhere near comprehensive. Moreover, doing the same task over and over can become mindless. You’re not necessarily getting stronger or fitter – you’re just going through the motions.

A smarter way to use kettlebells

In fairness, the challenge does have some value in the right context. For beginners who need structure, it can help establish a daily habit. It requires minimal equipment, little space and can raise heart rate, build endurance and activate the posterior chain.

But for it to be sustainable and effective, a few things must be in place:

  • Your form must be solid
  • The kettlebell weight must be appropriate for your fitness level
  • You should vary the volume or intensity over time
  • You should include rest days
  • It should be part of a broader training plan – not your only form of training

If you enjoy kettlebell swings, there are more intelligent and safer ways to include them in your training than doing 100 reps every day.

Try incorporating swings into interval sessions, circuits or strength workouts with varied repetitions and loads. Instead of doing 100 swings alone, aim for 100 total reps using a mix of exercises, such as goblet squats, rows and presses. This approach not only keeps things more balanced, but also reduces the risk of injury from overuse and gives different muscle groups time to recover .

The “100 kettlebell swings a day” challenge might sound appealing in its simplicity, but simple doesn’t always mean smart. Without personalisation, progression and recovery, it can quickly turn into a repetitive grind that risks doing more harm than good.

Yes, training should be challenging, but it should also be strategic. Your body deserves more than just a checkbox of daily repetitions – it needs the right moves done the right way.The Conversation

Jen Wilson, Senior Exercise and Health Practitioner, Nottingham Trent University and Athalie Redwood-Brown, Senior Lecturer in Performance Analysis of Sport, Nottingham Trent University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

What would a climate model made from music sound like? This team of artists and scientists has created one

Louise DevenishMonash University

Climate modelling is spoken about often by climate scientists. These complex, computer-generated calculations enable scientists to make predictions about the climate of the future.

Information generated from climate models is often shared through graphs, maps, images, animations or reports. These visual formats are excellent for accurately communicating data, statistics and recommendations, but can feel inaccessible for non-expert members of the general public.

David Attenborough said “saving our planet is now a communications challenge”. This points to the gap between the knowledge about the actions needed to address climate change, and motivation towards taking this action.

In this gap, musical creativity and imagination can offer new pathways towards awareness and understanding. This can contribute to how we collectively develop climate communication.

I have been collaborating with a team of artists and scientists on Dark Oceanography to explore new ways of sharing climate information.

Beyond words

The intangible nature of music provides exceptional opportunities to convey things that words, numbers or images cannot.

Music is a form of knowledge that is experienced, as it is felt through the body by the listener. Music provides a different means of engagement to inform our understanding of environmental phenomena – and therefore how we understand climate issues.

Climate models move beyond how things are or have been. They predict how things might be, and offer a window to view the future. Dark Oceanography takes modelling into new territory.

As director and a performer of Dark Oceanography, I worked with composer Kate Milligan, music technologist Aaron Wyatt, oceanographer Navid Constantinou and a team of percussionists.

Under a blue light, a woman holds up mallets.
Performer Niki Johnson within one of six percussion setups. Darren Gill

Stepping beyond prediction into imagination, Dark Oceanography questions the nature of data and how it can be communicated. By integrating data of ocean eddies with experimental music and spatial audio technology, this work creates a fictional climate model to be experienced through new music.

Translating eddies

Ocean eddies are circular water movements like big whirlpools, found throughout the ocean. Although they can be up to 200 kilometres in diameter and descend deep beneath the ocean surface, they are unseen from land.

Eddies propel heat, energy and nutrients through the ocean. They play a key role in the circulation of water and heat in the ocean. Research shows the behaviour of eddies is changing and becoming more active. However, eddies are not always included in climate projections.

Dark Oceanography invites the audience to experience the vitality of these ocean systems, translating and transforming eddy datasets into music.

A musician under blue lights.
Performer Louise Devenish plays a waterphone. Darren Gill

The live performances of three percussionists are captured by close microphones and sent swirling around the performance space through a multi-channel spatial audio system. Seated in the round and ringed by stations of percussion instruments, the audience is submerged in the circular motion of 360-degree sound.

The audience experience is like listening to an eddy from the inside.

The integration of scientific data with creative practice offers more than just innovative communication methods for science. It also offers new possibilities for musical composition and performance.

In Dark Oceanography, the circular motion of ocean eddies permeates every aspect of the work. This includes the instrument selection, the performers’ gestures and techniques, the notation and audience seating.

Abstract musical notations.
This excerpt of the musical notation by Kate Milligan is based on eddy movement. Kate Milligan

The continuous circular motion of eddies offers a metaphor for restarting, for renewal. Each iteration brings a level of change and evolution. The piece descends through the dataset in three stages from the ocean’s surface to nearly one kilometre underwater. The percussionists begin by sounding delicate glass and metal instruments, before the soundworld deepens with low drums and the sinking, sliding sounds of timpani.

A changing feat

The dataset that propels the music was extrapolated from existing ocean simulations, following the pathways of eddies from the Eastern Australian Current. As performance locations for this work change, so will the data, integrating new eddies drawn from local ocean currents. The musical experience also changes with different eddies.

A generated eddy path extracted from data captured from the Eastern Australian Current. Data provided by Navid Constantinou. Image credit: Aaron Wyatt.

The impact of changing ocean eddy systems on the global climate is currently unknown. This confluence of sound and science leans into the unknown, and offers a way of navigating uncertainty through music. Dark Oceanography shows us that there are many ways to imagine the future.

This article is part of Making Art Work, our series on what inspires artists and the process of their work.The Conversation

Louise Devenish, Senior Lecturer and director of The Sound Collectors Lab, Sir Zelman Cowen School of Music and Performance, Monash University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Why do some clothes shrink in the wash? A textile scientist explains how to ‘unshrink’ them

Ricardo Gomez Angel/Unsplash
Nisa SalimSwinburne University of Technology

When your favourite dress or shirt shrinks in the wash, it can be devastating, especially if you followed the instructions closely. Unfortunately, some fabrics just seem to be more prone to shrinking than others – but why?

Understanding more about the science of textile fibres can not only help you prevent the shrinkage of clothing, but also might help you “rescue” the occasional garment after a laundry accident.

It’s all down to the fibres

To know more about clothing shrinkage, we first need to understand a little about how textiles are made.

Common textile fibres, such as cotton and linen, are made from plants. These fibres are irregular and crinkled in their natural form. If you zoom deeper inside them, you’ll see millions of tiny, long-chain cellulose molecules that naturally exist in coiled or convoluted shapes.

Extreme close-up of a sewing thread shows the individual fibres, made up of millions of invisible convoluted cellulose molecules. Hadrian/Shutterstock

During textile manufacturing, these fibres are mechanically pulled, stretched and twisted to straighten and align these cellulose chains together. This creates smooth, long threads.

On a chemical level, there are also links between the chains called hydrogen bonds. These strengthen the fibre and the thread and make it more cohesive.

Threads are woven or knitted into fabrics, which locks in the tension that holds those fibres side by side.

However, these fibres have good “memory”. Whenever they’re exposed to heat, moisture or mechanical action (such as agitation in your washing machine), they tend to relax and return to their original crinkled state.

This fibre memory is why some fabrics wrinkle so easily and why some of them may even shrink after washing.

Cotton fabric under 40x magnification, showing the threads ‘locked’ in against each other. Kateryna Kon/Shutterstock

How does washing shrink the fabric?

To understand shrinkage, we again need to zoom down to the molecular level. During laundering, hot water helps to increase the energy level of fibres – this means they shake more rapidly which disrupts the hydrogen bonds holding them in place.

The way a fabric is knitted or woven also plays a role. Loosely knitted fabrics have more open spaces and loops, making them more susceptible to shrinkage. Tightly woven fabrics are more resistant because the threads are locked into place with less room to move.

Additionally, cellulose is hydrophilic – it attracts water. Water molecules penetrate inside the fibres, causing swelling and making them more flexible and mobile. Adding to all this is the tumble and twist action inside the washing machine.

The whole process makes the fibres relax and recoil back to their natural, less stretched, crinkled state. As a result, the garment shrinks.

It’s not just hot water – here’s why

This doesn’t just happen with hot water, as you may have experienced yourself with clothes made of rayon, for example.

Cold water can still penetrate into fibres, making them swell, along with the mechanical action of the tumbling in the washing machine. The effect is less dramatic with cold water, but it can happen.

To minimise shrinkage, you may use cold water, the lowest spin speed or the gentlest cycle available, especially for cotton and rayon. Machine labels don’t always fully explain the impact of spin speed and agitation. When in doubt, choose a “delicate” setting.

What about wool?

Different fibres shrink in different ways; there is no single mechanism that fits all.

While cellulose-based fabrics shrink as described above, wool is an animal-derived fibre made of keratin proteins. Its surface is covered in tiny, overlapping scales called cuticle cells.

Wool fibre under a microscope with the cuticles visible as overlapping scales. snap the reel/Shutterstock

During washing, these cuticles open up and interlock with neighbouring fibres causing fibre entanglement or “felting”. This makes the clothing feel denser and smaller – in other words, it shrinks.

Why don’t synthetics shrink as much?

Synthetic fibres such as polyester or nylon are made from petroleum-based polymers, engineered for stability and durability.

These polymers contain more crystalline regions that are highly ordered and act as an internal “skeleton”, preventing the fibres from crinkling.

The weave of nylon stockings under a microscope shows how the threads are much smoother and more crystalline than natural fibres. Alexander Klepnev/Wikimedia CommonsCC BY

Textile scientists and engineers are also working on fabrics that resist shrinkage through advanced material design. Among promising innovations are blended yarns that combine natural and synthetic fibres.

Some researchers are working on shape-memory polymers that can change shape – or return to a previous shape – in response to temperature or water, for example. This is different to stretch fabrics (such as those used in activewear) that are made up of highly elastic fibres which “bounce back” to their original state after stretching.

How can I unshrink a piece of clothing?

If a favourite garment has shrunk in the wash, you can try to rescue it with this simple method.

Gently soak the item in lukewarm water mixed with hair conditioner or baby shampoo (approximately one tablespoon per litre). Then, carefully stretch the fabric back into shape and dry it flat or under gentle tension – for example, by pegging the garment to a drying rack.

The reason this works is because conditioners have chemicals known as cationic surfactants. These will temporarily lubricate the fibres, making them more flexible and allowing you to gently pull everything back into place.

This process can’t completely reverse extreme shrinkage but it can help recover some of the lost size, making the clothes wearable again.The Conversation

Nisa Salim, Director, Swinburne-CSIRO National Testlab for Composite Additive Manufacturing, Swinburne University of Technology

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Your phone is covered in germs: a tech expert explains how to clean it without doing damage

nikkimeel/Shutterstock
Meena JhaCQUniversity Australia

We wash our hands, sanitise shopping trolleys and wipe down cafe tables. But what about our phones? We touch these devices dozens of times a day, and take them everywhere from the kitchen to the dining table, and even the bathroom.

Phones can be contaminated with many kinds of potential germs. When was the last time you wiped down yours – and with what?

If you use the wrong cleaning agents or tools, you could strip your phone’s protective coatings, degrade waterproof seals, or even affect its touch sensitivity.

Do phones really need cleaning?

Touchscreens get covered in fingerprints and smudges, so there are aesthetic and functional reasons to wipe down your screen.

Another reason comes down to potential health concerns. Whenever mobile phones are swabbed for microorganisms, scientists inevitably find hundreds of species of bacteria and viruses.

While not all of these cause sickness, the potential for transmission is there. We use phones while in the bathroom and then put them near our mouths, touch them while eating, and pass them between people in meetings, cafes, parties and classrooms.

Unlike hands, which can be washed many times a day, phones are rarely cleaned properly – if at all.

If you do want to sanitise your phone, it’s also important to not damage it in the process.

Some cleaning products will damage your phone

You might think a quick swipe with a household cleaner or hand sanitiser is a clever shortcut to keeping your phone clean. However, many of these products can actually degrade your device’s surface and internal components over time.

For example, both Apple and Samsung advise against using bleach, hydrogen peroxide, vinegar, aerosol sprays, window cleaners or high-concentration alcohol wipes (above 70%) on their devices.

Most smartphones are coated with an oleophobic layer – a thin film that helps resist fingerprints and smudges. Harsh chemicals such as alcohols, acetone or ammonia-based cleaners can strip this coating, making your screen more vulnerable to smudging, and diminished touch responsiveness.

Vinegar, a common DIY disinfectant, can corrode aluminium or plastic edges due to its high acidity. Bleach and hydrogen peroxide, though highly effective as disinfectants, are also too aggressive for the delicate materials used in consumer electronics.

High-alcohol content wipes may dry out plastics and make them brittle with repeated use.

In short: if the cleaner is tough enough to disinfect your kitchen bench, it is probably too harsh for your phone.

A smartphone outdoors on a table with water beading on its screen.
The oleophobic coating on a device screen can help repel fingerprints – but can be destroyed with harsh cleaning chemicals. Shuvro Mojumder/Unsplash

How should I clean my phone then?

The good news is that cleaning your phone properly is simple and inexpensive. You just need to follow the guidelines backed by major manufacturers. You should also unplug and remove any protective cases or accessories when cleaning your phone.

Most tech companies recommend using 70% isopropyl alcohol wipes (not higher), soft microfibre cloths, and anti-static soft-bristled brushes made of nylon, horsehair or goat hair to clean delicate areas like speaker grills and charging ports.

During the COVID pandemic, Apple revised its cleaning guidelines to permit the use of Clorox disinfecting wipes and 70% isopropyl alcohol on iPhones, provided they are used gently to avoid damaging screen coatings or allowing moisture to seep into the device.

Samsung offers similar advice, recommending users wipe down their phones with a microfibre cloth lightly dampened with a 70% alcohol solution, while steering clear of direct application to ports and openings.

Prevent accidental damage when using these tips

Never spray liquid directly onto the phone, as moisture can seep into ports and internal components, leading to short circuits or corrosion.

Submerging your phone in any cleaning solution is also risky, even for water-resistant models: the seals that prevent water from getting in, such as rubber gaskets, adhesives, nano-coatings and silicone layers, can degrade over time.

Avoid using paper towels, tissues, or rough cloths which may leave scratches on the screen or shed lint that clogs openings.

Finally, be cautious about over-cleaning. Excessive wiping or scrubbing can wear down protective coatings, making your phone more susceptible to fingerprints, smudges, and long-term surface damage.

How often should I clean my phone?

While there is no strict rule for how often you should clean your phone, giving it a proper wipe-down at least once a week under normal use would make sense.

If you regularly take your phone into high-risk environments such as public transport, hospitals, gyms, or bathrooms it is wise to clean it more frequently.

If you’re serious about hygiene, cleaning not just your hands but one of the things you touch most every single day makes sense.

Doing it wrong can slowly damage your device. But doing it right is simple, affordable, and doesn’t take much time.The Conversation

Meena Jha, Head Technology and Pedagogy Cluster CML-NET, CQUniversity Australia

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.


Online Registration FREE Scams Awareness Training

ONLINE Event Details:
Date: Friday, 22 August 2025
Time: 10:00 AM – 12:00 PM  AEST 
Cost: FREE 

If you would like to attend on-line please register here and a link will be sent to you from cota@cota.org.au.

If you have any issues, please email cota@cota.org.au.

To read more about this event visit: 

Aged care service delivery: Senate Inquiry

On 28 July 2025, the Senate referred an inquiry into aged care service delivery to the Community Affairs References Committee for report by 15 September 2025.

Submissions Close 22 August 2025.

Further detail about the scope of the inquiry is provided in the terms of reference.

Terms of Reference
The implications for older Australians, their families, carers, service providers and state and territory health systems of the Government’s decision to delay the commencement of the new Support at Home program until 1 November 2025 while also withholding the release of any additional Home Care Packages, with particular reference to:

(a) the impact of the delay on older Australians waiting for support at home, including unmet care needs and the wellbeing of seniors and their carers;

(b) the capacity of the Commonwealth Home Support Programme to meet increased demand for support at home prior to 1 November 2025;

(c) the impacts on aged care service providers, including on their workforce;

(d) the impacts on hospitals and state and territory health systems;

(e) the feasibility of achieving the Government’s target to reduce waiting times for Home Care Packages to 3 months by 1 July 2027, in light of the delay;

(f) the adequacy of the governance, assurance and accountability frameworks supporting the digital transformation projects required to deliver the aged care reforms on time;

(g) the implementation of the single assessment system and its readiness to support people to access a timely assessment now and beyond 1 November 2025; and

(h) any other related matters.

Walk & Talk: Narrabeen

The Belong Club invites anyone to come and participate in the Belong Club Walking Group!

Every Tuesday we walk along the pathway beside the Narrabeen Lagoon, from the Tramshed Arts and Community Centre to Jamieson Park and back. The route is about 1.8km each way, and is estimated to take 45 minutes.

The up and back walk allows for people of any walking speed to participate and enjoy the walk at their own comfortable pace. Walkers often split into smaller groups naturally along the route allowing everyone to go at their preferred pace. The aim here is for everyone to be included and to have an enjoyable walk.

Our meeting spot is to the right of the Tramshed Community Centre, between the basketball court and kids playground.

The key to a centenarian’s long life may be their superhuman ability to avoid disease – new research

Cenntenarians had lower rates of disease throughout their life overall. Lysenko Andrii/ Shutterstock
Karin ModigKarolinska Institutet

Humans may be living longer on average these days, but, even so, only a fraction of us will live to see our 100th birthday. Yet the reasons why only a select few will become centenarians still remains a mystery to scientists.

But the latest work published by myself and my colleagues has just uncovered one factor that may be key to the long lives that centenarians experience. My research team has found that people that live to 100 seem to possess the superhuman ability to avoid disease.

Centenarians are of such great interest to scientists because they may hold the key to understanding how we can live longer — and live longer in better health. Some questions researchers have long pondered is whether one of the keys to a centenarian’s resilience mainly lies in their ability to postpone major diseases, or whether they’re simply better at surviving them. Or, could it be that they avoid certain diseases altogether?

Understanding the answer to these questions would bring us at least one step closer to figuring out what specific factors contribute to longevity. So my colleagues and I set out to see if we could find the answers. In two recent studies, we analysed and compared long and shorter-lived people born in the same year.

The results from the two studies showed that centenarians not only suffer from fewer diseases overall throughout their lives, they also develop them more slowly. They’re also less likely to experience deadly conditions, such as major cardiovascular disease, compared to their shorter-lived peers.

The first study included 170,787 people born in Stockholm County, Sweden between 1912 and 1922. Using historical health data, residents were followed for 40 years – either from age 60 until their death, or up to age 100.

We calculated each participant’s risks of stroke, heart attack, hip fracture and various cancers, and compared those who survived to the age of 100 with their shorter-lived counterparts.

We found that centenarians not only had lower rates of disease in late-midlife, but they continued to have lower rates of disease throughout their life overall.

For example, at the age of 85, only 4% of those who lived to be centenarians had experienced a stroke. In comparison, around 10% of those who almost became centenarians – living to ages 90–99 – had experienced a stroke by age 85.

Moreover, despite living longer, their lifetime risk for most diseases never reached those of their shorter-lived peers. At the age of 100, 12.5% of centenarians had experienced a heart attack, compared to just over 24% among people who lived between the ages of 80 and 89. This suggests that centenarians delay – and in many cases even avoid – major age-related diseases, rather than simply surviving them more effectively.

One limitation of this study is that it only focused on analysing more serious diagnoses of major diseases. But what if the real key to longevity isn’t that centenarians avoid disease entirely – rather, it’s that they’re able to avoid developing serious diseases?

To explore this, we conducted a second study that included 40 different medical conditions. These conditions ranged from mild to severe – such as hypertension, heart failure, diabetes and heart attacks.

We looked at 274,108 participants who were born between 1920 and 1922 and who lived in Sweden. We followed participants for around 30 years – either from the age of 70 until their death or until they turned 100. A total of 4,330 people became centenarians – just 1.5% of the participants we looked at for the study.

An elderly woman has her heart checked by a female doctor who is using a stethoscope.
Centenarians were less likely to be diagnosed with cardiovascular disease. Akkalak Aiempradit/ Shutterstock

Even after including a wider range of diseases and allowing participants to have more than one health condition in the analysis, our team came to the same conclusions as we did in the first study: centenarians developed fewer diseases – and their rate of disease accumulation was slower across their lifetime.

We also found that centenarians were more likely to have conditions limited to a single organ system. This is a sign of this group’s health and resilience, since diseases that affect one organ system are much easier to treat and manage in the long term.

For instance, while cardiovascular conditions were the most common diagnoses across all age groups, centenarians were less likely overall to be diagnosed compared to their short-lived companions. At the age of 80, around 8% of centenarians were diagnosed with cardiovascular disease. In comparison, more than 15% of people who died at the age of 85 had been diagnosed with cardiovascular disease by 80 years of age. The lower rates of cardiovascular disease appear to be central to the centenarians’ extended survival.

Centenarians also demonstrated greater resilience to neuropsychiatric conditions – such as depression and dementia – throughout life.

Although most centenarians eventually developed multiple health conditions, they did so much later in life than non-centenarians – usually around the age of 89. This was thanks to having fewer diseases and a slower rate of disease accumulation.

Notably, non-centenarians typically experienced a sharp increase in the number of health conditions they suffered with in the final years of their lives. But centenarians did not experience this same sharp decline in health – even from their 90s onward.

The secret to a long life?

The finding that centenarians manage to delay, and in some cases avoid, disease despite living longer is both intriguing and encouraging. It shows it’s possible to age more slowly than is typical – and challenges the common belief that a longer life inevitably comes with more disease.

Our findings suggest that exceptional longevity isn’t just about postponing illness but reflects a distinct pattern of ageing. But whether this is mainly due to genetics, lifestyle, environment or a combination of these factors remains unknown. The next step in our research will be to explore what factors predict living to 100 – and how such predictors operate during a person’s life.

Understanding the mechanisms behind healthy ageing in centenarians may offer valuable insights for promoting longer, healthier lives for all.The Conversation

Karin Modig, Associate Professor, Epidemiology, Karolinska Institutet

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Can music be good company? Research shows it makes our imagination more social

Urbazon / Getty Images
Steffen A. HerffUniversity of Sydney and Ceren AyyildizUniversity of Sydney

Earlier this year, we asked a group of older adults what music they listened to when feeling lonely, and why. We discovered music was a powerful coping mechanism and source of escapism.

Other studies have also found listeners use music “to keep them company”. Such reports suggest music might be able shape listeners thoughts and imagination to provide social solace.

But can we establish scientifically how music affects imagination? In short, can music really be good company? Our latest research tried to find out.

Music and mental images

It’s common to experience mental imagery – that is a mental simulation or imagining something that is not there – while listening to music. Studies have found 77% of music listeners online, 73% of participants in the lab, and 83% of concert-goers report experiences of mental imagery during music listening.

What’s going on here? To get a better understanding, we previously carried out a series of experiments with mental imagery and music.

We showed participants a small clip from a video game called Journey, which featured a small figure travelling towards a mountain. We then asked them to imagine the continuation of the journey.

Participants reported how vivid or life-like their imagination was. In addition, they provided details on distance and time travelled in their mind and shared detailed descriptions of their imagined journeys.

Across multiple studies, we asked hundreds of participants to do the task in silence or while listening to various types of music. We observed much more vivid and emotionally positive imagination when listening to music. In addition, listeners’ imagined longer distances and time travelled when listening to music compared to silence.

A screenshot from a videogame showing a figure travelling towards a distant mountain.
Participants were shown a short clip from the video game Journey, either with or without music, and were asked to imagine a continuation of the journey towards the mountain in the distance. Thatgamecompany

Music shapes listeners’ imagination

Previous research has also found that what people imagine while listening to music often forms elaborate imagined stories. These share greater similarity among listeners with a shared cultural background.

Thoughts and themes in the imagined stories are shaped by the music. For example, heroic-sounding music induces empowering themes into imagined content.

Occurrences of new events in these imagined stories also tend to be similar between listeners, and are related to the pattern of musical tension and relief.

So there is strong scientific support for the idea that music can indeed affect what is imagined. But can it specifically induce imagined social interactions?

Our latest study is the first to explicitly investigate this question.

Does music make imagination more social?

We asked 600 participants to perform the imaginary journey task, either in silence or while listening to Italian, Spanish or Swedish folk music. To understand the potential effect of vocals and the meaning of lyrics on imagined content, the music was presented with or without lyrics to the participants, half of whom were native speakers and the other half non-speakers of the respective languages.

We then used tools from natural language processing – a set of computational methods for analysing language – to find underlying topics across participants’ reports of their imagined journeys.

A chart showing imagined social interactions within participants' reports of their imagined journeys. People listening to music more commonly imagined social interactions, and a cloud of words including 'people', 'dance', 'village', and other social words.
Imagined themes of social interactions were more common while listening to music than during silence. Herff et al. / Scientific Reports

One topic stood out: social interaction. Not only was it the predominant topic in participants’ reports of what they imagined, but it was also much stronger while listening to music compared to silence.

This suggests music can indeed affect social thought. The effect was stable regardless of whether listeners’ understood the lyrics or whether there even were lyrics in the first place.

But we can go one step further.

We used a generative AI system which produces images from text prompts (Stable Diffusion) to visualise participants’ descriptions of their imagined journeys.

Example images based on participants imageind content shows a path through a dark forest and a family walking in the mountains.
Example images generated from descriptions during silence (left: ‘I imagined a dark walk, without emotions, alone, looking for some hope’) and music (right: ‘I imagined a walk in the mountains with my family, all together, happy and carefree, we played, we laughed’). Herff et al. / Scientific Reports

By combining the natural language processing model with the image generator, we could visualise what the language processing model had learned to be a “stereotypical” representation of content imagined during silence and music listening.

An image of a solitary figure on a path (left) and several people dancing in a field (right).
What the computational model learned people tend to imagine during silence (left) and music (right). Herff et al. / Scientific Reports

The results of the computational model were further supported with manual annotations that showed three times more social interactions in journeys imagined during music listening compared to silence.

A shared imagination of music

Finally, we showed the images created from the descriptions to another group of people.

These people were able to pick out which images showed content imagined during music listening, and which showed content imagined while in silence – but they were only able to do it when listening to the same music that inspired the image.

This shows there is a shared understanding, or “theory of mind” of what another person might imagine while listening to a piece of music.

Taken together, our results suggest music can indeed be good company.The Conversation

Steffen A. Herff, Leader of the Sydney Music, Mind, & Body Lab, University of Sydney and Ceren Ayyildiz, PhD Candidate, Sydney Music, Mind & Body Lab, University of Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Avalon Beach SLSC turns 100 in 2025!

2025 marks 100 years of Avalon Beach Surf Lifesaving Club.

Planning is underway to celebrate the achievement of Avalon Beach SLSC's Volunteer Surf Lifesavers keeping Avalon Beach safe for residents and visitors for 100 years!

A number of celebratory events and activities spread throughout the Club's 100th year, are currently under development, and will be progressively announced through the year. 

The range of celebrations will involve past and present members, the Avalon Beach community, as well as visitors to our area.  The Surf Club is a focal point in and for the Avalon Beach community, so it is fitting that the community takes pride in this milestone.

Initially, so that our records are up to date, we invite all past members of our Club to Email the Club at 100years@avalonbeachslsc.com.au  with your updated details so we can keep you informed of what will be happening for members.

If you know of others that may be interested in the 100th Anniversary celebrations please pass the message on. 

The Club looks to the future, acknowledging and building on the legacy left from those who came before us over the past 100 years.

Avalon Beach SLSC Centenary Committee

A Call to Volunteer Trainers and Students

Come and share your knowledge or learn more about your device! 
Computer Pals for Seniors Northern Beaches would love to hear from you. We are a not-for-profit organisation helping seniors navigate the wonderful world of technology.

We teach in term times Monday to Friday in a relaxed fun environment.

Common topics requested by Students are: Sending and receiving emails, discovering useful apps, safe banking online, learning how to take and store photos, avoiding Scams, and basically being able to operate their device with confidence.

We teach Android/Apple tablets and phones, and Apple/Microsoft/ Chromebook laptops.

We are based at the Tramshed Arts & Community Centre, 1395a Pittwater Road, Narrabeen, near the B-Line bus stop.

Why not give us a call on 0478 920 651

Mona Vale Hospital’s Urgent Care Centre Becomes first in NSW To Roll Out ECAT

On July 15 2025 it was announced that Mona Vale Hospital’s Urgent Care Centre (UCC) has become the first UCC in New South Wales to implement Emergency Care Assessment and Treatment (ECAT) protocols.

The protocols will allow nurses to begin treatment immediately after triage which ultimately helps to reduce wait times and improve patient outcomes before a medical officer, nurse practitioner or physiotherapist takes over care.

The milestone follows the successful implementation of ECAT protocols across NSLHD’s emergency departments last year.
Over the first 24 hours of implementation, the centre adopted the protocols for 23 presentations.

Mona Vale Hospital’s UCC nurse unit manager Heidi Stojic said early adoption of the system is helping streamline care and enhance the patient experience.

“Patients are now receiving treatment faster, which helps reduce anxiety and improves their overall experience,” she said.

Photo: MVH/Facebook

How two transplants gave Josh a second chance at life

August 6, 2025: Northern Sydney LHD News
At just 19 years old in 1986, Josh Reed was told his kidneys were failing. Two years later, they had completely failed, and his mother offered one of her kidneys with a transplant soon following. It was a resounding success.

Josh lived 25 years with his mother’s kidney, raising his children, working in the film industry and enjoying everyday life.

But in 2014, his transplanted kidney failed, and he returned to dialysis.

Josh said it was initially manageable with the support of his children, but gradually took its toll.

“I continued to work and raise my kids, and they were amazingly supportive and helpful,” he said.

“But after a while my stamina began to fade, and I knew I’d need to slow down.”

After several rounds of plasma exchange to reduce antibodies from his first transplant, Josh was told in 2020 that a second transplant might not be possible.

“We had to accept it wasn’t going to be possible to receive another transplant. I’d be on dialysis for the rest of my life. That news was devastating, and out of everything, that was the hardest thing to process,” he said.

''Organ donation has given me a deep appreciation for the generosity of people'' - Organ donation recipient, Josh Reed

His fortunes changed thanks to Royal North Shore Hospital nephrologist Dr Yvonne Shen, his partner Carmen and a new drug called Imlifidase.

Imlifidase suppresses antibodies long enough to allow a transplant.

Josh became only the second person in Australia to receive it.

With Carmen donating a kidney as part of the Australian and New Zealand Paired Kidney Exchange Program, a match was found in 2024.

“Carmen and I were given a date for the operations to happen, and that, as you can imagine, was exhilarating news for both of us,” he said.

The transplant took place at Royal North Shore Hospital.

After a short period of mild rejection, his team brought it under control.

“I had a period of low-level rejection about a month after the transplant that took a few months to get under control. But the team at RNSH were amazing, and I never doubted they would be able to help me,” he said.

Since then, life has changed dramatically.

Josh recently travelled to Dublin to see his daughter graduate from her Masters at Trinity College.

“Travel was very difficult on dialysis, and most overseas travel was out of our reach, so that was huge,” he said.

Josh now shares his story to encourage others to consider organ donation.

“Organ donation has given me a deep appreciation for the generosity of people,” he said.

“I understand the hesitation, but it is an extraordinarily generous gift to give, and in whatever circumstances it happens, you’ll be in the best of hands.”

Josh thanked Royal North Shore Hospital for his care and Dr Shen for her dedication in treating him and helping access the drug.

“I’ve never had anything but good experiences throughout all the stages of care,” he said.

“Only two doses of Imlifidase were made available in Australia, and Dr Shen worked very hard to get me on that very short list. In the end I was the 43rd person in the world to have it. I wouldn’t want to be anywhere else.”

Celebrating Excellence at AMA25: AMA Awards recognise outstanding contributions to healthcare

One of the highlights of the AMA's national conference were the many amazing awards recognising the exceptional achievements, leadership, and dedication of AMA members across the medical profession. From pioneering research to transformative patient care, these recipients exemplify the very best of Australian medicine.

Women in Medical Leadership Award recipients Dr Kim Loo and Dr Pramudie Gunaratne were honoured for their exceptional leadership. Dr Loo, a Sydney-based GP, has shown remarkable dedication to addressing climate change's health impacts, whilst Dr Gunaratne has transformed mental healthcare across NSW, advocating for stronger public mental health systems amid workforce shortages.


AMA President Dr Danielle McMullen said both incredible doctors were being recognised for their unwavering commitment to promoting women in medical leadership, improving quality care, and influencing medical politics. 

“Dr Loo is a respected, Sydney-based general practitioner renowned for her compassion, fairness, and deep sense of purpose, particularly regarding the health impacts of climate change,” Dr McMullen said.  

“As a fellow GP, I've always admired Dr Loo not just for her clinical excellence, but for the unwavering compassion she brings to every patient and every cause. Her tireless advocacy for climate action and social justice reminds us all that medicine isn’t just about treating illness — it’s about healing communities and protecting the future.” 

Dr Loo serves on the board of Doctors for the Environment Australia.  She said more than 35 years working in general practice had made her acutely aware of the social, commercial and environmental factors affecting the lives of her patients.  

 “We need to live a simpler life and really value each other,” Dr Loo said. “It’s important we understand the systems and problems that damage our health so we can create healthier spaces for our kids to live in the future. The precarity of the lives of some of my patients, and the intergenerational inequity of climate devastation, fuels my advocacy.”  

Dr Gunaratne is a distinguished psychiatrist whose leadership has had a profound impact on mental healthcare across NSW, Australia, and globally. Currently Chair of the NSW Branch of the Royal Australian and New Zealand College of Psychiatrists, she has been a powerful advocate for strengthening the public mental health system, especially amid workforce shortages affecting patient safety and care quality.  

“Dr Gunaratne exemplifies what it means to lead with vision and integrity, bringing clarity and courage to some of the most difficult conversations in healthcare,” Dr McMullen said.  

“Her advocacy for mental health reform is not only inspiring — it’s reshaping our broader healthcare system for the better, with intellect, compassion, and unwavering determination.” 
Dr Gunaratne said shining a light on the mental health crisis has been an incredible team effort with so many dedicated and courageous psychiatrists, patients and families speaking out about a broken system that is failing our communities. 

"We urgently need to elevate mental health onto the mainstream public and political agenda. It can't continue to languish as an after-thought in the Australian psyche. One of the most encouraging aspects of our advocacy has been the uptake by mainstream media to tell our story and those of our patients and their families — I hope this is leading to conversations about mental health at dinner tables around the country.” 

The Women's Health Award was presented to Dr Dominic Edwards for his transformative work advancing women's healthcare globally. From volunteer work in Uganda and Cambodia to policy development and clinical mentoring, his dedication to respectful, comprehensive care has empowered communities and inspired the profession.

Adjunct Professor Tony Rahman received the Excellence in Healthcare Award for his commitment to helping homeless people, refugees, and vulnerable populations access healthcare. His leadership combines clinical excellence in gastroenterology with compassionate outreach to marginalised communities.

Dr Rebecca Healey was honoured with the Diversity in Medicine Award for ground-breaking research on international medical graduates. Her work has illuminated challenges faced by internationally-trained doctors, driving important conversations about systemic barriers and discrimination in Australian healthcare.

The Doctor in Training of the Year Award went to Dr Marrwah Ahmadzai for her outstanding work in women's healthcare and culturally safe care. Dr Ahmadzai led the ACT's first public antenatal education program for women with limited English proficiency and has been a passionate advocate for anti-racist medicine, demonstrating that doctors in training can make significant impacts through dedicated advocacy and leadership.

The President's Award went to Dr Rajeshwary (Raji) Krishnan for her extraordinary contributions to vulnerable populations. Leading a multidisciplinary team at Pramana Medical Centre in Perth, she provides wraparound care to over 6,500 patients — 65 per cent First Nations people — exemplifying holistic, barrier-free healthcare.

The top award, the AMA Gold Medal Award was presented to former AMA Presidents Dr Tony Bartone and Dr Omar Khorshid, recognising their exemplary leadership during the COVID-19 crisis. Both leaders guided the profession through Australia's worst health crisis in 100 years, with Dr Bartone securing crucial federal health packages and telehealth reforms, whilst Dr Khorshid launched transformative campaigns and the AMA’s first Vision for Australia’s Health.

Research to improve palliative care to commence at NSW universities

Friday August 8, 2025
The NSW Government has committed $2.7 million in grants to help university researchers improve end of life and palliative care services in NSW.

Funded as part of the World Class End of Life Care commitment, seven successful projects have received funding to pursue various focus areas that will inevitably benefit patients, their families and carers.

The successful applicants are:
  • The University of Newcastle – Stability and Compatibility of commonly used palliative care medications administered by continuous subcutaneous infusion: Improving best evidence for practice change
  • University of Technology Sydney – Caring for our community in a new home: End-of-life care for refugee communities
  • University of NSW – Evaluation of a tailored model of palliative care for people with intellectual disability
  • University of Sydney – Implementing a Model of Bereavement Care for the Palliative Care service across Nepean Blue Mountains Local Health District
  • University of Technology Sydney – Navigation Model for NSW Palliative Care Services- support for Arabic and Chinese speaking community
  • University of Technology Sydney – Strengthening Empathetic Communication Skills in Palliative Care Trainees
  • University of Wollongong – IMPACS-NSW: Improving Palliative Care Screening in NSW Hospitals
These grants were awarded after an open, competitive application process was conducted by the assessment panel, which included experts in palliative care, policy and research.

Projects have already commenced and will be conducted over the next three years.

Minister for Health Ryan Park stated on Friday:

“When you have a life-limiting illness, it is an extremely challenging time for patients and their families – but hopefully these research projects can go some way in reducing that burden.

“This research will translate into improved services and enhanced care for patients, families and carers who receive palliative care in NSW.

“Personally I am thrilled to see our universities put together such strong applications for such a diverse range of projects, and I would like to acknowledge the hard work that went into each, whether successful or not.”

Minister for Medical Research David Harris said:

“Research grants like these are critical to improving the care we offer in NSW, especially for end of life patients and their families.

“Each of these projects address priority research areas that were identified through extensive consultation with the NSW palliative care sector, including clinicians, policy managers, academics and advocacy groups.

“I would like to congratulate those universities and their staff who were successful in their applications and wish them the best as they begin their projects.”

What to say and how to help if someone close to you has attempted suicide

Adam Pretty/Getty
Milena HeinschUniversity of Tasmania and Campbell TicknerUniversity of Tasmania

If someone close to you has attempted suicide, you may be feeling scared, confused or overwhelmed.

You’re not alone – the most recent data shows more than one in three Australians have been close to someone who has died by or attempted suicide.

Talking about suicide can be really hard. But your support can make a big difference. Here’s what you can do to support someone after a suicide attempt.

It’s OK not to have all the answers

The days and weeks after a suicide attempt are often full of intense emotion — for the person who attempted and those who care about them.

Your loved one might feel guilt, shame, anger, confusion or relief. They might also be tired, both physically and emotionally. Meanwhile, you might feel worried, shocked, helpless, or unsure about what to say.

All of these feelings are normal. There’s no “right” way to feel in this situation. But staying connected and offering care (even in small ways) is one of the most powerful things you can do.

How you can help: emotional support

It’s OK to acknowledge the suicide attempt – avoiding it can add to feelings of stigma or isolation. But you don’t need to ask for details, and if you feel overwhelmed it’s also OK to set gentle boundaries.

If you’re unsure what to say, you can be honest about that.

Just be there. Let your loved one know you’re there to listen, without pressure or judgement.

Don’t rush the conversation. If they’re not ready to talk, that’s OK. Let them set the pace.

Avoid guilt or blame. Saying things like “how could you do this to us?” can make someone feel worse. Instead, say something like: “I’m really glad you’re still here. I care about you.”

Reassure them. Tell them they’re not alone and that it’s OK to ask for help.

How you can help: practical support

Offer help with everyday tasks, such as going to appointments, making meals or tidying up.

Encourage (but don’t force) activities they enjoy – maybe a walk, a movie, or just hanging out quietly.

If you’re not sure what would help, ask. Try: “What would make today a bit easier for you?”

Try not to take it personally if they seem withdrawn or say “nothing will help”. They may be feeling overwhelmed.

Stay with them, if they’re open to it, or check in later with a text message. Small acts that don’t require a response, such as dropping off a meal, can go a long way.

You don’t have to do this alone

Supporting someone after a suicide attempt can be both physically and emotionally draining. You might find yourself constantly alert, watching for signs they might be struggling again. This “hypervigilance” is normal, but remember – you don’t have to do this alone.

One person is not a support network. While your care and support make a real difference, professional help is essential too, whether from a psychologist, doctor or counsellor.

It can also help to bring in other trusted people, such as siblings, parents, friends or teachers. Ask your loved one who they’d like to involve, and how.

Support works best when shared.

If you’re worried it might happen again

Mental health professionals often help create a safety plan after a suicide attempt.

This is a step-by-step guide for what to do if suicidal thoughts come back. It usually includes information such as warning signs, how to reduce immediate risks, and strategies to use in the moment.

A plan can also involve personal motivations to keep going and a list of resources, trusted people and emergency contacts.

Lifeline has a free app called Beyond Now, where a plan can be written, saved, and shared with trusted people.

If you want to – and your loved one is open to it – ask if you can be part of the plan or at least know what to do if they’re in crisis again.

Don’t forget: your wellbeing matters too

This situation can take a toll on your own wellbeing. You might feel anxious, tired, sad, or even guilty, and struggle with sleep or appetite.

It’s OK to not be OK.

Make time to look after yourself – eat well, rest, move your body and talk to people you trust. You don’t need to share private details about your loved one to get the support you need.

If it feels overwhelming, speak to a doctor or therapist. Your GP can help set up a mental health treatment plan, which helps you access subsidised counselling.

And if you ever have thoughts of suicide yourself, or you’re deeply worried about someone, reach out – help is available 24/7.

Recovery is different for everyone

Recovery after a suicide attempt doesn’t follow a set path – it’s different for everyone. It may involve professional support, medication, changes in routine, or time off from work or school. Rebuilding takes time and often comes with ups and downs.

Patience and compassion – for your loved one and yourself – can make all the difference.

Remember, you’re not alone, and there is help available.

Lifeline Australia:

Beyond Blue:

  • call: 1300 22 4636
  • visit their website.

Suicide Call Back Service is a free nationwide service providing 24/7 phone and online counselling to people affected by suicide:

  • call: 1300 659 467
  • visit their website.

13YARN is a free and confidential 24/7 national crisis support line for Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander people who are feeling overwhelmed or having difficulty coping. Call 13 92 76. WellMob also has a list of culturally safe mental health organisations for First Nations people.The Conversation

Milena Heinsch, Professor and Head of Social Work, University of Tasmania and Campbell Tickner, Senior Fellow in Social Work, University of Tasmania

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Electricity industry on notice as more households invest in subsidised batteries and solar: ACCC

The ACCC is warning battery and solar suppliers and electricity retailers their sales practices must meet scrutiny as demand for home batteries and solar systems jumps due to subsidy schemes and the large savings that households on solar and battery plans are experiencing.

The ACCC’s latest Electricity Inquiry Report examines emerging markets for new electricity services, particularly those supported by solar and battery systems, and compares the electricity bills of solar and battery customers with the bills of regular customers who draw only from the grid.

The report found that the Australian Government's Cheaper Home Batteries Program is making batteries more affordable and providing more households an opportunity to lower their electricity bills. To ensure that consumers receive the full benefit of the Program, the ACCC is warning that retailers and installers must act in the consumer’s interest.

“As more Australian households switch to battery and solar plans, it’s important that the deals on offer are fair, accurate and easy to understand,” ACCC Commissioner Anna Brakey said.

“The ACCC will be watching carefully and actively monitoring consumer complaints. We will hold solar and battery installers, retailers and suppliers accountable to ensure they comply with Australia’s consumer laws.”

“Consumers looking to take advantage of the new subsidies for solar home batteries to lower their energy bills, should take their time and not feel pressured to rush in straight away,” Ms Brakey said.

The report emphasises the complexity of investing in a solar and home battery system and the need for consumers to understand whether the benefits they receive outweigh the costs, particularly when choosing system sizes.

The report supports calls for additional consumer protections to safeguard consumers purchasing systems and signing up to new energy services like virtual power plants. It also supports calls for an overarching consumer duty that requires energy companies to act in the interests of consumers.

“We believe additional consumer protections are needed as more Australians participate in markets for new and emerging energy services,” Ms Brakey said.

“We advise consumers to read the Australian Government’s Solar Consumer Guide, compare a number of quotes from different providers, and ask for personalised information from solar and battery sellers about the appropriate size for their system and the projected cost savings.”

Solar and battery customers see biggest bill savings

Australian households with rooftop solar and a home battery have electricity bills that are on average 40 per cent less than customers whose electricity comes entirely from the grid (regular users), the report found.

The report presents new analysis of the 2023 to 2024 billing outcomes of customers that have adopted different renewable energy solutions and compares them to regular users.

The median annual residential electricity bill for regular users, without rebates, in the National Electricity Market in 2023 to 2024 was $1,565. The median household with rooftop solar paid about 18 per cent less ($1,279 per year), while a household with solar and a home battery paid about 40 per cent less ($936).

Residential customers who are connected to a virtual power plant, which is an energy sharing network of solar and batteries, paid about 63 per cent less ($580) than the median household.

“Home solar and batteries continue to be a compelling option for Australians who can afford the upfront cost, with those who are connected to a virtual power plant saving up to almost $1000 off their annual bill,” ACCC Commissioner Anna Brakey said.
Median bills paid by regular, solar, battery and virtual power plant customers, by region, quarter 3 of 2023 to quarter 3 of 2024.

Government rebates bring down power bills by 21 per cent
The report also shows that government rebates resulted in the median quarterly household power bill dropping by 21 per cent between the third quarter 2023 and third quarter 2024.

Without rebates, the median quarterly bill would have instead risen by 4 per cent.

“The sharpest decline across the National Electricity Market was in South East Queensland, where rebates exceeded the median bill amount,” Ms Brakey said.

Background
The National Electricity Market is comprised of South East Queensland, New South Wales (including the ACT), Victoria, Tasmania and South Australia. Western Australia and the Northern Territory are not connected to the National Electricity Market.

To inform this report, we collected billing data from 8 retailers, which cover 97 per cent of residential customers and 90 per cent of small business customers in New South Wales, Victoria, South Australia and South East Queensland. We obtained additional data for customers on virtual power plant services, electric vehicle tariffs and behavioural demand response plans.

In 2018, the Australian Government directed the ACCC to hold an inquiry into the prices, profits and margins in relation to the supply of electricity in the National Electricity Market (which covers NSW, Victoria, South East Queensland and South Australia). On 23 March 2025, the Australian Government announced a 12-month extension to the inquiry.

This is the 13th time the ACCC has reported as part of this inquiry.

The report is available on the ACCC’s website at Electricity market monitoring 2018-2025.

The ACCC is required to report at least every 6 months. The next report is scheduled for December 2025.

Getting young and old people to dance together boosts health and reduces age discrimination – new research

fizkes/Shutterstock
Siobhán O’ReillyUniversity of LimerickAmanda CliffordUniversity of Limerick, and Orfhlaith Ni BhriainUniversity of Limerick

As the global population ages, the number of people aged 65 and older is projected to rise significantly over the next 25 years. But while we’re living longer, we’re also becoming more socially divided by age. Age segregation is on the rise and fewer people are regularly interacting with those outside their own generation.

This growing divide can fuel ageism – a form of discrimination that’s more widespread than many realise. Around half of the global population have experienced ageism at some point in their lives. Not only is this socially damaging, it’s also linked to poorer health outcomes and increased healthcare costs.

We know that regular physical activity is vital for our physical and mental wellbeing across all age groups. Yet many teenagers and older adults are falling short of recommended activity levels.

For adults, staying active helps prevent and manage chronic conditions like heart disease, cancer and type 2 diabetes. For children and teens, it supports healthy growth and development.

Dance is more than just movement – it’s creativity, self-expression and social connection. As a form of physical activity, it offers a wide range of benefits at all stages of life. For children, dance supports developmental maturity, attention span and memory. For adults, it can improve balance, flexibility, body composition and coordination.

Intergenerational dance takes this a step further, bringing people of different ages together in a shared creative space. It’s a form of social and artistic exercise that promotes health, strengthens community bonds, and helps challenge stereotypes about ageing.

Our research team is now designing and evaluating an intergenerational dance programme for teenagers and older adults in Ireland, to explore the extent to which shared movement can improve physical and mental health – and foster stronger connections between generations.

To inform the design, we reviewed intergenerational dance initiatives around the world. While a few programmes had been formally evaluated, most had not explored the health outcomes or participant experiences in depth. Where evaluations did exist, results were positive: participants of all ages found the experience enjoyable and appreciated the opportunity to connect with people from other generations.

Building on this, we ran a pilot programme in a local community centre, held after school hours. Sessions were co-led by a professional dance instructor and a physiotherapist trained in intergenerational practice. Each session followed a consistent structure:

  • icebreaker games like “human bingo”

  • warm-up

  • mirrored movement exercises

  • social partner dancing

  • cool-down

  • refreshments and informal socialising.

Our participants – adults aged 60+ and adolescents aged 14-16 – provided feedback throughout the pilot. For many, it was their first experience of interacting socially with people outside their own age group – and the response was overwhelmingly positive.

Before and after the programme, participants completed assessments measuring physical activity, cognitive function and emotional wellbeing. The results showed a reduction in sedentary behaviour among older adults and improved cognitive performance in both age groups. These early findings suggest that intergenerational dance may offer measurable benefits for both brain and body.

This was the first study to use objective measures of physical activity in an intergenerational setting – previous research has largely relied on qualitative feedback. While objective data on activity levels have been collected separately in adolescents and older adults, our study is the first to apply this approach across generations participating together.

It’s about more than just movement

Building on this, the next phase of the project introduces a new home-based component. Between sessions, participants are encouraged to complete short dance-based exercises at home. This element is designed to reinforce regular movement and promote sustained physical activity throughout the week.

The refined ten-week programme is now being rolled out across secondary schools in the mid-west of Ireland, for fourth-year pupils aged 15-16 and adults aged 60+. Each session increases in intensity, while being tailored to the evolving needs and abilities of those taking part.

To assess the impact, researchers will track physical activity via participants’ wearable devices, evaluate their balance, mobility and cognition, and use questionnaires to measure their moods, wellbeing and attitudes toward ageing.

Our aim is to determine whether embedding an intergenerational dance programme into the school year is not only feasible and enjoyable, but capable of delivering measurable health and social benefits at scale.

This project offers a rare and powerful opportunity for older adults and teenagers to move, laugh and learn together. If successful, it could pave the way for the wider adoption of intergenerational dance initiatives across Ireland and beyond.

At its heart, this project is about more than movement. By creating space for shared experience and physical expression, we may not only improve health but help mend the widening gap between generations – contributing to a society that moves more, and divides less.The Conversation

Siobhán O’Reilly, Doctoral Researcher, School of Allied Health, University of LimerickAmanda Clifford, Professor in Physiotherapy, School of Allied Health, University of Limerick, and Orfhlaith Ni Bhriain, Lecturer in ethnochoreology, Irish World Academy of Music & Dance, University of Limerick

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

NSW Government establishing independent commissioner to advocate for victim survivors of crime

On Thursday August 7, 2025, the NSW Government has announced it is introducing legislation to establish an independent commissioner to advocate for victim survivors of crime.

The Victim Rights and Victims of Crime Commissioner Bill 2025, introduced into NSW Parliament on Thursday, fulfils an election promise to establish an Independent Victims Commissioner, the government stated.
 
The new Commissioner will assume the advocacy functions of the current Commissioner of Victims Rights, who will continue to administer the Victims Support Scheme and register for victims of forensic patients. The new Commissioner will:
  • be appointed by the Governor and operate independently of Government
  • advocate on behalf of victims of crime on a systemic level and oversee the Charter of Victims’ Rights, which sets out how victims of crime should be treated
  • have the power to request or require an individual or agency to produce information or documents related to an alleged breach of the Charter
  • be able to prepare special reports for NSW Parliament on relevant matters, including the Charter of Victims’ Rights, and enter information-sharing arrangements with public sector agencies
  • be responsible for identifying, reviewing and conducting research into systemic issues faced by victims of crime, consulting with victims of crime and their supporters, and making recommendations to the Attorney General. 
The Bill will also rename the Victims Rights and Support Act 2013 as the Victims Support Act 2013.
 
It allows the Independent Victims Commissioner to appoint a new Victims Advisory Committee to replace the existing Victims Advisory Board.
 
The new committee will include representatives from the general community, including an Aboriginal representative, NSW Police, Office of the Director of Public Prosecutions, Legal Aid and Department of Communities and Justice.
 
The introduction of the legislation follows detailed and extensive consultation with key groups includingvictims’ support bodies and justice agencies.
 
 Attorney General Michael Daley stated:
 
“The Minns Labor Government stands with victim survivors of crime, and we are fulfilling our promise to establish a strong, independent advocate.
 
“The Independent Victims Commissioner will be integral in shaping policies affecting victim survivors.
“Importantly, they will be completely independent of Government and empowered to champion the interests of victim survivors.”

Plastics and human health: what’s at stake in the global treaty talks in Geneva

Cat AchesonUniversity of EdinburghAlice StreetUniversity of Edinburgh, and Rob RalstonUniversity of Edinburgh

Plastics are everywhere – they’re even in you right now – and are making many of us sick. Now, global negotiators are fighting over whether that matters.

As 180 countries meet in Geneva to seek agreement on a global treaty on plastic pollution, a landmark review published in medical journal The Lancet has made the stakes clear. Plastics, the evidence shows, are a threat to human health – from womb to grave.

They’re linked to miscarriages, birth defects, heart disease and cancer. Plastics are harming people at every stage of the plastics lifecycle – from initial oil extraction to the production and use of plastic products, and their eventual disposal via landfill, incinerator or just being left in the environment.

Yet the possibility of a strong, health-centred treaty hangs in the balance. Campaigners, scientists and healthcare groups are pushing for strong measures to cap production and ban hazardous chemicals. But petrochemical producers and industry lobbyists are pushing back – arguing, against mounting evidence, that plastics are essential to saving lives.

The UN meeting in Geneva is the culmination of several years of negotiating. In theory, delegates will agree on a global treaty by August 15.

The current draft text, which will be the basis for these negotiations, contains provisional elements which could make a real difference. These include cutting plastic production (Article 6), banning plastic products and chemicals that are hazardous to humans or the environment (Article 3), and a section dedicated to protecting human health (Article 19).

But some negotiators oppose these elements, and there is a risk they will be watered down or scrapped entirely in the final treaty.

The so-called Like-Minded Group of countries – many of whose members are petrochemical producers including Saudi Arabia, Iran, and Russia – has led the opposition to a health-centred treaty. They have done so by arguing that plastics are in fact essential for protecting health, due to the role of single-use plastic in modern medicine.

For example, Kuwait’s submission to the previous negotiating round in Busan, South Korea, last year called concerns about plastic “not inclusive”, and cited medical devices as proof that plastic saves lives. Saudi Arabia has opposed the inclusion of a dedicated article on health, arguing that this would divert the treaty away from its core purpose of managing plastic waste.

Since almost all plastic is made from oil or gas, these petrostates have a clear incentive to maintain the status quo of plastic production and dependency. No wonder they want to focus on managing waste, rather than making less in the first place.

Huge bales of plastic waste
Less than 10% of the world’s plastic is recycled. Clare Louise Jackson / shutterstock

Plastics industry lobbyists have also been accused of “infiltrating” the negotiations and wielding outsized influence. They too have pushed the narrative that plastics are essential for human health – for example, with posters displayed at an earlier round of negotiations in Ottawa, Canada, which claimed “plastics save lives”.

These lobby groups are pushing for healthcare plastics to be exempted from the treaty entirely, which would provide a significant loophole for plastic producers.

pro-plastics posters
Plastic lobby posters in Ottawa, April 2024. Rob Ralston

As evidence grows of the ways plastics are harming humans, claims they are necessary to safeguard our health are looking increasingly far-fetched. Of course, plastics are everywhere in modern healthcare. But in most cases, and especially with single-use plastics, they can and should be replaced with a less harmful alternative.

Civil society groups, scientists and healthcare professionals are building momentum for a strong health-centred treaty. The international nongovernmental organization Health Care Without Harm has coordinated an open letter rejecting exemptions for the health sector. Signed by 65 organisations representing 48 million health workers across 88 countries, it calls for a treaty that tackles the full plastics lifecycle – and says cutting unnecessary plastic in healthcare is both possible and necessary to protect patients.

The Scientists’ Coalition, made up of independent experts, has been instrumental in bringing evidence of plastics’ health effects into the debate, while groups like the Global Alliance for Incinerator Alternatives have been pushing for the treaty to recognise that plastics, and especially their disposal, affect marginalised populations hardest. They argue that justice for the most affected people and places should be at the heart of the treaty.

The global plastics treaty is an unprecedented opportunity to take decisive, coordinated action to tackle one of the planet’s biggest threats. At stake in Geneva is whether health will stay at the heart of this treaty – or be sacrificed under pressure from industry and petrostates.


This article was updated on August 7, 2025, to remove reference to China being in the Like Minded Group of countries and to make it clear that the authors saw “plastic saves lives” posters at negotiations in Ottawa (not Busan).The Conversation

Cat Acheson, Research Associate, School of Social and Political Science, University of EdinburghAlice Street, Senior Lecturer in Social Anthropology, University of Edinburgh, and Rob Ralston, Lecturer in Public Policy, University of Edinburgh

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Why alcohol policies miss those at the highest risk from drinking

Elina Sazonova/Pexels
Amy PennayLa Trobe University

People living in the most advantaged areas of Australia tend to drink more alcohol. But people who live in the least advantaged areas suffer the most alcohol-related harms, such as dying from alcohol-related disease or from alcohol-related injuries.

This puzzling phenomenon is known as the “alcohol harm paradox” And knowing what’s behind it has real-world implications.

It can help explain why educational campaigns to drink less alcohol, such as the “sober curious” movement, don’t always reach those most at risk of harm.

It can also help us design better policies to prevent alcohol-related harms – including some policies unrelated to alcohol.

So, rich people drink more?

In 2022, for example, about 31% of Australians living in the most advantaged neighbourhoods exceeded national guidelines for risky drinking in the past year. That’s compared with about 22% in the least advantaged neighbourhoods.

However, people living in more disadvantaged areas have more alcohol-related problems than people with living in more advantaged areas.

For instance, research from the United Kingdom shows those living in the most disadvantaged neighbourhoods are about 2.2 times more likely to die from alcohol problems than those in the least disadvantaged neighbourhoods.

Why is this happening?

Researchers have tried to explain why this is happening. Many have pointed to behavioural factors – choices that people make and actions they take.

For instance, researchers have questioned whether the type of alcohol, patterns of heavy drinking, or where people drink, might explain why people in disadvantaged areas suffer more from alcohol-related harms. But many studies show these factors do not explain it.

Could the combination of drinking with smoking and/or illicit drugs be a factor? Could it be linked to obesity, which we know is more common in lower socioeconomic groupsResearch shows this is not the explanation either.

This focus on people’s behaviour can have unintended consequences. Yes, it can lead to policies that try to get people to change their alcohol use or health behaviour, which can work for some groups. But such policies can exclude those most at risk of harm.

Why educational campaigns don’t always work

One common policy to try to change people’s behaviour is an educational campaign – the type we’d see on TV, online or on social media – to promote a healthy relationship with alcohol.

People living in more advantaged neighbourhoods, or with higher incomes, have greater access to material and social resources. They can draw on these resources – including organisations or individuals that can support them – to avoid risks, reduce the consequences of health and social problems, and take treatment to improve their health and wellbeing.

But people in lower socioeconomic groups may not have equal access to public health messages (for instance, through less access to good quality health care), understand these messages in the same way, or have the same resources and capacities to change their behaviour.

So educational campaigns can actually increase health inequalities.

Are you ‘sober curious’?

I was involved in an Australian study that looked at being “sober curious”, a social movement that emphasises being curious about living life or attending events without drinking alcohol. We explored individuals of different socioeconomic status and whether they were prepared to engage with being sober curious.

Participants of higher socioeconomic status found notions of being sober curious resonant, useful and fitted their lifestyles. But participants of lower socioeconomic status found it “for someone else” and didn’t identify with the concept.

In other words, the group most at risk of alcohol-related harms would have been least likely to take part.

Other interventions that may worsen alcohol-related inequalities also focus on an individual changing their behaviour. These include national guidelines on how much alcohol is safe to drink, and bans on drinking in public spaces that marginalise disadvantaged communities. These are policies that many Australians and policy makers think useful or necessary.

So to reduce alcohol-related inequality we need to fundamentally rethink the types of policies to reduce its harms.

So how can we design better policies?

We need to shift the focus from individual behavioural factors to see how broader social and structural conditions affect people’s health, and design policies to address these.

We need national policies that reduce drinking across the population. These include policies to reduce the availability of alcohol, especially avoiding clustering alcohol outlets in disadvantaged areas.

Another proven effective policy measure involves increasing the price of alcohol so that it cannot be sold under a certain “floor price”. This reduces the availability of very cheap alcohol.

However, policies that address the alcohol harm paradox most successfully may not be relevant to alcohol, but those that focus on reducing health inequality more broadly. These might include more equitable access to housing and better workplace policies as well as more equitable access to health care.

Better social conditions for all Australians would lead to improvements in mental health and wellbeing, and this could reduce alcohol-related harms across demographics. With more research, which I’m conducting, we could find out, and make some headway in reducing alcohol-related inequality in Australia.


If this article raises issues for you or someone you know, call the National Alcohol and Other Drug Hotline on 1800 250 015. Other support is also available.The Conversation

Amy Pennay, Senior Research Fellow and Deputy Director, Centre for Alcohol Policy Research, La Trobe University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Friday essay: Trump and Kennedy are destroying global science. Even Einstein questioned facts – but there’s a method to it

Elizabeth FinkelLa Trobe University

Eight months into Donald Trump’s second presidency of the United States, truth and science are again under attack – with global consequences. USAID, which tackled HIV, TB, malaria and child malnutrition is gone. Funding has been withdrawn from GAVI, a public–private global alliance that helps buy vaccines for the world’s poorest children. Malnourished children are already dying.

Besides these brutal consequences, the scientific machine that delivered America’s scientific and technological dominance is being ruthlessly dismantled. Any research project that mentions diversity, equity and inclusion (DEI), climate change or addresses the causes of vaccine hesitancy is a prime target. But even US space science, once the pride of the nation, is facing “an extinction-level event,” according to the US Planetary Society.

Across the spectrum of science, some 4,000 research grants have been cancelled. Unbelievably, bird-flu experts were fired in the middle of an outbreak. That was topped last May by cancelling a US$600M grant to the company Moderna to develop an mRNA vaccine against bird flu.

And this Tuesday, US$500 million was cancelled for 22 more projects developing mRNA vaccines. Bear in mind that under Operation Warp Speed, the first Trump administration funded the development of Moderna’s mRNA vaccine against COVID. Moderna and Pfizer-BioNTech both delivered mRNA vaccines in the record time of less than a year, winning mRNA vaccine technology a Nobel Prize in 2023.

It’s not just American science that’s being dismantled.

Threats to Australian science, too

In March, the Trump administration sent a questionnaire to researchers receiving US funding in Australia, the European Union, the United Kingdom and Canada. The 36 questions included whether their project related to climate, whether it is taking “appropriate measures” to defend against “gender ideology” and whether the organisation receives funding from China.

US funding for collaborative science projects with Australia amounts to AUD$386 million. So, the threat of losing those substantial funds is dire. As the Australian Academy of Science warned last March, if US–Australian collaboration ceases, “it will directly threaten […] strategic capability in areas of national interest such as defence, health, disaster mitigation and response, AI and quantum technology”.

By June, Australian medical research institutes were “suspending projects on malaria, tuberculosis and women’s health”. It’s like “having a bomb thrown into the middle of science”, noted Professor Brendan Crabb, director of the Burnet Institute, a Melbourne-based global health research centre.

The fallout for US medical research is worse. The Trump administration’s proposed funding cut, to the National Institutes of health, the largest funder of medical research in the world, will see its budget slashed by 40% – and over 2,400 projects cancelled. They include research into cancer, Parkinson’s disease, Alzheimer’s disease, tuberculosis, HIV prevention, COVID vaccines and long-COVID.

Experts have been summarily fired and replaced by sycophants. And of course, the Department of Health and Human Services is now led by America’s most prominent anti-vaxxer, Robert F. Kennedy Junior. Elite research universities, including Harvard, Columbia, Princeton and Cornell, continue to be prime targets.

“It’s hard to overstate how serious this is […] Today, as we’re witnessing kind of the destruction of the institutions behind American science, it’s hard to believe. It’s hard to believe any administration would do this,” noted Alan Bernstein, director of global public health at Oxford University, in April.

Indeed, how could this be happening?

Erika Nolan, a MAHA (Make America Healthy Again) stalwart and YouTube influencer, provides a candid answer: “Facts no longer matter.” Nolan plies her 200,000 strong audience with idyllic scenes of herding chickens and goats while snuggling her baby in a front pack.

Like Kennedy, Nolan believes America’s big health issues relate to food dyes and seed oils. Hopefully she does not live in a part of the US where measles or whooping cough is raging, and that her chicken flock won’t come down with bird flu.

She says it was COVID, and the pressure to be vaccinated, that “fast-tracked” her. And when asked about the 14 million lives saved in the first year, as reported in peer-reviewed medical journal, the Lancet, her answer is, “Everything can be manipulated.”

What Nolan doesn’t understand is that modern science emerged precisely to deal with the way everything can be manipulated. The very word science comes from scientia, Latin for knowledge. The gist of it is captured by the motto adopted in 1663 by the Royal Society in London: “Nullius in verba.”. That’s Latin for “Take nobody’s word for it.” In other words, experimentation and observation is what counts, not the opinions of influencers.

Nolan might be surprised to find her scepticism over “facts” goes all the way back to Socrates.

Knowledge, power and science

He left no written works, but we hear his voice through the “dialogues” of his student Plato. Ever so gently, Socrates probes the beliefs of his conversation partner, methodically laying bare their logical fallacies. It has come to be known as the Socratic method.

One of the most famous dialogues employs the allegory of a cave to teach Socrates’ primary lesson: knowledge can be based on false beliefs.

The cave is home to a group of prisoners who have been chained up for their entire lives. All they have ever been allowed to see is the cave wall in front of them. Shadows dance across it, representing the reality of the external world. The prisoners have no idea that the images are created by puppets paraded past a blazing fire just behind them.

One prisoner breaks free and climbs out of the cave. Dazed by the sunlight, it takes time for his sensitive eyes to adapt. At first, he is only able to look at shadows, then reflections, then real objects. He dashes back to the cave to enlighten his fellow captives. But his eyes have not readjusted to the dark and he stumbles around.

The prisoners perceive a blinded, deranged man, raving about a parallel world. They want nothing to do with him and become aggressive. This is Plato’s second lesson: the danger of trying to enlighten those wedded to pre-existing beliefs. Poignantly, Socrates would pay with his life for trying to enlighten others.

Plato’s allegory of the cave teaches Socrates’ primary lesson: knowledge can be based on false beliefs. Plato's Allegory of the Cave, by Jan Saenredam/Wikipedia

It would take over 2,000 years to come up with satisfactory responses to some of Socrates’ questions about the nature of knowledge. They appeared in the form of the scientific revolution.

Stars of the scientific revolution

The scientific revolution was ushered in by the exacting astronomical measurements of Copernicus, Galileo and Kepler, which revealed that Earth and the other planets were in orbit around the sun, rather than the other way round.

Brilliant as these astronomers were, they were just the warm-up acts. The starring role in the scientific revolution goes to Isaac Newton, who honoured his debt to those who came before with the timeless words: “If I have seen further, it is by standing on the shoulders of giants.” Standing on the shoulders of Copernicus, Galileo and Kepler, Newton glimpsed the sun-centred universe and pondered a new question: why did the planets orbit the sun?

The French philosopher Descartes had suggested an answer in 1633. He deemed that something like a giant tornado of dust particles raged around the sun, dragging the planets along with them.

Newton was seven years old when Descartes died. By the time Newton was 26, he was the Lucasian Professor of Mathematics at Cambridge, no doubt for the stunning discoveries he made during the plague years, which he spent in isolation at his mother’s farm in Lincolnshire. “Truth is the offspring of silence and unbroken meditation,” he noted.

His unbroken meditation gave birth to calculus, optics (in the pursuit of which he stuck a blunt needle into his eye), his laws of motion and the beginnings of his theory of gravity. Seeing an apple fall from a tree was famously his Eureka moment. The force that made the apple fall to the earth, he mused, was likely the same as the one binding the planets to the elliptical solar orbits described by Kepler.

Today, most people have no problem with the idea of gravity as a force that pulls the apple to the ground or the earth to the sun. It was a different story in Newton’s time. Descartes’ tornado seemed the more rational explanation.

Seeing an apple fall from a tree was famously Isaac Newton’s Eureka moment for his theory of gravity. Markus Winkler/Pexels

How could the sun reach out across the vastness of space to pull on our planet? This was “barbaric physics”, opined German mathematician and philosopher Gottfried Leibniz. Admittedly, Leibniz was peeved with Newton; they had rival claims as the first to develop calculus. But Leibniz was far from being the only one to label Newton’s theory unscientific.

What vindicated Newton’s theory was that it made testable, precise predictions. It specified that the gravitational force between two objects increases with their masses and decreases as they grow further apart.

Newton’s maths proved correct. It accurately predicted how long it would take for the moon to orbit the earth and the coming of Halley’s comet. His formula also predicted that the warped orbit of Uranus was due to the gravitational pull of a ghost planet. A century and a half later, Neptune was found. For 300 years, Newton’s predictions kept hitting the mark. And for most earth-bound situations, they still do.

Newton represents a watershed in the development of science. The peculiar thing about him, and what made him the lead actor of the scientific revolution, was that his theory, unlike those of Aristotle or Descartes, was limited to what could be accounted for by mathematical predictions. He did not attempt to go beyond the data to explain what gravity is or whether it really existed: “I have not as yet been able to deduce from phenomena the reason for these properties of gravity, and I do not feign hypotheses,” he wrote.

Philosophy of science

This notion of science as being light on theory is familiar to me. As a scientist (before I was a science writer, I was a molecular biologist), my contribution to theory was limited to what could be induced from my last successful experiment. In my ten years as a working scientist, I never encountered the philosophy of science. Nor did I encounter it much in my decades writing about the work of other scientists.

But in researching my book Prove It, which would see me roam widely, from theoretical physics to human evolution, and deeply, across the centuries, I knew I would have to reckon with the philosophy of science. I did not relish the task: reading philosophy can be challenging.

Moreover, I was not convinced that there was much philosophy at work in modern science. According to Michael Strevens, a philosopher of science based at New York University, when scientists themselves are placed under the microscope to dissect their philosophical impulses, nothing coherent emerges beyond a compulsion to test, test, test. As physicist Richard Feynman put it, “the philosophy of science is about as useful to science as ornithology is to birds”.

To my surprise, delight and relief, however, once I started investigating, philosophy emerged unbidden, first in the form of the Scottish enlightenment philosopher David Hume, whose ideas provided a natural kick-off point for the chapters that followed.

Like other Enlightenment philosophers, Hume valued individual reasoning over dogma and drew inspiration from the scientific revolution, particularly Newton, whom he described as “the greatest and rarest genius that ever arose for the ornament and instruction of the species”.

Newton inspired Hume, and Hume in turn inspired Albert Einstein to do what Newton could not: develop a theory of gravity.

Einstein’s ‘intellectual habits’

Einstein discovered Hume in 1902 while working as a patent clerk in Bern, Switzerland, in his early twenties. For fun, he and two colleagues formed a reading group to discuss philosophy. They paid particular attention to Hume’s 1739 A Treatise of Human Nature, in which Hume warned about the dangers of induction, the practice of extrapolating from observations to formulate general laws of the universe.

It may have been the method Newton employed, but it was an “intellectual habit” without a solid philosophical foundation, Hume argued. A well-known example concerns the colour of swans. Since Roman times, the whiteness of swans was held by European writers to be a self-evident truth. But in 1697, Dutch sea captain Willem de Vlamingh, while searching for shipwreck survivors on Australia’s west coast, sailed up a river and, lo, beheld black swans! The incident provided the name of Perth’s Swan River and a salutary philosophical lesson.

For Einstein, Hume’s ideas helped him to let go of his “intellectual habits”, a breakthrough that contributed to his theories of Special Relativity and General Relativity. Had he not read Hume, Einstein reflected, “I cannot say that the solution would have come.”

Einstein freed himself from the intellectual habit of induction by using a “deductive” process instead. It relied not on observations but on the mathematical certainty of the constant speed of light. All very well for Einstein – but the vast majority of scientists do not have the luxury of starting from mathematical certainties. While Einstein’s theory of relativity has endured unchanged for more than a century, the same cannot be said of any of the other theories explored in Prove It.

I needed Einstein to introduce me to David Hume, but Karl Popper needed no introduction. He is the most famous philosopher of science of the 20th century. If you’ve come across the idea that scientific theories can’t be proven, only disproven or “falsified”, that’s courtesy of Popper.

Karl Popper: science as search for truth

Popper has a poignant personal story that resonates strongly with my motive for writing a scientific guide for the post-truth era.

Karl Popper. Lucinda Douglas-Menzies/Wikipedia

Born in 1902 into a cultivated, scholarly home – his mother a pianist, his father a lawyer – Popper’s first decade was lived in Vienna’s golden age. As the capital of the Austro-Hungarian Empire, Vienna was the seat of political power, but also a cauldron of European cultural and intellectual ferment.

Modernism exploded: there was the stylised eroticism of Gustav Klimt’s shimmering gold paintings and the raw sexual canvases of Egon Schiele; the absurdist literature of Franz Kafka and the meltingly poetic work of Rainer Maria Rilke; the hauntingly beautiful music of Gustav Mahler and the atonal work of Arnold Schoenberg; the philosophy of Ludwig Wittgenstein; and of course, Sigmund Freud’s revolutionary theories about the life of the unconscious mind.

“In those first fourteen years of the twentieth century, Vienna, more than anywhere else, was the fulminating, bewitching crucible where the modern world was invented,” writes William Boyd.

Popper witnessed its destruction. He was 12 when the first world war broke out and 37 when the second one came around. In between, he flirted with and rejected Marxism, tried his hand at carpentry and teaching, and managed to complete a PhD in the philosophy of psychology. With the rise of Nazism, his Jewish ancestry erased his job prospects. To build a reputation, he wrote a book, The Logic of Scientific Discovery.

Published in 1934, it introduced his theory that the way to distinguish science from non-science is falsification. His ideas struck a chord and won him an offer to teach philosophy at Canterbury University College in Christchurch, New Zealand. He emigrated with his wife in 1937, a year before Austria was annexed by Hitler. In 1946, he moved to the United Kingdom to found the department of philosophy at the London School of Economics.

Popper experienced firsthand what can happen to the most intellectually progressive of civilisations when a populist ideology takes hold. How could a philosopher protect future generations from such an assault on truth? Like the Enlightenment thinkers before him, his answer was the scientific method. “Truth is therefore the aim of science; science is the search for truth,” he wrote.

Testing Einstein

I was delighted to discover that Popper’s theory was inspired by Einstein! As a teenager, Popper heard Einstein expound on his astonishing theory of General Relativity in Vienna in 1919.

Gravity was not a force, Einstein suggested, but a consequence of the way mass causes a curvature in spacetime. A fantastical theory! But in the same breath, Einstein proposed a way to prove his theory wrong. During an eclipse, the moon blocks the sun, and the dark sky makes the stars near the sun suddenly visible. Although the stars themselves are very far away from the sun, their light rays must pass close by it to be seen by people watching the eclipse.

Einstein predicted that the starlight would curve along the spacetime warped by the sun’s huge mass. As a result, the apparent positions of the stars would be shifted by an exact amount predicted by Einstein’s equations.

Bottom line: Einstein’s theory could be falsified, and Einstein offered his critics a way to do it. As Popper put it, “Thus I arrived, by the end of 1919, at the conclusion that the scientific attitude was the critical attitude, which did not look for verifications but for crucial tests; tests which could refute the theory tested, though they could never establish it.”

Science cannot prove theories, because, as Hume pointed out, what’s true today may not be true tomorrow. Just because we observe a phenomenon once doesn’t mean we can assume it will happen again. But science can certainly disprove things.

That’s what distinguishes scientific theories from, say, Freud’s theory of the unconscious or Marx’s theory of historical materialism. Those theories do not offer falsifiable predictions. You might agree or disagree with them, but there is no way to disprove them. Science, by contrast, offers predictions that can be tested and therefore falsified. “I believe I have solved the problem of induction,” Popper declared.

Popper had his detractors. One was his former student Imre Lakatos, who embraced the importance of falsification but argued that in practice, theories are rarely overturned by contradictory data. “Scientists have thick skins,” he wrote. “They do not abandon a theory because facts contradict it. They normally either invent some rescue hypothesis to explain what they then call a mere anomaly and if they cannot explain the anomaly, they ignore it.”

The philosopher most diametrically opposed to Popper was the American, Thomas Kuhn. No doubt you’ve heard the term “paradigm shift”? That’s thanks to Kuhn and his 1962 book The Structure of Scientific Revolutions, which sold over a million copies. According to Kuhn, modern scientists, rather than attempting to falsify their theories, do the exact opposite: they design experiments to affirm them.

These disputes notwithstanding, the hunt for the origins of COVID-19 showed me Popper is alive and well in the modern science lab. “Popperian” scientists were among the first to propose that the virus came from a lab. They then tried to see if they could disprove their own theory – and largely succeeded. The weight of evidence points to the virus spilling into the human population from an animal source.

Shared reality and true science

The scientific method doesn’t just apply to science. In his book, The Constitution of Knowledge, Jonathan Rauch, a senior fellow in governance at Brookings Institute, notes that the institutions that underpin democracies – academia, law, journalism and government – need to operate based on a shared reality. To do so, they employ the scientific method the gathering and testing of facts.

The Trump administration seems to have declared war on every aspect of the scientific method. It has declared war on fact-checking, triggering a global pile-on. Meta announced in January it would scrap its fact-checking programs. And last month, Google announced it will not renew its fact-checking contract with Australian Associated Press.

The Trump administration has also taken an axe to the workings of the scientific machine. In a breathtaking example of Orwellian “double speak”, on May 23, Trump issued an executive order to restore “gold standard science”.

What this means, explains New York University bioethicist Arthur Caplan, is that “instead of independent expert reviews of research, a Trump functionary can look at any peer-reviewed work and declare it to be in violation of the President’s gold standard”. He concluded that the US “has never had a situation in which political and ideological nonscientists got the last word about what is credible science”.

The history of authoritarian regimes tells us when ideologues take over science, it does not end well. It was the Nazi takeover of German universities that saw the likes of Einstein seek refuge in the US – and turned America into a scientific superpower.

The scientific method, designed to keep human failings in check, is the best guide for navigating the present era. Here are my guiding principles:

  1. Go to the experts. See what is being published in leading journals, find a good plain-language summary and check several sources. Science and Nature both offer excellent free reporting, as does The Conversation and The New York Times.

  2. Expert opinion seeks consensus. Consensus may be tough to obtain among scientists, but it is based on a convergence of evidence from different sources.

  3. Anyone who tries to whip up an emotional response, or who has a predetermined opinion or conflict of interest, is a red flag. Scientific evidence is generally measured. It comes with margins of error and estimates of effectiveness and risk. A scientist who offers opinions outside their field of expertise is also one to whom I would give less weight.

Our health, our agriculture, our environmental safety, our ability to ameliorate and adapt to climate change, to regulate AI and to fight the next pandemic, all rely on the proper functioning of the scientific machine. We must not stand by and see it dismantled.


This is an adapted extract of Elizabeth Finkel’s Prove It: A Scientific Guide for the Post-Truth Era (Black Inc.), published August 12.The Conversation

Elizabeth Finkel, Vice-Chancellor's Fellow, La Trobe University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Tiny homes could help ease the housing crisis, but councils are dragging their feet

Heather ShearerGriffith University and Paul BurtonGriffith University

Australia’s housing affordability crisis shows no sign of easing. An average home price now exceeds A$1 million and a recent report found only a handful of rental properties nationwide are affordable for someone on government benefits. Vulnerable people are hit hardest – for example, there has been a 14% increase in women and girls seeking homelessness services.

Yet some councils want to evict people from their own homes. A couple in the Bega Valley, NSW, faces fines of $10,000 per day unless they remove or demolish their tiny house.

On the Sunshine Coast in Queensland, four tiny house owners are fighting council eviction. In Victoria’s Yarra Valley, a couple was told to demolish or rebuild to comply with the Building Code of Australia (BCA).

We’ve researched the planning and social aspects of the tiny house movement in Australia for over a decade. We’ve looked at changing attitudes to tiny houses and living more modestly, and the barriers people face when they choose this path.

Regulations are the biggest obstacle

While interest in tiny houses has soared, actual numbers of tiny house dwellers has stayed low. Are people put off by living in a space half the size of a city unit? Or is it too difficult to secure finance for a depreciating asset?

We found the biggest barrier remains council regulations. Most councils do not explicitly prohibit tiny house living, but don’t know how to classify them. Rules vary markedly between local governments.

Preliminary results of our study investigating attitudes of council planners around Australia found views on tiny and alternative housing differed.

We surveyed all councils with an urban centre of at least 10,000 people, and received 147 valid responses (approximately 50% response rate). Most councils would approve a small, alternative dwelling such as a kit house, converted shipping container or shed house. But what about a tiny house on wheels?

Existing planning schemes don’t cover tiny homes on wheels. Instead, they are managed under local laws, and treated as caravans or even camping. Many councils ban permanent living in a caravan outside a residential caravan park. You can park one on your land, but cannot live in it full-time.

Many planners felt their policies were outdated – written before today’s housing crisis. Nonetheless, they tried to work within existing policies. They weren’t opposed to tiny houses per se, provided they were located away from flood or bushfire risk areas, managed waste properly and didn’t harm the amenities of their neighbours.

Nearly all would consider approving tiny homes if they could be certified under the National Construction Code. This requires a building to meet internal safety, durability and environmental standards. But a tiny home is not considered a permanent dwelling and instead, must comply with vehicle safety and appliance standards.

Pilot programs

Since 2023, some councils have adopted more flexible approaches. In Victoria, the Surf Coast Shire is running a tiny house pilot. Mount Alexander shire in Castlemaine allows people to live permanently in a tiny house provided there is an existing house on the land.

On the Fraser Coast in Queensland, people can live on a caravan for up to six months a year, if waste is managed and the council is notified.

Western Australia’s Shire of Esperance was the first council to include tiny homes in planning policy. But the state government later reversed this, reclassifying them as caravans.

The Tasmanian government released a tiny homes fact sheet, with some councils allowing them as permanent dwellings. But confusion remains; one tiny house advocate applying for council approval was told they “cannot use the bathroom in the tiny house”.

a tiny house off the grid.
Councils have a range of approaches to tiny homes. Lightitup/Shutterstock

Ironically, classifying tiny homes as caravans has led to some tiny house builders marketing their products for short-term rentals. Planning schemes have policies on this, so these are simpler to regulate, but not helpful in a housing crisis.

Despite the perception that councils are to blame, they are not the root cause. The deeper problem is not council regulations but a lack of clear policy from state and federal government.

A more diverse housing mix

Tiny homes are not for everyone and are not a silver bullet for the housing crisis. Some suggest they are more suited to residential parks, but we feel they can be part of a more diverse housing mix.

Tiny houses can normalise smaller, more sustainable living, and help older people age in place while letting underutilised houses to a larger household. Tiny houses could also give young adults an affordable start.

Navigating the current regulatory landscape is difficult. Groups such as the Australian Tiny House Association offer guidance but real change needs support across all levels of government.

The debate about tiny homes is tied to broader questions: are we over-regulated, does regulation stifle innovation and productivity, and can we relax some rules without compromising safety?

These are not easy questions. But one thing is clear, current policies and laws are blocking tiny houses from contributing to our housing mix. That’s a missed opportunity.The Conversation

Heather Shearer, Lecturer in GIS and Planning, Griffith University and Paul Burton, Professor of Urban Management & Planning, Griffith University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Foreign interference can be hidden in plain sight. Here’s how countries use ‘sharp power’ in Australia

Padini Carine/Wikimedia CommonsCC BY-SA
Ihsan YilmazDeakin UniversityAna-Maria BliucUniversity of DundeeJohn BettsMonash University, and Nicholas MoriesonDeakin University

Last week, Australian authorities arrested a woman for foreign interference. The Chinese citizen and Canberra resident is just the third person ever charged under our foreign interference laws.

According to the Australian Federal Police, she was allegedly gathering information on, and may be involved in efforts to infiltrate, the Guan Yin Citta Buddhist association. The group is banned in China, where the government regards it as a dangerous cult.

The story might seem unimportant. After all, it doesn’t involve defence secrets or political leaders, but a small, relatively obscure community.

But this is exactly why it matters. The case shows the Chinese Communist Party is deeply interested in Australia’s Chinese diaspora communities. It’s willing to disregard Australian law to police and manipulate them in ways that serve Beijing’s interests.

It also shows how authoritarian regimes use “sharp power”, or covert, manipulative influence, to do more than just spy. They also surveil, intimidate and control communities far beyond their borders.

From elections to TV dramas

Foreign interference in Australian affairs is no longer a hypothetical concern. Earlier this year, Australia’s spy chief warned that foreign agents were targeting the AUKUS submarine program, critical infrastructure and even political debate.

Beyond Australia, Russia has tried to sway US elections through disinformation campaigns.

Diaspora communities are a new front in wars for influence. For example, India’s government has attempted to mobilise its supporters in Canada against people demanding a separate homeland for Sikhs in India.

In Turkey, the ruling Justice and Development Party uses TV dramas. These glorify the Ottoman Empire to export Islamism, authoritarianism and pro-violence attitudes to other Muslim majority countries, in an effort expand Turkish influence across the world.

This is how sharp power works. It’s about shaping public narratives, creating division and undermining a country’s capacity to make independent, confident decisions.

What is sharp power?

The best way to understand sharp power is to compare it against “hard power” and “soft power”.

We are used to measuring power in economic and military terms, such as how many soldiers or warships a country has. This is “hard power”: the ability of a nation to coerce others to act according to its wishes through military prowess and economic dominance.

This kind of power is used by US President Donald Trump to bully other nations into accepting unequal trade deals. It can also be seen in Russia when it threatens nuclear war on Europe.

Many countries also use “soft power” to win the admiration of people in foreign countries. For example, despite its history of imperial domination, postwar Japan has enjoyed enormous soft power in Asia and beyond thanks to its popular culture.

Sharp power is different. It manipulates and distorts the information people receive, quietly shaping how they see the world and the choices they think they have. It’s the use of covert, manipulative and often emotional tactics to shape how other countries think, decide and act, often without them realising it’s happening.

The troubling thing about sharp power is that it sometimes wears a benign mask, such as TV dramas.

Scholar Joseph Nye argues the line between soft power and sharp power comes down to truth and openness.

When China’s state news agency, Xinhua, operates openly in other countries, it is playing the soft power game. But when China Radio International secretly funds 33 radio stations in 14 countries, or when Turkey spreads anti-Western conspiracy theories and disinformation, it crosses into sharp power.

Sharp power in Australia

The Canberra spy case shows how Beijing can shape opinions by infiltrating local Chinese organisations. It can also control information and mobilise people in ways that serve its own political interests. It reveals how some authoritarian governments regard co-ethnic, co-religious, or culturally linked diasporas in the West as part of their national community and seek to influence them accordingly.

Australia’s universities have also been targets of China’s sharp power. Scholars critical of Beijing’s oppression of Tibetans, Uighur Muslims, and pro-democracy activists in Hong Kong have faced pressure from student groups aligned with Chinese state interests.

The Chinese language media in Australia has also become deeply influenced by Beijing’s narratives. Many once independent outlets now republish state controlled content, narrowing the diversity of views available to Chinese-speaking Australians. This also encourages them to remain loyal and connected to China.

Given these other examples, it’s clear the Canberra spy case is far from an isolated incident. It’s part of a deliberate and evolving strategy used by a variety of authoritarian powers. These powers manipulate information environments and public opinion, and interfere in elections. They repress diaspora communities and influence nations.

For a multicultural society such as Australia, the challenge is to respond firmly to authoritarian sharp power attacks without undermining the openness and diversity that are among our greatest democratic strengths.

Indeed, if Australia responds to Chinese sharp power with blunt measures, it risks alienating Chinese Australians. Ultimately, that would do Beijing’s sharp power work for it.The Conversation

Ihsan Yilmaz, Deputy Directory (Research Development), Deakin Institute for Citizenship and Globalisation & Research Professor of Political Science and International Relations, Deakin UniversityAna-Maria Bliuc, Associate Professor in Social Psychology, University of DundeeJohn Betts, Senior Lecturer, Monash University, and Nicholas Morieson, Research fellow, Deakin University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Why Gareth Ward’s challenge to the power to expel him from the NSW parliament failed

Anne TwomeyUniversity of Sydney

Gareth Ward, who was recently found guilty of four sexual offences, has resigned as a member of the New South Wales Legislative Assembly.

In itself, this is unremarkable. Politicians accused of serious crimes or facing the threat of expulsion typically resign first, before they are disqualified or expelled. No one wants their name in the history books for such matters.

But what is remarkable is the tortured process that occurred to get to this point.

Why wasn’t conviction enough to remove him?

Ward, the state member for Kiama, was found guilty by a jury in the District Court on July 25 of one count of sexual intercourse without consent and three counts of indecent assault.

Section 13A of the NSW Constitution says members of parliament are disqualified if they are convicted of serious offences that are punishable by imprisonment for five years or more. The offences of which Ward was found guilty fall into that category.

In the past, this would have resulted in Ward immediately and automatically losing his seat in parliament upon conviction, as is the case in the federal parliament. But section 13A was amended in 2000 so disqualification takes effect at the end of the appeal process, if the conviction still stands. This prevents a member from losing their seat if they were wrongly convicted and their conviction was later overturned.

But what if the offence is so serious it would undermine the public’s trust in the House if the convicted person remained a member during the considerable time it might take for an appeal to be determined? Could a member really serve their constituency while sitting in prison?

Parliament recognised this problem and inserted section 13A(3), which states these changes do not affect the power to expel a member.

The court challenge to expulsion

As Ward initially refused to resign and indicated he intended to appeal his convictions, he was notified by the government that an expulsion motion would be moved against him on August 5. Late on August 4, Ward’s legal team rushed to court to get an injunction to stop the expulsion motion, pending the resolution of his legal challenge to the power to expel him.

The NSW Court of Appeal held an urgent hearing on the morning of August 7, and issued its 25-page judgment later that day. It unanimously rejected Ward’s arguments, allowing the House to proceed to expulsion.

Ward had argued there was no power to expel while his criminal appeal process was underway. The court rejected this, finding the appeal process does not prevent an earlier expulsion, as clearly indicated by section 13A(3).

Next, Ward argued the expulsion was beyond the power of the House, because it was being done to punish him. The Houses of the NSW parliament do not have any punitive power to expel. They can only expel a member to protect the House and its capacity to discharge its great responsibilities with public confidence. But the court held that Ward had failed to establish that the proposed expulsion would be punitive and outside the House’s powers.

Because Ward was being held in prison, in Cessnock, he would not be available to respond in the House to the expulsion motion. He claimed this meant there was no procedural fairness. The court pointed out that Ward had been asked to submit any statement or material to the House for its consideration before the vote on expulsion. The House had not prevented Ward from attending – it was the decision of a judge to refuse him bail, sending him into custody, pending sentencing. The court concluded there is no general rule that procedural fairness requires a person to have an oral hearing before a decision-maker, and that there was no procedural unfairness in this case.

Finally, Ward argued his expulsion was inconsistent with the system of representative democracy, as it overrides the choice made by the electors. The court rejected this argument, noting that the outcome of expulsion is that voters get a fresh chance to choose their representative in a by-election. The electors of the electorate of Kiama were not disenfranchised but were instead “re-enfranchised in an orderly and expeditious way”.

The controversy over the injunction

Most controversial of all was the question of whether a judge could or should have issued an injunction restraining the House from deliberating on or passing a motion of expulsion. The courts and the Houses have long applied a principle of “comity”, under which neither interferes with the internal proceedings of the other.

Leader of the Government in the Legislative Assembly Ron Hoenig disputed the validity of the injunction, while nonetheless respecting the court’s order and voluntarily complying with it, pending an urgent hearing.

The Court of Appeal was critical of the conduct of the legal representatives for Ward, which led to the issuing of the injunction without the other side being properly notified or represented. At paragraph 88 of its judgment, it described the lack of notification as “unacceptable and inappropriate”. The deficiencies in the process of obtaining the injunction were such that no further consideration was given to the deeper issues concerning the constitutional relationship between the House and the courts.

Democracy lives on

The upshot of Ward’s resignation is that it will end the prospect of further litigation about his place in parliament. The people of the electorate of Kiama will now be able to exercise their democratic mandate in a by-election, to choose a representative who can serve them in the NSW parliament, rather than a prison cell.The Conversation

Anne Twomey, Professor Emerita in Constitutional Law, University of Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

How many of Australia’s 2.2 million property investors would lose out under a new plan to curb negative gearing?

Martin DuckUniversity of Sydney

The Australian Council of Trade Unions is pushing to limit negative gearing and capital gains tax discounts to just one investment property.

So who stands to win or lose the most if it happens? And is the Albanese government likely to act on the proposal, given Labor has been burnt on the issue before?

My research on Australian housing finance shows negative gearing and capital gains tax discounts were not designed with rental housing in mind – yet this is where they’ve had their greatest impact.

How do the tax breaks work now – and what might change?

Under current negative gearing rules, investors are able to deduct losses incurred from an investment property (such as interest payments and other expenses) against their own taxable income. These can be claimed on an unlimited number of investment properties.

High-income earners tend to have greater incomes to buy properties, and larger tax bills to make deductions against.

With the 50% capital gains tax discount, only half the increase in price of an asset is taxed when it is sold. High-income earners also tend to benefit more from this than low-income earners.

Under the ACTU’s proposal, the current negative gearing and capital gains tax discount arrangements would stay the same for the next five years.

That would give investors time to adjust their property portfolios before a change to only getting tax breaks on a single investment property.

ACTU Secretary Sally McManus is putting forward the idea at this month’s national economic reform roundtable. She warns continuing to give investors tax discounts to own multiple properties is making home ownership “nearly unimaginable for young people”.

Who would win and lose under the proposal?

According to analysis of the most recent Australian Tax Office statistics from 2022-23 by RMIT researcher Liam Davies, there were 2,261,080 individuals with an “interest in property” – meaning they have an investment in at least one rental property.

Of those investors, 1,117,175 (49.4%) were negatively geared. And of those who were negatively geared, 810,875 have an interest in one property, and 306,300 have an interest in two or more properties.

So yes, there would be some losers under the ACTU proposal. About 306,300 out of 2,261,080 investors – 13.5%, or roughly one in seven property investors – would be affected by the new proposed limits. That’s just over 1% of all Australians.

But for the majority of other investors who negatively gear now – 810,875 people at last count – they would continue on with the same tax breaks as before.

What tax breaks cost now – and what they could fund

It’s also worth noting that negatively geared investors “lost” (or claimed deductions for) a total of A$10.4 billion in 2022-23, with $4.8 billion being “lost” by investors with an interest in two or more properties.

The ACTU estimates its change would raise about $1.5 billion in tax revenue each year.

That money could go towards housing in other areas – such as the government’s Housing Accord target of helping finance 40,000 social and affordable homes over the next five years.

We’ve known for years that a tiny fraction of investors actually get the vast majority of these tax breaks.

The Parliamentary Budget Office has reported around 80% of the benefits of the capital gains tax discount go to the top 10% of Australian income earners, while 60% of the benefits of negative gearing go to the top 20% of income earners.

Over the past decade, foregone revenue from negative gearing and capital gains taxation has totalled more than A$80 billion.

Tax breaks that were never meant to work this way

Neither negative gearing nor the capital gains tax discount were initially targeted at rental housing.

Negative gearing provisions actually date back to an unclear loophole in the 1936 Income Tax Assessment Act.

And until as recently the mid-1980s – just two generations ago – there was no capital gains taxation in Australia. Back then, it was much harder for investors to get finance to buy rental properties.

The big change came in 1999, when then-prime minister John Howard acted on a Treasury recommendation and applied a blanket 50% discount to all assets held for a year or more.

At the time, the stated aim was to get more people investing in Australian businesses, such as through the share market. Instead, many people ploughed money into housing and have bid up house prices ever since.

What are the prospects of change?

Within the past year, Labor has repeatedly ruled out changing negative gearing or the capital gains tax discount.

Labor has been cautious about it ever since Bill Shorten’s failed 2019 election campaign, which proposed limiting negative gearing to newly-built dwellings and reducing the capital gains tax discount from 50% to 25%.

But the simplicity of the ACTU’s proposal – and the fact that it would leave the majority of property investors untouched – may make it simpler to implement and also easier to win over voters.

The Greens have already said they back the ACTU’s proposal. So if the Albanese government chose to act, it would have enough support in parliament to pass it.

Public support for limits on how many properties investors can own has also grown in recent years. Gen Z and Millennial voters now comprise almost half the electorate – and their most pressing concern is housing (un)affordability.

The ACTU’s proposal is a modest one. In the eyes of some, it won’t go far enough.

If the Albanese government finds the will to take on the proposal, it would have more winners than losers – and would make the housing system slightly fairer than it is now.The Conversation

Martin Duck, Post-Doctoral Research Associate, University of Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

How do you feel about doing exams? Our research unearthed 4 types of test-takers

Johnny Greig/ Getty Images
Andrew J. MartinUNSW SydneyEmma BurnsMacquarie UniversityJoel PearsonUNSW SydneyRebecca J. CollieUNSW Sydney, and Roger KennettUNSW Sydney

If you had to do a test, how would you respond? Would you relish the chance to demonstrate your knowledge? Or worry you were about to fall short of the mark and embarrass yourself?

Research tells us students’ attitudes towards taking tests or doing exams can have an impact on their performance. This is because what they think about themselves, the test questions, and the consequences of the test can impact their motivation and focus during the test.

To date, this research has largely grouped students into two main types of test-takers. One group sees tests as a challenge they can cope with. Another sees tests as a threat they will not be able to handle.

But some studies have suggested these groupings may be too broad to give useful support to students.

In our new study, the largest of its kind, we explored Australian high school students taking a science test. By capturing diverse psychological data, such as students’ brainwaves and stress responses, we found there are four types of test-takers.

Our study

We studied 244 male and female students from three Sydney schools in years 8 to 10 as they did a science test.

It is the largest study of its kind to collate diverse information on students’ brain wave activity, physiological responses and self-reported attitudes while they are doing a test.

This is significant because this kind of research is usually done in labs with large functional magnetic resonance imaging (fMRI) machines, a setting quite different from a real classroom. Our approach allowed us to get a well-rounded look at the different psychological indicators at play when students do a test.

The students were part of a larger research project looking at science engagement. The test was developed by our research team, with guidance from science teachers.

How we set up our research

Students wore an electroencephalogram (EEG) headset during the test to capture their brain activity, via alpha and theta waves.

The alpha waves measured how much students were focusing on the test and the theta waves looked at the strain on their working memory (which students need to use to solve problems in a test). Both these capacities can be disrupted if a person feels threatened or stressed.

Students also wore a biometric wristband that measured their sweat glands. In our study, lower “electrodermal activity” scores indicated a calmer and more positive state, and higher scores indicated stress.

Midway through the test, students reported how confident they were about meeting the demands of the test and how anxious they felt about not meeting the demands.

We then used a statistical technique called latent profile analysis to help us identify different types of test-takers. This technique enables researchers to identify subgroups based on certain variables.

4 types of test-takers

We were able to identify four groups of students who had distinct patterns on these different measures.

1. Confident striders: these students took the test “in their stride”. They reported high confidence and low anxiety, and recorded an optimal balance of attention and working memory. Their wristband readings indicated they were calm. They made up 27% of the group.

2. Confident battlers: also reported they were confident and low in anxiety, but other data suggested they were battling behind the scenes. Their wristband readings suggested their “fight or flight” system was aroused. Their brain waves also showed their working memory did not have as much capacity to problem-solve as the confident striders, which also indicates a level of stress. They made up 8% of the group.

3. Ambivalents: these students were average across all of the indicators, reflecting that they didn’t see the test as a challenge or a threat. They made up 38% of the group.

4. Fearers: reported low confidence and high anxiety. Their wristband readings indicated they were stressed, and their brain wave readings showed they were not directing much direction to the actual test. They made up 27% of the group.

How did these test-takers perform on the test?

We then looked at the test performance for each of these four test-takers. Not surprisingly, confident striders were the highest achievers. Confident battlers also did well on the test, but not as well as striders. Ambivalents scored lower on the test, but not as low as fearers.

These results were measured against students’ previous science results (in school tests and assignments), because we wanted to know whether students performed above or below their usual level. This was to ensure we were measuring the impact of students’ psychological approach to the test, rather than just how good they are at science.

Taken together, our findings suggest that believing in themselves, confronting any fearful thoughts, and having a clear mind to concentrate on the task, puts students in the strongest position to perform well.

What can teachers do?

Our findings also provide guidance for teachers to target the factors that defined the test-takers.

  • To help build confidence, students can be taught how to challenge doubts about themselves. This can include reminding students of their strengths as they approach the test. For example, students could reflect on how well they conducted the experiments in their science lessons if the test includes questions about those experiments.

  • To ease anxiety, students can be taught constructive ways to think about challenging schoolwork. For example, students can remind themselves of the knowledge they have learned that will be helpful. Students can also be taught to use breathing and mindfulness exercises to ease stress. This can reduce a physical stress response and help focus their attention on the task at hand.

  • To optimise working memory, for in-class assessments teachers can match the test to students’ abilities and prior learning. This means the test is challenging enough, but not so overwhelming that it excessively burdens working memory while they are problem solving. This can also help build confidence ahead of other, higher-stakes exams.The Conversation

Andrew J. Martin, Scientia Professor and Professor of Educational Psychology, UNSW SydneyEmma Burns, ARC DECRA fellow and Senior Lecturer, School of Education, Macquarie UniversityJoel Pearson, Professor of Cognitive Neuroscience, UNSW SydneyRebecca J. Collie, Scientia Associate Professor of Educational Psychology, UNSW Sydney, and Roger Kennett, Researcher in educational neuroscience, UNSW Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Financial stress is on the rise in Australia. Here’s what to do if money worries are affecting your mental health

Maskot/Getty
Nicholas ProcterUniversity of South Australia

Stories about interest rates and cost-of-living often focus on Australians’ hip pockets. But what about the impact on our mental health?

The National Mental Health Commission’s most recent “report card” shows financial stress has taken a significant toll in the last few years.

It found the proportion of people finding it “difficult” or “very difficult” to cope on their income doubled from 17.1% in November 2020 to 34.6% in January 2024. Women consistently reported higher levels of financial stress compared to men.

More people are also delaying seeing a mental health professional due to cost – or not seeing one at all (20.4% in 2023–24, compared to 12% in 2020–21).

But whether you’re experiencing a job loss, struggling with debt, or just worried about day-to-day expenses, it’s important to take your mental health seriously.

Financial stress and mental health

We often focus on the medical aspects of mental health, for example, whether someone has a certain mental health condition such as depression or anxiety.

But broader social factors can also influence our mental health, including access to housing, income, unemployment and food insecurity. These are known as social determinants of health.

These are the things that often feel out of our control – and therefore can make us feel helpless. The report card also found people who experience a high sense of control over their lives declined slightly between 2019 and 2023.

Being able to save and pay off debt is linked to significantly better mental health.

In contrast, having to forgo meals or medicine, or struggling with bills and rent or mortgage payments, is stressful and over time can affect our physical and mental health.

Financial stress can lead some people to develop anxiety or depression, or use alcohol and drugs to cope. If you have a pre-existing mental health condition, it can also make things more challenging.

We also know that rates of suicide are often higher in groups that experience economic disadvantage and financial hardship.

Signs financial stress is taking a toll

Feeling overwhelmed can make it harder to take care of yourself, but it’s important – and will also make it easier to work through your financial situation.

Try taking one step at a time. The first is to take notice of what is happening.

Signs financial stress is affecting your health and/or relationships might include:

  • arguing a lot about money
  • having difficulty sleeping
  • fatigue
  • feeling angry, scared or experiencing mood swings
  • feeling guilty and worried about spending money
  • delaying health care because of the cost.

These are normal responses to money stress. But if they’re not addressed, they may lead to further difficulties.

Understanding your relationship with money

Mental distress can also affect how you deal with your personal finances – and make it harder to get on top of them.

For example, people who have struggled with money in the past – or who grew up in circumstances without much money – may have a difficult relationship with managing finances.

You may have patterns of behaviours – such as frequently spending above your means or borrowing money – that make you more stressed about money. Maybe you cope by avoiding the problem, ignoring emails from banks or not reading bills.

Some people may find it helpful to understand how money is linked to emotional wellbeing. This means getting to know your money and mood patterns.

You might start by keeping a diary of your spending and your mood, considering when you’re more likely to spend and why, what emotions come up, and how best to manage them.

Beyond Blue’s money, financial wellbeing and mental health quiz is another good place to start.

Where else to get help

Beyond Blue and the National Debt Helpline provide a breakdown of what might be causing financial distress and can help you find free financial counselling.

Free online tips and advice about managing your finances and household debt are also available via the government website MoneySmart, or Financial Counselling Australia (a not-for-profit).

For mental health symptoms, such as trouble sleeping or feeling anxious, Medicare Mental Health is a free service that connects you with support services, either via the website or by calling 1800 595 212 (weekdays 8:30am – 5pm). You can also talk to your GP.

Remember, no matter how difficult the situation, it’s never too early – or too late – to get support.

If this article has raised issues for you, or if you’re concerned about someone you know, call Lifeline on 13 11 14.The Conversation

Nicholas Procter, Professor and Chair: Mental Health Nursing, University of South Australia

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Disclaimer: These articles are not intended to provide medical advice, diagnosis or treatment.  Views expressed here do not necessarily reflect those of Pittwater Online News or its staff.

Week One August 2025 (July 28 - August 3)

Manly Warringah Sapphires Opens Team Set for Grand Final at Ken Rosewall Arena

The Manly Warringah Sapphires are charging into the 2025 Netball NSW Premier League Grand Final with momentum, belief, and the backing of a proud netball community behind them.

After a thrilling season filled with elite performances and down-to-the-wire finishes, the Sapphires will take on North Shore United in the Opens Grand Final, held at Ken Rosewall Arena, Sydney Olympic Park, on Sunday, 3 August at 5:00 PM.

The game marks the fourth clash between the two rivals this season, following a tightly contested race for top spot where North Shore United finished as minor premiers, just one point ahead of our Sapphires.

The Sapphires' journey to the Grand Final began with a dominant pre-season HeartKids Cup win in March 2025, setting the tone for a campaign defined by consistency, composure, and collective strength. Despite a mid-season stumble, including a Round 11 loss to Sutherland Stingrays, our Sapphires regrouped and powered through an extra-time Preliminary Final thriller to eliminate the Stingrays and earn their shot at the 2025 title.

Manly Warringah Sapphires Opens HeartKids Cup 2025 Champions.  L-R Sue Gill, Charlotte Craig, Eloise Egan, Mardi Aplin, Audrey Little, Eugenie Little, Kiara Bloor, Mel Clarke, Erin, Chelsea Mann, Latika Tombs (C), Allegra McDonald, Jemma Donoghue. Photo: Clusterpix.

“I think that the belief has certainly been present within the team from the beginning,” said Sapphires Head Coach, Mel Clarke.

“The challenges we have overcome together throughout the season have contributed to the resilience and positive mindset that has driven our momentum leading into the finals series, giving us the confidence to play our best netball on Sunday.”

Head-to-head with North Shore United in 2025:

  • Round 2: NSU 55 def. MW Sapphires 39
  • Round 11: MW Sapphires 48 def. NSU 46
  • Finals Week 1: NSU 51 def. MW Sapphires 50

As the numbers suggest, the Opens Grand Final promises a blockbuster finale between two evenly matched and experienced sides.

“Leading into the Grand Final, we’ve focused on the importance of trusting the work we’ve done throughout the season and the things we can control,” Clarke added.

“It’s about confidence in our preparation and in each other, so we can enjoy the occasion and perform at our best.”

Milestone Year for Sapphire Stalwarts

The 2025 season carries special meaning for three of the Sapphires’ longest-serving contributors:

Latika Tombs (Captain)

Teigan O’Shannassy (NSW Swifts and Sapphires player)

Lisa Eady (Team Manager)

All three are celebrating 10 years with the franchise, with Tombs, Eady, and Clarke having been part of both championship-winning teams in 2017 and 2023. Now, the trio is chasing a third title together - a rare feat in Premier League history.

“This Grand Final is a reflection of the dedication and unity that runs through our entire Manly Warringah netball community,” said Tombs. “Our supporters, especially our MWNA juniors, give us incredible energy and pride every week.”

From Sapphire to Star: Jemma Donoghue Secures 2025 Signing with London Mavericks

In April the Manly Warringah Sapphires were bursting with pride as they announced the permanent replacement signing of homegrown talent, Jemma Donoghue, with the London Mavericks for the 2025 Netball Super League season.

The 2025 Netball Super League season was the twentieth season of the Netball Super League, the elite domestic netball competition in the United Kingdom. Running from 14 March 2025 – 6 July 2025, it is an elite netball league in the United Kingdom. The league is organised by England Netball but features teams based in England, Wales and previously Scotland. 

Jemma Donoghue joined the Mavericks squad as a permanent replacement for Chelsea Blackman following her unfortunate Achilles rupture. In 2023 Jemma signed with Leeds Rhino Netball for the remainder of the English Netball Super League season.

Jemma was born in the UK and moved to Sydney as a youngster, where she played all her netball. Jemma had an alternative path to the top, she wasn’t picked in her local rep teams until the U15 age group. Jemma Donoghue won an Under 20s Premier League title with North Shore United in 2018 before making the move to the Manly Warringah Sapphires. From there she shone and progressed quickly. 

Jemma has been an integral part of the Sapphires family since her junior years, rising through the ranks with grace, determination, and a fierce competitive spirit. Her transition from local hero to international athlete is not only a reflection of her extraordinary talent, but also her relentless work ethic and humble heart — qualities that have made her a much-loved figure in the Sapphires community and beyond.

After an incredible stint as a Training Partner with the NSW Swifts, where she consistently impressed with her athleticism, leadership, and positive influence on and off the court, Jemma has now earned her place on the global stage. Her move to the London Mavericks as a permanent replacement player is a well-deserved opportunity that we know she will embrace wholeheartedly.

“Jemma has always been a shining example of what it means to be a Sapphire — resilient, grounded, and always striving for excellence,” MW Sapphires Opens Head Coach, Mel Clarke. “We’ve watched her grow into a phenomenal athlete and leader, and while we’ll miss her dearly, we are so excited to see her thrive in this next chapter of her journey.”

Jemma Donoghue’s exceptional one-on-one defensive pressure earned her selection as a Giants Netball Training Partner in 2021, 2022, and 2023. She made her debut in the Suncorp Super Netball league as a temporary replacement player, taking the court for the Giants in 2022 and the NSW Swifts in 2024.

As GIANT #25 and Swift #108, Jemma’s advancement to the top tier of netball reflects her dedication, skill, and influence in both teams’ defensive line-ups. It was no surprise to see the Mavericks move swiftly to secure her talents, full-time.

The move also represented an exciting new challenge for Jemma, who competed in one of Europe’s most competitive leagues. Despite the distance, her Sapphires family was cheering her on every step of the way.

''We couldn’t be prouder of Jemma and are confident she will continue to inspire young athletes both here in Australia, and overseas. She remains a beacon for aspiring netballers who dream big and work hard.''

"This opportunity for Jemma is incredibly exciting and such a well-deserved reward for all the hard work and dedication she’s given to the sport over the years. As both her teammate and best friend, I couldn’t be prouder." Latika Tombs, MW Sapphires Captain "Even though her decision to leave brought me to tears, my happiness for her far outweighs the sadness. I miss her both on and off the court… but thank goodness for FaceTime!" 

Sapphires Besties; Jemma Donoghue & Latika Tombs, Vice Captain and Captain

Manly Warringah Sapphires Opens Team 2025

Players
Allegra McDonald; WD | GD | GK
Audrey Little; C | WA
Chelsea Mann; WD | C
Eloise Egan; GK | GD
Eugenie Little; WD | C
Jemma Donoghue - Vice Captain; GD | WD
Kiara Bloor; GA | WA
Latika Tombs - Captain; C | WA | WD
Matisse Letherbarrow; GS | GA
Millie Tonkin; GS | GA
Teigan O'Shannassy; GK | GD

Support Staff
Mel Clarke; Head Coach
Sue Gill; Assistant Coach
Lisa Eady; Manager

Manly Warringah Sapphires Legacy

The Sapphires were launched in 2016 and quickly established themselves as one of the most competitive teams in the league winning the championships in 2017 and more recently in 2023. Several past and present MW Sapphires athletes are now signed with teams in Australia’s top level elite netball competition; the Suncorp Super Netball League.

2016 Sapphires Opens Team at the launch. Photo: A J Guesdon/PON

Under 16's Skye and Izzy with Annie Sargeant OAM at the 2016 MW Sapphires launch. Photo: AJG/PON

The Open and U23 MW Sapphires squad is made up of around 30 local athletes who have decided to pursue netball at an elite level. These athletes dedicate an enormous amount of time as part of these teams, proudly representing Manly Warringah as part of the League.

In 2020, the Sapphires added an Academy to its Program, giving local 15 and 16 year old representative level players, as well as emerging local coaches, the chance to learn from this outstanding program. These young athletes and coaches are mentored by the MW Sapphires, providing further motivation, guidance, and a clear pathway into elite netball.

The MW Sapphires teams enjoy strong support from their dedicated fan base, including junior teams from the Manly Warringah Netball Association. 

The Netball NSW Premier League program plays a crucial role in developing players, umpires, coaches, and technical officials, providing them with valuable experience at an elite level.

This program is also a vital pathway for the Manly Warringah Netball Association, one of the largest associations in NSW.

Grand Final Day Details:

📍 Ken Rosewall Arena, Sydney Olympic Park

📅 Sunday, 3 August 2025

🕑 2:00 PM – 23U Grand Final: GWS Fury v Panthers

🕔 5:00 PM – Opens Grand Final: North Shore United v Manly Warringah Sapphires

🎟️ Tickets: $15 – Available now

Join the Blue Wave

Rep your colours, bring the noise and be part of the electric atmosphere as the Sapphires chase Grand Final glory. With belief, experience and heart on their side, Manly Warringah Sapphires are ready to shine on the Premier League’s biggest stage.

 

Malta to host 2027 Commonwealth Youth Games

Malta is calling for Australia’s next generation of sporting stars after the Mediterranean isle was announced as host of the 2027 Commonwealth Youth Games (CYG) on Thursday 31 July 2025.  

The eighth edition of the Youth Games will take place from 27 October to 4 November 2027, bringing together athletes aged 14–18 from across the Commonwealth for an inspiring celebration of sport and culture.  

With a compelling dual-island concept that features existing world-class facilities, venues will be spread across two main clusters on the islands of Malta and Gozo. 

Approximately 1,150 young athletes will come together for Malta 2027, where the sports program will feature athletics and para-athletics, swimming and para-swimming, water polo, netball, triathlon, sailing, squash and weightlifting.   

The Games will include the largest Para sport program in Youth Games history, with para-swimming added for the first time, building on the landmark inclusion of para-athletics at Trinidad and Tobago 2023.  

Sailing and water polo will also make their debut, in a distinctive eight-sport schedule designed to maximise youth appeal and showcase Malta’s world-class facilities.  

Australia dominated the most recent edition in Trinidad and Tobago in 2023, topping the medal tally with 64 medals, including 26 gold and 62 individual medallists.  

See previous PON reports: 

Commonwealth Youth Games 2023: Local Athletes set to shine in Trinbago - Trinidad

A stunning 64 medals sees Australia atop the medal tally at Trinbago 2023 Youth Commonwealth Games

Commonwealth Games Australia (CGA) President Ben Houston welcomed the announcement of Malta as host and reaffirmed the value of the Youth Games in developing the country’s future sporting champions.  

“The Commonwealth Youth Games play a vital role in developing the next generation of athletes by giving them a unique opportunity to experience international competition in a multi-sport environment,” Houston said. 

“For many, it’s their first taste of representing Australia on the global stage, an experience that can shape their future in sport and beyond.  

“The Commonwealth Youth Games are an important part of our athlete development pathway, and we look forward to seeing Malta 2027 inspire and elevate our emerging talent.” 

Commonwealth Sport President Dr. Donald Rukare hailed Malta’s athlete-first approach, world-class facilities and proven hosting experience as the ideal foundation for a transformative edition of the Commonwealth Youth Games.  

“We are thrilled to bring the Commonwealth Youth Games to Malta in 2027 and thank Commonwealth Sport Malta and the Government of Malta for their commitment and vision,” Rukare said.  

“The Commonwealth Youth Games are more than a captivating celebration of sport; they are a transformative experience for young athletes. Those that compete are the stars of tomorrow and the voices of today, changemakers who will shape the future of our Movement. We look forward to being on the beautiful island of Malta in 2027.”  

The Malta 2027 Commonwealth Youth Games will mark the eighth edition of the event, following previous Games in Edinburgh (2000), Bendigo (2004), Pune (2008), Isle of Man (2011), Samoa (2015), the Bahamas (2017) and Trinidad and Tobago (2023). 

Glasgow 2026 session schedule unveiled

August 1, 2025

In related news, Glasgow 2026 has revealed the session schedule for next year’s Commonwealth Games, with more than 200 champions to be crowned across 50 medal sessions of unforgettable sport spanning 10 days.  

In a history marking celebration of Para sport, Powerlifting gold will be the first medal awarded on day one to showcase the unprecedented commitment of Commonwealth Sport to inclusion. The day then continues with a medal rush across Artistic Gymnastics, Swimming and Para-Swimming.  

An expanded program across several sports creates more sessions and greater opportunities for fans to experience world-class competition.   

Bowls and Para-Bowls will feature throughout all 10 days of the Games, while Basketball 3x3 and Wheelchair Basketball 3x3 will include three additional sessions compared to Birmingham 2022, reflecting the growing popularity of this fast-paced, engaging format.

The pool will debut the biggest swimming program ever featured at a Commonwealth Games, with several historic firsts including the men's 800m freestyle and women's 1500m freestyle making their Commonwealth Games debut.  

The opening weekend of 25-26 July promises show-stopping action as six sports light up Glasgow, including the maiden matches for the Australian Diamonds.  

From Monday 27 July, Athletics and Para-Athletics launch six days of thrilling competition at Scotstoun Stadium. The program features the highly anticipated return of the iconic Commonwealth Mile, back on the schedule for the first time since 1966.  

Swimming and Para-Swimming will conclude their campaigns on Wednesday 29 July, with evening finals promising high-stakes races and unforgettable podium moments.  

Track Cycling and Para-Track Cycling take over the Sir Chris Hoy Velodrome from 30 July, with the elimination race making its Commonwealth Games debut.   

Saturday 1 August then delivers non-stop excitement, with medals contested across Athletics and Para-Athletics (morning and evening sessions), Boxing, Judo, and Track Cycling and Para-Track Cycling.  

The Games conclude on Sunday 2 August with a final day of competition across Netball, Judo and Track Cycling and Para-Track Cycling, bringing 10 days of world-class Commonwealth sport to a thrilling close.  

Craig Phillips AM, CGA CEO, praised the comprehensive schedule and its breadth of competition opportunities.  

"This schedule delivers exactly what we want to see - more sessions, more medals, and more opportunities for our athletes to compete at the highest level and showcase their talents on the global stage," Phillips said. 

"The expanded programs across sports like 3x3 Basketball and the biggest swimming line up in Commonwealth Games history shows Glasgow's commitment to providing a world-class competition experience.  

"The return of iconic events like the Commonwealth Mile, combined with exciting debuts such as the elimination race in track cycling, creates a perfect blend of tradition and innovation and from the opening medal on day one through to the final competition, this schedule promises non-stop action that will captivate audiences and inspire the next generation of Commonwealth athletes.  

"Glasgow 2026 is shaping up to deliver the kind of comprehensive, high-quality competition program that brings out the best in our athletes and creates lasting memories for fans around the world."  

Alongside the session schedule announcement, Glasgow 2026 has launched its first advertising campaign, placing sport and athletes at the heart of the Games and capturing the unique power of Commonwealth competition.  

Rolling out across digital platforms and out of home advertising boards, the campaign channels Glasgow's signature energy, warmth and humour, building excitement for what promises to be an unforgettable celebration of sport across 10 days of world-class competition.  

The Glasgow 2026 Commonwealth Games will take place from 23 July to 2 August 2026. 

A legacy takes root – Commonwealth Games Alumni Recognition Program launched

On Monday July 21 2025 Legacy Leaves, the first-ever alumni recognition program of Commonwealth Games Australia (CGA), was launched as the countdown to the one-year-to-go milestone for Glasgow 2026 fast approached. 

Set to honour the 3605 Australian athletes who have proudly worn the green and gold on the Commonwealth Games stage, the initiative includes athletes who have competed from the inaugural 1930 British Empire Games in Hamilton, Canada to today, and is  planting a native tree for every Games an athlete has participated, to create a living legacy that honours the past while at the same time growing the future. 

The planted trees will form part of an establishing ecological corridor at Wilyun Pools, nestled near the Stirling Ranges in Western Australia that was chosen for its powerful environmental impact and cultural significance. 

It is being delivered in partnership with climate solutions organisation Carbon Neutral, alongside Gondwana Link and Wirlomin Noongar Language and Stories, creating a living legacy that grows over time, rejuvenating land, restoring biodiversity and reconnecting communities. 

“Legacy Leaves recognises greatness in a way that gives back, not only to athletes, but to Country, community and future generations,” Ben Houston, CGA President, said.  

“Instead of giving something, we’re growing something.” 

“Recognition goes beyond simple thanks, it acknowledges the dedication, resilience and achievements of our Commonwealth Games alumni,” Houston added.  

A little under 5,000 trees will be planted in this first phase, symbolising every Games appearance made by an Australian athlete at the Commonwealth Games, with the initiative supporting large-scale landscape restoration, carbon sequestration and critical wildlife habitat growth, CGA states. 

As part of the launch, Birmingham 2022 diving bronze medallist Sam Fricker and four-time gymnastics medallist Emily Whitehead visited the reforested area to see the undertaking at work.  

“As athletes, we’re used to thinking about long-term, growth, progress and legacy,” Fricker said. 

“Seeing the project confirmed that our participation isn’t just about highlighting our past; it’s about the world we leave behind.” 

“A medal celebrates a moment, but this grows with time,” Whitehead said. 

“It connects us to the past, honours our contribution, and plants something real for the future.”   

“Legacy Leaves is an exciting way to celebrate the Games athletes,” two-time Commonwealth Games medallist, Milly Tapper, added. 

“It’s more than just recognition; it’s a powerful reminder that every time we compete, we leave a mark.”  

The planting area, Wilyun Pools, is located 100 kilometres from Albany, Western Australia. Carbon Neutral's webpage for the project states:

Situated on Menang Noongar boodjar near Kinjarling (Albany) on Western Australia’s southern coast, the land has been cherished and nurtured for over 40,000 years. Wilyun Pools, surrounded by Mettler Lake, Basil Road Nature Reserves, and Hassell National Park, serves as a crucial wildlife corridor. The area boasts a rich diversity of birds, mammals, reptiles, and insects, though they face numerous threats.

The project aims to expand and connect habitats by linking patches of remnant vegetation with biodiverse native plantings while carefully managing the threat of feral pests.

It protects habitats for the endangered:

  • Carnaby’s Black Cockatoo (Ngolak)
  • Forest Red-tailed Cockatoo (Karak)
  • Australasian Bittern (Boordenitj)
  • Painted Buttonquail (Boorolom)
  • Jewelled Sandplain Ctenotus

The region’s complex and ancient geology, featuring plains and wetlands, is home to a myriad of biodiverse species. Over 150 native plant varieties, highly adapted to the nutrient-poor soils and climate, have been recorded in the old-growth vegetation. Land clearing in the 1950s and 1960s, destroyed 88% of the area’s native vegetation, leaving fragmented patches of habitat. The Kwongan shrubland plant community here is nationally recognised as a Threatened Ecological Community, and the Flat-Topped Swamp Yate wetlands in low-lying claypans are classified as a Priority Ecological Community in Western Australia.

Once degraded farmland, it is now being transformed into a thriving ecosystem that supports providing a home for endangered wildlife, restoring fragile bushland, and telling stories that stretch back thousands of years. 

“Wilyun Pools is more than just a planting site, it’s a place where culture, sustainability, and now sporting spirit come together,” Dr. Phil Ireland, CEO of Carbon Neutral, said. 

“It’s a living landscape of connection and renewal, where each tree planted represents not only environmental restoration but also the enduring legacy of athletes and community working hand in hand.” 

About Legacy Leaves: 

This program marks the first step in the development of a comprehensive Commonwealth Games alumni recognition program, designed to honour the past, celebrate the present and build stronger connections for the future. 

The Legacy Leaves Alumni Recognition Program recognises Australian athletes who have proudly represented the nation at the Commonwealth Games and its historical iterations, including and limited to the British Empire Games, British Empire and Commonwealth Games and British Commonwealth Games from 1930 to present day. 

Recognition is based on the best available data and historical records, which CGA commits to refining continuously to ensure inclusivity, accuracy and comprehensive acknowledgment of all eligible athletes. 

Recognition is granted per Games attended, reflecting participation in each eligible edition.   

Alumni will receive a personalised communication acknowledging their contribution and recognition within the program.  

About Carbon Neutral: 

Carbon Neutral has grown to be a market leader with a global reputation, and is now one of the longest standing carbon offset providers in Australia.

Carbon Neutral is one of Australia’s longest-standing environmental organisations, specialising in nature-based solutions to mitigate carbon emissions and protect native ecosystems.   

Through its Plant-a-Tree program, Carbon Neutral restores native biodiversity, rejuvenates degraded landscapes through large-scale planting initiatives across Australia.   

With over two decades of experience, Carbon Neutral states it partners with businesses and communities to drive measurable and lasting environmental impact. 

Diamonds squad named for 2025-2026

With just one year to go until the Diamonds launch their gold medal defence at the Commonwealth Games, Netball Australia unveiled the 2025–26 Origin Australian Diamonds squad on July 17, an exciting mix of proven champions and rising stars.

The squad announcement follows an impressive 2025 Suncorp Super Netball season, with selectors rewarding both consistency and impact across the league.

With just one year to go until the Diamonds begin their gold medal defence at Glasgow 2026, the squad blends world-class experience with emerging talent eager to make their mark.

Nine athletes named were part of Australia’s triumphant Birmingham 2022 campaign that saw the Diamond’s atop the podium, including current captain Liz Watson and vice-captain Paige Hadley.

They’re joined by stalwarts Kiera Austin, Courtney Bruce, Sunday Aryang, Sarah Klau, Cara Koenen, Kate Moloney and Jo Weston, bringing invaluable leadership and composure to the group.

The squad also includes three new Diamonds elevated from invitee status following recent impressive domestic performances, all of whom have the potential to debut, while four invitee athletes have also been included.

Their inclusion reflects the healthy depth within Australian netball and the Diamonds’ commitment to building a team with versatility and long-term strength, providing targeted players with opportunities to showcase their capabilities within the Diamonds environment.

Led by head coach Stacey Marinkovich and national selectors Anne Sargeant OAM and Michelle Wilkins, the Diamonds squad will come together in the lead-up to the Constellation Cup and other international fixtures.

While selection in the squad does not guarantee match play, it provides athletes with critical opportunities to push for final selection for Glasgow 2026.

The 2025 South Africa Series will take place from 4 October to 12 October, with matches played in Bendigo, Wollongong and Adelaide.

The team will then take on traditional rivals, the New Zealand Silver Ferns, in the 15th edition of the Constellation Cup, with the first two of four matches on Friday 17 and Wednesday 22 October, in Melbourne and Sydney respectively.

The final two matches of the series will then be played across the Tasman in New Zealand on 26 and 29 October.

2025 - 2026 ORIGIN AUSTRALIAN DIAMONDS SQUAD

Sunday Aryang (West Coast Fever/ Western Australia)

Kiera Austin (Melbourne Vixens/ New South Wales)

Courtney Bruce (Sunshine Coast Lightning/ Western Australia)

Sophie Dwyer (Giants Netball/ New South Wales)

Ashleigh Ervin (Sunshine Coast Lightning/ Queensland)

Sophie Garbin (Melbourne Vixens/ Western Australia)

Matilda Garrett (Adelaide Thunderbirds/ Victoria)

Paige Hadley (NSW Swifts/ New South Wales)

Georgie Horjus (Adelaide Thunderbirds/ South Australia)

Sarah Klau (NSW Swifts/ South Australia)

Cara Koenen (Sunshine Coast Lightning/ Queensland)

Kate Moloney (Melbourne Vixens/ Victoria)

Hannah Mundy (Melbourne Vixens/ Victoria)

Amy Parmenter (Melbourne Mavericks/ New South Wales)

Jamie-Lee Price (Giants Netball/ New South Wales)

Alice Teague-Neeld (West Coast Fever/ Victoria)

Liz Watson (Sunshine Coast Lightning/ Victoria)

Joanna Weston (Melbourne Vixens/ Victoria)

2025 - 2026 INVITEES

Lucy Austin (Adelaide Thunderbirds/ South Australia)

Teigan O’Shannassy (NSW Swifts /New South Wales)

Amy Sligar (Giants Netball/ New South Wales)

Donnell Wallam (Northern Mystics/Western Australia)

Broken Section: the story of Pittwater's anti-submarine boom net

by Pittwater Pathways

Opportunities:

Young Filmmakers Comp turns 21

The highly anticipated Beaches Young Filmmakers Comp 2025 is back, now in its 21st year, offering a golden opportunity for budding filmmakers to showcase their talents and creativity.

This exciting competition invites individuals or teams to produce a short film of up to 7 minutes, integrating secret inclusions—a mystery item, keyword, and phrase—that will be revealed on the council's website at 5 pm on Wednesday, 27 August.

Participants will have four days to bring their vision to life and submit their entries by 10 pm on Sunday, 31 August 2025.

With a total prize pool of $3000 and various industry prizes, aspiring filmmakers will also have the chance to see their films screened at the prestigious Finals and Awards Night on Thursday, 18 September at HOYTS Warringah Mall. Family, friends, and the public are invited to attend and celebrate the creative achievements of these emerging filmmakers.

Mayor Sue Heins expressed her enthusiasm for the competition and encouraged young filmmakers to take part.

"Beaches Young Filmmakers Comp is a wonderful way to learn the craft of filmmaking while having fun, picking up new skills and meeting like-minded people.

"If you’ve ever thought about making a short film, even if you have never done it before, why not enter? You never know where it may lead," said Mayor Heins.

Teams can consist of 1 to 12 members, aged between 12 and 24 years, with at least one member living, working, or studying on the Manly to Palm Beach peninsula.

The council stated it extends its heartfelt thanks to premium sponsor and long-time supporter, now for the thirteenth year, Miller Tripods, for their unwavering support, along with huge thanks to Screenwise and Canon for also being premium sponsors. Further thanks go to Australian Cinematography Society for their generous sponsorship of this year's competition.

Finalists’ films will be showcased on the council’s website following the Finals and Awards Night, providing further exposure for the talented young filmmakers.

Prize money is funded through entry fees, final night ticket sales and sponsorship.

Underwater Photography Contest returns

Council is holding its annual Underwater Photography competition from Thursday 24 July to Sunday 18 August 2025.

The 2025 theme Wonder, sustaining what sustains us aligns with the Worlds Ocean Day theme and gives photographers the opportunity to showcase the Northern Beaches 5 aquatic reserves and be in the running for part of the $4,000 prize pool.

With 80 km of iconic coastline featuring 24 ocean and harbour beaches, five aquatic reserves, and 5 intertidal protected areas—including nationally and globally recognised surfing reserves—photographers are truly spoilt for choice when deciding where to capture the perfect shot.

Mayor Sue Heins said, “Our coastline is home to an extraordinary array of marine life, from delicate seagrass meadows to majestic sea creatures. Each photograph taken helps tell the story of this precious underwater world and the urgent need to protect it for future generations.”

The competition celebrates all skill levels and is open to amateur and professional photographers and videographers.

“I encourage everyone, whether you’re a seasoned photographer or just starting out, to grab your camera, dive in, and capture the wonder that lies beneath our waves. Every image you share inspires greater understanding and appreciation for the ocean that sustains us all.” Mayor Heins said.

With 8 categories including a major award - The Valerie Taylor Underwater Photography Award for Excellence, entrants can enter up to 3 images. Videographers can submit one reel.

Categories:

  • Behaviour: Capturing natural behaviour of marine life.
  • Macro: Getting up close to the subject matter.
  • Threatened Species: Portraying the vulnerability of a threatened species found, for example: black rod cod, grey nurse shark, green turtle.
  •  Human Connection: Capturing the positive or negative connection between a person(s) and marine life (flora / fauna / megafauna). This could include monitoring citizen science projects or research undertaken in one of the Northern Beaches aquatic reserves.
  • Seascapes (wide angle): Capturing the raw beauty of the underwater vista in one of the Northern Beaches aquatic reserves.
  • Youth: For the budding young photographers aged 12 to 17 years old. The winner will be recognised as the Underwater Youth Photographer of the Year 2025.
  • Reels: Capturing the wonder of the biodiversity in our underwater world. Reel length is 15 to 30 seconds duration.
  • People’s Choice Award: Everyone can vote online for their favourite finalist image.

The People’s Choice voting opens Thursday 28 August and runs through to Sunday 21 September with winners announced in November.

For more information about the competition and the full terms and conditions, visit council's website.

Take the Polar Plunge 2025

We're freezin’ for a reason! Take the Polar Plunge and support Special Olympics Australia. Your help empowers athletes with intellectual disabilities and/or autism, giving them the chance to play, shine, and thrive—on and off the field.

Entry Donation: $25 per person - Participants must be aged 12 or over on the day of the Polar Plunge.

Event Details
Sunday, August 3, 2025
Dee Why Rock Pool
Registration/Check-in: 8.15am, Torch Run: 8:45am, Polar Plunge: 9am

Sign up at: include.specialolympics.com.au/event/pp-dee-why-25

Open Mic at Palm Beach

Come on down this Sunday from 2–5pm for our Open Mic Afternoon — happening every last Sunday of the month!

Show off your talent, enjoy great vibes, and be part of a supportive local music scene. Don’t miss it!

Club Palm Beach

More places available in innovative jobs program for women

Applications are now open for the 2025 Future Women (FW) Jobs Academy – an innovative pre-employment initiative designed to help women overcome career challenges and connect them with employers.

The NSW Government invested $5.8 million as part of an election promise to support 1,000 women to be part of FW Jobs Academy.

The program is already showing results with nearly 75 per cent of the 2024 participants now actively looking for work or applying for further study, and 85 per cent reporting they now feel well-equipped to search for work.

Flexible, free and online, FW Jobs Academy is a year-long program that equips women with the skills, networks and confidence they need to re-enter the workforce following a career break. The program offers a curated mix of learning, mentoring and community to assist participants navigate evolving job search tools, employer expectations and workplace environments.

The NSW Government is focused on supporting women who face intersecting barriers to securing employment and career progression through FW Jobs Academy. This includes women from the following communities:

  • Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander women, who are prioritised and accepted on an ‘if not why not’ basis
  • women from culturally diverse backgrounds
  • women living with disability
  • women living in regional, rural or remote areas.

Jobs Academy is delivered by FW (formerly Future Women), an Australian-based organisation that was founded in NSW. FW’s programs help women succeed in finding work, building their careers and securing their economic futures. Since launching in 2021, the Jobs Academy program has helped thousands of women to return to work and thrive.

The 2025 program will commence in early August 2025. For more information and to apply, visit the Future Women Jobs Academy web page.

Minister for Women Jodie Harrison said:

“FW Jobs Academy is solving two challenges simultaneously. Helping NSW women overcome the barriers they face in finding meaningful work and achieving financial security and, at the same time, helping employers access an untapped talent pool.

“By supporting more New South Wales women to return to work, the Minns Government is not only empowering women to succeed but addressing critical skills gaps in industries that will drive the future prosperity of our state.

“FW Jobs Academy is helping to unlock the full potential of NSW’s skilled workforce, boosting women’s workforce participation and securing their economic futures.”

FW Managing Director and co-founder of FW Jobs Academy Helen McCabe said:   

“Hundreds of thousands of Australian women would like to return to work but can face multiple and intersecting barriers to paid employment.

“Jobs Academy works because we recognise women as experts in their own lives and, with their input, we’re providing the right balance of education, empowerment and connection to achieve real results.”

FW Deputy Managing and co-founder of FW Jobs Academy Jamila Rizvi said:  

“As Australia faces skills shortages in a variety of occupations, FW Jobs Academy offers a practical pathway for women to be part of the solution.

“Having already supported thousands of women to re-enter the workforce or undertake further study, FW Jobs Academy is boosting workforce participation and productivity, as well as addressing skills shortages and helping families make ends meet.”

Financial help for young people

Concessions and financial support for young people.

Includes:

  • You could receive payments and services from Centrelink: Use the payment and services finder to check what support you could receive.
  • Apply for a concession Opal card for students: Receive a reduced fare when travelling on public transport.
  • Financial support for students: Get financial help whilst studying or training.
  • Youth Development Scholarships: Successful applicants will receive $1000 to help with school expenses and support services.
  • Tertiary Access Payment for students: The Tertiary Access Payment can help you with the costs of moving to undertake tertiary study.
  • Relocation scholarship: A once a year payment if you get ABSTUDY or Youth Allowance if you move to or from a regional or remote area for higher education study.
  • Get help finding a place to live and paying your rent: Rent Choice Youth helps young people aged 16 to 24 years to rent a home.

Visit: https://www.nsw.gov.au/living-nsw/young-people/young-people-financial-help

School Leavers Support

Explore the School Leavers Information Kit (SLIK) as your guide to education, training and work options in 2022;
As you prepare to finish your final year of school, the next phase of your journey will be full of interesting and exciting opportunities. You will discover new passions and develop new skills and knowledge.

We know that this transition can sometimes be challenging. With changes to the education and workforce landscape, you might be wondering if your planned decisions are still a good option or what new alternatives are available and how to pursue them.

There are lots of options for education, training and work in 2022 to help you further your career. This information kit has been designed to help you understand what those options might be and assist you to choose the right one for you. Including:
  • Download or explore the SLIK here to help guide Your Career.
  • School Leavers Information Kit (PDF 5.2MB).
  • School Leavers Information Kit (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • The SLIK has also been translated into additional languages.
  • Download our information booklets if you are rural, regional and remote, Aboriginal or Torres Strait Islander, or living with disability.
  • Support for Regional, Rural and Remote School Leavers (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for Regional, Rural and Remote School Leavers (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • Support for Aboriginal and/or Torres Strait Islander School Leavers (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for Aboriginal and/or Torres Strait Islander School Leavers (DOCX 1.1MB).
  • Support for School Leavers with Disability (PDF 2MB).
  • Support for School Leavers with Disability (DOCX 0.9MB).
  • Download the Parents and Guardian’s Guide for School Leavers, which summarises the resources and information available to help you explore all the education, training, and work options available to your young person.

School Leavers Information Service

Are you aged between 15 and 24 and looking for career guidance?

Call 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337).

SMS 'SLIS2022' to 0429 009 435.

Our information officers will help you:
  • navigate the School Leavers Information Kit (SLIK),
  • access and use the Your Career website and tools; and
  • find relevant support services if needed.
You may also be referred to a qualified career practitioner for a 45-minute personalised career guidance session. Our career practitioners will provide information, advice and assistance relating to a wide range of matters, such as career planning and management, training and studying, and looking for work.

You can call to book your session on 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337) Monday to Friday, from 9am to 7pm (AEST). Sessions with a career practitioner can be booked from Monday to Friday, 9am to 7pm.

This is a free service, however minimal call/text costs may apply.

Call 1800 CAREER (1800 227 337) or SMS SLIS2022 to 0429 009 435 to start a conversation about how the tools in Your Career can help you or to book a free session with a career practitioner.

All downloads and more available at: www.yourcareer.gov.au/school-leavers-support

Word Of The Week: Warble

Word of the Week remains a keynote in 2025, simply to throw some disruption in amongst the 'yeah-nah' mix. 

Noun

1. a warbling sound or utterance.

Verb

1. (of a bird) sing softly and with a succession of constantly changing notes.

From: late 14c., in reference to a trumpet, from Old North French werbler "to sing with trills and quavers" (Old French guerbler, guerbloiier), from Frankish werbilon (cognate with Old High German wirbil "whirlwind," German Wirbel "whirl, whirlpool, tuning peg, vertebra," Middle Dutch wervelen "to turn, whirl"); see whirl (v.). Transitive sense is from 1570s. Related: Warbled; warbling. The noun, "a stream of clear, rapid, gliding, melodious tones" is recorded from late 14c.

Compare Gabble

Verb: talk rapidly and unintelligibly.

Noun: rapid unintelligible talk.

The word "gabble" is connected to geese through the collective noun "gaggle". A gaggle refers to a group of geese, especially when they are on land and being noisy. The term "gaggle" is also related to the Middle English word for "cackle", reflecting the loud, often disorderly, sounds geese make.

From: late 16th century: from Dutch gabbelen, of imitative origin.

The word "goose" is a direct descendant of Proto-Indo-European ǵhéns. In Germanic languages, the word-root gave us Old English gōs with the plural gēs and gandra (becoming Modern English goose, geese, gander, respectively), West Frisian goes, gies and guoske, Dutch: gans, ganzen, ganzerik, New High German Gans, Gänse, and Ganter, and Old Norse gás and gæslingr, whence English gosling came from

This term also gave Lithuanian: žąsìs, Irish: gé (goose, from Old Irish: géiss), Hindi: hans, Latin: anser, Spanish and Portuguese: ganso, Ancient Greek: khēn, Albanian: gatë (swans), Finnish: hanhi, Avestan: zāō, Polish: gęś, Romanian: gâscă / gânsac, Ukrainian: гуска / гусак (huska / husak), Russian: гусыня / гусь (gusyna / gus), Czech: husa, and Persian: ghāz.

Goose fossils have been found ranging from 10 to 12 million years ago (Middle Miocene). Garganornis ballmanni from Late Miocene (~ 6–9 Ma) of Gargano region of central Italy, stood one and a half meters tall and weighed about 22 kilograms. The evidence suggests the bird was flightless, unlike modern geese. Most goose species are migratory, though populations of Canada geese living near human developments may remain in a locality year-round.

Photo: Barnacle geese (Branta leucopsis) in Naantali, Finland. Photo by Diana Ringo

Compare gab(verb) "talk much," 1786, probably via Scottish and northern England dialect from earlier sense "speak foolishly; talk indiscreetly" (late 14c.), from gabben "to scoff, jeer; mock (someone), ridicule; reproach (oneself)," also "to lie to" (late 13c.), from a Scandinavian source, such as Old Norse gabba "to mock, make fun of," and probably in part from Old French gaber "to mock, jest; brag, boast," which, too, is from Scandinavian. Ultimately perhaps imitative (compare gabble, which might have shaded the sense of this word). Gabber was Middle English for "liar, deceiver; mocker."

In northern English folklore, the cries of migrating geese are associated with "Gabriel Ratchets," which are believed to be a spectral pack of hounds or a harbinger of hard times. This belief stems from the sound of geese flying overhead, which was likened to the baying of dogs. The term "Gabriel" is related to the sound of the geese's calls, while "Ratchets" refers to a hunting dog. Others state the name "Gabriel" may be connected to the "gabble" sound of the geese, or the medieval word for corpse, "gabbe". "Ratchets" is believed to be derived from the Old English word "ræcc," which means a hunting dog.

Rache also spelled racch, rach, and ratch, from Old English ræcc, linked to Old Norse rakkí, is an obsolete name for a type of hunting dog used in Great Britain in the Middle Ages. It was a scenthound used in a pack to run down and kill 'game'.

In Great Britain, they may have included the now-extinct North Country Beagle and Southern Hound, and some paintings of them show them to be Greyhounds alongside Bloodhounds. As styles of hunting changed, and the Bloodhound fell out of use, packs were normally employed on their own to hunt all quarry. Though their name became obsolete, raches must have continued in this use. We may assume that it was from them, rather than the Bloodhound, that the various breeds of pack hounds such as the English Foxhound, English Staghound, Harrier and Beagle were developed. It is apparent that in the 16th and 17th centuries there was a good deal of regional variation in sizes and types of scenthound, from which the prospective Master of Hounds could mix and match to form his pack. - Markham, Gervaise (1615). Country Contentments or The Husbandman's Recreations.

Drawing 1st published in Gessner's Historiae Animalium in the 16th C. This is from 17th C copy. Edward Topsell's History of Four Footed

How poetry can help to fight polarisation and misinformation

Drazen Zigic/Shutterstock
Alex HubbardAberystwyth University

People are becoming more divided and ill informed. In January 2024, a report by the World Economic Forum identified misinformation and disinformation as “the most severe global risk anticipated over the next two years”.

As a result, it predicted “perceptions of reality are likely to also become polarised” – and that unrest resulting from unreliable information may cause “violent protests … hate crimes … civil confrontation and terrorism”. Many people would agree that something is needed to bridge the ever-widening gaps between ourselves.

In my view, this is not just a problem of alternative sets of facts, but a failure to perceive and empathise with that which is outside of our own experiences.

While the smartphone, with its capacity to provide users with sources from across the world, can provide endless opportunity to learn about other perspectives and experiences, research suggests social media increasingly cocoons users within their own interests.

This algorithmically encouraged self-importance means we are stuck in a feedback loop – the echo chamber – where our own experiences, values and desires are seen as the norm.

In contrast, by encouraging people to imagine beyond their own experience, reading poetry can serve as an exercise in seeing things from a different perspective.

Poetry has always been political. The writer and civil-rights activist Audre Lorde argued it produces “a revelatory distillation of experience”. In other words, by distilling aspects of an experience, poetry can reveal powerful truths about reality.

Lorde’s poem Afterimages (1981) records her memory of turning 21 in the same year that 14-year-old Emmett Till was lynched in Mississippi. The poem’s revelation is a simple one. For black Americans, coming of age means coming to terms with the constant threat of extreme racial violence.

Poetry’s success often relies upon showing people aspects of the world which they might otherwise have ignored, repressed or simply missed.

Some poetry experiments with form itself to produce this revelatory effect. Estate Fragments (2014) is a long poem written by Gavin Goodwin, exploring the Bettws council estate in Newport. It juxtaposes quotations from academic writing alongside interviews with residents – a practice referred to as “found poetry”.

Goodwin attempts to consider the effect that seemingly abstract political decision-making and discussions have on a particular place and community. Take this stanza:

Increased inequality

ups the stakes

‘People that were younger than you

were more dangerous.’

The first two lines quote Common Culture by Paul Willis (1990), a sociological study in the cultures of young people. The latter are from an interview with a resident of the Bettws estate. Together, they tell a story: national economic inequality causes people in a working-class community to fear each other.

Looking closer and looking deeper

More conventional lyric poetry can still reveal sociopolitical realities. Canadian Métis Nation writer katherena vermette’s collection North End Love Songs (2012) explores the North End in Winnipeg, Canada. In a CBC interview, vermette discussed how the local community are:

The people that get picked on [and] blamed … but what I’m trying to do in my work is to go into looking closer and looking deeper … and seeing that they’re not what they seem.

Misinformation and polarisation cause social tension, as particular groups are generalised and blamed. Vermette’s poem indians explicitly explores the devastation caused by preconceptions of peoples and places.

Red River at sunset
Red River in Winnipeg. Teng Guan/Shutterstock

The poem recalls vermette’s brother going missing, before being found in the Red River, a powerful body of water that moves through Winnipeg. It focuses on the apathy of Winnipeg’s police service, who tell the family that there is “no sense looking”, as the man will return when “he gets bored/or broke”. The authorities come to this conclusion not through investigation, but by reducing the speaker’s brother to racist stereotypes.

This is then contrasted with what the family “finds out”. Not only has the brother drowned, but the “land floods/with dead indians”. The speaker discovers the fate of her brother is also the fate of many other Métis people in Winnipeg. This personal experience of loss comes to speak for many other loses:

indians get drunk

don’t we know it?

do stupid things

like being young

like going home alone

like walking across a frozen river

not quite frozen

Vermette links grief to struggles against systematic apathy and oppression. The poem’s sense of politics, people and place are a central part of its poetics.

Audre Lorde looking pensive
Audre Lorde in 1980. Wiki CommonsCC BY

Such explicitness means the poem meaningfully connects to important political issues – drawing attention to the startlingly high number of missing people found and suspected to be in the Red River. As such, it can also link to important grassroots initiatives like Drag the Red, which aims to “find answers about missing loved ones” which might lie in the river.

While North End Love Songs was published two years before Drag the Red’s formation, the poem and initiative are clearly formed by the same kind of traumatic, sociopolitical events.

Newsfeeds increasingly silo us into comfortable ways of thinking and perceiving. Forty years on, Lorde’s declaration that poetry “is not a luxury” takes on a whole new meaning. Now, it might be a political necessity.


Get your news from actual experts, straight to your inbox. Sign up to our daily newsletter to receive all The Conversation UK’s latest coverage of news and research, from politics and business to the arts and sciences.The Conversation

Alex Hubbard, Associate lecturer in English Literature and Creative Writing, Aberystwyth University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

‘Fibremaxxing’ is trending – here’s why that could be a problem

Soluble fibre. Towfiqu ahamed barbhuiya/Shutterstock.com
Lewis MattinUniversity of Westminster

You need fibre. That much is true. But in the world of online health trends, what started out as sound dietary advice has spiralled into “fibremaxxing” – a push to consume eye-watering amounts in the name of wellness.

In the UK, NHS guidelines suggest that an adult should consume at least 30g of fibre a day. Children and teens typically need much less.

Yet despite clear guidelines, most Britons fall short of their daily fibre target. One major culprit? The rise of ultra-processed foods, or UPFs. UK adults now get over 54% of their daily calories from ultra-processed foods. For teenagers, it’s nearer 66%.

This matters because UPFs are typically low in fibre and micronutrients, while being high in sugar, salt and unhealthy fats. When these foods dominate our plate, naturally fibre-rich whole foods get pushed out.

Studies show that as ultra-processed food intake increases, fibre consumption decreases, along with other essential nutrients. The result is a population falling well short of its daily fibre target.

Dietary fibre is essential for good health as part of a balanced diet. And it is best found in natural plant-based foods.

Adding high fibre foods to your meals and snacks throughout a typical day, such as switching to wholegrain bread for breakfast, keeping the skin on fruits like an apple, adding lentils and onions to a chilli evening meal and eating a handful of pumpkin seeds or Brazil nuts between meals, would help an average person hit their 30g-a-day dietary requirements.

Displacement

With fibremaxxing, what might make this trend somewhat dangerous is the removal of other food groups such as proteins, carbohydrates and fats and replacing them with fibre-dense foods, supplements or powder. This is where the potential risk could mitigate the benefits of increasing fibre, as no robust studies in humans – as far as I’m aware – have been conducted on long-term fibre intakes over 40g a day. (Some advocates of fibremaxxing suggest consuming between 50 and 100g a day.)

Eating too much fibre too quickly – especially without enough water – can lead to bloating, cramping and constipation. It can also cause a buildup of gas that can escape at the most inconvenient moments, like during a daily commute.

Commuters looking suspiciously at someone off-camera.
Someone’s been fibremaxxing. William Perugini/Shutterstock.com

Rapidly increasing fibre intake or consuming too much can interfere with the absorption of essential micronutrients like iron, which supports normal body function, as well as macronutrients, which provide the energy needed for movement, repair and adaptation.

However, it’s important to remember that increasing fibre in your diet offers a wide range of health benefits. It supports a healthy digestive system by promoting regular bowel movements and reducing the occurrence of inflammatory bowel disease.

Soluble fibre helps to regulate blood sugar levels by slowing the absorption of glucose, making it especially helpful for people at risk of type 2 diabetes. It also lowers LDL (bad) cholesterol, reducing the risk of heart disease. Fibre keeps you feeling full for longer, which supports healthy weight management and appetite regulation. These findings are all well documented.

Additionally, a high-fibre diet has been linked to a lower risk of certain cancers, particularly colon cancer, by helping to remove toxins efficiently from the body. Gradually increasing fibre intake to recommended levels – through a balanced, varied diet – can offer real health benefits.

Given the evidence, it’s clear that many of us could benefit from eating more fibre – but within reason.

Until we know more, it’s safest to stick to fibre intake within current guidelines, and get it from natural sources rather than powders or supplements. Fibre is vital, but more isn’t always better. Skip the social media fads and aim for balance: whole grains, veg, nuts and seeds. Your gut – and your fellow commuters – will thank you.The Conversation

Lewis Mattin, Senior Lecturer, Life Sciences, University of Westminster

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

6 simple questions to tell if a ‘finfluencer’ is more flash than cash

Oleg Golovnev/Shutterstock
Dimitrios SalampasisSwinburne University of Technology

Images of flashy sports cars. Lavish lifestyle shots. These are just some of the red flags consumers should watch out for when they turn to social media for financial advice.

Consumers should not believe everything they see on Instagram, TikTok or YouTube from the growing numbers of “finfluencers” – content creators who build their audience by giving out financial advice.

The regulator responsible for financial products and advice, the Australian Securities and Investments Commission (ASIC), has issued warning notices to 18 social media finfluencers. ASIC said it suspects they have broken the law by promoting high-risk financial products or providing unlicensed financial advice. ASIC did not name them.

So, why is regulated financial advice important and what are some of the common practices finfluencers use to attract followers and customers?

Financial advice rules explained

Australian Financial Services laws are designed to protect consumers and investors, while promoting the integrity of financial markets. It is both unethical and illegal to promote financial products without proper authorisation.

In Australia, it is an offence under the Corporations Act to provide financial advice without an Australian Financial Services licence. Penalties include up to five years’ imprisonment or fines of A$1 million or more.

ASIC issued a similar warning to online finfluencers in 2022. Since then, the number of social media posts by unauthorised finfluencers have substantially reduced.

Many finfluencers became licensed or authorised representatives of a licensee, along with being more diligent about what they were posting online. Natasha Etschmann, with 300,000 Instagram and TikTok followers at @TashInvests, became licensed immediately after the 2022 warning.

Some other finfluencers were arrested, issued fines or ordered to take down their websites.

High-risk products

However, some finfluencers who style themselves as “trading experts” continue to provide unauthorised financial advice, usually for a fee or commission. They promote high-risk, complex investment products that can cause consumers substantial harm.

These products include contracts-for-difference and over-the-counter derivative products that do not trade on an exchange. ASIC says its current concerns lie with these content creators:

Their social media content is often accompanied by misleading or deceptive representations about the prospects of success from the products or trading strategies they promote, sharing images of lavish lifestyles, sports cars and other luxury goods.

What to watch on socials

About 41% of young Australians aged 18 to 30 look online for financial information or advice.

While budgeting tips can be helpful, it’s important to be extra careful with online financial advice. Consumers should not believe everything they see on social media.

Conducting due diligence and checking finfluencers’ credentials on ASIC’s Professional Registers search tool is crucial. Choose expert and licensed finfluencers rather than accounts with large followings and exaggerated or misleading claims. Popularity does not always mean credibility.

There are certain red flags to watch out for. Some finfluencers use pseudonyms. They promote “exclusive” financial advice content and access to “invitation-only” online communities for a fee. In many cases, they lack credible experience or certified financial planning training to provide financial advice.

Your finfluencer vetting toolkit

When choosing to follow or acquire the services of a finfluencer, ask:

  1. is this finfluencer licensed or authorised?

  2. how realistic are the promised financial outcomes? Are they too good to be true?

  3. does the finfluencer disclose their personal financial position or investments when discussing financial products or strategies?

  4. are they transparent about their track record of accuracy or accountability?

  5. do they address publicly a case when their audience lost money from a strategy they recommended?

  6. does the finfluencer tailor content to different investment risk profiles or financial maturity levels in their audiences?

Are you being sold a dream?

Social media finfluencer content can often come with misleading or deceptive representations (such as the sports cars and luxury goods that ASIC has warned about). Content may overstate the prospects of success and potential profits.

Some – usually unlicensed – finfluencers use social media content as “proof” of their financial expertise. One common practice is to try to lure consumers by creating a hyped world around their own personal lifestyle. Many finfluencers often extend invitations to consumers to join closed forums to “learn” their hidden secrets to success or copy their “famous” trading practices.

These finfluencers usually try to convince consumers they can achieve a similar lifestyle by following their advice.

Finfluencers are global

ASIC issued the warnings as part of a recent global week of action. ASIC and eight regulators from the United Kingdom, United Arab Emirates, Italy, Hong Kong and Canada took coordinated action to disrupt unlawful finfluencer activity.
The global campaign aims to raise awareness about unlawful finfluencer activity, protect consumers, and prevent them from investing after encountering misleading content.

Consumers need to distinguish between credible financial advice and self-serving or misleading content before trusting their money to anyone.

Spotted unlicensed influencer activity? Report this misconduct to ASIC.The Conversation

Dimitrios Salampasis, Associate Professor, Emerging Technologies and FinTech | FinTech Capability Lead, Swinburne University of Technology

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

‘Provocative in a good way’: John Hirst was a rigorous historian, independent thinker and passionate believer in Australia

Convict gang, Sydney – Augustus Earle (1830) Public domain, via Wikimedia Commons
Anna ClarkUniversity of Technology Sydney

I first read John Hirst (1942-2016) as an undergraduate in the late 1990s as part of a subject on 19th-century Australian history. We discussed convict history and explored contrasting views about its role and function in the early colonies. What was life as a convict like? Was transportation a cruel punishment or a ticket to a better future? Could we compare the convict system to slavery?

Hirst’s Convict Society and Its Enemies was one of our required readings and I studied it with interest.


Review: John Hirst: Selected Writings – edited by Chris Feik (Black Inc.)


I had devoured Robert Hughes’s The Fatal Shore the previous summer and had been powerfully swayed by his descriptions of visceral cruelty in the penal colony. There were convicts who rubbed lime in their own eyes because blindness was preferable to working in the kilns. Others were whipped until flesh hung in strips from their backs and collapsed on treadmills from exhaustion.

Hirst demurred. Yes, there was violence, he agreed, but England was a violent place in the late 18th and early 19th centuries. Rather than judge, historians must understand the broader context of that world. Comparing convicts to slaves overlooked historical evidence that pointed to the relative freedom convicts enjoyed in colonial society.

Due to the dire shortage of labour, for example, convicts were able to control aspects of their own lives, working on their daily tasks for the state in the morning and then having their “own time” after the day’s work was done. This not only facilitated considerable freedom for convicts, but also their power in the fledgling society.

Following their sentences, convicts were free to own property and, from 1842, even to vote and stand for the New South Wales Legislative Council. Critically, the children of convicts were all born free, not into servitude.

Impact and legacy

The central arguments of Convict Society and Its Enemies are reproduced in an essay included in this posthumous collection of Hirst’s writings, edited by Chris Feik. The book catalogues some of Hirst’s major contributions to Australian historiography, spanning 50 years of scholarship from the mid 1970s.

How Did a Penal Colony Change Peacefully into a Democracy? is classic Hirst. The prose is crisp and succinct, avoiding jargon and calmly outlining the logic of its contention, drawn from a deep reading of the sources. Hirst critiques what he sees as convict research motivated by ideology rather than the evidence of this period in Australia’s past. In doing so, he sets himself apart from historians who viewed the convicts as victims of a brutal, dehumanising system.

Selected Writings also includes short personal reflections from a fellow historian, a former student, and a colleague, which help frame the impact and legacy of Hirst’s work. His intellectual independence is noted by each of the three contributors.

“Hirst prided himself on his resistance to the current of fashionable opinion,” notes Frank Bongiorno, “and he was above all else a fiercely independent individual.” This wasn’t about being contrary, adds Alex McDermott, but a process of applying the same critical analysis to the field as he did to his primary sources. Hirst “viewed his project as more than mere provocation”. He was both a passionate believer in Australia, as well as a fiercely independent voice, writes Robert Manne.

Bongiorno, McDermott and Manne all emphasise Hirst’s personal generosity and commitment to teaching and the profession – he was clearly loved by generations of students. Upon the book’s release, I was struck by comments on social media and at conferences from colleagues and former students who remembered acts of kindness that accompanied Hirst’s rigorous commitment to debate.

This collection feels like a faithful reflection of that contribution to Australian history.

John Hirst had an ‘ongoing interest in the emergence of Australian democracy’. The opening of the Parliament of Australia on May 9 1901, Melbourne – Tom Roberts (1903) Public domain, via Wikimedia Commons

A historian’s conscience

Selected Writings covers several major themes Hirst pursued in his research. We see a persuasive defence of democracy and an ongoing interest in the emergence of Australian democracy, in particular. Hirst’s account of national sentiment as a driver towards federation is compelling, as it understands the important imaginative leap required to hold a nation together beyond the establishment of political institutions. And his belief in republicanism is a thread he returned to across his career.

Another substantial theme is Hirst’s belief in, and support for, the history discipline. At the heart of his approach and practice is a contention that evidence and source criticism fundamentally broaden our knowledge of the past. Ideas are tested, and debates between historians are equally intrinsic to evaluating hypotheses and arguments.

Reading this diverse collection, I find Hirst’s writing provocative in a good way. I often had to pause and ask myself, do I agree or disagree here? What is my argument? Where is the evidence for my opinion?

Hirst’s body of work represents an implicit but powerful defence of evidence-based history at a time when the truth is under attack from venal Trumpism and students are submitting dispiriting essays written by GenAI. He was a powerful advocate for the discipline, advancing what history educators would call a form of historical literacy or historical thinking.

In response to the Howard Government’s proposal to develop a national history curriculum in 2006, for example, Hirst agreed with the need for a more rigorous and coordinated approach to the subject. Yet he also insisted that history’s purpose must be to teach the skills of empirical research and criticism, rather than jingoism.

John Hirst in 2015. Matthew Duchesne, via Wikimedia CommonsCC BY

Given the spread of these essays and the genealogy of Hirst’s career, it was a curious decision to organise the collection thematically, rather than chronologically. I am aware this criticism is likely framed by my own interests, and a thematic approach allows for a different organisation of ideas, but I did wonder what context was perhaps missed by not seeing the evolution of Hirst’s writing over time.

For example, the essay Changing My Mind appears first, but reflects back on Hirst’s career in Australian history. I was also surprised that one of his most well-known (and controversial) essays was not included in the collection or cited in the select bibliography. It’s another piece I first read as an undergraduate – a pointed critique of Creating a Nation by Patricia Grimshaw, Marilyn Lake, Ann McGrath and Marian Quartly, published in Quadrant in 1995, in which Hirst questioned whether a gendered history of Australia could and should be written. “A history of gender relations,” he argued, “is something less than the history of the nation.”

Obviously, all edited collections require curatorial decisions based on all sorts of reasons, but the exclusion of this essay was notable, given its prominence.

Other pieces in Selected Writings include Hirst’s critiques of what he termed the “black school” of Australian history writing. He was referring to the movement of historical revision advanced by labour, feminist, migrant and First Nations histories, which have challenged Australia’s understanding of its historical “progress”.

Hirst resisted this movement for being ideologically driven. But that is not to say he wasn’t interested in the “historian’s conscience”. He was, deeply. The essay that opens the collection was published in a volume on that very topic.

Yet his commitment to the history discipline also ran up against a growing acknowledgement within the field that empirical history has been complicit in and essential to exploitative systems of imperialism and colonisation. Hirst wanted historians to understand the past in context. “History writing will always reflect our current preoccupations,” he argued, “but as a disciplined enquiry it is also committed to understanding past people in their own terms.”

It’s a view that has been challenged in recent decades, as historians have sought to understand the ways history itself has legitimised and storied the settler-colonial project by curating its own archives and rules of historical evidence. As well as uncovering the past, history also has its own “blind eyes”, as Catherine Hall famously acknowledged.

Given Hirst’s commitment to debate, and his belief in collegiality and the sharing of ideas, that is a spirited discussion I reckon he would have been up for.The Conversation

Anna Clark, Professor in Public History, University of Technology Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Water recycling is paramount for space stations and long-duration missions − an environmental engineer explains how the ISS does it

The water recovery system on the ISS is state of the art. Roscosmos State Space Corporation via AP, File
Berrin TanselFlorida International University

When you’re on a camping trip, you might have to pack your own food and maybe something to filter or treat water that you find. But imagine your campsite is in space, where there’s no water, and packing jugs of water would take up room when every inch of cargo space counts. That’s a key challenge engineers faced when designing the International Space Station.

Before NASA developed an advanced water recycling system, water made up nearly half the payload of shuttles traveling to the ISS. I am an environmental engineer and have conducted research at Kennedy Space Center’s Space Life Sciences Laboratory. As part of this work, I helped to develop a closed-loop water recovery system.

Today, NASA recovers over 90% of the water used in space. Clean water keeps an astronaut crew hydrated, hygienic and fed, as it can use it to rehydrate food. Recovering used water is a cornerstone of closed-loop life support, which is essential for future lunar bases, Mars missions and even potential space settlements.

A rack of machinery.
A close-up view of the water recovery system’s racks – these contain the hardware that provides a constant supply of clean water for four to six crew members aboard the ISS. NASA

NASA’s environmental control and life support system is a set of equipment and processes that perform several functions to manage air and water quality, waste, atmospheric pressure and emergency response systems such as fire detection and suppression. The water recovery system − one component of environmental control and life support − supports the astronauts aboard the ISS and plays a central role in water recycling.

Water systems built for microgravity

In microgravity environments like the ISS, every form of water available is valuable. The water recovery systems on the ISS collect water from several sources, including urine, moisture in cabin air, and hygiene – meaning from activities such as brushing teeth.

On Earth, wastewater includes various types of water: residential wastewater from sinks, showers and toilets; industrial wastewater from factories and manufacturing processes; and agricultural runoff, which contains fertilizers and pesticides.

In space, astronaut wastewater is much more concentrated than Earth-based wastewater. It contains significantly higher levels of urea – a compound from urine – salts, and surfactants from soaps and materials used for hygiene. To make the water safe to drink, the system needs to remove all of these quickly and effectively.

The water recovery systems used in space employ some of the same principles as Earth-based water treatment. However, they are specifically engineered to function in microgravity with minimal maintenance. These systems also must operate for months or even years without the need for replacement parts or hands-on intervention.

NASA’s water recovery system captures and recycles nearly all forms of water used or generated aboard the space station. It routes the collected wastewater to a system called the water processor assembly, where it is purified into safe, potable water that exceeds many Earth-based drinking water standards.

The water recovery and treatment system on the ISS consists of several subsystems.

Recovering water from urine and sweat

The urine processor assembly recovers about 75% of the water from urine by heating and vacuum compression. The recovered water is sent to the water processor assembly for further treatment. The remaining liquid, called brine, still contains a significant amount of water. So, NASA developed a brine processor assembly system to extract the final fraction of water from this urine brine.

In the brine processor assembly, warm, dry air evaporates water from the leftover brine. A filter separates the contaminants from the water vapor, and the water vapor is collected to become drinking water. This innovation pushed the water recovery system’s overall water recovery rate to an impressive 98%. The remaining 2% is combined with the other waste generated.

An astronaut in a red shirt holds a small metal cylinder.
The filter used in brine processing has helped achieve 98% recovery. NASA

The air revitalization system condenses moisture from the cabin air – primarily water vapor from sweat and exhalation – into liquid water. It directs the recovered water to the water processor assembly, which treats all the collected water.

Treating recovered water

The water processor assembly’s treatment process includes several steps.

First, all the recovered water goes through filters to remove suspended particles such as dust. Then, a series of filters removes salts and some of the organic contaminants, followed by a chemical process called catalytic oxidation that uses heat and oxygen to break down the remaining organic compounds. The final step is adding iodine to the water to prevent microbial growth while it is stored.

Japan Aerospace Exploration Agency astronaut Koichi Wakata next to the International Space Station’s water recovery system, which recycles urine and wastewater into drinking water. As Wakata humorously puts it, ‘Here on board the ISS, we turn yesterday’s coffee into tomorrow’s coffee.’

The output is potable water — often cleaner than municipal tap water on Earth.

Getting to Mars and beyond

To make human missions to Mars possible, NASA has estimated that spacecraft must reclaim at least 98% of the water used on board. While self-sustaining travel to Mars is still a few years away, the new brine processor on the ISS has increased the water recovery rate enough that this 98% goal is now in reach. However, more work is needed to develop a compact system that can be used in a space ship.

The journey to Mars is complex, not just because of the distance involved, but because Mars and Earth are constantly moving in their respective orbits around the Sun.

The distance between the two planets varies depending on their positions. On average, they’re about 140 million miles (225 million km) apart, with the shortest theoretical approach, when the two planets’ orbits bring them close together, taking 33.9 million miles (54.6 million km).

A typical crewed mission is expected to take about nine months one way. A round-trip mission to Mars, including surface operations and return trajectory planning, could take around three years. In addition, launch windows occur only every 26 months, when Earth and Mars align favorably.

As NASA prepares to send humans on multiyear expeditions to the red planet, space agencies around the world continue to focus on improving propulsion and perfecting life support systems. Advances in closed-loop systems, robotic support and autonomous operations are all inching the dream of putting humans on Mars closer to reality.The Conversation

Berrin Tansel, Professor of Civil and Environmental Engineering, Florida International University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

As Spotify moves to video, the environmental footprint of music streaming hits the high notes

CarlosBarquero/Shutterstock
Hussein BoonUniversity of Westminster

Spotify currently has 675 million active users. Now, as it expands into video for music streaming and as more people use Spotifythe app’s environmental footprint is set to increase.

In-video advertisements that aim to increase ad revenue involve AI to tap into a users’ preferences. This means lots of individual videos with minor differences requiring additional processing scaled to the user’s streaming resolution.

But while Spotify used to publish data on its environmental costs, its reports have been incomplete since 2021. As American author and scholar, Shoshanna Zuboff points out in her book The Age of Surveillance Capitalism, many tech companies lack environmental accountability.

The Carbon Trust, a consultancy that helps businesses reduce their carbon footprints, works to globally promote a sustainable future and has calculated the European average carbon footprint for video streaming as producing 55g of CO₂e per hour. This CO₂e or carbon dioxide equivalent is a comparable measure of the potential effect of different greenhouse gases on the climate: 55g of CO₂e is 50 times more than audio streaming and the equivalent of microwaving four bags of popcorn.

woman at cafe table with laptop open watching music video
Online music videos are becoming the default - but at what environmental cost? Song_about_summer/Shutterstock

As a music technology and AI researcher, I’m aware of the shift in responsibility that comes with Spotify’s video innovations. While companies’ significant role in generating emissions should not be diminished, the shift of responsibility fromt he platform to users and content creators means that better informed choices about their streaming devices and streaming quality settings larger screens need to be made. Streaming at higher resolutions becomes significant factors in increasing video’s carbon footprint.

This increased responsibility means that end users needs to make better informed choices about their streaming devices and streaming quality settings.

While companies’ significant role in generating emissions should not be diminished, this shift of responsibility to the end user means that larger screens and streaming at higher resolutions become significant factors in increasing video’s carbon footprint.

Location also affects how carbon emissions are managed. Germany has the largest carbon footprint for video streaming at 76g CO₂e per hour of streaming, reflecting its continued reliance on coal and fossil fuels. In the UK, this figure is 48g CO₂e per hour, because its energy mix includes renewables and natural gas, increasingly with nuclear as central to the UK’s low-carbon future. France, with a reliance on nuclear is the lowest, at 10g CO₂e per hour.

There is an absolute burden of responsibility on tech and media companies to reduce their carbon emissions and to be transparent about their efforts to do so. In fact, net zero cannot be achieved without commitments from the major technology companies, many of which are based in the US whose government has not ratified the Kyoto protocol and withdrew from the Paris agreement in 2020 which are both significant global efforts to combat climate change.

Eco-conscious music streaming

A French thinktank called the Shift Project advocates for people and companies to adopt “digital sobriety” (the mindful use of digital tech) to ensure efficiency and sustainability. For example, research shows that the UK could reduce its carbon output by more 16,433 tonnes if each adult sent one less thank you email a day.

Certainly aimless streaming should be avoided because video decoding can account for 35-50% of playback energy on user devices. However, music video is more than mere music. As I have argued in my own work, video “provides a layer of meaning making not present in lyrics or audio alone”.

Video can bring marginalised music makers, cultures and ideas to the foreground by tackling difficult subjects. Like the work of Syrian-American rapper, poet, activist and chaplain Mona Haydar’s Wrap My Hijab or UK grime rapper Drillminister and his critique of neo-liberalism and trickle-down economics Nouveau Riche.

To minimise the environmental footprint of your own music streaming, use Wi-Fi rather than 4G or 5G. If you listen to a song repeatedly, purchase a download to play. Use localised storage rather than cloud-based systems for all of your music and video files. Reduce auto-play, aimless background streaming or using streaming as a sleep aid by changing the default settings on your device including reducing streaming resolution. And turn your camera off for video calls, as carbon emissions are 25 times more than for audio only.


Don’t have time to read about climate change as much as you’d like?
Get a weekly roundup in your inbox instead. Every Wednesday, The Conversation’s environment editor writes Imagine, a short email that goes a little deeper into just one climate issue. Join the 45,000+ readers who’ve subscribed so far.The Conversation


Hussein Boon, Principal Lecturer - Music, University of Westminster

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

The Man from Hong Kong at 50: how the first ever Australian–Hong Kong co-production became a cult classic

LMPC via Getty Images
Gregory FerrisUniversity of Technology Sydney

A cinematic firecracker of a film exploded onto international screens 50 years ago this week, blending martial arts mayhem, Bond-esque set pieces, casual racism – and a distinctly Australian swagger.

From its audacious visual style; to its complex, life-threatening stunts; to its pioneering status as an international co-production, Brian Trenchard-Smith’s The Man from Hong Kong has solidified its place as a cult classic.

The plot is deceptively simple. A Sydney-based crime lord’s activities come under the scrutiny of a determined Hong Kong detective, Inspector Fang Sing Leng. A fiery East-meets-West martial arts showdown explodes across the Australian landscape, pushing both sides to their limits.

Jimmy Wang Yu (known at the time as Asia’s Steve McQueen) plays Inspector Fang Sing Leng. Fang delivers justice with his fists and uses his wits navigating greater Sydney, with help from the local constabulary and its adoring female population.

The movie is a playful pastiche that confidently combines martial arts action, police procedurals, spy thrillers, and Westerns, all filtered through a distinctly Australian “crash-zoom” lens.

An Australia–Hong Kong co-production

The Man from Hong Kong was the first official Australia–Hong Kong co-production, uniting Hong Kong’s Golden Harvest studio with Australian producer John Fraser.

This model would pave the way for numerous future collaborations – the film demonstrating that Australia was open for international (film) business, albeit with some constraints, such as shooting locales.

In The Man from Hong Kong’s case, the financial arrangement was 50/50. As a result, half of the film had to be shot in Hong Kong, despite 85% of the storyline being set in Australia. Many of the interiors were filmed in Hong Kong studios to meet this production requirement.

An example of this is the interrogation scene, which alternates between its Sydney exteriors and a fight scene taking place in the interior film set shot thousands of miles away at the Golden Harvest studios.

In a genius bit of montage, the scene jumps from a shot of a kick in the crotch to a close-up of pool balls breaking on a table.

A film of cunning stunts

The Man from Hong Kong served as a reunion of sorts for many of the cast and crew, either starring in Stone (1974) or featuring in Trenchard-Smith’s documentary about martial arts films, Kung Fu Killers (1974).

The film was an influence to Quentin Tarantino and paved the way for films such as Mad Max (1979), particularly in what Trenchard-Smith and his partner in film, stunt legend Grant Page, might call its “cunning stunts”.

The elaborate car chases and explosive stunt setups in The Man from Hong Kong served as prototypes for iconic sequences that would inspire the Mad Max films, among others, a testament to a bygone era of practical effects and thrill seeking audacity.

Car crashes and other explosive stunts were executed without permits or road closures. This sense of chaos is heightened by the stunts being performed by the actors themselves, adding a sense of immediacy and peril.

An example of this is set on the cliffs at Stanwell Park. Wang Yu drives at speed towards the waiting Caroline, executing a precision gravel slide that misses Caroline’s car by under a metre, the shot continuing as he exits the car to greet her.

Part character, and part tourism advert

Trenchard-Smith’s script wasn’t shy in its depiction of culture clash, especially when it came to the racist attitudes of the Australian characters.

But as Trenchard-Smith recalls:

Our lead character, a Chinese Dirty Harry/James Bond upends these racial stereotypes by being smarter, sexier, and tougher than his opponents.

Cinematographer Russell Boyd brings a sharp, dynamic (did I mention the crash-zooms?) visual style to the film that deftly matches the on-screen action.

The film’s Australian setting is part character and part tourism advert – from the “Ayers Rock” (Uluru) cold opener, to the cafe scene on the Opera House forecourt.

Pure cinema

Stunt legend Grant Page appears in multiple villainous roles throughout the film, with the martial arts choreography handled by the legendary director Sammo Hung, who also played the role of Win Chan.

The cast was a fascinating mix of talent and personality. Wang Yu, a martial arts icon, was also an established film director, leading to creative clashes on set with Trenchard-Smith.

Playing the film’s villain is George Lazenby, whose casting added another layer of meta-textual intrigue, positioning him as an antagonist to a character who was explicitly a Bond villain archetype.

The Man from Hong Kong remains an exhilarating piece of pure cinema, despite its relatively small budget. It’s an exemplar (and occasional cautionary tale) for filmmakers in terms of international co-production, its cunning stunts, and genre blending.

The film is a testament to a moment when Australian cinema was confidently looking outwards, ready to take on the world, one explosive car crash at a time.The Conversation

Gregory Ferris, Senior Lecturer, Media Arts & Production, University of Technology Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Top Australian writers urge Albanese to abolish Job-Ready Graduates, calling their humanities degrees life changing

Caitlin MacdonaldUniversity of Sydney

“Earning a humanities degree was not only life changing, in terms of opening up a world of knowledge otherwise beyond my reach, it also turns out to have been enormously productive – for me and many, many people around me,” said Tim Winton this week. “My little arts degree has created jobs and cultural value for over 40 years.”

Winton is one of more than 100 high-profile Australians with Bachelor of Arts degrees who have signed an open letter by the Australian Historical Association (AHA). It urges Anthony Albanese to abolish the Morrison government’s widely condemned Job-Ready Graduates package and establish an equitable university fee system that “does not punish students who choose to study the humanities and social sciences”.

Writers who have signed include Nam Le, Helen Garner, Tim Flannery and Kate Grenville, who said her humanities and history studies were “absolutely essential” to the writing of her books. The signatories range widely across Australian intellectual life, from Megan Davis, co-chair of the Uluru Dialogue and chair of Australian Studies at Harvard, to musician and former Labor minister Peter Garrett.

In the lead-up to the 2022 election, Labor promised a review of the scheme. Two years and two federal elections later, it remains in place. “The idea that a Labor government would do nothing at all to right this wrong is utterly mystifying,” said Winton.

A sustained political attack

Job-Ready Graduates claimed to guide students toward areas of national need by reducing fees for degrees in STEM, education and nursing – while raising fees for other degrees, including the humanities. Philosophy, history and literature bore some of the steepest increases.

The cost of an arts degree now exceeds A$50,000. History fees alone jumped 117% when the policy took effect. The result? Humanities enrolments have dropped to a ten-year low.

Historian Michelle Arrow, AHA president, is the convener of the letter. “There has been a sustained political attack on the humanities,” she recently told Good Weekend. That attack now spans two governments and three education ministers.

The Job-Ready Graduates policy did not increase places in those cheaper degrees. Instead, it penalised students who chose disciplines with more ambiguous career outcomes. These shifts reinforced a message: that such choices are self-indulgent and economically irrational.

Universities, meanwhile, face escalating costs and volatile revenue from international students. In that context, humanities departments are an easy target.

At the University of Wollongong, up to 124 full-time jobs are being cut as part of a $30 million cost-saving restructure, with significant losses across the humanities. At Macquarie, entire majors in sociology and politics are being eliminated. The University of Tasmania is shedding up to 13 arts and humanities roles.

These are not isolated incidents; they are part of a broader pattern of disinvestment. This is not drift; it is deliberate dismantling.

Humanities faculties are being restructured not because they cost too much to run, but because they are perceived to return too little. Yet the skills they foster – interpretive reasoning, ethical judgement, historical understanding – remain essential to democratic life.

Teaching us to sit with contradiction

Teaching literature at university, I have seen how the study of complex texts fosters not just critical thinking, but a slower, more deliberative mode of engagement.

Carpentaria author Alexis Wright. Abigail Varney/Giramondo

Wrestling with Alexis Wright’s Carpentaria, Kim Stanley Robinson’s The Ministry for the Future or George Eliot’s Middlemarch is not about extracting quick answers.

Wright’s novel grapples with sovereignty, environmental stewardship and intergenerational trauma. It invites us into a kind of intellectual disorientation – which is the beginning of serious thinking. Robinson imagines a near-future world on the brink of climate collapse, and how we might respond to its challenges. Middlemarch is a slow education in moral attention.

These works cultivate patience, tolerance for ambiguity and the ability to sit with contradiction. These are not only academic skills; they are habits of mind essential to civic life.

At St Andrew’s College within the University of Sydney, I recently observed students engaging with the poetry of John Keats and Emily Dickinson, Pascal’s Wager and the Ship of Theseus, an ancient paradox regarding identity and change over time. Not as academic curiosities, but as frameworks for judgement and moral reasoning.

Students practised a kind of learning that is increasingly rare: slow, rigorous and open-ended. It required nuance, comparison and a tolerance for uncertainty. These were not exercises in arriving at answers, but in developing the capacity to think clearly when no obvious answer exists.

Take Keats’s idea of “negative capability”: the capacity to remain “in uncertainties, Mysteries, doubts, without any irritable reaching after fact and reason”. In a world of polarisation and misinformation, this disposition is more relevant than ever. Reading Keats doesn’t just inform us about Romantic poetry – it models how to remain intellectually and ethically open.

John Keats – Joseph Severn (c.1822) Public domain, via Wikimedia Commons

Pascal’s Wager, a philosophical argument that frames belief in God as a rational bet under uncertainty, reframes the question of belief. Rather than ask if God exists, it does not ask is it true?, but what happens if you bet wrongly? It opens a door beyond theology – to ethics, probability and decision-making under uncertainty.

This is something the broader university system is increasingly struggling to preserve: learning as a form of ethical formation, rather than mere information transfer.

This kind of learning is slow. It resists metrics of productivity. It can’t be sped up or automated. But it is precisely what builds ethical capacity in future lawyers, teachers, doctors, journalists and citizens.

We risk leaving students ‘soul starved’

There is irony in this moment. As Nick Bryant writes in his Good Weekend article, history podcasts are booming. Philosophy books routinely shape national conversations. Humanities graduates remain employable across sectors precisely because they can read closely, write clearly and think critically. The appetite for big, messy human questions is real – and yet the institutions that trained people to ask them are shrinking.

Reports from employers continue to cite communication, judgement and adaptability among the most desirable graduate traits. These so-called “soft skills” are essential in law, health, diplomacy and policy – all fields where decisions carry real moral weight. When pandemic responses required weighing privacy against public safety, or vaccine equity against speed, the skills in play weren’t just technical. They were interpretive. Ethical. Human.

This is not abstract. During myriad global crises, humanities-trained advocates and writers play key roles in reshaping public messaging. Indigenous-led campaigns for Voice, Treaty and Truth from the Uluru Statement of the Heart have drawn not only on legal frameworks, but on storytelling traditions, cultural knowledge and historical understanding – all core to the humanities. These moments remind us: change isn’t only engineered. It’s narrated, debated, imagined into being.

The Universities Accord Final Report has now acknowledged that the Job-Ready Graduates scheme “failed to meet its objectives” and recommended urgent reform. Not all learning is “job-ready.” Some forms of knowledge are valuable because they deepen our understanding, sharpen our empathy, or expand our imagination.

The erosion of the humanities is not just a policy failure. It is a failure of imagination. We make students ready for the job market. But without the tools to think deeply, imagine ethically and reason clearly, we risk leaving them soul-starved.The Conversation

Caitlin Macdonald, PhD Candidate, Faculty of Arts and Social Sciences, University of Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Celebrating 60 Years Of Manly Warringah Netball

1965 – 2025 

In 2025, we proudly celebrate 60 years of the Manly Warringah Netball Association.

We invite all past and present members to join us for a special evening of memories, laughter, and celebration.

Tables of ten or single tickets available.

This is an 18+ event.

Purchase tickets via the QR code or this link.

Let’s come together to honour six decades of netball, community, and connection.

Online Registration FREE Scams Awareness Training

ONLINE Event Details:
Date: Friday, 22 August 2025
Time: 10:00 AM – 12:00 PM  AEST 
Cost: FREE 

If you would like to attend on-line please register here and a link will be sent to you from cota@cota.org.au.

If you have any issues, please email cota@cota.org.au.

To read more about this event visit: 

Combining medication and exercise could greatly reduce osteoporosis risk

July 25, 2025
Researchers from the Kolling Institute and Royal North Shore Hospital are inviting women aged 50-80 to join a study to assess the effectiveness of combining exercise with medication for better bone and muscle health in postmenopausal women.

Endocrinologist and researcher Dr Shejil Kumar said researchers know that exercise has benefits for bone and muscle health, and there are effective treatments available to strengthen bones.

“However, what we don’t know is whether combining exercise plus medication at the same time can lead to even greater improvements in bone and muscle health than either approach on its own,” he said.

The study will use a medication which is registered and approved in Australia and has been shown to increase bone density and reduce fracture risk in large international studies.

''We believe this combination will be more effective and could dramatically change the way we treat and prevent osteoporosis going forward'' - Dr Shejil Kumar, Endocrinologist and Researcher

The research team will aim to assess how different combinations of treatment improve bone density, muscle strength, body composition, physical function and risk of falls.

Participants will be randomly assigned to different treatment groups, including a supervised group class focusing on weightbearing exercises and a home-based exercise program concentrating on mobility and balance.

Researchers have recruited 45 women into the study and are hoping to reach a target of 75.

For further information email Shejil.Kumar@health.nsw.gov.au

Walk & Talk: Narrabeen

The Belong Club invites anyone to come and participate in the Belong Club Walking Group!

Every Tuesday we walk along the pathway beside the Narrabeen Lagoon, from the Tramshed Arts and Community Centre to Jamieson Park and back. The route is about 1.8km each way, and is estimated to take 45 minutes.

The up and back walk allows for people of any walking speed to participate and enjoy the walk at their own comfortable pace. Walkers often split into smaller groups naturally along the route allowing everyone to go at their preferred pace. The aim here is for everyone to be included and to have an enjoyable walk.

Our meeting spot is to the right of the Tramshed Community Centre, between the basketball court and kids playground.

Take fish, salt in vats, leave in sun for months: why ancient Romans loved fermented fish sauces like garum

Photo by Engin Akyurt/Pexels
Tamara LewitThe University of Melbourne

If you slipped back through time to taste a dish from the Roman Empire, you’d likely be sampling some fermented fish sauce.

Surviving Roman recipes add this to anything from barley porridge to a sweet custard made with pine nuts, olive oil, wine, honey and pepper.

Although it is often referred to as garum, the exact meaning of this term is surprisingly uncertain.

A fish sauce by any other name

Fish sauce is called garumliquamen, or garon (in Greek) in various ancient Roman texts, including labels on containers.

It’s unclear whether these were different products or if the name changed over time.

According to one recent theorygarum may have been an expensive condiment, of short-lived popularity, made with the blood and organs of large fish.

Liquamen was a low-cost cooking sauce popular across the centuries and made by fermenting whole small, cheap fish.

The fish were layered with salt in covered vats or pots, and left in warm sun for two to three months to liquefy and ferment.

The method has been replicated by experimental archaeologists and even instagrammers.

Such umami-flavoured sauce would have transformed the cheap food of ordinary people in the Roman Empire. Most of the population had no access to the expensive spices, meats and sweet raisin wine on the tables of the wealthy.

In an edict listing prices issued by the Emperor Diocletian in 301 CE, second quality fish sauce is half the price of cheap honey.

Containers found in the humble houses and food shops of Pompeii show ordinary people had access to fish sauce.

An even longer history

Its origins go back thousands of years.

As was also the case for wine and olive oil, the roots of this dietary practice lay in earlier and originally eastern Mediterranean foodways.

Clay tablets from around 1700 BCE record a Babylonian recipe for poultry pie pastry flavoured with a fish sauce called siqqu.

Also used in Greek and Phoenician (middle eastern) cooking from at least the 5th century BCE, fermented fish sauce was adopted enthusiastically by the Romans and spread within the cultural melting pot that was the Roman Empire.

Roman conquest brought not only roads, baths and gladiators, but also diet and food customs to millions of peoples of varied ancestries and traditions across three continents.

The huge fish processing vats at Baelo, a Roman city on the straits on Gibraltar in southern Spain
The huge fish processing vats at Baelo, a Roman city on the straits on Gibraltar in southern Spain. Carole Raddato/FlickrCC BY-SA

Thriving industry and trade

In the Roman period, processing factories with huge vats were set up at the sites of the seasonal migrations of mackerel, sardines, anchovies and tuna around the Straits of Gibraltar and on Atlantic and Black Sea coasts.

Cuts of large fish were salted for transport while small fish were fermented for sauce.

The vats at these factories were called cetariae, and the name survives today as the town of Cetara in southern Italy near Pompeii, which still produces a fermented anchovy sauce called colatura di alici.

In a Roman shipwreck recently found off the island of Mallorca, skeletal remains from fish sauce were identified as anchovy (Engraulis encrasicolus).

Recent DNA analysis of fish remains from an ancient production workshop in north-west coastal Spain shows the fish fermented there were sardines (Sardina pilchardus).

The tens of thousands of tiny fish bones found in vessels at a town workshop in Pompeii came from picarels (Spicara smaris), anchovies, and other fish, which were being fermented whole, heads and all, at the time of the volcanic eruption.

Chemical analysis also revealed traces of wine and Mediterranean herbs which may have been mixed with this sauce.

Spanish archaeologists replicated the chemistry by using anchovies from a Cádiz market with typical Roman ingredients of thyme, oregano, coriander, celery, sage, poppy seeds, fennel, mint and rosemary.

In spite of its reputation, the fermented sauce was not unpleasantly smelly, since the salt and processing neutralises odours.

Fish sauce was shipped to the city of Rome, northern Europe, the eastern Mediterranean, and to the armies in Croatia or northern Britian, supplied to soldiers as part of their rations.

A Roman ship wrecked in deep water off the coast of Sicily, explored by maritime archaeologists using remotely operated vehicles, was carrying Tunisian olive oil from the port of Carthage (now Tunis) to Rome.

On board was also a shipment of fish sauce which had travelled more than 2,000km from what is now Portugal.

A useful food

Fermenting fish was a way to make it long-lasting. Salting and fermentation were essential to preserving seasonal products in the ancient world, which lacked any effective means of sealing, freezing or refrigeration.

While there is evidence for malnutrition and dietary deficiencies such as scurvy among the population of the Roman Empire, fish sauce would have provided year-round protein, vitamin B12 and minerals such as iron and calcium (from the fish bones).

It was also used in medicine, especially as a laxative – including for horses.

After the end of the Roman Empire, it continued to be valued by medieval monks who were forbidden to eat red meat.

Roman sauce was almost identical to the fermented fish sauces that have been a staple of Asian cuisines for centuries.

For a hint of ancient Mediterranean flavours, try some with egg custard and honey.The Conversation

Tamara Lewit, Honorary Fellow, School of Historical and Philosophical Studies, The University of Melbourne

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Sydney Writers Festival will program year-round, partnering with State Library of NSW. Is this ‘Sydney’s Wheeler Centre’?

Alice GrundyAustralian National University

Sydney is gaining on Melbourne’s long lead as a literary city, with a new partnership between Sydney Writers’ Festival and the State Library of New South Wales. This year-round program of literary events, programmed by the festival (with many hosted by the library) presents a serious injection into Sydney’s literary scene. The budget is A$1.5 million, creating over 300 paid opportunities for writers over 12 months.

The events program, which starts in September, will kick off with events featuring Hannah Kent, Bob Brown, romance writers Melanie Saward and Saman Shad, and Michelle de Kretser. There are plans for international guests in the rotation too.

The Sydney/Melbourne rivalry may be highly competitive for hospitality or international events – but Melbourne has long been the frontrunner for literature, especially after it became the second city in the world to be designated a UNESCO City of Literature in 2008. Its Wheeler Centre, a literary hub dedicated to books, writing and ideas, was established a year later, in 2009 – hosted by the State Library of Victoria, with significant support from the state government.

The Guardian suggests Sydney’s new initiative will be “a rival to the Wheeler Centre”. The recently refurbished 344-seat auditorium underneath the historic Mitchell Library reading room will reportedly be the headquarters for many of the program’s events.

This news is welcome for Australian readers, writers and publishers. It will provide a valuable added source of author income – and a series of opportunities to engage with books and writing, at a time when Australians are reading less. It’s also a good thing for Sydney nightlife.

Michelle de Kretser is one of the writers featured in the initial program in the Sydney Writers Festival’s year-round programming partnership with State Library NSW. Joy Lai

Helping writers get paid

The New South Wales government calls it the first part of “a sector-wide strategy” to position writing and literature at the heart of the state’s “cultural, educational, and economic life”.

Such investment is critical at a time when writers are facing the multiple crises of cuts to the university sector (where many work casually), low incomes from freelance work and pressures on book sales. On average, Australian writers earn around $18,500 per year from their writing practice.

The budget for this initiative is huge in terms of literature funding. In 2023-4, the total budget for literature from Creative Australia was $7.8 million: so this is equivalent to nearly one fifth of the federal budget for literature. That said, it is a fraction of the funding the NSW government gave music last week: $9.3 million to support touring, recording and promotion.

Australia Society of Authors rates are set at $336 for an “in conversation” (where the author is interviewed). For an author to reach this level from sales alone at a bookshop event, the bookseller would need to shift around 100 copies (assuming a 10% royalty on a $30 book).

Authors’ receipt of money from sales is significantly delayed: royalties are most often paid twice a year. Paid appearances mark a significant boon to an author’s income – and they get the money much quicker, too. For these events, it’s likely the State Library Bookshop would also have books for sale.

Enlivening Sydney’s nightlife

While Sydney hosts regular literary events, events have traditionally been tricky in the city. Barriers include the high cost for venues and difficulties connecting audiences from different parts of the city. Sydneysiders have long been jealous of Wheeler Centre as a central venue hosting regular events.

Literary events take place at booksellers such as Gleebooks in the inner-west, with their newly renovated space, megabookstore Kinokuniya in the CBD and Gertrude & Alice, at Bondi Beach. Also in the inner west, Balmain’s Roaring Stories hosts events, including at a rum distillery. But authors are usually not paid for bookseller events, so the author’s income is only from book sales.

There are fewer booksellers in Western Sydney, but the area does host its own literary festivals, including Parramatta’s Lit and Write Out West, which present opportunities for authors and readers.

Sydney’s nighttime economy was struggling before COVID, including as a result of the change in licensing laws after two violent assaults a decade ago. The pandemic depressed the local nightlife further – and the city hasn’t quite recovered.

This new initiative will help enliven one of the city’s most beautiful buildings – which has already been focused on bringing in people after hours, with a rooftop bar and literary trivia nights.

Future opportunities?

There are other synergies between Melbourne’s established hub and Sydney’s new one. The Wheeler Centre administers the Victorian Premiers’ Literary Awards. Similarly, the State Library of NSW is responsible for the NSW Premiers’ Literary Awards.

The money these awards deliver to writers are significant, but are predominantly for well-established authors. The Wheeler Centre is also in its 13th year of administering its Hot Desk Fellowships for emerging writers, which provide a stipend, a dedicated workspace in the building and access to the writing community. It would be marvellous to see an equivalent program for emerging authors make its way to Sydney.

The partnership between State Library of New South Wales and the Sydney Writers Festival is the latest in a string of government announcements addressing the arts in the state. The upcoming tax reform roundtable, scheduled for late September, presents another opportunity for structural reform to a sector under pressure.The Conversation

Alice Grundy, Visiting Fellow, School of Literature, Language and Linguistics, Australian National University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Support for Senate inquiry into Home Care package delays

July 29, 2025
National Seniors Australia (NSA) has welcomed a Senate inquiry into Home Care packages to examine the impact of delaying the Support at Home program and withholding new Home Care packages. While the wait list decreased since June 2019, wait times have shot up since 2023, with approximately 88,000 people now waiting for a home care package, NSA states.

NSA Chief Executive Officer Mr Chris Grice said while the peak consumer body understands the need to delay commencement of the new Aged Care Act from July 1 to November 1, this doesn’t mean the government needs to delay the release of new packages, promised to be released from July 1.

“The new Aged Care Act acknowledges older people want to stay in their own homes for longer so they can remain healthy, active, and socially connected. It also acknowledges older Australians increasingly want the freedom, support, and choice to remain in the home and community they love,” Mr Grice said.

“These inspiring ideals – to help older Australians remain safe and independent in their own homes as they age, are not possible without the urgent release of more home care packages.

“While the wait list decreased since June 2019, wait times have shot up since 2023, with approximately 88,000 people now waiting for a home care package.

“We need to remember when we’re talking about packages, we’re talking about people. Vulnerable people in desperate need of support at home; support to stay out of aged care; support to leave hospital; support to relieve family members who have become carers, and it wouldn’t be a stretch to say support they need to survive.

“These 88,000 older Australians are why NSA supports the Senate inquiry and why we are also calling for the immediate increase in home care packages to reduce the wait list to 25,000 people.
“Clearing the wait list was a recommendation of the Aged Care Royal Commission, and one NSA sees as a top priority for the Federal Government. 

“We support the Senate inquiry and look forward to making a submission on behalf of every older Australian waiting for care, their families, and carers.” 

Aged care service delivery: Senate Inquiry

On 28 July 2025, the Senate referred an inquiry into aged care service delivery to the Community Affairs References Committee for report by 15 September 2025.

Submissions Close 22 August 2025.

Further detail about the scope of the inquiry is provided in the terms of reference.

Terms of Reference
The implications for older Australians, their families, carers, service providers and state and territory health systems of the Government’s decision to delay the commencement of the new Support at Home program until 1 November 2025 while also withholding the release of any additional Home Care Packages, with particular reference to:

(a) the impact of the delay on older Australians waiting for support at home, including unmet care needs and the wellbeing of seniors and their carers;
(b) the capacity of the Commonwealth Home Support Programme to meet increased demand for support at home prior to 1 November 2025;
(c) the impacts on aged care service providers, including on their workforce;
(d) the impacts on hospitals and state and territory health systems;
(e) the feasibility of achieving the Government’s target to reduce waiting times for Home Care Packages to 3 months by 1 July 2027, in light of the delay;
(f) the adequacy of the governance, assurance and accountability frameworks supporting the digital transformation projects required to deliver the aged care reforms on time;
(g) the implementation of the single assessment system and its readiness to support people to access a timely assessment now and beyond 1 November 2025; and
(h) any other related matters.


Release of rules another step towards a new Aged Care Act

July 31, 2025
The Australian Government is continuing its work to deliver generational aged care reforms, today releasing the final draft of the new Aged Care Rules that will guide the sector in these reforms.

''This is about making sure aged care providers have the tools they need to deliver the best care for older Australians.'' the Government states

Set to commence alongside the new Aged Care Act from 1 November 2025, the new Rules have been developed after seven consultation drafts, and in response to more than 400 submissions from aged care providers, advocates, workers, carers, healthcare experts and older people themselves.

The Rules set out how the aged care sector provides care to our older loved ones, covering issues from residential care to Home Support Packages, worker screening, vaccinations and financial obligations in aged care.

The Rules provide further detail and instruction on how the new Act will work – and we’re getting them out well ahead of the Act’s commencement to make sure aged care providers have the time they need to prepare their systems, processes and workforce. 

The release of the Rules follows the introduction of amending legislation to Parliament last week, which paves the way for a smooth transition to the new Aged Care Act.

Read more about the new Aged Care Rules and the consultation process, and access important resources to help prepare for the Act. 

Minister for Aged Care and Seniors Sam Rae stated:

"We’re getting on with the job of delivering generational change to make sure every older Australian can live with the best care, dignity and support.

"The release of the Rules is another meaningful step towards a new rights-based Aged Care Act that delivers the dignified care older Australians deserve.

"We’ve released the Rules 3 months before the new Act comes into force, giving providers time to implement new systems and processes, and train workers to deliver the best care to our loved ones."

The ghost of Robodebt – Federal Court rules billions of dollars in welfare debts must be recalculated

Christopher RudgeUniversity of Sydney

A recent landmark court decision could have significant ramifications for several million social security recipients.

The ruling means the federal government will need to recalculate more than A$4 billion in debts owed to the Department of Social Services, which administers Centrelink.

Some of the debts – which occurred due to overpayment of benefits – stretch back decades.

Reminiscent of Robodebt, the problem occurred because an unlawful method – income apportionment – was used to calculate the money Centrelink claimed it was owed.

The judgement

From the early 1990s until 2020, more than 5.3 million welfare debts were calculated using income apportionment.

In the test case Chaplin v Secretary, Department of Social Services, the full Federal Court approved a method proposed by the government to recalculate the debts.

The court was not asked whether the debts were unlawful – a point the department had already conceded – but whether its remedy was legally sound. In a two-judge majority, the court ruled it generally was.

Following the judgement, the department swiftly resumed debt recovery, which had been paused in 2023, pending the legal decision. It said in a statement:

now there is certainty to the legal position, assessments will recommence in line with the court’s decision.

The scale of the problem

The unlawful debts are worth $4.31 billion in total, and affect almost three million Australians. About 91% of these debts – $3.93 billion – has already been repaid to Centrelink.

Another 170,000 debts – totalling $347 million – remain outstanding.

All the debts – either repaid or still owing – must be recalculated using the revised method approved by the court.

According to the government, the median debt is $330 and has been owed for 19 years, on average.

But the judgement does not compel the government to actually recover the money. Some media reports suggest a waiver is being considered.

For its part, the government says it will “evaluate” the court decision and develop a “suitable response”.

What is income apportionment?

An internal anti-fraud policy meant Centrelink was obliged to calculate a person’s income when it was “earned” rather than “received”.

This led to the use of income apportionment – essentially an educated guess about a person’s fortnightly earnings when their pay cycle didn’t align with their income reporting period.

This process, which typically produced overpayments to recipients, spread income outside an instalment period, which was contrary to the applicable law. It also attributed earnings to a person for days and fortnights they hadn’t worked.

Income apportionment was discontinued in 2020. Three years later, the Commonwealth ombudsman found the method was unlawful.

Is this different to Robodebt?

While Social Services has sought to distinguish income apportionment from Robodebt, the two methods of calculating debt are comparable.

Both attributed a person’s daily income beyond the timeframe permitted by law.

But there are differences in source and scale.

Where apportionment was personalised by using individual customer payslips, Robodebt used Australian Tax Office records to raise debts en masse.

Significantly, while the ombudsman said the department’s understanding of the law relating to apportionment was “incorrect”, it was also “genuinely held”.

On the other hand, the infamous Robodebt scheme was designed to ramp up debt clawbacks. Claims of misfeasance in public office continue to be litigated.

Other troubling overlaps remain.

Many individuals affected by apportionment debts raised after 2015 will be the same people served with Robodebt notices.

Evidentiary burden

A troubling aspect of the test case was the suggestion by the majority judges – citing High Court precedent – that the evidentiary burden could shift to the welfare recipient when overpayments are believed to occur through “wrongdoing”.

This could force an individual to disprove their alleged debt if a decision-maker concluded the recipient had accidentally under-reported – as occurred in the test case – and a lack of evidence made it difficult for the government to prove its allegation.

The finding arguably runs counter to the Robodebt Royal Commission’s observation that most welfare recipients lack the power to disprove a debt because their historical records are unavailable.

The dissenting judge in the case rejected the government’s proposed recalculation method, finding it “not proper” for recovery action to be taken without probative evidence.

He said the majority decision meant Centrelink could reassess debts in the future after evidence had been lost, and recipients would be powerless to disprove them.

Expensive fix

The administrative burden of reassessing these unlawful debts is immense.

Late last year, a team of 150 public servants, each costing $117,400 per annum, was assigned to rectify income apportionment.

Their internal sampling revealed 64% of people issued debt bills were overcharged, 29% were undercharged, while 4% are owed a total refund.

The remediation process has been chaotic.

In the year following the ombudsman’s report, recipients lodged 531 appeals and made 530 complaints, highlighting the human impact of income apportionment.

But in a five-month period, a mere 83 cases have been finalised.

Controversially, Social Services offered to process debts on request, contrary to a provisional finding of the Administrative Appeals Tribunal, which dismissed the method being used by the department.

Political choice

While the Federal Court has seemingly given the government a legal victory, the ultimate outcome will be costly – especially if the debts are waived.

The court ruling requires recipients be afforded “procedural fairness”, meaning resource-intensive investigations will need to be undertaken into the millions of cases yet to be reviewed.

The final price tag is yet unknown. In the 2025–26 budget, income apportionment was recorded as a “contingent liability – unquantifiable”.

Almost all of the outstanding debts would have already been resolved if the government had implemented the Robodebt Royal Commission recommendation that welfare overpayments should not be pursued if they are more than six years old.

The court’s decision also fails to address the 159 Australians believed to have been criminally prosecuted over unlawful debts since 2018. These people – and likely many more before that year – may have been convicted on defective evidence.

The response to these issues will be a test for the government.

Has it learned the lessons of previous egregious mistakes, or will it allow the ghost of Robodebt to continue to haunt our welfare system?The Conversation

Christopher Rudge, Law lecturer, University of Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

‘Provocative in a good way’: John Hirst was a rigorous historian, independent thinker and passionate believer in Australia

Convict gang, Sydney – Augustus Earle (1830) Public domain, via Wikimedia Commons
Anna ClarkUniversity of Technology Sydney

I first read John Hirst (1942-2016) as an undergraduate in the late 1990s as part of a subject on 19th-century Australian history. We discussed convict history and explored contrasting views about its role and function in the early colonies. What was life as a convict like? Was transportation a cruel punishment or a ticket to a better future? Could we compare the convict system to slavery?

Hirst’s Convict Society and Its Enemies was one of our required readings and I studied it with interest.


Review: John Hirst: Selected Writings – edited by Chris Feik (Black Inc.)


I had devoured Robert Hughes’s The Fatal Shore the previous summer and had been powerfully swayed by his descriptions of visceral cruelty in the penal colony. There were convicts who rubbed lime in their own eyes because blindness was preferable to working in the kilns. Others were whipped until flesh hung in strips from their backs and collapsed on treadmills from exhaustion.

Hirst demurred. Yes, there was violence, he agreed, but England was a violent place in the late 18th and early 19th centuries. Rather than judge, historians must understand the broader context of that world. Comparing convicts to slaves overlooked historical evidence that pointed to the relative freedom convicts enjoyed in colonial society.

Due to the dire shortage of labour, for example, convicts were able to control aspects of their own lives, working on their daily tasks for the state in the morning and then having their “own time” after the day’s work was done. This not only facilitated considerable freedom for convicts, but also their power in the fledgling society.

Following their sentences, convicts were free to own property and, from 1842, even to vote and stand for the New South Wales Legislative Council. Critically, the children of convicts were all born free, not into servitude.

Impact and legacy

The central arguments of Convict Society and Its Enemies are reproduced in an essay included in this posthumous collection of Hirst’s writings, edited by Chris Feik. The book catalogues some of Hirst’s major contributions to Australian historiography, spanning 50 years of scholarship from the mid 1970s.

How Did a Penal Colony Change Peacefully into a Democracy? is classic Hirst. The prose is crisp and succinct, avoiding jargon and calmly outlining the logic of its contention, drawn from a deep reading of the sources. Hirst critiques what he sees as convict research motivated by ideology rather than the evidence of this period in Australia’s past. In doing so, he sets himself apart from historians who viewed the convicts as victims of a brutal, dehumanising system.

Selected Writings also includes short personal reflections from a fellow historian, a former student, and a colleague, which help frame the impact and legacy of Hirst’s work. His intellectual independence is noted by each of the three contributors.

“Hirst prided himself on his resistance to the current of fashionable opinion,” notes Frank Bongiorno, “and he was above all else a fiercely independent individual.” This wasn’t about being contrary, adds Alex McDermott, but a process of applying the same critical analysis to the field as he did to his primary sources. Hirst “viewed his project as more than mere provocation”. He was both a passionate believer in Australia, as well as a fiercely independent voice, writes Robert Manne.

Bongiorno, McDermott and Manne all emphasise Hirst’s personal generosity and commitment to teaching and the profession – he was clearly loved by generations of students. Upon the book’s release, I was struck by comments on social media and at conferences from colleagues and former students who remembered acts of kindness that accompanied Hirst’s rigorous commitment to debate.

This collection feels like a faithful reflection of that contribution to Australian history.

John Hirst had an ‘ongoing interest in the emergence of Australian democracy’. The opening of the Parliament of Australia on May 9 1901, Melbourne – Tom Roberts (1903) Public domain, via Wikimedia Commons

A historian’s conscience

Selected Writings covers several major themes Hirst pursued in his research. We see a persuasive defence of democracy and an ongoing interest in the emergence of Australian democracy, in particular. Hirst’s account of national sentiment as a driver towards federation is compelling, as it understands the important imaginative leap required to hold a nation together beyond the establishment of political institutions. And his belief in republicanism is a thread he returned to across his career.

Another substantial theme is Hirst’s belief in, and support for, the history discipline. At the heart of his approach and practice is a contention that evidence and source criticism fundamentally broaden our knowledge of the past. Ideas are tested, and debates between historians are equally intrinsic to evaluating hypotheses and arguments.

Reading this diverse collection, I find Hirst’s writing provocative in a good way. I often had to pause and ask myself, do I agree or disagree here? What is my argument? Where is the evidence for my opinion?

Hirst’s body of work represents an implicit but powerful defence of evidence-based history at a time when the truth is under attack from venal Trumpism and students are submitting dispiriting essays written by GenAI. He was a powerful advocate for the discipline, advancing what history educators would call a form of historical literacy or historical thinking.

In response to the Howard Government’s proposal to develop a national history curriculum in 2006, for example, Hirst agreed with the need for a more rigorous and coordinated approach to the subject. Yet he also insisted that history’s purpose must be to teach the skills of empirical research and criticism, rather than jingoism.

John Hirst in 2015. Matthew Duchesne, via Wikimedia CommonsCC BY

Given the spread of these essays and the genealogy of Hirst’s career, it was a curious decision to organise the collection thematically, rather than chronologically. I am aware this criticism is likely framed by my own interests, and a thematic approach allows for a different organisation of ideas, but I did wonder what context was perhaps missed by not seeing the evolution of Hirst’s writing over time.

For example, the essay Changing My Mind appears first, but reflects back on Hirst’s career in Australian history. I was also surprised that one of his most well-known (and controversial) essays was not included in the collection or cited in the select bibliography. It’s another piece I first read as an undergraduate – a pointed critique of Creating a Nation by Patricia Grimshaw, Marilyn Lake, Ann McGrath and Marian Quartly, published in Quadrant in 1995, in which Hirst questioned whether a gendered history of Australia could and should be written. “A history of gender relations,” he argued, “is something less than the history of the nation.”

Obviously, all edited collections require curatorial decisions based on all sorts of reasons, but the exclusion of this essay was notable, given its prominence.

Other pieces in Selected Writings include Hirst’s critiques of what he termed the “black school” of Australian history writing. He was referring to the movement of historical revision advanced by labour, feminist, migrant and First Nations histories, which have challenged Australia’s understanding of its historical “progress”.

Hirst resisted this movement for being ideologically driven. But that is not to say he wasn’t interested in the “historian’s conscience”. He was, deeply. The essay that opens the collection was published in a volume on that very topic.

Yet his commitment to the history discipline also ran up against a growing acknowledgement within the field that empirical history has been complicit in and essential to exploitative systems of imperialism and colonisation. Hirst wanted historians to understand the past in context. “History writing will always reflect our current preoccupations,” he argued, “but as a disciplined enquiry it is also committed to understanding past people in their own terms.”

It’s a view that has been challenged in recent decades, as historians have sought to understand the ways history itself has legitimised and storied the settler-colonial project by curating its own archives and rules of historical evidence. As well as uncovering the past, history also has its own “blind eyes”, as Catherine Hall famously acknowledged.

Given Hirst’s commitment to debate, and his belief in collegiality and the sharing of ideas, that is a spirited discussion I reckon he would have been up for.The Conversation

Anna Clark, Professor in Public History, University of Technology Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Governments are becoming increasingly secretive. Here’s how they can be made to be more transparent

Gabrielle ApplebyUNSW Sydney

Transparency is vital to our democratic system of government.

It promotes good government, spurring those in power into better practice. Even when what is revealed is pretty revolting, transparency means those transgressions are known, and accountability for them can follow.

Transparency is particularly important for people who otherwise do not have access to government, who are not “in the room” or “at the table”, whether that be directly or through lobbyists or other connections.

But recent data reveal government transparency in Australia is on the decline. Given the connection between transparency and a well-functioning democracy, this is deeply concerning.

The Albanese government’s compliance rate with Senate orders for documents is the lowest of any government since 2016, and the second-worst of any government since 1993. Disclosures under freedom of information laws have dropped dramatically over the past decade.

The problem isn’t a lack of solutions, but that governments appear perpetually unwilling to open up.

How should transparency work?

In Australia, there is a complex system of institutions and laws that provide government accountability and transparency.

Outside of the blunt instrument of electoral accountability through the ballot box, the parliament, and in particular the non-government-dominated Senate, plays a key role in providing accountability and transparency.

The transparency work of the Senate is supplemented by a number of regimes, chief among them freedom of information. Under freedom of information, members of the public can request specific information from government departments and agencies, and this is supported by a “freedom of information champion”, the Office of the Australian Information Commissioner.

To work properly, these schemes and regimes need the ongoing support, cooperation and buy-in (literally in the form of funding) from government. This has, at times, been less than forthcoming, which can hobble their operation in different ways.

There are also several reasons why a government might refuse to publicly disclose what it is doing. Former High Court Chief Justice Harry Gibbs said “government at a high level cannot function without some degree of secrecy”.

But limits and exceptions to transparency regimes are controversial. Does there need to be an exception at all? Does a particular document fall within the exception?

The government holds the upper hand in asserting whether a document falls within an exception, because they are the ones who know what the documents are. This gives rise to cynicism that these exceptions can be and are being abused.

Documents remaining buried

This cynicism may be warranted, as two recent reports by the Centre for Public Integrity show successive governments lack true commitment to transparency.

The first report was about Senate orders for the production of documents and how often the government complies with them.

One of the Senate’s most powerful tools in holding the executive to account is its ability to order the production of government documents.

But governments have a long history of avoiding compliance with Senate orders. They either outright refuse to respond, or offer broad claims of “public interest immunity” over sensitive documents, such as those relating to national security, Cabinet, federal relations or law enforcement.

While the Senate can sanction ministers who refuse to comply with its orders, such as through suspending them from the chamber, it has historically done little in response to government insouciance.

This means we don’t know whether the public interest immunity claims being made over the documents are valid, and there is currently no mechanism to find out.

The recent data show the government’s compliance rates with Senate orders to produce documents have fallen from 92% in 1993–96, to approximately 33% for the current parliament.

This is a low that only the Abbott/Turnbull government in the 44th parliament has the ignominious record of beating in the past 30-odd years.

It is coupled with the government increasingly claiming public interest immunity. Public interest immunity rejections as a proportion of non-compliance sat at 61% over the 46th Parliament, this rose to almost 68% over the Albanese government’s first term.

These averaged roughly one claim per week under Albanese, compared with about one claim every three weeks under by the Morrison government in the 46th parliament.

What about freedom of information?

The second report is on the operation of the Commonwealth’s freedom of information (FOI) regime.

The Albanese government’s performance on delivering transparency this way is a mixed bag.

First, the good news: the Office of the Australian Information Commissioner is better resourced, first-instance processing times have improved, and more of the reviews received by the OAIC are being finalised.

But the plaudits end there.

Whereas the proportion of requests granted in full stood at 59% in 2011–12, by 2023–24 it had fallen to just 25%.

Over the same period, outright refusals have ballooned from 12% to 23%.

The precipitous decline in the “refusal gap” (the difference between the proportion of requests granted in full and those refused) is alarming.

Moreover, it’s difficult to have confidence in the correctness of these refusals. In 2023–24, almost half of initial decisions were found to be flawed following internal review.

Processing timeframes are also cause for significant concern. Average processing time for Office of the Australian Information Commissioner reviews has blown out from 6 months in 2016-17, to 15.5 months in 2023-24.

Fixing the mess

Of course, numbers are not a full story. But they also cannot be denied, and these tell a damning story for government.

So how could they be addressed?

The Senate should adopt an independent legal arbiter to oversee claims for public interest immunity. This would discourage secrecy by providing an independent review mechanism for parliament to check the government’s immunity claims.

For this reform to work, the Senate must not shy away from flexing its enforcement muscles either. The government must know that lack of transparency has consequences.

In response to the freedom of information crisis, there’s a number of reforms that could improve transparency. These cover:

  • legislative changes such as clarifying that existing applications are not invalidated with a change in minister or portfolio title

  • greater resourcing to support information officer training and ongoing monitoring

  • and increasing parliamentary oversight of the regime.

Transparency is not an elite concern, but one of those who are otherwise not in the room. It is the peoples’ concern. Governments, however, have incentives to keep the status quo.

So even though Labor spoke a big transparency game in opposition, they have done little in government. We need to demand that they do.


The author would like to thank Catherine Williams, Executive Director of the Centre for Public Integrity, for her contributions to this article.The Conversation

Gabrielle Appleby, Professor of Law, UNSW Law School, UNSW Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

More than 2 in 5 young Australians are lonely, our new report shows. This is what could help

Oliver Rossi/Getty Images
Michelle H. LimUniversity of Sydney and Ben J. SmithUniversity of Sydney

Loneliness is not a word often associated with young people. We tend to think of our youth as a time spent with family, friends and being engaged with school and work activities. Loneliness is an experience we may be more likely to associate with older people.

In a new report looking at loneliness in young Australians, we found 43% of people aged 15 to 25 feel lonely. That’s more than two in five young people.

While one in four felt lonely when asked, one in seven had felt lonely for at least two years (what we call persistent loneliness).

There’s more we should be doing in Australia to address loneliness among young people and more broadly.

What else did we find?

In this report, we analysed data from the Household, Income and Labour Dynamics in Australia survey from 2022–23. This helped us understand what sort of factors increase the risk of loneliness among young people.

We found having poor physical health and mental health can double (or more) the likelihood of persistent loneliness among young people.

Life circumstances, as well as socioeconomic and behavioural factors, also play a role, as shown below.

Worryingly, young people who report persistent loneliness are over seven times more likely to experience high or very high psychological distress compared to those who aren’t lonely.

But loneliness in young people should not be seen just as a mental health issue. Research shows it can have consequences for physical health too. For example, a study published in 2024 found loneliness is linked to early signs of vascular dysfunction (functional changes to the arteries) in adults as young as 22.

Why does loneliness persist?

As well as analysing data, we also interviewed young people aged 16 to 25 from diverse backgrounds about what helps them make healthy social connections, and what hinders them.

One of the things they flagged was a need for safe community spaces. A male participant from metro New South Wales, aged between 22 and 25, said:

After lectures, someone’s hungry, you go to eat together. We used to go to [Name of restaurant] after almost every lecture. Talk or discuss somethings so it gave us that extra opportunity to mingle amongst each other and take that next step towards building a good friendship.

We found technology could both help and hinder social connections. A female from regional Victoria, aged 22 to 25, who identified as LGBTIQ+, told us:

If you’re in school or something like that and you don’t really have […] many people within your community to look to, it’s really nice being able to connect with people and make those friends online.

On the flip side, a female participant from metropolitan Victoria, aged between 16 and 18, said:

a lot of maybe like mean stuff or like bullying and stuff happens over the Internet […] there’s a big group chat and like everyone’s texting on it or something. And then a lot of the time, people will break off into a smaller chat […] or they’ll break off into one on one and be like, ohh, do you see what she said?

The high cost of living was also regarded as a hindrance to maintaining social connections. As a male aged 22 to 25 from metro NSW told us:

you’ll go on [a] drive [with friends] or whatever […] but that is so like incredibly expensive. Having to pay for your own car and like petrol and insurance and maintenance. Sometimes it’s hard to […] even like […] sit down in peace and have a chat. All the cafes will close at 2 and by the time everyone gets out of their jobs, you’re having to go to a restaurant and [you’re] spending 50 dollars.

So what can we do?

Loneliness has long been treated as a personal issue but it’s increasingly clear we have to shift our approach to include community-wide and systemic solutions.

The World Health Organization’s Commission on Social Connection recently released a report pointing to loneliness as a public health, social, community and economic issue.

In Australia, the economic burden of loneliness stands at A$2.7 billion each year for associated health-care costs including GP and hospital visits.

And there are additional costs including lower workforce productivity and educational outcomes that have yet to be accounted for.

Some countries have already developed and implemented strategies to address loneliness. In 2023, Denmark, for example, commissioned the development of a national loneliness action plan led by a consortium of organisations. This was underpinned by an investment of around 21 million Danish kroner (roughly A$5 million) over 2023–25.

Australia now stands at a crossroads.

Australia needs a national loneliness strategy

A national strategy underpinned by evidence and by lived experience is crucial to effectively address loneliness. This approach would:

  • coordinate efforts across sectors: health, education, social services and business

  • identify effective strategies that should be included in a comprehensive response, and the principles to guide their delivery in communities and other settings

  • highlight sub-groups at risk of persistent loneliness who should be prioritised within population-wide strategies

  • commit to the delivery of a national awareness campaign that can educate the public and reduce stigma around loneliness.

With the right national strategy, we will be able to increase our capacity to help all Australians, not just young people, connect in meaningful ways.


If this article has raised issues for you, or if you’re concerned about someone you know, call Lifeline on 13 11 14. You can learn more about youth loneliness and how to help at Ending Loneliness Together.The Conversation

Michelle H. Lim, Associate Professor, Sydney School of Public Health, University of Sydney and Ben J. Smith, Professor of Public Health, University of Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Want to save yourself from super scams and dodgy financial advice? Ask these questions

Angelique Nadia Sweetman McInnesCQUniversity Australia

Is there anything you can do to protect your superannuation from dodgy providers or questionable financial advice? And if someone rings you out of the blue and tempts you with a better return on your savings – what should you do?

Around 12,000 Australians with A$1.2 billion in retirement savings have been caught up in three collapsed or frozen fundsFirst GuardianShield and Australian Fiduciaries.

People have described being cold-called or seeing ads on social media, suggesting they could earn more by leaving their current super fund. Several financial advisers linked to these funds have now been banned for giving “inappropriate advice” to clients, containing “false and misleading statements”.

As a former financial adviser and now researcher, here are the questions I wish more people asked to screen out scammers and dodgy financial advisers faster – and places to seek help if you need it.

What do I do if someone calls with an unexpected sales pitch?

The first thing you need to know is that in Australia we have anti-hawking legislation. This prohibits people making cold calls or unsolicited face-to-face approaches for financial products, such as superannuation.

If you get a phone call like that, the official advice is now to hang up immediately. If they persist, you could say:

I didn’t request this cold call. Did you know you’re breaking the law and I can report you?

They will probably put the phone down! They know they’re not doing the right thing. If they keep talking, hang up.

Block their number. Tell a family member if you need help. If you’ve shared personal information, call your super fund or bank.

I’m thinking of switching super funds. What should I ask first?

Whether you’re talking to a super fund or a financial adviser, my first three questions would be about their fees, what’s known as “the 4Ps” – philosophy, people, process and performance – and risk profile.

What are the fees?

Don’t just look at a super fund’s returns: look closely at their fees.

Your super fund statement will disclose how much administration, insurance premiums, transactions, buy/sell spread and investment fees and costs are being deducted.

High fees charged by a trustee eat up your super balance over time. If a fund earns 7% annually and charges fees of 0.63% annually, then your actual return is only 6.37%.

Is the fund a good match on “the 4 Ps”?

Go to the provider’s website to understand whether the fund’s philosophy reflect your core beliefs about investing and risk.

Learn about the reputations of the people behind the fund who lead and invest your money.

Find out what process they use to select and manage investments. Finally, consider how well and consistently the fund has performed over the past five to ten years.

What’s the risk profile?

Super funds classify investment options into risk profiles (such as conservative, balanced or growth) to provide you with investments to match your risk tolerance and age.

You can find a fund’s risk profile on the fund’s website under investment options, in the product disclosure statement and target market determination.

How can I compare my super fund?

Want to check if your retirement savings are in an underperforming fund? For the past few years, the Australian Prudential Regulation Authority (APRA) has called out MySuper funds that aren’t performing to standard.

Compare funds with the Australian Tax Office’s YourSuper Comparison Tool.

How I can find out if a financial adviser’s been in trouble?

On advisers, you can investigate their reputation or past complaints at:

If you’re comfortable using OpenAI, such as ChatGPT or CoPilot, you can try searching with the following prompts.

  • “Can you find any complaints or disciplinary actions against (name of adviser/fund)?”
  • “What is the public reputation of (adviser/fund) in financial forums or news?”
  • “Has (adviser/fund) been mentioned in any ASIC enforceable actions, bans or media reports?”

More action promised, but not yet delivered

There are echoes in what’s allegedly happened with First Guardian and Shield of Storm Financial’s collapse in 2009, which also hit thousands of people.

There are bad apples in every industry. Whether it’s in finance or medicine, it’s often colleagues who know who the dodgy operators are. Then it’s a question of whether anyone does anything about it.

In the case of First Guardian and Shield, other financial advisers helped raise the alarm – unfortunately several years before the corporate watchdog, the Australian Securities and Investments Commission, acted.

The commission says they’re now working with the federal government on more “reform options”. But that won’t help the thousands of people currently without access to their retirement savings, uncertain how much of those funds they’ll recover.


You can seek free counselling and advice from the National Debt Helpline (1800 007 007); Mob Strong Debt Helpline (1800 808 488) for Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander people; or the Consumer Action Law Centre.

Disclaimer: this is general information only and not to be taken as financial advice.The Conversation

Angelique Nadia Sweetman McInnes, Academic in Financial Planning, CQUniversity Australia

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Australia's Disability Strategy updated

July 30, 2025
The Australian Government's Department of Health, Disability and Ageing states it has updated Australia’s Disability Strategy to deliver better outcomes for people with disability.

Australia’s Disability Strategy is the nation’s disability policy framework. It calls on all Australians to ensure people with disability can participate as equal members of society.

The strategy was reviewed over the past year. The review was based on feedback from people with disability and the wider community. We asked what parts of the strategy were working and what needed to change.

The Department of Health, Disability and Ageing states; ''We’ve heard your feedback and have updated the strategy so that it continues to drive outcomes for the 5.5 million Australians with disability.''

The updated strategy has several supporting documents, including:
  • 3 new targeted action plans
  • a revised Data Improvement Plan
  • the Guide to Applying Australia’s Disability Strategy 2021–2031.

Versions for Easy Read, Auslan and languages other than English are available.

Targeted action plans
Targeted action plans help governments do extra work in specific areas. These areas have been identified by people with disability.

The 3 new targeted action plans for 2025–2027 are:
The first 5 targeted action plans have now concluded. You can find out what was achieved in the Third Targeted Action Plan Report. This is the final report covering this set of targeted action plans.

Data Improvement Plan
Australia’s Disability Strategy 2021–2031 Data Improvement Plan has been revised.

The Data Improvement Plan shows how governments will improve the data and reporting needed to measure progress on outcomes for people with disability.

We revised the Data Improvement Plan in consultation with Disability Representative Organisations, Australia’s Disability Strategy Advisory Council and Australian, state and territory agencies.

Applying the strategy
The Guide to Applying Australia’s Disability Strategy 2021–2031 gives practical advice on how to apply the strategy’s guiding principles. 

The guide:
  • helps make sure policies, programs and service can work better for everyone
  • can be used by government, business and community to better consider people with disability in their work
  • helps you ‘Identify, Plan and Reflect’ on making the work you do more inclusive and accessible for people with disability.

Ground-breaking research to identify early signs of multiple sclerosis

July 30, 2025
In a major step towards early detection, University of South Australia researchers are investigating the biology behind multiple sclerosis (MS) to help predict people’s genetic risk of developing the disease, long before any symptoms appear.

Funded by an MS Australia Incubator Grant announced today, the Australian-first study will use a powerful new research method known as ‘recall by genotype’ to explore genetic causes of MS.

Specifically, the study will explore links between MS and the Epstein-Barr virus – a common virus best known for causing glandular fever, but increasingly believed to be a trigger for MS.

MS is a chronic autoimmune disease that disrupts communication between the brain, spinal cord and body. Affecting more than 33,000 Australians, the exact cause of MS remains unknown, though genetics and environmental factors are thought to play a key role.

Lead researcher, UniSA’s Dr David Stacey, says the research aims to untangle how the Epstein-Barr virus might lead to MS in some people but not others.

“For many years we’ve known that the Epstein-Barr virus is a likely precursor for MS,” Dr Stacey says.

“But because the virus affects up to 90% of the population, it’s difficult to pin down why some people go on to develop MS while others don’t.

“We believe the way a person’s immune system responds to the Epstein-Barr virus may be a key factor, and genetics can help us uncover that.”

The study will calculate MS genetic risk scores for more than 1000 South Australian participants without an MS diagnosis, then compare biological traits in a subset of participants with either high or low genetic risk.

“By grouping people based on their genetic profile, we expect to find those with a high genetic risk for MS will also show biological differences – even if they don’t have the disease,” Dr Stacey says. “That could reveal how the Epstein-Barr virus and MS are connected and identify early warning signs or biomarkers for MS.”

To enable this study, the researchers will use an innovative research design called ‘recall by genotype’ – or RbG for short. RbG studies use naturally occurring genetic variants that are strongly associated with a disease to group people for research. Participants are then ‘recalled’ for further testing based on their DNA, allowing researchers to study differences in a more targeted and reliable way.

The researchers have been working to establish resources to enable RbG studies in Australia, which until now have not been possible. This study will therefore help to establish standard operating procedures for participant recall and tackle important ethical questions about sharing genetic risk with research participants.

“If we identify people who are at risk of developing MS, we need to consider how – and whether – to share that information, particularly as this information may not yet be clinically actionable,” Dr Stacey says.

“This study will explore those ethical, legal and social questions to guide how future studies approach personal genetic risk.”

Ultimately, the research team – which includes collaborators from the Perron Institute and the University of Adelaide – hopes the study will pave the way for larger investigations and help support the development of early diagnostic tools and future preventative strategies for MS.

Precious finger traces from First Nations ancestors revealed in a glittering mountain cave in Australia

Mal and Dylan Siely examine finger grooves at Waribruk with GunaiKurnai Elder Uncle Russell Mullett. Photo by Jess Shapiro, courtesy of GunaiKurnai Land and Waters Aboriginal Corporation
Russell MullettIndigenous KnowledgeBruno DavidMonash University, and Madeleine KellyFlinders University

Australia’s First Nations history stretches back many tens of thousands of years, rich in depth and diversity.

Archaeological research has revealed much about this deep past, but it has rarely captured the gestures of the ancestors – their movements, postures and physical motions. Material traces like tools and hearths tend to survive; fleeting movements usually do not.

Newly published research in the journal Australian Archaeology has revealed something different: traces of hand movements preserved in soft rock deep within GunaiKurnai Country.

In a limestone cave in the foothills of the Victorian alps, a team of researchers led by the GunaiKurnai Land and Waters Aboriginal Corporation in partnership with Monash University and international archaeologists from Spain, France and New Zealand studied finger impressions dragged into the walls and ceilings. They reveal the hand movements of ancestors from thousands of years ago.

The glittering Waribruk

The cave, referred to by GunaiKurnai Elders as Waribruk, contains a pitch-black chamber beyond the reach of natural light. To enter and mark these walls, the ancestors would have needed artificial light: firesticks or small fires.

The cave’s deeper interior walls became soft over millions of years as underground waters penetrated the limestone, slowly weathering and dissolving the rock into cavernous tunnels.

The remaining wall surfaces and ceilings became spongy and malleable, much like the texture of playdough.

Over time, cave-dwelling bacteria living on the soft, moist rock produced luminescent microcrystals, so that today, the walls and ceiling glitter when exposed to light.

It is on these glittering surfaces that the finger grooves are found.

We don’t know exactly when they were made, but people would have needed artificial light to reach this part of the cave. They would have either carried firesticks or lit fires on the ground.

Archaeological excavations below and near the panels failed to uncover evidence of fires on the ground, but we did find millimetre-long fragments of charcoal and tiny patches of ash, likely dropped embers from firesticks.

These were found buried in the cave floor under and near the decorated walls. They date between 8,400 and 1,800 years ago, about 420 to 90 generations past.

This, then, is the best estimate for how long ago the old ancestors moved through the dark tunnels of the cave, firelight in hand, to create the finger impressions on the walls.

Rare ancestral gestures

What they made when they dragged their fingers along the soft rock surfaces deep in the cave is remarkable, revealing rare evidence of ancestral gestures: fleeting bodily movements captured in soft cave surfaces.

On one panel, 96 sets of grooves were recorded. The first marks run horizontally, made by multiple fingers, sometimes both hands side by side. Later, vertical and diagonal grooves were added, intersecting the earlier ones.

Among them are two parallel sets of narrow impressions, only 3 to 5 millimetres wide for each finger. They are each set a short distance apart, indicating they were made by a small child. However, they’re so high up, the child must have been lifted by an adult.

Deeper in the cave, a low ceiling panel bears 262 grooves above a narrow clay bench sloping steeply toward a creek bed. The grooves indicate people moved along the ledge, crawling, sitting, or balancing to reach the ceiling.

Farther along, 193 grooves trace a path above the creek bed. Fingers were pressed into the soft ceiling, gradually releasing 1.6 metres farther along as the people walked forward.

All impressions point the same way, suggesting arms and hands raised overhead, capturing a deliberate, embodied gesture as the ancestors moved deeper into the cave.

A place only few could enter

Altogether there are 950 sets of finger grooves deep within Waribruk. Their meaning remained unclear for years, but a close analysis of where the marks appear, and where they don’t, offers key insights.

The grooves are always located in areas where calcite microcrystals coat the cave walls or ceiling, sometimes just extending past the glitter’s edges. They never appear in areas of the cave where the soft walls are without glitter.

Crucially, they occur far from any archaeological evidence of domestic life: no hearths, no food remains, no tools.

This absence matters. GunaiKurnai oral traditions hold that such caves weren’t used for ordinary living. They were only frequented by special individuals, mulla-mullung – medicine men and women who wielded powerful knowledge.

Mulla-mullung healed and cursed through ritual, using crystals and powdered minerals as part of their practice.

In the late 1800s, GunaiKurnai knowledge-holders told the pioneer ethnographer Alfred Howitt about the powers of these crystals, and of the caves. The role of mulla-mullung, they explained, was usually passed on from parent to child, and when a mulla-mullung lost their crystals, they lost their powers.

The finger grooves at Waribruk matches these traditions. They are not casual decorations. They are deliberate gestures, linked to crystal-coated surfaces, made in places only a few could enter.

The grooves reflect movement, touch, and sources of power for special individuals in the community: an embodied record of people interacting with the sacred.

What survives is not just ancient “rock art”. These are the gestures of ancestors, mulla-mullung it now seems, who ventured into the deepest darkness of the cave to access the power of the glittering surfaces.

Through these finger trails, we glimpse not only a physical act, but a cultural practice grounded in knowledge, memory and spirituality. A momentary movement, preserved in stone, connecting us to lives lived long ago – and breathing the cave to life through the actions of the ancestors and culture.


Acknowledgements: The authors are just three of the 13 authors of the journal article, including Olivia Rivero Vilá and Diego Garate Maidagan, who undertook the photography to create the digital 3D models of the panels to record and measure the size of the finger grooves.The Conversation

Russell Mullett, Traditional Custodian — Kurnai, Indigenous KnowledgeBruno David, Professor, Australian Research Council Industry Laureate, Monash University, and Madeleine Kelly, Research Associate, College of Science and Engineering, Flinders University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

China’s greening steel industry signals an economic reality check for Australia

CUHRIG/Getty
Christoph NedopilGriffith University

Australia has flourished as an export powerhouse for decades. Much of this prosperity has been driven by the nation’s natural endowment with two important raw products for producing steel the traditional way: iron ore and metallurgical coal.

Worth more than A$100 billion in 2024, Australia’s iron ore shipments to China make up about 55% of everything we export there. But a transformation has been taking place in China’s steel industry, which is under intense pressure to decarbonise.

Earlier this year, Beijing formally expanded its national emissions trading scheme to cover steel production. And just this month, it issued another decree requiring steelmakers to increase their share of green energy in steel production.

Prime Minister Anthony Albanese’s recent visit to China may have looked like a celebration of normalised diplomatic or trade ties. Behind the scenes was a quiet but critical economic pivot.

Australia’s economic future depends on whether it can green its exports fast enough to meet the decarbonisation needs of its biggest market.

A greener China

In China, no new permits for coal-based steelmaking appear to have been issued since early 2024. However, China has been approving new, greener steelmaking capacity, using electric arc furnace (EAF) technology, the main low-emissions technology in steel.

These furnaces use high-voltage electric arcs, powered ideally by green energy, to melt scrap steel or what’s known as direct reduced iron (DRI). Through that process, they limit carbon emissions by reducing the use of thermal coal for electricity and metallurgical coal for iron making in blast furnaces.

In total, China has now installed enough electric arc furnaces to produce more than 160 million tonnes of steel annually. That’s about the same as the total steel output of Japan and the United States combined.

China’s current 10% share of steel production from electric arc furnaces still remains below the country’s 15% target. But overall, China’s total domestic steel production continues to fall. With real estate, infrastructure and heavy industry slowing, steel consumption is forecast to drop by more than 20% this decade.

Rather than prop up its old blast furnaces, rapidly falling green energy prices and increased capacity should allow China to accelerate its shift towards green steel.

Electric arc furnace with sparks seen flying
Electric arc furnace technology can produce steel with lower emissions than traditional processes. Oleksiy Mark/Shutterstock

Why Australia is so exposed

China’s transition directly threatens two pillars of Australia’s export model: coal and iron ore.

The use of thermal coal is poised to decline as China ramps up renewables and needs to burn less coal for electricity.

The other coal type exported from Australia, metallurgical coal (sometimes called “coking” coal), is needed for the traditional “basic oxygen process” of making steel. This is already being squeezed by lower demand and the shift to green steel production.

In the past five years, Australia’s metallurgical coal exports have already fallen by about 15%, despite persistent predictions for growing demand.

Australian iron ore reserves, meanwhile, are primarily composed of hematite, meaning they’re less suited for green steelmaking. Unprocessed, these reserves lack the grade needed for direct reduction using green hydrogen. That incentivises Chinese mills to move to cleaner inputs from elsewhere.

This transformation won’t be immediate. But the nature of long-term investment cycles means Australia faces a choice: start integrating into these greener supply chains, or face key national assets becoming stranded.

Invest in a green future or face irrelevance

Australia can adjust to this new reality. While coal may not have much of a future, iron ore can be processed to make it suitable for green steel production. Yet, significant investment in research and development is required to produce competitive green iron pellets from hematite.

For some in the industry, this transition is already under way. Fortescue, for example, has committed to real net-zero emissions by 2030, without relying on offsets. It is also investing in the development of green iron products. This is not just for climate leadership, but to preserve competitiveness.

The company is also pushing for Australia to adopt a national 75% emissions reduction target by 2035.

Albanese’s trip might mark a turning point

Ambition alone won’t suffice. Australia also needs demand and policy certainty to attract domestic and international investment — including from China.

That’s where Albanese’s recent trip to our biggest trading partner may mark a turning point. One of the most consequential outcomes of this trip could turn out to be the establishment of a new policy dialogue on steel decarbonisation.

This signals an intent from the Australian and Chinese governments to align on standards, contracts and investment frameworks — not just for iron ore, but for green iron, hydrogen and low-carbon steel.

But talk is cheap. Turning this dialogue into real outcomes will require Australia to address difficult questions. Can Australian companies secure sufficient demand from China to justify investments in green supply contracts — not just for iron ore, but for hydrogen, green iron or even finished steel?

And can Australia attract international investors – including from China – to green energy and iron processing, despite recent decisions by Australia’s Foreign Investment Review Board to block or unwind certain Chinese investments?

Unlocking investment

New financial instruments may also be needed to unlock investment. One option is green steel certificates.

Similar to renewable energy certificates (RECs), green steel certificates would allow producers to generate a credit for producing green steel that can be sold to interested “green” buyers, while the steel itself could be used in close-by markets to avoid emissions related to long-distance transport.

While much of the commentary on Albanese’s trip revolved around diplomacy and geopolitics, its real legacy may be economic.

As China continues – and in all likelihood, accelerates – its transition to a low-carbon model, Australia can no longer count on sustained demand for its coal and iron ore exports.The Conversation

Christoph Nedopil, Director Griffith Asia Institute, Griffith University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

‘I was very fearful of my parents’: new research shows how parents can use coercive control on their children

Kate Fitz-GibbonMonash University

In Australia, there is growing recognition that children and young people are not just witnesses to domestic, family and sexual violence, but victim-survivors in their own right.

While we are getting better at understanding how coercive control operates in adult relationships – particularly where men use it against women – much less attention has been given to how children experience this kind of abuse, especially when it comes from a parent or caregiver.

New research interviewing teenage victim-survivors reveals how parents can coercively control their children under the guise of parental discipline.

What is coercive control?

Coercive control is a pattern of abusive behaviours used to instil fear, dominate or isolate someone over time. It can include:

  • physical violence

  • sexual abuse

  • surveillance

  • threats

  • humiliation

  • limiting access to money

  • technology-facilitated abuse

  • animal abuse, among many other abusive tactics.

Focusing largely on adult victim-survivors, research has found experiences of coercive control can have cumulative and long-lasting negative impacts.

Studies of children show how coercive control can erode a child’s mental health, self-esteem and sense of safety.

Fear, guilt and manipulation

For young people, within the context of the family, coercive control may be perpetrated by parents, step-parents, caregivers, siblings and other family members. The tactics used may mirror those seen in adult contexts.

But there are different circumstances at play for children. They are typically dependent on their caregivers, still mentally developing, and often have limited access to external support.

My new report, Silence and Inaction, released by the South Australian Royal Commission into Domestic, Family and Sexual Violence, draws on interviews with 53 young people aged 13–18 who have experienced different forms of domestic, family and sexual violence in that state.

In this study, young victim-survivors spoke of rules imposed by abusive adults in their family to control their friendships, communication, bodily autonomy and emotional expression. These were often enforced through fear, guilt or manipulation. One child told me:

I kicked the wall when I was eight, and my parents came in and they stripped my entire room bare, just got rid of everything […] I was either in my room or was at school […] I got water brought to me, food brought to me three times a day […] they said, “You have abused this home. It was a loving place, and you’ve abused it so when people do things wrong, they go to prison”. I was very fearful of my parents.

Several young people described experiences that reflect the dynamics of coercive control, even if they did not use that language themselves. They spoke of environments where control, surveillance and isolation were constant, and where resistance or independence was met with punishment.

Experiences of gaslighting

Several young victim-survivors interviewed described being made to feel “crazy” or “overdramatic” when they challenged the behaviour they were experiencing. Others were punished for asserting boundaries or seeking help.

A number of young people described experiences of gaslighting – being told their memories or feelings were wrong or exaggerated.

This was particularly apparent among young people who had tried to speak up about the violence they were experiencing. One young victim-survivor told me:

I was very much gaslighting myself, and then also was being gaslit for years prior by my father and not made to feel that I could ever tell anyone.

Some young victim-survivors described beginning to question their own perceptions or feeling responsible for the harm they experienced. One young person said:

I always have a fear in my head that everything I’ve said and done [is] just a massive lie, which is why I documented a lot of things […] I have photos and videos of things that have happened […] it kind of keeps me a little bit sane.

For the young people interviewed, the dynamics of coercive control were further compounded by their legal and financial dependence on the person using violence.

Young people described having limited avenues to escape or resist the abuse, and having little access to alternative sources of care or trusted adults for support.

Discipline or control?

Many of the young people I interviewed said the abuse they experienced was explained away by parents as “discipline”.

Reasonable parenting involves setting boundaries and enforcing rules through clear communication and respect for a child’s emotional and physical safety. What the young people in the study described went well beyond that.

The young people interviewed described being physically punished – through beatings, slaps or threats – as a way of “correcting” behaviour or “teaching respect”.

For young people, this led to confusion and self-doubt about whether what they experienced “counted” as abuse.

This mislabelling of abuse as discipline was particularly difficult for young people to challenge when it was reinforced by religious, cultural or generational norms. In some cases, violence was deeply embedded in family tradition and viewed as an expected method of parenting.

Young people interviewed expressed a strong desire for this cycle to be broken, including through education for caregivers. One young victim said:

it’s not just kids who need to learn – adults need to unlearn the stuff they were taught too.

The need for change

Several young people believed some parents may be unaware of the impacts of these forms of punishment. They called for targeted awareness campaigns and community education. One young victim-survivor suggested:

they feel that is still part of discipline, whereas they are actually going extra miles […] I think parents too need to be educated on how they treat their children.

Several young people said their experiences of abuse were often minimised or dismissed as necessary or appropriate acts of discipline by extended family, caregivers or other adults in their community.

This highlights the need to better engage families and communities to change understandings of discipline, particularly through culturally responsive, trauma-informed approaches to education.

We must develop deeper understandings of coercive and controlling behaviours as they are experienced by children and young people in families.

Without such awareness, there is a risk that controlling behaviour will continue to be minimised as “strict parenting”, or young people’s disclosures will be dismissed.

These experiences highlight the problem of the normalisation of violence in some households and the need for greater prevention and early intervention efforts, both for young people and caregivers.The Conversation

Kate Fitz-Gibbon, Professor (Practice), Faculty of Business and Economics, Monash University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Albanese government to include YouTube in social media ban for under-16s

Michelle GrattanUniversity of Canberra

The Albanese government has decided to include YouTube accounts in its ban on access to social media for those under the age of 16.

The decision will be controversial with many social media users, especially young people, and face resistance from the company. YouTube, owned by Google, has threatened to sue if it were included in the ban.

The government said in a statement that it was “Informed by advice from the eSafety Commissioner”.

The eSafety Commissioner, Julie Inman Grant, said in her advice to the Minister for Communications Anika Wells last month, “YouTube currently employs persuasive design features and functionality that may be associated with harms to health, including those which may contribute to unwanted or excessive use”.

Apart from YouTube, platforms that will be age restricted are Facebook, Instagram, Snapchat, TikTok, and X, among others.

Platforms will face fines up to $49.5 million if they are found to fail to take responsible steps to prevent underage account holders using them.

Young people would still be able to access YouTube through a search, but would be unable to set up an account.

Argument has raged about whether YouTube should be included in the ban, with those opposed to capturing it arguing it has educational value to younger people.

“YouTube is a video-sharing platform, not a social media service, that offers benefit and value to younger Australians,” a YouTube spokesperson said in its defence.

A range of online gaming, messaging apps, health and education services are being exempted from the ban. “These types of online services have been excluded from the new minimum age obligations because they pose fewer social media harms to under 16s, or are regulated under different laws,” the government said in a statement.

The ban comes into effect on December 10 this year. Age-restricted social media accounts are defined as services that allow users to interact and post material.

Prime Minister Anthony Albanese said:

Our government is making it clear – we stand on the side of families. Social media has a social responsibility and there is no doubt that Australian kids are being negatively impacted by online platforms so I’m calling time on it.

Social media is doing social harm to our children, and I want Australian parents to know that we have their backs.

Wells said there was no perfect solution to keep people safer online, “but the social media minimum age will make a significantly positive difference to their wellbeing. The rules are not a set and forget, they are a set and support.”The Conversation

Michelle Grattan, Professorial Fellow, University of Canberra

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Prac payments must be extended to medical students to bolster rural workforce: AMA

The Australian Medical Association has written to independent MP Dr Monique Ryan welcoming her draft amendment to HELP debt legislation to extend prac payments medical students, a proposal the AMA has previously raised with the federal government.

Australian medical students are currently required to undertake 2000 hours of unpaid clinical placements, often in rural and regional settings while incurring a significant financial burden.

AMA President Dr Danielle McMullen said in the face of ongoing workforce shortages it was simply “odd” that medical students were not eligible for prac payments while students from other disciplines receive financial support for their mandatory placements.

“It really is odd to exclude our medical students from the same financial help other students receive while expecting them to undertake practical placements, often in rural, regional and remote areas,” Dr McMullen said.

“I wrote to the Education Minister last year to extend the scheme to medical students, especially as we are struggling to fill rural and regional healthcare positions.

“We again urge the government to get on board and support Dr Ryan’s amendment which would remove the inequity faced by medical students and removing disincentives to get our medical students out bush.”

The current inequity in healthcare outcomes for rural and remote patients was highlighted by the AMA earlier this year.

Dr McMullen said the “evidence also tells us that medical students that practice in a rural and regional area are more likely to stay in a rural and regional areas. Helping these students stay and undertake their practice in rural and remote communities will mean more doctors in areas that struggle the most with access.”  

“Helping students have a well-supported experience of rural medicine is vital to entice students to pursue a career in rural practice and in other underserviced communities,” she said.

“Dr Ryan’s amendment is supported by hundreds of thousands of Australians, with more than 290,000 signatures on her petition in favour of helping support our rural communities with this amendment.”

“Removing the unfair financial exclusion of medical students can make a real difference to our future medical workforce and we encourage the government to get on board as part of efforts to improve rural access to medical services.”

The Commonwealth prac payment scheme — announced in the 2024–25 federal budget — provides means tested support to nursing and midwifery students undertaking mandatory placements.   

AMA Indigenous Medical Scholarship reaches historic milestone

Three medical students will be awarded an AMA Indigenous Medical Scholarship this year for the first time in the program’s 30-year history.

AMA President Dr Danielle McMullen said 2025 marked a critical point in the scholarship’s future, as it is the first time it has been financially possible to award three scholarships in a single year.

“The AMA Indigenous Medical Scholarship has been supporting Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander medical students for decades, and we are thrilled to expand that support this year,” Dr McMullen said.

“This was made possible by the generosity of many donors, who recognised the need to increase Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander leadership in our medical workforce.”

Dr McMullen said the scholarships, each worth $11,000 per year for the remainder of the student’s degree, is aimed at closing the gap in health outcomes by empowering the next generation of First Nations doctors.

“We know Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander peoples experience better health outcomes when they are directly involved in the design and delivery of their healthcare models,” she said.

“That’s why it’s so important to support more First Nations students to study medicine and become healthcare leaders in their communities.”

This year’s recipients hail from South Australia, Queensland and Western Australia — three outstanding students who will be presented with their scholarships at the AMA25 National Conference this weekend.

Samantha Nillissen, a proud Aboriginal midwife and Flinders University medical student, said she faced more than just academic hurdles on her path into medicine. She said the scholarship would provide the support and recognition needed to continue following her aspirations of becoming a paediatrician.

“I’ve been homeless twice. I know what it means to live on the margins — feeling invisible within a healthcare system that doesn’t always recognise the realities of time or lived experience,” Ms Nillissen said.

“These experiences opened my eyes to the deep disparities that exist and gave me a clear sense of purpose: to fight and advocate on behalf of the vulnerable. I want to be a doctor who truly sees people, understands their context, and helps build a more compassionate and equitable healthcare system for all.”

Myles McKenzie, a Barundji Aboriginal man and third-year medical student at James Cook University, hopes to pursue psychiatry to address the gaps in mental health outcomes for Aboriginal and Torres Strait Islander peoples.

“We know that over a third of Aboriginal people experience some sort of mental health condition, and yet you can roughly count on one hand how many Aboriginal psychiatrists there are,” he said.

“Suicide has become the leading cause of death for Aboriginal children aged five to 17, so that is a big driver for me pursuing psychiatry, because I know that I can work with both the mental health system and from a cultural perspective to address those challenges.”

Kayla Williams-Tucker, a Wongutha, Ngarluma and Wudjari-Noongar woman and third-year medical student at the University of Notre Dame WA, also has her sights set on paediatrics.

“I am deeply committed to becoming a future Aboriginal paediatrician, using my medical training to improve the health and wellbeing of Indigenous children and their families,” she said.

“I am especially passionate about prevention, education, and advocacy, with a strong focus on early intervention and developmental health. As a mother to a child with developmental needs, I know firsthand how difficult it can be to navigate a healthcare system that too often feels like it was not built for us. 

“These personal and lived experiences drive my determination to be a doctor who listens, understands, and walks alongside families during their most vulnerable times.”

Work to begin on New Richmond Bridge

On Monday July 28 the NSW State Government announced work is now underway on two transformative projects in the Hawkesbury region: the Pitt Town Bypass, and the commencement of enabling works for the new Richmond Bridge.

The projects, costed at over $600 million, aim to improve flood resilience, reduce congestion and boost safety for local residents and visitors to the region.

Pitt Town Bypass
Major works are set to begin on the long-awaited Pitt Town Bypass, a $100 million NSW Government project set to improve travel times and safety in the region.

The 950-metre bypass will link Pitt Town Road and Cattai Road with two new roundabouts and a new bridge across Hortons Creek. It will divert traffic, including heavy vehicles, away from the village centre, easing congestion and improving access for emergency services.

Abergeldie Complex Infrastructure has been awarded the contract and will soon begin geotechnical and survey work ahead of full construction from August 1, 2026. The bypass is due to open to traffic by the end of 2026.

Road Upgrades ahead of a New Richmond Bridge
Shovels are in the ground as work begins on the first stage of road upgrades in the Hawkesbury that will eventually connect to the New Richmond Bridge.

The $515 million project, funded by the Albanese and Minns Governments, will see two new roundabouts be built along The Driftway at Londonderry and Blacktown Roads, improving safety and traffic flow during flood evacuations.

The upgrade at Londonderry Road will include a new roundabout and an additional southbound lane to support emergency evacuations. A new roundabout and new bridge across Rickabys Creek will also be delivered at Blacktown Road, improving safety and flood resilience.

Government is preparing to release the Stage 2 Determination Report, responding to community feedback. Stage 2 includes construction of a new four-lane bridge over the Hawkesbury River, around 10 metres higher than the existing bridge, providing significant flood immunity and improved access during extreme weather.

Construction on Stage 2 is expected to begin in 2026. Visit: www.transport.nsw.gov.au/new-richmond-bridge-stage-2

The government sated that thanks to community feedback, extra funding has been committed by the Albanese Government towards a future stage of the New Richmond Bridge project, to support delivery of a bypass to Londonderry and key North Richmond intersection upgrades.

Federal Minister for Infrastructure, Transport, Regional Development and Local Government, Catherine King stated:

“The Albanese Government is proud to be working with the Minns Government to deliver key road upgrades near Richmond. Once complete, stages one and two of this project will improve flood resilience, safety, and connectivity across the Hawkesbury.

“We’ve listened to community feedback and responded with additional investment to deliver additional key upgrades for road connections are delivered alongside the New Richmond Bridge.

“We’re building infrastructure that locals can rely on, day in, day out, rain or shine.”

NSW Minister for Roads, Jenny Aitchison stated:

“These two projects show the Minns Labor Government is serious about building a safer and more resilient road network across North Western Sydney. We’re reducing congestion, improving flood evacuation routes, and delivering the infrastructure that communities like Pitt Town and Richmond need and deserve.

“The New Richmond Bridge will transform access across the Hawkesbury, while the Pitt Town Bypass will take pressure off local roads and make it easier for emergency services to do their job. These are practical upgrades that will have a lasting legacy.”

Federal Member for Macquarie, Susan Templeman stated:

“These two projects will make a real difference for the people of Hawkesbury. Whether it’s easing the pressure on Pitt Town or building a safer, flood-resilient connection across the river to North Richmond, this is about delivering infrastructure that keeps our communities connected, even in times of crisis.”

“I’m proud to be part of a Government that is working alongside the Minns Government to deliver what locals and I have long called for.”

New chapter for readers and writers at the State Library with the Sydney Writers Festival hub

Readers and writers across the state will benefit from a $1.5 million investment to establish a dedicated literature hub in Sydney, providing a dynamic, year-round home for storytelling.

The partnership between the Sydney Writers Festival and the State Library of NSW will deliver a new continuous program of literary events in addition to its annual Festival, beginning this September 2025.

The $1.5 million initiative is the first part of a sector-wide strategy to position writing and literature at the heart of NSWs’ cultural, educational, and economic life.

Supported by world-class publishers, a depth of writing talent, and a network of festivals, libraries, schools, booksellers and literary organisations, the initiative will create over 300 paid opportunities for local writers over 12 months and offering exceptional events, many of them free.

The list of writers who have called NSW home stretches from iconic figures such as Patrick White, Christina Stead and Tom Keneally to contemporary global superstars like Anna Funder, Markus Zusak, Charlotte McConaghy, Tara June Winch and Aaron Blabey. The strategy, an Australian first, will recognise NSW is home to a rich and dynamic literary ecosystem.

The partnership between the Sydney Writers Festival and the State Library of NSW will boost participation in literary events, embed reading and writing into Sydney’s cultural identity, and deliver a diverse program of events, workshops and readings.

The initiative will also support global literary exchange and nurture emerging talent through appearances by international and local authors. Crucially, it will provide an inclusive and accessible platform for NSW’s diverse communities, amplifying underrepresented voices and strengthening the connection between writers and readers.

The first series of events, announced today and available for presale from 30 July, will bring some of the most exciting Australian and international voices to the Library Auditorium.

Highlights include Stella Prize winner Michelle de Kretser, 2025 Festival favourite Hannah Kent, former Australian Greens leader Bob Brown, and Happy Endings with Melanie Saward and Saman Shad.

Minister for Arts, John Graham said:
“In Australia, writers earn on average $18,500 per year, yet reading and writing are vital to our personal wellbeing, and to our collective prosperity.

“The NSW Government is pleased to support this partnership between the Sydney Writers Festival and the State Library of NSW. The partnership recognises the role libraries play as the homes for readers and writers, and the great contribution that writers festivals play in taking what is quite a solitary act – reading – and transforming it into community experience.

“This $1.5 million investment into a year-around program will benefit us all, strengthening the cultural heartbeat of our city, creating a home for readers and writers – a place for discussion, ideas, reflection, discovery.

“This investment is the first step in our upcoming writing and literature strategy – the first time an Australian government has put together a comprehensive strategy to support the writing and literature sector.”

Sydney Writers’ Festival CEO Brooke Webb said:
“Sydney Writers' Festival is proud to partner with the State Library of NSW — a relationship that began almost 30 years ago, when some of our earliest events were held there.

“This new chapter allows us to extend the spirit of the Festival year-round, engaging loyal audiences and inviting new readers to discover the power of books, stories, and ideas. United by a shared commitment to literature and learning, we’re working together to champion more writers, inspire readers, and nurture vibrant literary communities across NSW.”

State Librarian Dr. Caroline Butler-Bowdon said:
“As the home of reading, research and creativity in NSW, the State Library is pleased to be partnering with Sydney Writers’ Festival to enhance our state’s cultural offering and deepen our commitment to making literature and storytelling more accessible, inclusive and engaging for all.

“We’re excited to welcome new and familiar visitors through our doors and continue to offer unforgettable experiences all year round.”

NSW Government will legislate to limit pollie pay

The Minns Labor Government has announced it will introduce legislation when Parliament returns in August to limit the pay rises for NSW parliamentarians to 3.5 per cent in 2025-2026.

The independent Parliamentary Remuneration Tribunal (PRT) has awarded a 4 per cent for NSW politicians.

This comes as the Government’s legislated wage freeze of the pay of MPs, senior public servants, judges, the governor, and other office holders for two years came to an end on July 1.

It was a significant budget measure that saved the NSW budget hundreds of millions of dollars.

Given the Tribunal’s decision to award a higher increase than the base increase offered to essential public sector workers, the Minns Labor Government believes the most responsible and fair course of action is to align the parliamentary pay rise with the pay offer of 3.5 per cent to the general public sector workforce last financial year.

This ensures consistency with broader public sector wage settings and reflects the Government’s commitment to responsible budget management and fairness.

This will mean in the first three years of the Minns Labor Government, essential workers will have received a minimum pay rise of 10.5 per cent, three times higher than the 3.5 per cent plus super which politicians will have received in three years.

Premier Chris Minns said:
“We removed the wages cap so we could deliver fair pay increases to the essential workers who keep NSW running — like teachers, paramedics, nurses, firefighters and police.”

Special Minister of State John Graham said:
“While the government has settled the majority of public sector pay claims, there are still important pay disputes underway. We have taken the view it is the wrong moment for parliamentarian pay to increase by 4%.”

Should I limit how much fruit my child eats because it contains sugar?

Nick FullerUniversity of Sydney

Parents are often told fruit is “bad” because it contains sugar, prompting concerns about how much fruit they should allow their child to eat.

This message has been fuelled by the “sugar-free” movement, which demonises sugar with claims it’s fattening and causes diabetes. The movement promotes arbitrary lists of foods to avoid, which often include kids’ favourites such as bananas and berries.

But like many claims made by the diet industry, this one isn’t backed by evidence.

Naturally occurring versus added sugars

Sugar itself isn’t inherently harmful, but the type of sugar kids eat can be.

The good news is whole fruits contain naturally occurring sugars that are healthy and provide kids with energy. Whole fruits are packed with vitamins and minerals needed for good health. This includes vitamins A, C, E, magnesium, zinc and folic acid. All fruits are suitable – bananas, berries, mandarins, apples and mangoes, to name just a few.

The insoluble fibre in fruit skins also helps kids stay regular, and the soluble fibre in fruit flesh helps keep their cholesterol in a healthy range, absorbing “bad” cholesterol to reduce their long-term risk of stroke and heart disease.

Added sugars – which add calories but no nutritional value to kids’ diets – are the “bad” sugars and the ones to avoid. They’re found in processed and ultra-processed foods kids crave, such as lollies, chocolates, cakes and soft drinks.

Added sugars are often added to seemingly healthy packaged foods, such as muesli bars. They’re also hidden under 60-plus different names in ingredient lists, making them hard to spot.

Sugar, weight and diabetes risk

There’s no evidence backing claims that sugar directly causes diabetes.

Type 1 diabetes is an autoimmune disease that can’t be prevented or cured and has no connection to sugar consumption. Type 2 diabetes is typically caused when we carry excess body weight, which stops the body from working efficiently, not sugar intake.

However, a diet high in added sugars – found in many processed, ultra-processed foods (for example, sweet and savoury packaged snacks) – can mean kids consume excess calories and gain unnecessary weight, which may increase their chance of developing type 2 diabetes as they get older.

On the other hand, research shows that kids who eat more fruit have less abdominal fat.

Research also shows fruit can reduce the risk of type 2 diabetes, with one study finding kids who ate 1.5 servings of fruit daily had a 36% lower risk of developing the disease.

Nutritional deficiencies

A diet high in added sugars can also result in nutritional deficiencies.

Many processed foods offer low-to-no nutrition, which is why dietary guidelines recommend limiting them.

Kids filling up on these foods are less likely to eat vegetables, fruits, whole grains and lean meats, producing a diet lacking in fibre and other key nutrients needed for growth and development.

But these “discretionary foods” make up one-third of Aussie kids’ daily energy intake.

My advice? Give kids fruit in abundance

There’s no need to limit how much whole fruit kids eat – it’s nutritious, filling and can protect their health. It’s also going to fill them up and reduce their desire to scream out for the processed, packet food that is low in nutrition, and calorie-rich.

Just go easy on juiced and dried fruits because juicing leaves the goodness (the fibre) behind in the juicer, and drying strips fruits of their water content, making them easy to overconsume.

The nutritional guidelines recommend just two serves of fruit a day for those nine years of age and older, 1.5 serves from 4-8, one serve from 2–3, and half a serve from 1–2 years. But these guidelines are dated and need to be changed.

We do need to reduce kids’ sugar consumption. But this needs to be achieved by reducing their intake of processed foods that contain added sugars, rather than fruit.

Added sugars aren’t always easy to spot, so we should focus on reducing kids’ consumption of processed and packet foods and teaching them to rely on fruit – “nature’s treats” – as a way to keep unhealthy sugars out of their diets.

Nick Fuller is the author of Healthy Parents, Healthy Kids – Six Steps to Total Family Wellness.The Conversation

Nick Fuller, Clinical Trials Director, Department of Endocrinology, RPA Hospital, University of Sydney

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

‘No filter can fix that face’: how online body shaming harms teenage girls

Richard Drury/Getty Images
Taliah Jade PrinceUniversity of the Sunshine Coast and Daniel HermensUniversity of the Sunshine Coast

You’re so ugly it hurts.

Maybe if you lost some weight, someone would actually like you.

No filter can fix that face.

These are the sorts of comments teenage girls see online daily, via social media, group chats, or anonymous messages. While some may dismiss this as teasing, these comments constitute appearance-related cyberbullying.

Our previous research shows appearance-related cyberbullying is one of the most common and harmful forms of online abuse of young people. It not only hurts feelings – it changes how teens, particularly girls, see themselves.

In a new study, we’ve looked at brain images of teenage girls viewing appearance-related cyberbullying. We’ve found even just being exposed to online body shaming directed at others can activate regions of the brain linked to emotional pain and social threat.

What is appearance-related cyberbullying?

Appearance-related cyberbullying is any online behaviour that targets the way someone looks. This includes comments about their face, clothes or body. It often happens in public forums, such as comment sections or social media posts, where other people can see it, join in or share it.

The most damaging type focuses on someone’s body, such as their weight, shape or size. These messages don’t need to be long or explicit to hurt. Sometimes a single word, hashtag or even emoji is enough.

While appearance-related bullying can affect anyone, previous studies have shown teenage girls are particularly vulnerable.

During adolescence, the brain is still developing – especially the parts that shape self-esteem and help us make sense of how others see us. This means teenagers can be more affected by what people say about them.

What’s more, girls often feel strong societal pressure to look a certain way. This combination makes body shaming especially harmful.

How common is it?

In a survey of 336 teenage girls we published last year, 98% had experienced some form of cyberbullying. For 62% of them, the abuse targeted their appearance.

Most of those girls said this bullying had lasting effects on their body image and mental health, with 96% saying it made them want to change how they looked. More than 80% felt they needed to consider cosmetic procedures.

Studies from around the world have shown appearance-related cyberbullying is a strong predictor of body dissatisfaction, which is one of the biggest risk factors for eating disorders in teenage girls.

What does it do to the brain?

To understand how body-shaming content affects girls on a deeper level, we designed a brain imaging study.

First, we created a set of social media posts based on typical comments teenage girls see online. Some posts were neutral, while others included body shaming comments.

A mock up social media post with a picture of a woman riding a bike, with comments underneath.
We created social media posts like this one for our study. Author provided

More than 400 girls rated how realistic and emotionally powerful these posts were. This helped us validate the content so it could be used in current and future studies on how young people respond to body shaming online.

We then invited 26 girls aged 14 to 18, from the Longitudinal Adolescent Brain Study – a five-year research project at our university seeking to better understand how the teenage brain develops and how this relates to mental health – to take part in a brain scan study.

We used functional MRI, a technique that shows which areas of the brain are more active during certain experiences. Alongside the scans, participants completed questionnaires about their recent experiences of cyberbullying and their body image.

When girls viewed body-shaming posts, we found certain brain regions “lit up” more than others. These included areas involved in emotional pain, self-image, and social judgement. These are regions the brain uses to interpret how others see us, and how we deal with feelings such as shame or rejection.

Girls who had recently been cyberbullied showed more activity in memory and attention regions. This suggests they were reprocessing earlier, painful experiences. Girls with more positive body image, meanwhile, showed calmer, more regulated brain responses, suggesting healthy self-image might be protective.

A teenage girl lying on the ground using a laptop.
Appearance-related cyberbullying can have lasting effects on body image. Samuel Borges Photography/Shutterstock

Girls are affected even when they’re not targeted

Notably, the girls in our study were viewing posts aimed at others – not being subjected to bullying directly. But even so, we saw changes in the way their brains reacted, and how they felt about their own bodies seemed to affect these reactions.

This tells us something important: body-shaming content doesn’t just hurt the person it targets. When appearance is constantly judged and criticised, it can change what girls think is normal or acceptable. It may also affect how their brains respond to social and emotional situations.

What needs to change?

Appearance-related cyberbullying is not just about teenage conflict. It’s a wider, societal issue. Social media platforms reward content that grabs attention, even when it causes harm.

All of this is happening during a sensitive period of brain development, where social feedback shapes how teenagers see themselves and others.

To reduce harm, we need to act on multiple levels:

  • start early: while some schools offer lessons on body image and online safety, these topics are not taught consistently. Many young people say they want more support in dealing with appearance-related pressure online

  • support parents and educators: adults need tools, resources and language to talk with young people about what they see online, without shame or blame

  • hold platforms accountable: social media companies should strengthen reporting systems, and better moderate content that may promote appearance-related abuse such as “before-and-after” posts or other viral trends that target how someone looks

  • celebrate all body types: schools, media and influencers can help by showing real people with different body types and focusing on strengths such as kindness, talent, or what bodies can do.

Adolescence is a time of major change in how teenagers think, manage emotions and build relationships. What teenagers experience during these years can shape how they see themselves and understand the world.

Online body shaming may seem like just words on a screen. But if we want the next generation to grow up confident and well, we need to take it seriously.

In Australia, if you are experiencing body image concerns, you can contact the Butterfly Foundation’s national helpline on 1800 33 4673 (or use their online chat).The Conversation

Taliah Jade Prince, Postdoctoral Research Fellow in Youth Mental Health and Neuroimaging, University of the Sunshine Coast and Daniel Hermens, Professor of Youth Mental Health & Neurobiology, University of the Sunshine Coast

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

How conspiracy theories about COVID’s origins are hampering our ability to prevent the next pandemic

peterschreiber.media/Getty Images
Edward C. HolmesUniversity of SydneyAndrew RambautUniversity of EdinburghKristian AndersenThe Scripps Research Institute, and Robert GarryTulane University

In late June, the Scientific Advisory Group for the Origins of Novel Pathogens (SAGO), a group of independent experts convened by the World Health Organization (WHO), published an assessment of the origins of COVID.

The report concluded that although we don’t know conclusively where the virus that caused the pandemic came from:

a zoonotic origin with spillover from animals to humans is currently considered the best supported hypothesis.

SAGO did not find scientific evidence to support “a deliberate manipulation of the virus in a laboratory and subsequent biosafety breach”.

This follows a series of reports and research papers since the early days of the pandemic that have reached similar conclusions: COVID most likely emerged from an infected animal at the Huanan market in Wuhan, and was not the result of a lab leak.

But conspiracy theories about COVID’s origins persist. And this is hampering our ability to prevent the next pandemic.

Attacks on our research

As experts in the emergence of viruses, we published a peer-reviewed paper in Nature Medicine in 2020 on the origins of SARS-CoV-2, the virus that causes COVID.

Like SAGO, we evaluated several hypotheses for how a novel coronavirus could have emerged in Wuhan in late 2019. We concluded the virus very likely emerged through a natural spillover from animals – a “zoonosis” – caused by the unregulated wildlife trade in China.

Since then, our paper has become a focal point of conspiracy theories and political attacks.

The idea SARS-CoV-2 might have originated in a laboratory is not, in itself, a conspiracy theory. Like many scientists, we considered that possibility seriously. And we still do, although evidence hasn’t emerged to support it.

But the public discourse around the origin of the pandemic has increasingly been shaped by political agendas and conspiratorial narratives. Some of this has targeted our work and vilified experts who have studied this question in a data-driven manner.

A common conspiracy theory claims senior officials pressured us to promote the “preferred” hypothesis of a natural origin, while silencing the possibility of a lab leak. Some conspiracy theories even propose we were rewarded with grant funding in exchange.

These narratives are false. They ignoredismiss or misrepresent the extensive body of evidence on the origin of the pandemic. Instead, they rely on selective quoting from private discussions and a distorted portrayal of the scientific process and the motivations of scientists.

So what does the evidence tell us?

In the five years since our Nature Medicine paper, a substantial body of new evidence has emerged that has deepened our understanding of how SARS-CoV-2 most likely emerged through a natural spillover.

In early 2020, the case for a zoonotic origin was already compelling. Much-discussed features of the virus are found in related coronaviruses and carry signatures of natural evolution. The genome of SARS-CoV-2 showed no signs of laboratory manipulation.

The multi-billion-dollar wildlife trade and fur farming industry in China regularly moves high-risk animals, frequently infected with viruses, into dense urban centres.

It’s believed that SARS-CoV-1, the virus responsible for the SARS outbreak, emerged this way in 2002 in China’s Guangdong province.

Similarly, detailed analyses of epidemiological data show the earliest known COVID cases clustered around the Huanan live-animal market in Wuhan, in the Hubei province, in December 2019.

Multiple independent data sources, including early hospitalisationsexcess pneumonia deathsantibody studies and infections among health-care workers indicate COVID first spread in the district where the market is located.

In a 2022 study we and other experts showed that environmental samples positive for SARS-CoV-2 clustered in the section of the market where wildlife was sold.

In a 2024 follow-up study we demonstrated those same samples contained genetic material from susceptible animals – including raccoon dogs and civets – on cages, carts, and other surfaces used to hold and transport them.

This doesn’t prove infected animals were the source. But it’s precisely what we would expect if the market was where the virus first spilled over. And it’s contrary to what would be expected from a lab leak.

These and all other independent lines of evidence point to the Huanan market as the early epicentre of the COVID pandemic.

Hindering preparedness for the next pandemic

Speculation and conspiracy theories around the origin of COVID have undermined trust in science. The false balance between lab leak and zoonotic origin theories assigned by some commentators has added fuel to the conspiracy fire.

This anti-science agenda, stemming in part from COVID origin conspiracy theories, is being used to help justify deep cuts to funding for biomedical research, public health and global aid. These areas are essential for pandemic preparedness.

In the United States this has meant major cuts to the US Centers for Disease Control and the National Institutes of Health, the closure of the US Agency for International Development, and withdrawal from the WHO.

Undermining trust in science and public health institutions also hinders the development and uptake of life-saving vaccines and other medical interventions. This leaves us more vulnerable to future pandemics.

The amplification of conspiracy theories about the origin of COVID has promoted a dangerously flawed understanding of pandemic risk. The idea that a researcher discovered or engineered a pandemic virus, accidentally infected themselves, and unknowingly sparked a global outbreak (in exactly the type of setting where natural spillovers are known to occur) defies logic. It also detracts from the significant risk posed by the wildlife trade.

In contrast, the evidence-based conclusion that the COVID pandemic most likely began with a virus jumping from animals to humans highlights the very real risk we increasingly face. This is how pandemics start, and it will happen again. But we’re dismantling our ability to stop it or prepare for it.The Conversation

Edward C. Holmes, NHMRC Leadership Fellow and Professor of Virology, University of SydneyAndrew Rambaut, Professor of Molecular Evolution, University of EdinburghKristian Andersen, Professor; Director of Infectious Disease Genomics, The Scripps Research Institute, and Robert Garry, Professor, Department of Microbiology and Immunology, Tulane University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

What is chikungunya virus, and should we be worried about it in Australia?

Noppharat05081977/Getty Images
Jacqueline StephensFlinders University and Jill CarrFlinders University

This week, the World Health Organization (WHO) raised concerns about a surge in the number of cases of a mosquito-borne viral infection called chikungunya.

Diana Rojas Alvarez, a medical officer at the WHO, highlighted an outbreak occurring across La Réunion and Mayotte. These small islands in the Indian Ocean were previously hit during an epidemic of the virus in 2004–05.

Between August 2024 and May 2025, more than 47,500 confirmed cases and 12 deaths from chikungunya were reported in La Réunion. Some 116 cases were reported in Mayotte between March and May this year.

But more than 100 countries have seen local transmission of this virus to date, and the WHO has also flagged recent cases in Africa, Asia and Europe.

So, what is chikungunya, how does it spread, and should we be worried here in Australia?

What are the symptoms?

The main symptoms of chikungunya include fever, joint pain and joint swelling. However, other symptoms may include headache, rash, muscle pain, nausea and tiredness. On rare occasions, chikungunya can be fatal.

Some people are more prone to having worse symptoms, including infants, older adults, and people with pre-existing medical conditions.

Symptoms can take up to 12 days to appear, but most people start to experience symptoms three to seven days after being bitten by an infected mosquito.

There’s no specific treatment for chikungunya other than managing the pain with medications, such as paracetamol.

Most people recover after a few weeks, but some people can experience ongoing tiredness and joint pains for many months, or even years.

How does it spread?

Infected female mosquitoes spread chikungunya. The mosquitoes become infected when they feed on a person carrying the virus in their blood. Once infected, the virus reproduces in the mosquito, and then they can transmit it to other people when the mosquitoes bite them.

There are more than 3,000 different types of mosquitoes on Earth, but only two are commonly involved in transmitting chikungunya: Aedes aegypti and Aedes albopictus.

A. aegypti and A. albopictus look similar and can be easily confused. Both are about 4–7 millimetres in size and have similar black and white markings on their thorax and legs.

Both are day-time biters, unlike other mosquitoes that typically bite at dawn or dusk. They’re known as “ankle biters” because they mainly bite exposed legs and ankles. These aggressive mosquitoes bite multiple times and are known to follow people indoors to get their meal of human blood.

These species also transmit dengue virus, yellow fever virus and Zika virus.

Where does chikungunya occur?

Chikungunya was first documented in Tanzania in 1952. While outbreaks initially occurred across Africa and Asia, over time the virus has spread around the world. As of December 2024, local transmission of chikungunya had been reported in 119 countries and territories.

The 2004–05 epidemic was the largest so far, with hundreds of thousands of people infected. The epidemic started in the Indian Ocean islands, but eventually spread across to India. Since then, outbreaks have become more frequent and widespread.

A key contributor to the proliferation of chikungunya is climate change. Warmer temperatures, altered rainfall patterns, and increased humidity are creating ideal conditions for mosquito breeding. This allows the mosquitoes to adapt to new environments and therefore expand into new habitats.

The increase is also partly because chikungunya has evolved and been introduced into new populations, whose immune systems have not previously been exposed to the virus.

So, should we be worried?

While evidence suggests A. aegypti has been present in northern Queensland since the 1800s (outbreaks of dengue occurred in Townsville in 1879 and Rockhampton in 1885), A. albopictus is a more recent arrival, first documented in the Torres Strait in 2005.

A. aegypti mosquitoes are now found in areas across north, central and southern Queensland, while A. albopictus is currently still only found in the Torres Strait.

Nonetheless, to date, there have been no recorded cases of chikungunya transmission within Australia.

But cases do occur in people who have recently travelled overseas, most often to South and Southeast Asia, or the Pacific Islands.

In 2023 there were 42 cases of chikungunya recorded in Australia, 70 in 2024, and 90 so far in 2025. Previous years have seen figures above 100, however numbers in recent years may have been lower due to COVID impacting travel.

As climate change continues to support the spread of A. aegypti and A. albopictus, the risk of transmission within Australia increases.

That said, there is some evidence we might be lucky in Australia, with potential immune protection from a related local virus, Ross River virus.

I’m travelling, what should I do?

Two vaccines are approved for use in the United States against chikungunya, but there’s currently no vaccine approved in Australia. The only way to reduce your risk of infection is to avoid being bitten by mosquitoes.

People travelling to places where chikungunya is known to occur should wear loose-fitting and light-coloured clothing with enclosed shoes, use insect repellent, close windows and consider using mosquito bed nets. Taking these steps also reduces the risk of other mosquito-borne infections, such as dengue fever.

If you travel to a place where chikungunya occurs and you get bitten by mosquitoes, monitor yourself for signs and symptoms.

If you become unwell, see a doctor immediately.The Conversation

Jacqueline Stephens, Associate Professor in Public Health, Flinders University and Jill Carr, Professor, College of Medicine and Public Health, Flinders University

This article is republished from The Conversation under a Creative Commons license. Read the original article.

Disclaimer: These articles are not intended to provide medical advice, diagnosis or treatment.  Views expressed here do not necessarily reflect those of Pittwater Online News or its staff.